Designing Radial Machines AxCent

Agi l e E n gi n e e r i n g D e s i g® n Sys t e m
Agile Engineering Design System
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent

Designing Radial Machines with AxCent ®
(including Pushbutton FEA™ User Guide)
Corporate Headquarters and Product Center CN Europe
217 Billings Farm Road 3B Marston House
White River Junction, VT 05001-9486 Cromwell Park, Banbury Road
USA Chipping Norton
Phone: 802 296 2321 Oxon, OX7 5SR, UK
Fax: 802 296 2325 Phone: 44 (0) 1608 641515
Web: www.conceptsnrec.com Fax: 44 (0) 1608 644110
E-mail: sales@conceptsnrec.com
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent®
January 11, 2018
Copyright © 2018 by Concepts ETI, Inc.
All rights reserved.
This document describes proprietary software developed by Concepts NREC LLC, for the end user's informational
purposes only, and is subject to change or withdrawal by Concepts NREC LLC at any time.
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Concepts NREC LLC AND PROTECTED BY
THE COPYRIGHT LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES AND INTERNATIONAL TREATIES.
You may make copies of this document for use by personnel at your site only. Any other attempt to copy or use this
document without the express permission of Concepts NREC LLC is forbidden.
The software described herein is constantly being enhanced and altered by Concepts NREC LLC This document may
contain errors or omissions and may not describe the most current version of the software. Concepts NREC LLC is
not responsible for any loss, financial or otherwise, brought about by the use of this document.
AXIAL, AXISTRESS, CADTranslator, CTAADS, EASy! Control, FANPAL, MatProp, MAX-5, MAX-AB, MAX-
PAC, MAX-PP, MAX-SI, P3MAX, PREMAX, RITAL, STRESSPREP, and TurboOPT II are trademarks of Concepts
ETI, Inc. AxCent, Agile Engineering Design System, COMPAL, PUMPAL, and Pushbutton CFD are registered
trademarks of Concepts NREC LLC.
All other products, services, or company names mentioned herein are claimed as trademarks or trade names by their
respective owners.
Version: AxCent v8.6

Contents
Chapter 1: Welcome to Pushbutton FEA 459
Chapter 2: Welcome to AxCent 9

Introduction to AxCent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Who should use this Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
How to use this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Getting help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
About this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Chapter 3: Getting Started 21

Starting and exiting from AxCent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
The AxCent Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Opening existing AxCent designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Creating designs with the AxCent wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Creating new designs with CADFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Importing CAD files into AxCent using CADFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setting preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Specifying units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Making geometric adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Saving designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Closing designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter 4: Developing Radial Blade Geometry 49

Introduction: AxCent blade definition approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
AxCent's blade generation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Specifying the type of blade generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Adding mid-span geometry defined cross-sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Specifying blade stacking for mid-span geometry defined cross-sections . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Removing mid-span geometry defined cross-sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Specifying blade angle distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Editing blade angle distributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setting entry lean angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Adjusting exit lean angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Editing wrap angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Specifying blade thickness distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Modifying blade shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Staggering blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Specifying a swept leading edge and trailing edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Improving blade alignment for a swept leading edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Setting bowed blading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Stretching the axial length of segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Copying and importing segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Adding flow paths and casing treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Specifying side ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Specifying vane slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Designing volutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Adding volutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Importing volutes from CAD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Introduction: Editing the volute using Bezier curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Chapter 5: Creating and Linking to Meanline Designs 117

Introduction: Updating meanline information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Linking AxCent designs to meanline designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Updating meanline designs with AxCent information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Introduction: Creating meanline files from AxCent designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Creating meanline files from AxCent designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Creating meanline CFD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Creating meanline LAB files from CFD results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Linking AxCent designs to MAX-PAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Chapter 6: Performing Streamline Curvature Calculations 129

Introduction to streamline curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Viewing rapid loading analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Setting rapid loading parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Introduction to MST analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Performing MST analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Restarting rapid loading analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Chapter 7: Generating Flow Simulations with Pushbutton CFD 141

Introduction to performing CFD calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Introduction to setting boundary and initial conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Setting inlet boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Setting exit boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Setting initial conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Selecting CFD solver settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Running CFD calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Selecting CFD view options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Performing multi-block CFD calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Introduction to working with injection and extraction slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Managing CFD runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Chapter 8: Generating CFD Grids 163

Introduction to AxCent CFD grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . 164
Generating H-Classic CFD grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . 167
Generating C-type CFD grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . 174
Generating OH- and OH-C-type CFD grids . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . 178
Viewing the CFD grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . 179
Previewing grid settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . 180
Chapter 9: Exporting information from AxCent 181

Exporting to table-based options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4 Contents Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Exporting flow field information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Transferring a design to Numeca . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Introduction: Preparing for CAD export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Viewing 3D geometry before exporting to CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Exporting table-based output options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Exporting to Concepts NREC formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Exporting to third-party programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Exporting graphics-based 3D solids and surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Chapter 10:Using PBFEA in AxCent 193

What is Pushbutton FEA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Specifying the PBFEA solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Selecting Pushbutton FEA views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Animating 3D Pushbutton FEA models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Viewing Pushbutton FEA™ results in a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
3D FEA window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Chapter 11:AxCent Dialog Box Reference 201

Add Multiple User Defined Sections dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Adjust Exit Lean Angle dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Append the New Segment to the Design dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Blade Generation Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Blade Stagger Angle dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Blade Surface Selection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Boundary Conditions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Bowed Blading Parameters dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Bring in Model dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
CADFIT dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
CFD Results dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
CFD Results Groups dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
CFD Multiple Grids Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
CFD View Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Choose Segment dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Choose data/Choose data to show or edit dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Concepts NREC Format dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Copy a Segment dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Create Meanline File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Create New Flow Path Branch dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Curve/Control Points dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Entry Wrap Angle (Theta) dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Exit Theta dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
FEA Results dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Fitting Method dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Geometry Engine Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Graphics-based 3D solids surfaces dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Grid dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Grid settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® 5

Graphics-based 3D solids/surfaces dialog box – CAD and CFD Geometry tab . . . . . . . . 326
Link to Meanline Program dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
MAX-PAC Output File Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
MAX-5/AB/SI File Parameters dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Stacking and Geometry Options for Midspan Sections dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
MST Parameters dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Preferences dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Pressure/Suction Results dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Remove Mid-Span Geometry Definition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Restagger Blade dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Select CFD Run dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Concepts NREC Format dialog box – Flow File tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Select Segment Range dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Select Units Used dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Setup Segments dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Side ports dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Slot Selection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Solver Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Solver Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Solver Settings dialog box – for Numeca Fine™/Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Stacking and Geometry Options for Midspan Sections dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Start Pushbutton CFD Run dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
STEP output options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
STL Output Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Stretch Segment dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Swept Leading/Trailing Edge Parameters dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Table Based Options dialog box – Machining/CFD Output Parameters tab . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Third Party Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Transfer design to Numeca dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Vane slots dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Input/Output Volute dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Chapter 1: Welcome to Pushbutton FEA 457

Introduction to Pushbutton FEA (Radial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
About this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Chapter 2: Getting Started 461

Quick Start: Using Pushbutton FEA for radial models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Specifying project settings for stress analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Viewing cross-section and axial views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Viewing FEA models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Working with model views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Checking models in Pushbutton FEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Chapter 3: Setting Model Specifications 477

Specifying radial model dimensions in Pushbutton FEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Specifying model properties for a radial geometry in Pushbutton FEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Specifying contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
6 Contents Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Specifying material properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Offsetting the coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Specifying pressure and thermal loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Specifying heat transfer constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Specifying mesh parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Submodeled boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Chapter 4: Generating FEA Models 489

Building FEA models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Customizing FEA solver runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Running external FEA solvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Mass and inertia properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Introduction to element goodness calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Viewing the Model Statistics report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Chapter 5: Linking Pushbutton FEA to Other Programs 497

Performing stress calculations with standalone STRESSPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Transferring mass and inertia data to RotorLab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Editing the materials database with MatProp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Chapter 6: Performing Post-Processing 503

Introduction to Post-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Specifying post-processing options for Pushbutton FEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Viewing the Campbell diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Viewing the Goodman diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Viewing the Interference diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Fatigue life from start-stop cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Vibratory fatigue margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Running hot-to-cold conversions (radial Pushbutton FEA models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Viewing the Model Statistics report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Chapter 7: Pushbutton FEA Dialog Box Reference (Radial) 519

Aero Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Contours dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Data Setup dialog box (for radial PBFEA models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Element Thresholds dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
FEA Results dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
FEA Stress/Vibration Parameters dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Geometry dialog box (for radial PBFEA models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Hot to Cold dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Mesh dialog box (hexahedral dominant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Mesh dialog box (tetrahedral) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Project dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Properties dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
RotorLab Parameters dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
SubModel Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Translate Z dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Software License Agreement 619
Index 625
Chapter 1: Welcome to AxCent
This chapter includes...

Introduction to AxCent ....................................................................... 10
Who should use this Guide? ................................................................ 14
How to use this Guide ........................................................................ 15
Getting help ...................................................................................... 19
About this Guide ................................................................................ 20
Introduction to AxCent
The Concepts NREC AxCent™ program provides full capabilities for specifying and analyzing 3D
radial and axial compressors, pumps, fans, and turbines.
AxCent’s flexibility and agile links to other Concepts NREC programs allow you to use AxCent at
whatever stage of the design process you need, whether it’s during the initial creation of a design or
during the final CFD analysis. Typically, most designers use AxCent in the following ways:
 Refining a meanline design
Meanline (1D) programs are often used to optimize the most basic parameters of a machine based
on design goals and constraints. Once this initial analysis has been completed, you can proceed to a
full 3D design. The Concepts NREC meanline programs (COMPAL, FANPAL, PUMPAL, and
RITAL) allow you to transfer meanline design information directly into AxCent via the programs’
Agile menu. For example, when you have completed a preliminary compressor design with COM-
PAL, you can choose the Start AxCent command from COMPAL’s Agile menu. This opens AxCent
and generates an initial 3D design that uses all of the geometric parameters from the meanline design
in COMPAL. Once the design has been imported into AxCent, you can then modify and optimize
the impeller geometry by using AxCent’s rapid loading and MST analysis tools, and can then com-
plete the design with a full 3D CFD analysis using Pushbutton CFD. If desired, you can update the
original COMPAL design with the resulting CFD calculations so that a final performance map can
be generated in Data Reduction mode.
 Analyzing an existing 3D design from a CAD file
AxCent is also commonly used for the detailed analysis of an existing design. By using AxCent’s
CADFIT feature, you can create a new AxCent design by importing blade shape geometry from a
CAD file and can then analyze the design in AxCent. You can create the import file with another
program, or by exporting the information from an existing design in AxCent.
CADFIT can use several file formats as input, with the .fit file format being the preferred format.
The .fit file format contains R, Z, Theta, and thickness along the hub and shroud, and possibly, for
some blade sections, between. This file format is the only one that can also contain data for a swept
leading edge. If only surface date is available for the design, you can create and import a .sur file
instead.
If you are unable to provide or create an import file for CADFIT, you can also use a CAD model to
extract data from an IGES file by using the Concepts NREC CADTranslator utility. CADTranslator
is used to generate surface files (.sur) which can then be imported into AxCent.
Regardless of the method you use to import the CAD information into AxCent, once the geometry
has been successfully imported, you must specify the machine operating conditions and boundary
conditions prior to performing rapid loading, MST, or CFD analysis. AxCent can also be used in con-
junction with the Turbo OPT II optimization package to make incremental improvements to the ex-
isting design.
For imports and exports, see the following topics:
 On importing a .fit or .sur file, see "Creating new designs with CADFIT" on page 33.
 On importing a CAD file, "Importing CAD files into AxCent using CADFIT" on page 37.
 On importing geometry via a text or other format file, see "Importing geometry" in
AxCent Help.
 On exporting an AxCent design to a CAD format, see "Introduction: Preparing for CAD
export" on page 185.
 On exporting an AxCent design to a STEP format,see "Exporting graphics-based 3D
solids and surfaces" on page 192.
10 Chapter 1: Welcome to AxCent Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

 On exporting an AxCent design to a STL format,see "Exporting graphics-based 3D
solids and surfaces" on page 192..
Creating a new design from scratch

In cases where you have created a completed meanline design with an in-house or third-party pack-
age that has no agile link with AxCent, you can use the AxCent wizard to create a full 3D design
from scratch. For more information, see "Opening existing AxCent designs" on page 30.
Blade shape design with AxCent

Radial blade shape design with AxCent
Radial and mixed flow turbomachinery designs historically have been developed using a camber line
and thickness definition approach to determine the blade shape. For radial designs, the AxCent pro-
gram allows you to design complex stage components by shaping the contours, adjusting blade angle
distributions, and defining blade thickness distributions. Advanced features like bowed blading and
swept leading edges, as well as the standard flow cuts and diameter trims, allow the most complex
shapes and features to be modeled. Coupled with AxCent are powerful quasi-three-dimensional flow
solvers that use streamline curvature techniques to determine velocities and loadings. These solvers
provide rapid analysis of aerodynamic conditions within the flow field and significantly speed up
the design process.
This Guide describes how to set up and analyze camber line-thickness defined blades for radial de-
signs. For information about setting up and analyzing blades for axial designs, see AxCent Help or
Designing Axial Machines with AxCent.
Aerodynamic analysis of designs can be accomplished through standard methods of three-dimen-
sional analysis using Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) with Concepts NREC's Pushbutton
CFD® program. In addition to this approach, other methods such as blade-to-blade and throughflow
analysis allow a much more rapid analysis approach using quasi-three- dimensional CFD analysis
methods. These more rapid solution techniques are particularly useful in refining the designs in the
early part of the process. Streamline curvature methods are also available in AxCent for subsonic
flow analysis but they are not effective for supersonic or transonic designs.
For radial designs, AxCent is capable of defining any combination of volutes, axisymmetric ducts,
impellers, diffusers, crossovers, return channels, and any general axisymmetric flow path.
Introduction to the AxCent design flow

The following procedures provide a high-level overview of the most typical workflow for designing
machines with AxCent. Depending on your needs and your design, you may or may not need to per-
form all of the described steps. For each step, consult the indicated documentation for further details.
1 Create an initial meanline design.
Use COMPAL, PUMPAL, FANPAL or RITAL to create a meanline design. The purpose of this 1D
design is set the basic parameters (impeller dimensions, passage areas, volute size, etc.) based on
design goals and constraints. For more information about creating meanline designs, refer to the
meanline program documentation.
2 Transfer the meanline design to AxCent.
Use the Agile link in the appropriate Concepts NREC meanline program to transfer the geometry for
your design into AxCent. When you use the Agile link, AxCent opens automatically and generates
an initial 3D design. You can then view the 3D design by choosing the New 3D View command from
AxCent’s Window menu. For more information about importing meanline designs into AxCent, re-
fer to the Help for the meanline program you are using.
3 Refine the 3D geometry by using the rapid loading and then the MST solvers.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction to AxCent 11

AxCent’s rapid loading solver is used to assess that the overall flow of the design makes sense. The
MST solver uses multiple stream tubes and provides somewhat more detailed flow information. It is
possible to make quick and accurate assessments of blade loading and other critical design charac-
teristics using the MST analysis. For compressor design, red and yellow zones are provided in many
line plots (Blade to Blade Loading and Pressure Recovery, for example) in order to pinpoint imme-
diate design concerns. The MST solver generally takes only a few seconds to run. Various optimi-
zation procedures may also be applied. For more information about using the Rapid Loading and
MST solvers in AxCent, see Overview: Rapid loading analyses and Overview: MST analyses.
4 Generate flow simulations with Pushbutton CFD.
When set up with care, CFD simulations can provide the most detailed and accurate predictions of
impeller, diffuser, and passage design. AxCent integrates with the Concepts NREC Pushbutton CFD
program to offer several built-in CFD solvers, including both 2D and 3D versions of the Concepts
NREC CFD solver as well as the third-party Dawes solver. Since applying these solvers can take
much more time than MST analysis, we recommend that you progress with the design as far as pos-
sible with MST before using CFD. For more information about running flow simulations, see Over-
view: AxCent CFD grids.
5 Generate flow simulations with Pushbutton CFD.
When set up with care, CFD simulations can provide the most detailed and accurate predictions of
impeller, diffuser, and passage design. AxCent integrates with the Concepts NREC Pushbutton CFD
program to offer several built-in CFD solvers, including both 2D and 3D versions of the Concepts
NREC CFD solver as well as the third-party Dawes solver. Since applying these solvers can take
much more time than MST analysis, we recommend that you progress with the design as far as pos-
sible with MST before using CFD. For more information about running flow simulations, see Over-
view: AxCent CFD grids.
You can use the same optimization procedures available for the MST solver for your CFD runs; how-
ever, they may take some time to complete.
6 Update the meanline file with AxCent solver results.
Rapid Load, MST and CFD often generate results that call for modification in the assumptions of
the meanline analysis. You can choose to update your meanline design parameters (such as Beta2,
primary and secondary deviation angles, etc.) with calculated quantities from the Rapid Load, MST
and CFD analyses, such as localized mass flow rates, static and total pressure and temperature and
meridional and tangential velocities. For more information, see "Exporting to Concepts NREC
formats" on page 190..
7 Update the meanline file with geometry modifications made in AxCent.
You can also update the original meanline file with geometry modifications that you made in Ax-
Cent, and you can update meanline parameters with those updated via CFD. You can then use the
updated meanline file to generate more accurate performance maps.For more information about us-
ing the updated meanline file, refer to the meanline program documentation.
8 Perform stress analysis with STRESSPREP.
When you have completed the aero and thermodynamic analysis for your design, you can check oth-
er important design considerations such as structural integrity and noise generation. You can use the
Concepts NREC Pushbutton FEA™ program from within AxCent to prepare an input file for a stan-
dard FEA structural solver such as NASTRAN or COSMOS/M. Pushbutton FEA will export the
pressure and temperature distributions in an appropriate format so that the structural analysis can be
performed. For more information about using Pushbutton FEA, "What is Pushbutton FEA?" on
page 194.
9 Export the geometry for machining.

The final step in the Concepts NREC CAE design process is to export the design’s geometry in a
format suitable for numerically controlled machining, such as the Concepts NREC CAM format, so
that the part can be manufactured. For more information about exporting to CAM format for use with
MAX-PAC programs, see Exporting machine information. For more information about the Concepts
CAM programs, refer to the MAX-PAC User Guide and to MAX-PAC Help.
You can use the same optimization procedures available for the MST solver for your CFD runs; how-
ever, they may take some time to complete.
10 Update the meanline file with AxCent solver results.
Rapid Load, MST and CFD often generate results that call for modification in the assumptions of
the meanline analysis. You can choose to update your meanline design parameters (such as Beta2,
primary and secondary deviation angles, etc.) with calculated quantities from the Rapid Load, MST
and CFD analyses, such as localized mass flow rates, static and total pressure and temperature and
meridional and tangential velocities. For more information, see "Exporting to Concepts NREC
formats" on page 190..
11 Update the meanline file with geometry modifications made in AxCent.
You can also update the original meanline file with geometry modifications that you made in Ax-
Cent, and you can update meanline parameters with those updated via CFD. You can then use the
updated meanline file to generate more accurate performance maps.For more information about us-
ing the updated meanline file, refer to the meanline program documentation.
12 Perform stress analysis with Pushbutton FEA.
When you have completed the aero and thermodynamic analysis for your design, you can check oth-
er important design considerations such as structural integrity and noise generation. You can use the
Concepts NREC Pushbutton FEA™ program from within AxCent to prepare an input file for a stan-
dard FEA structural solver such as NASTRAN or COSMOS/M. PBFEA will export the pressure and
temperature distributions in an appropriate format so that the structural analysis can be performed.
For more information about using PBFEA, see “Introduction to Pushbutton FEA (Radial)” on
page 458..
13 Export the geometry for machining.
The final step in the Concepts NREC CAE design process is to export the design’s geometry in a
format suitable for numerically controlled machining, such as the Concepts NREC CAM format, so
that the part can be manufactured. For more information about exporting to CAM format for use with
MAX-PAC programs, see Exporting machine information. For more information about the Concepts
CAM programs, refer to the MAX-PAC User Guide and to MAX-PAC Help.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction to AxCent 13

Who should use this Guide?
This Guide is designed for engineers, managers, and supervisors with an engineering background
who want an introduction to using the Concepts NREC AxCent program to design radial compres-
sors, pumps, fans, and turbines.
This Guide assumes that you know the general principles of mechanical engineering and have expe-
rience designing compressors, pumps, fans, and turbines.
Note: This Guide also assumes that you have a basic understanding of the Microsoft®
Windows® environment. You should be familiar with using a mouse to click, drag
and drop, and choose items from menus. For more information on how to work in the
Windows environment, refer to your Windows product documentation.

How to use this Guide
This Guide provides you with a set of procedures that introduce you to the radial turbomachinery
design features in AxCent. If you cannot find a feature described in this Guide, or if you want more
information about any feature, including design features in AxCent, refer to the AxCent Help system
(by pressing F1 or by choosing Help Topics from the AxCent Help menu).
This Guide uses sample cases and other files to demonstrate the tasks that you can perform with the
programs. Each procedure in this Guide indicates which files are used so that you can follow along.
The sample files are stored in the following directory after you install AxCent:
...\\Program Files\Concepts\AxCent\Examples
...\\Program Files\Concepts\AxCent\Examples – advanced
Note: On 64-bit platforms that are running a 64-bit operating system, AxCent and its
sample files are installed in the \\Program Files(x86)\Concepts\AxCent directory.
Standard Examples (functional with minimal licensing)

The sample cases in the “Examples” directory of AxCent are set to a single blade row in CFD using
the H-grid topology. The overall grid count is kept below 85,000. Single-stage examples are set to
run the rotor and not the stator. These settings make the cases compatible with the base licensing
level.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® How to use this Guide 15

Standard radial examples
This file is a
comp_rad_Compex1.DES A radial compressor with a vaneless diffuser. The stage has
a pressure ratio of 1.9.
This case example is used frequently in this guide.
comp_rad_Eckardt.DES A radial compressor with a vaneless diffuser. The geometry

has zero backsweep and is based on a test series performed
in Germany in the 1980s with extensive laser velocimeter
data. The pressure ratio of the stage is approximately 2.1.
comp_rad_PR-1.2.DES A low speed (PR=1.2) radial compressor with a vaneless

diffuser and an asymmetric volute design.
comp_rad_PR1.6.DES A moderate speed (PR=1.6) radial compressor with a

vaneless diffuser.
comp_rad_turbocharger.DES A radial compressor with a geometry and flow field typical

of an automobile turbocharger compressor. The design uses
nearly parallel quasi-orthogonal lines combined with
leading and trailing edge trim for efficient five-axis
machining.
fan_rad_squirrelCage.DES Squirrel cage style radial fan with a symmetric pump style
volute.
pump_rad_cont_cross.DES Mixed flow (almost radial) pump with a continuous cross-

over style diffuser used in multiple stage designs.
pump_rad_Ns1000.DES Low specific speed (Nsp=1000) radial pump with a head

rise of approximately 30 m. The stage consists of an
impeller and volute.
pump_rad_Ns2000.DES Moderate specific speed (Nsp=2000) radial pump with a

volute. The head rise is approximately 30 m.
pump_rad_Ns4000.DES High specific speed (Nsp=4000) mixed flow pump design

with a volute. The head rise is approximately 25 m.
turb_rad_RicardoB80.DES Radial gas turbine with nozzle. The design is based on one
of the Richardo radial turbine tests done in the 1950s and
60s. The pressure ratio for the stage is approximately 3.5
but with a smaller mass flow than the turb_rad_A70.des
design.
Advanced Examples (requires at least some higher level license

features)
The sample cases in the “Examples-Advanced” directory of AxCent are set to run the entire stage
geometry and include either multiple blade rows, volutes, and advanced CFD topologies. Some of
these cases are geometrically identical to the similarly named cases in the basic examples directory.

Advanced radial examples
This file is a
comp_rad_2stage.DES A two-stage radial compressor design with vaned return channel
for the first stage and an asymmetric volute for the last stage. The
overall pressure ration is approximately 3.
comp_rad_Eckardt_OH-grid.DES Radial Eckardt “O” compressor design using the OH grid

topology.
comp_rad_PR-1.2_full_stage.DES Low pressure ratio radial compressor set to run CFD with the
volute.
comp_rad_PR-2p0_cascade.DES Total-total pressure ratio 2 radial compressor with a cascade style

diffuser and an asymmetric volute.
comp_rad_PR5_OH-grid.DES High pressure ratio radial compressor with a wedge diffuser. The
stage pressure ratio is approximately 5 and the CFD is set to use
the OH grid topology.
comp_rad_R134_OH-grid.DES Refrigeration compressor design set to use DBR model R134a

working fluid. The overall stage pressure ratio is approximately
2.3.
fan_radial_ERCOFTAC_OH-grid.DES Low-speed radial fan with vaned diffuser set to run with the OH
grid topology.
fan_rad_squirrelCage_OH_grid.DES Squirrel cage style radial fan with a symmetric volute. The case
is setup to run the entire stage using the OH-grid topology.
fan_rad_reversable.DES A radial fan with straight blades that run radially. The design lets
the rotor spin in either direction with the same resulting high rise.
pump_rad_3stage.DES Three-stage radial pump design delivering approximately 100m

of head rise. The first two stages use vaned diffusers and return
channels and the third stage uses a pump style volute.
pump_rad_cont_cross_OH_grid.DES Mixed flow (almost radial) pump with a continuous cross-over

style diffuser used in multiple stage designs. The CFD is set to
run the entire stage using the OH grid topology.
pump_rad_dual_volute.DES Radial pump design with a dual-exit volute geometry.
pump_rad_high_head.DES An advanced high pressure radial pump with about 300 m of head
rise. The design uses a vaned diffuser and a symmetric volute.
pump_rad_inducer_H2.DES High-speed liquid hydrogen pump design typical of a rocket fuel

pump. The design uses a cavitation reducing inducer at the
beginning of the stage,
pump_rad_Ns1000_large_grid.DES Low specific speed radial pump similar to the basic example but
set to run a finer grid and including the volute in the CFD.
pump_rad_Ns2000_large_grid.DES Same design as the one in the basic examples

(pump_rad_Ns1000.DES), but set to run a finer grid and a volute
as well.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® How to use this Guide 17

This file is a
pump_rad_Ns4000_OH-grid.DES Same high specific speed design as the one in the basic examples
(pump_rad_Ns4000.DES), but set to run a finer grid and a volute
as well.
turb_rad_A70_OH-grid.DES Radial gas turbine design set to run the entire stage including the
volute, nozzles, and rotor. The design is based on one of the
Richardo radial turbine tests done in the 1950’s and 60’s. The
pressure ratio for the stage is approximately 3.5.
turb_rad_hydro.DES Radial hydroturbine design with volute and nozzles. The design
has a pressure drop of approximately of 180 m of water.
turb_rad_mixed.DES Mixed inflow turbine with an “advanced” style volute and no noz-
zle.
turb_rad_nozzleless.DES Nozzleless turbine design with an asymmetric volute.
While working with this Guide, you can use the sample cases to try the procedures described. It is
important, however, that you do not overwrite these sample case files so that they are available later
on if you want to retest a procedure or look back at the original version.
If you’d like to save the changes you make to the sample cases, you can either make copies of the
sample case files before making changes to them, or you can save changes you make to a sample
case file by choosing Save As from the File menu and specifying another name for the case file. This
allows you to keep your changes without changing the original case file.
If you have any problems with the sample case files, don’t hesitate to contact Concepts NREC Soft-
ware Support (see "Getting help" on page 19).
This Guide is intended as a beginner’s guide to the AxCent program, but can also be used as a ref-
erence tool regardless of your experience level.
Caution: This Guide is not a design book nor a guide for your next design. Information concerning
actual design preferences is provided in the Concepts NREC Design Software Workshops. Refer-
ences on turbomachine performance, courses on performance, and individual consulting are also
provided by Concepts NREC.

Getting help
AxCent provides online Help documentation that you can access by using one of the following meth-
ods:
 From the program’s Help menu, choose Help Topics.
 In a window or dialog box, press F1.
Note: In dialog boxes, you can also click the Help button if one is available.
At any time, you can refer to the Help for more information while using this Guide.
For further assistance, contact Concepts NREC Software Support at the following address, phone
number, or email address:
Corporate Headquarters
217 Billings Farm Road
White River Jct., VT USA 05001-9486
Tel: 802-296-2321 Ext. 107
Fax: 802-296-2325
Email: support@conceptsnrec.com
Internet: http://www.conceptsnrec.com
Documentation feedback
At Concepts NREC, we are continually working towards improving our software documentation.
Your feedback is extremely valuable in producing accurate, comprehensive, and useful documenta-
tion.
If you find any errors, or have suggestions for changes that you would like to see in this Guide or in
other Concepts NREC software documentation, please email your comments to documenta-
tion@conceptsnrec.com. In your email, please include the following information:
 The name and version of the Concepts NREC product that you are using
 The name of the book or Help system where you found the problem
 The page number (for books) or the title at the top of the Help page (for Help systems)
where you found the problem
 Your suggestion for correcting or improving the documentation
This email address is intended strictly for feedback related to Concepts NREC software documenta-
tion. If you have a technical question or a problem using the software, please contact Software Sup-
port at support@conceptsnrec.com.
Thank you!
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Getting help 19

About this Guide
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent contains the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Welcome to AxCent

Introduces you to AxCent and to this Guide and explains how to get more help about using AxCent.
Chapter 2: Getting Started

Explains how to start and exit from AxCent, gives an overview of the main components of the Ax-
Cent interface, and provides procedures for opening and creating designs with AxCent. This chapter
also describes the basic features for working with a design in AxCent, including setting AxCent pref-
erences, specifying units for a design, making geometric adjustments to blades in a design, and sav-
ing and closing designs.
Chapter 3: Developing Radial Blade Geometry

Provides an overview of developing and modifying radial blade geometry, including selecting the
desired type of blade generation, working with radial blade sections, specifying blade angle distri-
bution, specifying blade thickness distribution, modifying blade shapes, specifying swept leading
and trailing edges, staggering blades, improving blade alignment, stretching the axial length of seg-
ments, and copying segments.
Chapter 4: Creating and Linking to Meanline Designs

Explains how to link your AxCent design with a radial meanline design in COMPAL, PUMPAL,
FANPAL, or RITAL; how to update a linked meanline design with AxCent geometry and CFD data,
and how to create meanline files from AxCent designs.
Chapter 5: Performing Streamline Curvature Calculations

Provides an introduction to the AxCent rapid loading and MST (multi-streamtube) analysis features,
and explains how to perform rapid loading and MST analyses on your designs.
Chapter 6: Generating Flow Simulation with Pushbutton CFD

Explains how to use Pushbutton CFD® to run CFD calculations (including performing multiblock
calculations), how to set boundary conditions, how to specify injection slots, and how to manage
multiple CFD runs.
Chapter 7: Generating CFD Grids

Provides information on the CFD grid options you can use with AxCent; explains how to generate
H- and C-type grids for radial designs, and discusses how to apply different viewing options when
you are viewing a generated CFD grid.
Chapter 8: Exporting Information from AxCent

Describes how to export data from AxCent to use with other programs. This chapter covers export-
ing machine information, flow field information, and information for use with CAD programs.
Chapter 9: Using PBFEA in AxCent

Describes how to use the PBFEA solver in AxCent, and how to view the solver results.
Chapter 10: Dialog Box Reference

Reference chapter for all dialog boxes used in procedures contained in the AxCent user guide.


Starting and exiting from AxCent ........................................................ 22
The AxCent Interface ......................................................................... 23
Opening existing AxCent designs ........................................................ 30
Creating designs with the AxCent wizard ............................................. 31
Creating new designs with CADFIT ..................................................... 33
Importing CAD files into AxCent using CADFIT ..................................... 37
Setting preferences ............................................................................ 39
Specifying units ................................................................................. 40
Making geometric adjustments ........................................................... 41
Saving designs .................................................................................. 46
Closing designs .................................................................................. 47
Starting and exiting from AxCent
To start AxCent
 From the Windows menu, choose Programs – Concepts – AxCent.
Note: If you are using Windows XP, choose All Programs – Concepts – AxCent. If you are
using Windows Vista, choose All Programs, click the Concepts folder, and then click
AxCent.
The AxCent window opens. For detailed information about the AxCent window and its menu and
toolbars, see "The AxCent window" on page 23, "Menus" on page 24, and "Toolbar" on page 25.
To exit from AxCent

1 From the File menu, choose Exit.
If you’ve made any changes to your design, AxCent asks you if you want to save the changes before
exiting from the program.
2 Choose what you want to do:
 To save your changes and then exit from AxCent, click Yes.
 To exit from AxCent without saving the changes, click No.
 To cancel exiting from AxCent, click Cancel.
22 Chapter 2: Getting Started Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

The AxCent Interface
The AxCent program was developed with a Microsoft Windows user interface that provides a main
window in which secondary windows and dialog boxes appear. The interface also provides standard
Windows menus, toolbar buttons, and keyboard shortcuts.
The following sections give you a brief tour of the AxCent interface by illustrating its main window
and its menus, toolbar, and keyboard shortcuts.
The AxCent window

When you first start AxCent, the AxCent window is empty.
When you open or create a design in AxCent, AxCent displays the design in a Contours window
within the main AxCent window. All other AxCent windows appear within the main AxCent win-
dow.
If you start AxCent from one of the other Concepts NREC meanline programs, your design automat-
ically appears in AxCent.
The Contours window is the default window AxCent uses to display a two-dimensional view of your
design. This window displays your design graphically, using colors to represent different sections
and stages in the design:
 Orange indicates a bladed rotating element.
 Green indicates a bladed non-rotating element.
 Blue indicates an unbladed element, a flow cut, or a hub cut.
 Black lines on a bladed segment indicate a flow cut, hub cut, swept leading edge, swept
trailing edge, or stacking curve.
 Black lines in dashes indicate segment boundaries.
 Light green lines on a bladed segment indicate the blade tip for blades that do not follow
the segment boundaries.
The Contours window graphs your design by the radius (R) against the Z axial coordinate. You can
right-click the window to display a shortcut menu of commands that allow you to make changes to
your design. All other AxCent windows appear within the main AxCent window.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® The AxCent Interface 23

Menus
The menus in the AxCent window provide access to commands for performing tasks with the pro-
gram. The menu bar appears at the top of the AxCent window, just beneath the window’s title bar.
The following section provides a brief overview of the AxCent menus. For complete descriptions of
each command available from the AxCent menus, see AxCent Help.
When you first start AxCent, the menu bar displays only the File, View, and Help menus. After you
open or create a design in AxCent, the menu bar displays the following menus:
Note: The availability of commands on these menus depends on the type of window or
information you are viewing and the task you are performing.
This menu allows you to
File menu Create new designs, open existing designs, save your changes,
print designs, export designs into other formats and file types,
import designs created with other programs, and exit from
AxCent.
Edit menu Edit, add, or remove Bezier control points; undo or redo
actions; revert all changes; and copy data onto the Windows
Clipboard for use in other programs.
View menu Adjust the current view by showing or hiding the toolbar or
status bar, choose segments to view and control points to edit,
choose the type of X-axis in graphs, return views to their
default zoom level, view and control overlays, and select other
view-related commands.
This menu also gives you access to FEA views, or stress
analysis model windows.
Setup menu Specify general information for the design, including units and
angle conventions; set up and import or copy segments in the
design; add a volute; and specify speed map points.
Flow menu View plots of various fluid dynamic results.
Geometry menu Specify, view, and edit geometric parameters in your design.
Graphics menu Change and manipulate the look of graphics in AxCent, and turn
on and off the animation feature in 3D windows.
Standard Screens menu Create and view AxCent Standard Screens.
CFD menu Choose settings for CFD, run CFD calculations, and display
views for CFD calculations.
Mechanical menu Perform Pushbutton FEA™ (PBFEA) stress calculations,

specify parameters for axial thrust calculations, and view axial
thrust calculation results.
Agile menu Establish links between AxCent and meanline, stress, and
optimization programs. These links make AxCent part of a
larger design system. Also use Concepts NREC macros.

This menu allows you to
Window menu Create new windows, arrange multiple views of windows in the
AxCent window, and navigate to open windows.
Help menu View AxCent Help and view copyright, version, and module
information about the AxCent program.
Toolbar
The AxCent program toolbar allows you to perform common functions in the program with the click
of a button. Most of the buttons on the toolbar gives you access to commands that are also available
via the AxCent menus.
Note that buttons are available only when they apply to the task you are currently performing. But-
tons that are not available for the current task appear as grayed out.
AxCent/PBCFD toolbar
The following table describes each of the buttons on the AxCent toolbar. Where the toolbar button
corresponds to a command on the AxCent menu, the menu and command are indicated in parenthe-
ses.
Click this button to

Create a new blade design by using the AxCent wizard. (File – New)
Open an existing AxCent design. (File – Open)
Save the design that is displayed in the active window. (File – Save)
Print the design that is displayed in the active window. (File – Print)
Undo the previous change. (Edit– Undo)
Redo the last change you undid with the Undo command. (Edit– Redo)
Decrease the number of control points in a curve. (Edit– Decrease Poly-

gon Order)
Increase the number of control points in a curve so that you can more
precisely modify the design manually.(Edit– Increase Polygon Order)
Select an area in a 3D model window to zoom in for a closer view.
Manually move an entire 3D image within the active window.
Rotate a 3D image manually.
Zoom in towards a 3D image. (Graphics– Zoom In)
Zoom out from a 3D image. (Graphics– Zoom Out)
Point to an area in a 3D image to zoom in towards it.

Select options to display curves and control points at the hub, mean,
and shroud locations and on the pressure, mean, and suction surfaces
for viewing and/or editing. (View– Choose Data)
Select segments to view in the active window. (View– Choose

Segment)
Specify fluid dynamic loading parameters. (Flow– Loading)
Run an MST calculation. (Flow– Run MST Solver)
Run the CFD solver in blade-to-blade mode without using the CFD
environment. (Flow– Run Blade to Blade Solver)
Start or schedule CFD runs. (CFD– Start CFD)
Stop CFD runs. (CFD– Stop CFD)
View results before a CFD calculation is complete by writing the

results to a file. (CFD– Write CFD Results)
Launch Pushbutton FEA (PBFEA), perform a stress analysis on the

current design, estimate impeller stress and vibration. (Mechanical–
Stress / Vibration)
Show or hide the Graph Control dialog box so that you can select to
show or hide elements in the displayed graph. (View– Graph
Controls).
Activate hub side control points in all active windows.
Activate shroud side control points in all active windows.
Turn on or off the overlays feature in all windows. (View– All

Windows Overlay)
Switch between graph and table views in the active window. (View–
Format – Graph or View– Format – Table)
View version, copyright, and option information for AxCent. (View–

About AxCent)
View Help for the currently displayed window (you can also view
Help for the current window by pressing F1).
View Standard Screens 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. (Standard Screens– Toolbar

Button Screens– AxCent Screen 1, etc.)
CFD Shortcuts When you create CFD shortcuts for viewing the CFD variables, the
shortcut buttons appear to the right of the buttons for standard screens.

Pushbutton FEA toolbar
If you have purchased a license for Pushbutton FEA (PBFEA), the following toolbar buttons are also
available on the Stress toolbar.

View the project summary. (View – FEA Views – Defaults)
View the cross-sectional view of the model. (View – FEA Views –

Cross Section)
View the axial view of the model. (View – FEA Views – Axial)
View the FEA 3D mesh. (View – FEA Views – FEA Model)
View mass, inertia, and node and element summary information for the
model in the Model Statistics window. (View – FEA Views – Model
Statistics)
Toggle between plot and data views.
Plot the results on a Goodman diagram. (Mechanical – Goodman

diagram)
Plot the results on a Campbell diagram. (Mechanical – Campbell

diagram)
Plot the results on an Interference diagram. (Mechanical –

Interference Diagram)
Specify hot-to-cold conversion parameters. (Mechanical –Hot to-

Cold)
Plot only the rendered solid, without the element outlines. (On the
shortcut menu: Render Type – Solid)
Plot the solid and element outlines. (On the shortcut menu: Render
Type – Solid Wireframe)
Plot a hollow wireframe. (On the shortcut menu: Hollow Wireframe)
View the thermal load for the FEA model. (On the shortcut menu:
Temperature)
View the pressure load for the FEA model. (On the shortcut menu:
Pressure)
View the convection coefficient for the FEA model. (On the shortcut
menu: Convection)

Keyboard shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts allow you to perform common functions in the AxCent program by pressing a
combination of keys on your keyboard. AxCent provides many keyboard shortcuts.
Viewing segments and slices commands

Note: The LEFT and RIGHT ARROW keys change the slice direction, so they would cycle
between I=1, J=1 and K=1. The UP/DOWN ARROW keys change the value, I=1, I=2,
I=3, and so on.
The following table describes some of the most commonly used keyboard shortcuts available in Ax-
Cent. For the complete list of AxCent keyboard shortcuts, refer to the “Keyboard shortcuts” topic in
AxCent Help.
Press to
* Display another window showing the same data as the window currently
selected.
= Display the Curve/Control Points dialog box to edit all curves currently
selected.
? Display the Choose Data dialog box for the active window.
0 Display all segments in the active window.
1–9 Display the corresponding segment (1 – 9) in the active window.
a–g Display the corresponding segment (10 – 16) in the active window.
H Activate/deactivate hub control points in a graph.
S Activate/deactivate shroud control points in a graph.
ALT+F4 Exit from AxCent.
BACKSPACE View a transparent overlay in the 3D window (this overlay appears in red).
CTRL+A Show/hide the axes in a graph.
CTRL+C Copy selected text to the clipboard.
CTRL+E Revert to the baseline design.
CTRL+F Show/hide a full window view of a graph. In full view, the entire window
is used to display the graph. All legends, borders, and axes are removed.
CTRL+G Show/hide the background grid in a graph. In some windows, this shortcut
will cycle through different types of grids.
CTRL+L Show/hide legends in graphs.
CTRL+N Create a new design.
CTRL+O Open an existing design.
CTRL+P Print the current window.
CTRL+Q Show/hide QOs in a flow path view.
CTRL+R Redo the last action.

Press to
CTRL+S Save the current document.
CTRL+T Cycle through different ways to view data graph, table, or spreadsheet.
Not all graphs support all three types of views.
CTRL+V Paste clipboard contents to the current location.
CTRL+W Show/hid walls in a flow path view.
CTRL+Z Undo the last action.
x Switch between viewing a line graph and a 2D color contour plot.

(In the 3D window, select x for a cutaway view (or cross-section).
SPACEBAR Return a zoomed view to its original magnification.
F1 Display Help for the currently selected window or dialog box.

Opening existing AxCent designs
Use the following procedure to open an existing AxCent design, including the sample designs that
are included with the program.
To open an existing design
 From the File menu, choose Open (or click in the toolbar), then navigate to and
select the design that you want to open.
– or –
If you’ve already opened the design in AxCent, choose its name from the list of the most
recently used files at the bottom of the File menu.
The design you selected appears in a Contours window in the AxCent window.
With AxCent, you can create a new design by
 Saving the currently open AxCent design as a new design. To learn how, see "Saving
designs" on page 46.
 Using the AxCent wizard to create a new design from scratch. To learn how, see
"Creating designs with the AxCent wizard" on page 31.
 Using CADFIT and the AxCent wizard to create a new design by importing blade shape
geometry from a CAD file. To learn how, see "Creating new designs with CADFIT" on
page 33.
Note: You can also create a new design by passing an existing meanline design from a
meanline program into AxCent. For information about passing a meanline design into
AxCent, refer to meanline program Help.

Creating designs with the AxCent wizard
Use the AxCent wizard to create a new design from scratch in AxCent.
The AxCent wizard helps you create a new blade design for compressors, pumps, fans, and turbines.
Each wizard window leads you through the steps for producing the design, allowing you to answer
a set of questions in series until the required information is obtained. In most cases, you answer the
questions in order, but you can skip ahead or back using the Next or Back buttons. When all the re-
quired information is specified, you can then perform normal AxCent functions with your new de-
sign.
To create a new design using the AxCent wizard

1 From the File menu, choose New.
The AxCent wizard launches and displays the first dialog box of the wizard (the Design Title dialog
box).
2 Use the wizard to define the final specifications of the new design. After you complete each dialog
box in the wizard, click Next to move to the next dialog box. For information about the options
available in each dialog box, click the Help button (or press F1).
3 When you complete the last page of the wizard (the Blade Generation Options page), click Finish.
AxCent generates the machine based upon the geometry and settings you specified in the previous
wizard windows, and then displays the design in a Contours window.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Creating designs with the AxCent wizard 31
If any errors occurred while generating the design, AxCent displays messages describing the errors.
You can modify the geometry by selecting one of the parameters from the Flow menu or Geometry
menu.

Creating new designs with CADFIT
Use the CADFIT feature in AxCent to create a new design by importing blade shape geometry from
a CAD file. Although you can import this geometry in multiple formats, CADFIT (.fit) is the pre-
ferred file format for bringing the design into AxCent. You can then adjust the geometry to custom-
fit the design for conversion into a final AxCent blade design.
There are three ways in which to import designs using CADFIT:
 Open a file in the CADFIT format (*.fit).
 Import a file using a surface file format (*.sur).
 Import a CAD file in ACIS (*.sat), IGS (*.iges), or STEP (*.step) formats.
CADFIT fits one blade row each time it is used, creating a design with the first blade row in the flow
path of the machine configuration.
Before you use CADFIT, you must first create a CADFIT file that contains the blade geometric set-
tings from existing data. You can do this by creating the file format with another program, or export-
ing the information from within AxCent. To view sample CADFIT files and detailed instructions for
formatting the CADFIT file, refer to CADFIT File Formats.
Once you have formatted your CADFIT file appropriately, you can open this file in AxCent using
the CADFIT option to create a new design. When you do this, AxCent automatically generates a
blade design based upon the information in the file and displays it in the CADFIT window in Ax-
Cent.
Note: For more information about using CADFIT and how to format a CADFIT file, refer
to the topics in the “Using CADFIT” chapter in AxCent Help.
To create a new design with CADFIT (using the *.fit file format)
1 From the File menu, choose Start from CADFIT.
The Open dialog box appears and is set to open CADFIT input files (*.fit).
2 Select the type of CADFIT file you want to use to create your designs.
3 Select the CADFIT file to use.
4 Click Open.
The Fitting Method dialog box appears.
5 Select the CADFIT method you want to use for the geometry data you are importing into AxCent.
For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, see "Fitting Method dialog box" on page 284.
6 Click OK.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Creating new designs with CADFIT 33
AxCent generates a blade design based upon the information in the file and displays the design in a
set of CADFIT windows.
 For radial designs, the following windows appear: Cadfit Contours, Cadfit Thickness,
and Cadfit Beta Distribution.
AxCent generates Bezier polynomials of the hub and shroud contours and the variations of blade an-
gle and thickness along them. Circular arcs are also an option for the hub and shroud contours be-
cause many existing designs were originally created in this way.
The contours are (R, Z) curves in the meridional plane. The blade angle and blade thickness are func-
tions of percent distance along a meridional curve. To fit them, you can adjust the contours to deter-
mine the actual meridional distances.
AxCent performs the initial fitting using a set of default parameters, but you may need to check and
adjust them, if necessary, to ensure the best fit for the design.
7 Use the options in the left pane of each window to adjust the geometry in each window.
Tip: For detailed descriptions of each option in a CADFIT window, click the window to make it ac-
tive and then press F1 to view AxCent Help.
Do not specify an order that is too high to fit to the Bezier curves. Profiles in excess of an 8th order
often cause instability and produce regions of artificially high curvature.
You can also adjust contours by dragging data points. To activate the data points, choose Edit Raw
Data from the Input Data menu, and then select the data points you want to activate in the Choose
Raw Data to Edit dialog box.

8 To convert the CADFIT file into an AxCent blade design, choose Finish from the CADFIT menu.
You can save the CADFIT settings you have specified here by choosing Save Settings from the
Cadfit menu. If you ever need to fit the same (or very similar) data again, you can use your saved
CADFIT settings by choosing the Load Settings command from the Cadfit menu and then selecting
the CADFIT file you saved.
The AxCent wizard launches and displays the Design Title dialog box.
9 Use the AxCent wizard to define the final specifications of the CADFIT design. After you complete
each dialog box in the wizard, click Next to move to the next dialog box. For information about the
options available in each dialog box, click the Help button (or press F1).
10 When you have reached the last window in the wizard, click Finish.
AxCent creates the design based on the CADFIT settings and displays it in a Contours window.
To manually import a new design using CADFIT (using the *.sur file format)
1 After exporting an *.iges file to a surface file format (*.sur) using CADTranslator, import the surface
file into AxCent using the CADFIT feature.
Note: Use a surface file with control points that are located exactly at the transitions from
the edge curves to the PS/SS curves to improve the accuracy of the post-processing
blade parameters from the section geometry. Use the option for trimming and cutting
curves in CADTranslator to select and separate PS/SS and LE/TE curves. (See the
“Cutting curves” topic in CADTranslator F1 Help.) Ensure that the surface file
contains the necessary flowpath data.
2 From the File menu, choose Start from CADFIT.
3 In the drop-down list of the Open dialog box, select Surface data files (*.sur).
Note: A sample surface file is contained in the following directory...\\Program Files (x86)\
Concepts \AXCENT \Examples\geometry\sur.
4 Select the surface file, and click Open.
5 In the Fitting Method dialog box that appears, select Surface sections, and click OK.
AxCent generates a blade design based upon the data in the file, and displays the design in a set of
CADFIT windows.
For radial designs, adjust the design in the following windows:
 Cadfit Contours window – Adjust the flowpath contours (or create them from the blade
sections of the hub and shroud).
 Cadfit Thickness window – Adjust the blade thickness.
 Cadfit Beta Distribution window – Adjust beta distribution.
6 If necessary, manually edit the surface points using the Choose Raw Data to Edit dialog box (from
the Input data menu, choose Edit Raw Data), and click OK.
7 To convert the CADFIT file into an AxCent blade design, choose Finish from the CADFIT menu.
Note: To save the CADFIT settings you have specified, you can choose Save Settings from
the Cadfit menu. To fit the same (or similar) data again, use your saved CADFIT
settings by choosing the Load Settings command from the Cadfit menu and then
selecting the CADFIT file you saved.
The AxCent wizard launches and displays the Design Title dialog box.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Creating new designs with CADFIT 35
8 Use the AxCent wizard to define the final specifications of the CADFIT design.
After you complete each dialog box in the wizard, click Next to move to the next dialog box. For
information about the options available in each dialog box, click the Help button (or press F1).
9 When you have reached the last window in the wizard, click Finish.
AxCent creates the design based on the CADFIT settings and displays it in the Contours window.
10 If required, append the geometry with every new processed blade row, using the Copy a Segment
dialog box (from the Setup menu, choose Import/Copy Segment), and click OK.
(See also Copying and importing segments and Appending segments to designs.)
11 Snap the segments to the guide contours that were imported through CADFIT (from the Geometry
menu, choose Operations – Snap Segments to Blades).
12 In the Setup segments dialog box (from the Setup menu, choose Set up Segments), perform the
following tasks:
 Adjust the blade count (in the # full blades column).
 Correct the rotation speed (in the RPM column).
13 Click OK.
14 Change the fluid properties and boundary conditions as needed on the Fluid Properties tab (available
when you choose Loading from the Flow menu), and click OK.
15 Run the MST solver, and then run the CFD solver.

Importing CAD files into AxCent using CADFIT
Use this feature to import CAD files into AxCent by means of the CADFIT program.
If you are new to using the CADFIT utility for importing CAD files into AxCent, read Overview:
Using the CADFIT option.
If you are new to using the CADFIT utility for importing CAD files into AxCent, read "Overview:
Using the CADFIT option" in AxCent F1 Help.
To import CAD files

1 From the File menu, choose Import CAD file.
– or –
If another file has already been open, choose Import – Import CAD file.
2 In the Open dialog box, select one of the following file formats:
 ACIS files (*.sat)
 IGES files (*.igs)
 Parasolid files (*.x_t)
 STEP files (*.stp)
3 Select the file and click Open.
The imported file appears in the 3D model window.
Note: If an error message appears in the absence of the OCC view, consult the following
procedure in AxCent Help: "Troubleshooting Open CASCADE (OCC) in AxCent."
Next, you must select the blade surfaces for inclusion in the CADFIT file.
4 Click on the toolbar menu to open the Blade Surface Selection dialog box.
Use this dialog box to collect the blade surfaces for import into CADFIT.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Blade Surface Selection dialog box" on page 222.
5 In the "Surfaces" section of the dialog box, first highlight the surface to be imported into the
CADFIT file.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Importing CAD files into AxCent using CADFIT 37
6 To select a blade surface, double-click the surface in the 3D model window (the selected surface
turns red).
7 Click the Collect button to add the surfaces to the tree in the Surfaces section.
The numbered faces appear under the selected surface (in the 3D view, the selected surface turns pur-
ple).
8 Specify the following features for each face that you select in the Surfaces window:
 Number of Sections (default of 4)
 Flow direction (V-Iso or U-Iso)
 Leading edge location
 Machine type (Radial or Axial)
9 After you specify the blade surfaces, click OK.
Next, specify the number of control points defining the surfaces.
10 Click in the toolbar menu.

The CADFIT dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, "CADFIT dialog box" on page 243.
11 In this dialog box, specify point density along the surfaces (number of points for PS/SS and for LE),
and the number of blades.
Next, continue to create the AxCent geometry using CADFIT.
12 Click the Launch CADFIT button in the CADFIT dialog box.
AxCent generates a blade design based upon the information in the file and displays the design in a
set of CADFIT windows.
 For radial designs, the following windows appear: Cadfit Contours, Cadfit Thickness,
and Cadfit Beta Distribution.

Setting preferences
In AxCent, you can specify general program preferences and 2D map plot preferences.
To set preferences
1 In AxCent, open any design.
Note: The preference settings you select affect all designs you open or create with AxCent,
not just the current design.
2 From the File menu, choose Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box appears.
3 Under "Directories & Files" on the General tab, specify the directories where you want to save
AxCent information. For descriptions of the options on this tab, "Preferences dialog box – General
tab" on page 348
4 In the Number of undo steps to store box, type the number of steps you want AxCent to remember
for the Undo command.
5 Click the 3D tab.
Use this tab to specify the default 3D options for AxCent to use when generating 3D models of your
design. For descriptions of the options on this tab, see "Preferences dialog box – 3D tab" on page
346.
6 Click the Fonts tab.For descriptions of the options on this tab, "Preferences dialog box – Fonts
tab" on page 350.
Use this tab to specify the fonts for 2D windows.
Note: The font settings on this tab are for 2D windows only. To change the font settings
for 3D windows. To change the font settings for 3D windows, see Changing font
settings. To change the font settings for 3D windows, see "Changing font settings" in
AxCent Help.
7 Click the Parallel tab.
For descriptions of the options on this tab, "Preferences dialog box – Parallel tab" on page 351
Use this tab to specify the use of multiple computers for parallel CFD solver operations, using Open
MPI.
8 Click Apply to view the results of your changes; click OK when you are finished setting
preferences.
AxCent applies your preferences immediately.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Setting preferences 39

Specifying units
When you create a new design using the AxCent wizard, you select the unit system and specific units
for length, temperature, pressure, stress, mass flow, and volume flow that you want to use for the
design. Use the following procedure to change the unit system for any design at any time.
To specify units
1 In AxCent, Open the design for which you want to specify units.
2 From the Setup menu, choose General – Unit System.
The Select Units Used dialog box appears. For information about each option in this dialog box, see
"Select Units Used dialog box" on page 364.
3 Under "Unit System", select the system of units to use for the design: Metric or English.
4 Under "Choose units", select the units that you want to use for each measuring parameter.
5 Click OK.
AxCent automatically adjusts your design to the new units you selected.

Making geometric adjustments
You can make geometric adjustments to your AxCent design by adjusting plot points (also called
"control points") in graph windows by using two methods:
 By dragging control points in a graph view
Using this method allows you to make geometric adjustments quickly without specifying exact point
values, and you can immediately see the effects of your edits in the graph.
 By specifying coordinates n the Curve/Control Points dialog box
With this method, you can enter exact Z and R values for the plot points, can easily make the Z or R
values of two points equal, and you can reuse point values by copying and pasting values in the table.
Note: Normally, you can adjust plot points for the Beta Distribution, Contours, Sheet
Contours, and Thickness windows only. The other parameters that are available in
AxCent are typically for viewing purposes only; however they may become editable
when geometry options are changed (for example, some output values may become
input values).
The following procedure describes how to make geometric adjustments manually and by specifying
coordinates.
To make geometric adjustments

1 In AxCent, open the design whose geometry you want to adjust.
(The images shown below are from the comp_rad_Compex1.des example case.)
2 From the View menu, choose Choose Segment (or click on the toolbar).
The Choose Segment dialog box appears. For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, see see
"Choose Segment dialog box" on page 260.
3 Under "Select segment", select the segment that you want to adjust.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Making geometric adjustments 41

Tip: You can also select a segment by double-clicking the segment in the Contours window.
4 Click OK.
AxCent displays the selected segment in the window.
The following example shows the impeller segment of the example case.
5 From the Geometry menu, choose the command for the parameter that you want to view and adjust.
You can also choose a Standard Screen from the Standard Screens menu if a parameter you want to
adjust is included in one of the Standard Screens.
The simplest way to start contour editing is to choose Contours – Geometry from the Standard
Screens menu (or press F3). Three windows appear, one showing the contours with Bezier control
points on the shroud available for modification. The other two windows show the slope and curva-
ture distributions.

The following example shows the Contours – Geometry Standard Screen for the design.
Note the control points on the shroud plot in the Contours window.
6 In the Contours window, activate the data points that you want to edit in the graph by choosing
Choose Data from the View menu (or by right-clicking the graph window and then choosing
Choose Data).
The Choose data to edit dialog box appears. For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, see
"Choose data/Choose data to show or edit dialog box" on page 262.
Note: Depending on the type of parameter window you have open, your choices for which
contours to edit may vary. Some parameter windows allow you to edit certain control
points only.
7 Select the check boxes for the data that you want to edit.
8 Click OK.
The control points for the data you selected appear in the graph window.
Note: To add or remove control points for better plot manipulation, click or on the
toolbar.

9 Manually adjust the activated points by dragging control points on the plot to the new location in the
graph, as shown in the following example.
When you release the mouse button, AxCent adjusts the design geometry according to the change
you made.
Tip: Choosing Contours – Aero from the Standard Screens menu (or pressing F4) allows you
to simultaneously view aerodynamic plots while you adjust contours. You can view as
many windows as you want by using the New Window command from the Window menu
and then choosing the data to appear in each window from the Aero or Geometry menu.
For more exact control over the control point positions, use the Curve/Control Points dialog box.
10 From the Edit menu, choose Edit Control Points.
The Curve/Control Points dialog box appears. For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, see
"Curve/Control Points dialog box" on page 276.
AxCent keeps track of the control points by numbering them (the point numbers appear in the status
bar). The Z and R coordinates of the points appear in the upper-left section of the dialog box.
You can edit any value that does not appear in bold.
Note: Values that appear in bold are the endpoints and cannot be edited directly in this
dialog box. To edit endpoints, click the Endpoints button and make your changes in
the Change Junction Points dialog box.
The control points that you can edit in the Curve/Control Points dialog box depend on the window/
graph that you are viewing:
In this window You can edit these control points

Contours in the meridional view ZR
Beta distributions %M Beta
Thickness distributions %M Thickness

11 To modify a control point value, click its cell in the table and then type a new value.
Tip: The Curve/Control Points dialog box provides several other methods to modify the control
points, such as scaling or shifting them all. For details on using the options in this dialog
box, press F1 while viewing the dialog box.
12 When you are finished making changes, click OK.

Saving designs
Use the following procedures to save your AxCent design and to create a new design by saving a
copy of the current design as a new design.
To save a design
 From the File menu, choose Save.
– or –
Click on the toolbar.

If you haven’t already saved the file, AxCent displays the Save As dialog box so you can
specify a name for the file.
To save the currently open design as a new design

1 From the File menu, choose Save As.
The Save As dialog box appears.
The current name of the design appears in the File name box.
2 To save the new design in a different directory, navigate to the directory in which you want to save
the design.
3 In the File name box, type a new name for the new design file you will create.
4 Click Save.
The new design appears in the main AxCent window.

Closing designs
Use the following procedure to close a design when you no longer want to view it in AxCent.
If you have made changes since the last time you saved the design, AxCent gives you the opportunity
to save your changes or to close the design without saving your changes.
To close a design
1 From the File menu, choose Close.
If you have made changes to your design that you have not yet saved, AxCent displays a message
asking if you want to save the design before closing.
2 Choose what you want to do:
 To save your changes and then close the case, click Yes.
 To close the case without saving the changes, click No.
 To cancel closing the case, click Cancel.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Closing designs 47

Chapter 3: Developing Radial Blade Geometry

Introduction: AxCent blade definition approaches ................................. 50
AxCent's blade generation options ...................................................... 52
Specifying the type of blade generation ............................................... 54
Adding mid-span geometry defined cross-sections ............................... 55
Specifying blade angle distribution ...................................................... 63
Specifying blade thickness distribution ................................................. 72
Modifying blade shapes ...................................................................... 75
Staggering blades .............................................................................. 76
Specifying a swept leading edge and trailing edge ................................ 80
Improving blade alignment for a swept leading edge ............................ 83
Setting bowed blading ....................................................................... 85
Stretching the axial length of segments ............................................... 87
Copying and importing segments ........................................................ 89
Adding flow paths and casing treatments ............................................ 99
Designing volutes ............................................................................. 106
Introduction: AxCent blade definition approaches
AxCent provides two different paradigms for defining blade shape:
 You can define the blades by specifying an explicit camber line and thickness
distribution. Blades defined this way can be used for radial, mixed flow, or axial
designs.
This method is generally the preferred method for radial designs where the blades are comparatively
thin and passages are typically long and well defined.
 You can use a pressure-suction surface defined blade type such as NACA (National
Advisory Committee for Aeronautics), Pritchard, or MCA (Multiple Circular Arc) to
determine the blade shape. The pressure-suction defined blade type can take the form of
Bezier type lines that explicitly define the pressure and suction side of the blade. Most
pressure-suction blade types are available in AxCent for axial flow machines only.
This method is generally used in axial flow machines where you want more explicit control over the
pressure and suction side definitions or when you want to use a predefined blade type where perfor-
mance data may be available.
AxCent allows you to define blades by specifying an explicit camber line and thickness distribution.
Blades defined this way can be used for radial, mixed flow, or axial designs. Specifying camber line
and thickness distribution is generally the preferred method for radial designs in which the blades
are comparatively thin and the passages are typically long and well defined. This method is de-
scribed in more detail in the following section.
In AxCent, you choose the type of blading method to use for your design in the Blade Generation
Options dialog box (which appears when you choose Blade Angles – Blade Generation Option
[KBLADE] from the Geometry menu after you have selected to view a bladed segment in the de-
sign).
Camber line-thickness blading methods

The camber line-thickness blade method in AxCent is defined in three parts: annulus shape, blade
thickness distribution, and blade camber surface. Each of these parts is described below.
Annulus shape
The annulus shape is defined by hub and shroud curves, with an arbitrary number of segments (the
same number in hub and shroud). The blades must be entirely confined within one segment but need
not occupy the entire segment. Various options are provided to allow initial definition of the seg-
ments.The hub and shroud contours of the segment are each defined by a characterized curve, C(u)
γ (Z, R). The variable u runs from 0 at the inlet of the segment to 1 at the exit. Note that u does not
necessarily vary proportionally to the meridional distance m along the curve, By default, the curves
are Bezier-Bernstein polynomials, but other curve types are possible.
Blade thickness
The blade thickness is distributed, with respect to proportional meridional distance over the blade
length, on both hub and shroud contours. The thickness distribution utilizes a single segment, vari-
able order, Bezier formulation where the u parameter is replaced by proportional meridional dis-
tance.
Blade camber surface

AxCent provides many methods for defining the shape of the blade surface. One of the simplest
methods is to define the shape by hub and shroud section only. In addition, blade surfaces can be
50 Chapter 3: Developing Radial Blade Geometry Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

defined by more than two sections by using bowing, non-linear thickness, mid-span geometry de-
fined cross-sections, and the 2D blading options.
The blade camber surface is usually defined in terms of the blade angle beta. The blade angle beta
is related to the coordinate of the cylindrical (Z-R ) coordinate system through
Where m is the meridional distance along the Z-R contour, and and r are functions of m. When
r(m) is defined by the contour shape and (m) is specified by the user-specified control curve, the
coordinate is determined by numerical integration of
This way, the program will calculate Z- R and values for each QO point along the hub and shroud.
If the total wrap angle is different than desired, an automatic adjustment of the distribution is pro-
vided in AxCent to adjust the wrap ( ) angle. Other blade shape adjustments are provided, including
individual adjustment of polygon points.
After you complete a design in AxCent, data are stored in a file that can be used later either to read-
just the design using AxCent or to generate a complete geometry of the impeller. Data can also be
stored in a file suitable for machining or for full quasi-3D analysis.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction: AxCent blade definition approaches 51
AxCent's blade generation options
Quick reference: Choosing the right blade generation options

AxCent provides several blade generation options so that you can easily create the blade design that
best suits your needs. Each blade generation option is designed for a specific purpose, and provides
further options that allow you to modify the resulting blade as needed.
For information on AxCent's blade generation options, along with a description of the Blade Gener-
ation Option dialog box, Blade Generation Options dialog box on page 207
The following table provides a quick reference for selecting the best type of blade generation option
for the type of wheel you are creating.
For information about specifying the blade generation option for bladed segments in your design see
Specifying the type of blade generation.
Type of wheel Blade option recommendation
Impellers The option you want to use for the impeller varies depending on
the required impeller shape:
For flat blades with an inducer section, use any of the following
options:
1 Independent hub and shroud
Specify shroud and lean angle
3 Explicit shroud, radial inlet, exit rake
For bowed and other complex blade shapes, use the following
options:
1 Independent hub and shroud (with bowing and swept LE/TE
options)
Specify shroud and lean angle (with bowing and swept LE/TE
options)
Arbitrary number of midspan sections and stacking curve
For centrifugal blades without an inducer section, use the
following options:
5 2-D wheel with Bezier beta distribution (if appropriate)
Specify hub and extrusion direction
The same options as a blade with an inducer
Rotors for radial Radial turbines often use the 4 Fully radial blade generation
turbines option. If this option is not suitable, you can use the same options
as those listed for impellers.
Inlet guide vanes Inlet guide vanes can be designed using the Use blade sections
defined in (Z, RTheta) option. If this is not a suitable option, use
the 1 Independent hub and shroud option to define inlet guide
vanes.

Type of wheel Blade option recommendation
Diffusers Different types of diffusers can have quite different geometries.

The preferred blade generation option, therefore, varies by type of
diffuser.
Cascade diffusers can use the NACA 65 Airfoil blades option. If
the diffuser is axial, it is also possible to use the Use blade sections
defined in (Z, RTheta)option.
Wedge diffusers can use the 2D Wedge Diffuser option . An
alternative is to use the 6 2-D wheel with straight or circular arc
blades option to define a straight line blade. Set the leading and
trailing edge to the desired thickness to get a wedge shape. Use the
Use Wedge Thickness Distribution command (on the Geometry
– Thickness menu) to recalculate a thickness distribution suitable
for wedges.
Deswirls can often be done using 2D blading, utilizing the 5 2-D
wheel with Bezier beta distribution option.
Other diffusers can be designed using the 1 Independent hub and
shroud or Specify shroud and lean angle options. Some very
complex shapes (e.g., complex crossovers) might require the use
of the Arbitrary number of midspan sections and stacking curve
option.
Blades for flank If a blade must be suitable for flank milling, the following blade
milling generation options are most suitable:
Use a separate blade generating sheet
5 2-D wheel with bezier beta distribution
6 2-D wheel with straight or circular arc blades
Note that simply using one of these options does not guarantee that
the blade can be flank milled. Thickness distribution and leading
and trailing edge types must also be suitable, and the geometry
must be designed with flank milling in mind.
For more details on blade generation, see "Blade Generation Options dialog box" on page 207.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® AxCent's blade generation options 53

Specifying the type of blade generation
Use this procedure to select the type of blading to use in your design. An entire machine can have
both radial and axial components.
Note: Switching back and forth between blading types may not necessarily yield the same
blade shape in the end. Some of the blade geometry may be lost in the refitting
process when moving from one type to another.
To specify a type of blade generation

1 In the Contours window, select to view the bladed segment.
2 From the Geometry menu, choose Blade Angles – Blade Generation Option (KBLADE).
The Blade Generation Options dialog box appears.
For a description of this dialog box, Blade Generation Options dialog box on page 207.
Note: Some blade generation options apply only to radial designs. For more information
about each blade generation option, see "AxCent's blade generation options" on page
52..
3 Select the type of blading that you want to use.
4 To use the wrap angle (Theta) rather than the blade angle (Beta) to specify the blade shape, select
the Use theta instead of beta curves check box. In general, the blade angle is easier to work than
the wrap angle, and the blade angle is numerically more stable than the wrap angle, so selecting this
check box is not usually recommended.
5 Click OK.
AxCent displays a warning message alerting you to the fact that, by changing the blade generation
option, you may lose some geometry.
6 To proceed with the change, click Yes.
Depending on the type of blade option you selected, a dialog box may appear to allow you to further
specify blade generation parameters.
Press F1 to view Help for any dialog boxes that appears.

Adding mid-span geometry defined cross-sections
In AxCent, you can add a series of mid-span geometry defined cross-sections at various percentages
of span. One common reason to add cross-sections is to closely duplicate an existing blade shape.
Another reason is to precisely control bowing along the entire blade. Cross-sections are also neces-
sary when you need to set leading and trailing edge blade stacking.
Note: You can add mid-span geometry defined cross-sections only if you select the
Arbitrary number of midspan sections and stacking curve blade generation
option. For information on selecting the blade generation option, see "Specifying the
type of blade generation" on page 54..
To add multiple mid-span geometry defined cross-sections

1 Make sure that you select Arbitrary number of midspan sections and stacking curve in the Blade
Generation Options dialog box.
2 Select the impeller segment in the Contours window.
3 From the Geometry menu, choose Mid-Span Geometry Defn – Add Multiple Sections.
Note: The options in this submenu become active after you’ve selected Blade Angles –
Blade Generation Options (KBLADE)from the Geometry menu, and then selected
the Arbitrary number of midspan sections and stacking curve option.
The Add Multiple User Defined Sections dialog box appears.
For a description of this dialog box, see "Add Multiple User Defined Sections dialog box" on page
203.
4 In the box next to the Add % Span button, type the percentage at which you want to add the cross
section. For example, if you type 25, you will specify a mid-span cross-section at 25% span.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Adding mid-span geometry defined cross-sections 55
5 Click the Add % Span button.
The mid-span cross-section at the percentage you specified appears in the New sections box.
6 Repeat steps 2-3 until you have specified all the cross-sections that you want to add. For example,
specify cross-sections at 25, 50, and 75% span.
7 Click OK.
AxCent displays the mid-span cross-sections as black lines in the Contours window.

Specifying blade stacking for mid-span geometry defined cross-sections
In AxCent, you can stack mid-span blade cross-sections tangentially and/or meridionally. One of the
blading types supported by AxCent can contain an arbitrary number of sections between the hub and
the shroud. Stacking curves are used to position those sections in the tangential and meridional di-
rection.
Note: You can stack mid-span geometry defined cross-sections only if you select the
Arbitrary number of midspan sections and stacking curve blade generation option.
For information on selecting the blade generation option, see Specifying the type of
blade generation. For information on selecting the blade generation option,
Specifying the type of blade generation on page 54
To specify blade stacking

1 In the Contours window, select to view the impeller segment.
2 Select the blade generation option for Arbitrary number of midspan sections and stacking curve.
3 If you have not done so already, add a series of mid-span geometry defined cross-sections.
4 When you are done adding cross-sections, select Mid-Span Geometry Defn – Stacking and
Geometry Options from the Geometry menu.
The Stacking and Geometry Options for Midspan Sections dialog box appears.
For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, Stacking and Geometry Options for Midspan Sec-
tions dialog box on page 338
5 Select the options in the dialog box, and then click OK.
A green line in the contour plot indicates the effects of the meridional stacking.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Specifying blade stacking for mid-span geometry defined cross-sections 57
Note: The meridional stacking offsets are negative for a bulging leading edge, but positive
for a bulging trailing edge: negative in the upstream, and positive in the downstream.
6 From the Window menu, choose New Window.

7 From the Geometry menu, choose Mid Span Geometry Defn. – Leading Edge Stacking Curve or
Trailing Edge Stacking Curve.

The Stacking Curve window appears, showing only the leading or trailing edge. Meridional curves
in blue (for LE and TE) and tangential curves in red (for LE only) are displayed in the same plot.
Note: In some cases, the blue line may be hidden behind the red line.
8 Select the line and move the control points slightly downward (for leading edge) or upward (for
trailing edge).
9 Select the Contours window and move the image to the right to view how this adjustment affects the
leading edge or trailing edge green line.
10 From the Window menu, choose New Window to open another new window.
11 From the Geometry menu, choose Blade Angles – Beta to view the Beta Distribution.
12 Choose New 3D View from the Window menu.

13 Right-click the 3D window and then choose Solid Wireframe from the shortcut menu that appears.

14 From the Window menu, choose Tile Vertical.
15 Use this set of windows to examine the blade stacking.
Removing mid-span geometry defined cross-sections
Use the following procedure to remove a mid-span geometry defined cross-section from your de-
sign.
To remove a mid-span geometry defined cross-section

1 View your design in a Contours window.
2 Select the segment that contains the mid-span cross-section that you want to remove.
3 From the Geometry menu, choose Mid-Span Geometry Defn. – Remove Section.
The Remove Mid-Span Geometry Definition dialog box appears.
For a description of this dialog box, Remove Mid-Span Geometry Definition dialog box on page 358
4 Select the section that you want to remove.
5 Click OK.
A message appears that asks you to verify that you want to remove the blade section.
6 Click Yes.

Specifying blade angle distribution
The blade angle distribution in your design is another important part of the blade geometry descrip-
tion that you can easily manipulate in AxCent.
The amount of control you have over blade angle (and thickness) distributions depends on the Blade
Generation option used for a particular segment. For some blade options, information must be spec-
ified by choosing Blade Angles – Blade Generation Parameters from the Geometry menu. For
other blade options, you can change the blade shape by altering the blade angles directly.
Viewing blade angle distributions

In AxCent, you can easily view the angle distributions of the blades in your design by using one of
AxCent’s Standard Screens. Use the following procedure to display the blade angle (beta) distribu-
tion, together with a set of related parameters.
To view the blade angle (beta) distribution

2 From the Standard Screens menu, choose Beta – Geometry (or press F7).
AxCent displays the following set of windows (from the comp_rad_Compex1.des example case):
Beta Distribution The Beta Distribution window displays the blade angle (beta)
window distribution. Note that this is defined on the hub and shroud
contours. The preliminary design, created by using a meanline
analysis program such as COMPAL, normally provides values of
the blade angle at the endpoints of the hub and shroud.
AxCent allows you to define the distributions between these
points on each contour. By default, AxCent creates straight lines
in 3D space along quasi-orthogonals (QOs) to calculate the blade
geometry at mid-span points.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Specifying blade angle distribution 63

Theta Distribution The Theta Distribution window shows the wrap angle q , or polar
window coordinate. If the wrap starts at zero, this shows how far around
the axis of rotation the blade is wrapped. The wrap angle is
related to the blade angle by means of a simple relationship:
where:
m is the meridional distance along the contour
r is the radius (as a function of m)
bis the blade angle (as a function of m).
The wrap angle is, therefore, a function of the blade angle
distribution integrated along the blade contour. If you consider an
extreme case of b= 0 everywhere, the blade is a straight line and
there is no wrap. At the other extreme, as b® 90°, the blade angle
is close to the tangent and the blade is a tightly packed spiral
about the axis of the impeller. In this case, the blade probably
makes several turns of the impeller like a helix, and the wrap
angle can be very large. Real compressor blades, of course, are
somewhere between these two extremes.
Lean Angle window The Lean Angle window shows a plot of the blade lean angle. This
is the angle that the blade leans relative to a line that points
straight out along the QOs. In part, the curve represents the
difference between the hub and shroud wrapping; the further apart
the hub and the shroud wraps become, the more the blade leans.
The lean also correlates to other aspects of the design, including
the radius.
For each QO, the lean angle is calculated as:
tan(lean_angle) = Rshroud * ( shroud - hub) / QOlength
where
Rshroud is the radius of the shroud point of the QO
shroud is the wrap angle ( in [Z-R, ] cylindrical
coordinates) of the shroud point
hub is the wrap angle at the hub
QOlength is the length of the QO in the 2D (Z-R) plane.
Due to these correlations, the blade angle, wrap angle, and lean
angle are all related and cannot be edited independently. For
example, when you modify the blade angle distribution, AxCent
automatically recalculates the wrap and lean angles.
3D window The 3D model window is the fourth window of the Beta –

Geometry Standard Screen. It appears in the bottom-right corner
of the AxCent window.

Editing blade angle distributions
The blade angle (beta) distributions on the hub and shroud are defined using Bezier polynomials,
just like the hub and shroud contours, and they can be edited in the same way.
The amount of control you have over blade angle (and thickness) distributions depends on the Blade
Generation option used for a particular segment. For some blade options, information must be spec-
ified by choosing Blade Angles – Blade Generation Parameters from the Geometry menu.
This procedure explains how you can change the blade shape by altering the blade angles for a case
using the 1 Independent hub and shroud blade generation option.
To modify the blade angle distribution

2 From the Standard Screens menu, choose Beta Geometry (or press F7).
The Beta Geometry windows appear.
For descriptions of each of these windows, see Viewing blade angle distributions on page 63.
3 From the View menu, choose the All Windows Overlay feature to compare changes.
4 Select the Beta Distribution window.
5 If the shroud control points are not already visible, activate them by pressing the S key.
The X-axis (%M) in this graph runs in the streamwise direction, so the far-left control point is the
leading edge point and the far-right control point is the trailing edge point, or backsweep angle.
6 Move the far-right control point of the shroud curve downward. The X-axis (%M) in this graph runs
in the streamwise direction, so this is the trailing edge point, or the backsweep angle. By moving it
downward, you are increasing the blade trailing edge angle in magnitude (that is, moving it toward
the tangential direction).
Note that changing the blade angle also changes the wrap and lean angles.
7 If necessary, remove control points to modify the blade distribution even further.
Changing the blade angle in this way affects the wrap and lean angles as well.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Editing blade angle distributions 65

8 View the Theta Distribution window to see how you have changed the wrap angle, adding degrees
of wrap to the shroud.
9 View the Lean Angle window to see how the curve has moved in degrees because you shifted the
shroud relative to the hub enough to make the blade lean in the opposite direction.
10 You can also view the change in blade angle in a 3D model window.

Setting entry lean angle
Set the entry lean angle by specifying a value of theta ( )at the hub or shroud of the impeller leading
or trailing edge. The difference between the hub and shroud entry theta sets the entry lean angle. This
is the constant of integration when finding theta from an integration of beta.
You can also set the entry lean angle manually using the Theta Distribution window.
To set the entry lean angle

2 From the Geometry menu, choose Blade Angles – Entry Theta.
The Entry Wrap Angle (Theta) dialog box appears.
For a description of this dialog box, Entry Wrap Angle (Theta) dialog box on page 279
3 In the Entry hub theta box, type the value of the wrap angle (theta) on the hub at the leading edge of
the blade.
4 In the Entry shroud theta box, type the value of the wrap angle (theta) on the shroud at the leading
edge of the blade.
5 If you want the trailing edge to be at a specific point in the coordinate system, select the Set Theta
reference at exit, not entry check box. For example, some designers use the shroud/trailing edge
as the reference point of their coordinate system.
6 Click Apply to view results, click OK when you are done.
To set the entry lean angle using the Theta Distribution window
2 Right-click the impeller, and choose Geometry – Theta Distribution from the shortcut menu.
– or –
From the Geometry menu, choose Blade Angles – Theta Distribution.
The Theta Distribution window appears.
3 Adjust the wrap angles by dragging the hub marker (in blue) or shroud marker (in red) in a vertical
direction.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Setting entry lean angle 67

– or –
Click on either marker to open the Enter Value for [ ] dialog box.
4 Type a degree value for the hub or shroud entry lean angle in this dialog box.
5 Click OK when you are done.

Adjusting exit lean angles
Although you usually adjust the wrap and exit lean angles by modifying the blade angle distribution,
you can also adjust the exit lean angle separately.
To adjust the lean angle, choose 1 Independent hub and shroud blade generation option for the
design. For more information about this option, Specifying the type of blade generation on page 54
To adjust the exit lean angle

2 From the Geometry menu, choose Blade Angles – Blade Generation Option (KBLADE).
3 In the Blade generation options dialog box that appears, choose 1 Independent hub and shroud.
4 Click OK.
A message box may appear, indicating that the blade may change from its current definition.
5 To continue, click Yes in the message dialog box.
6 From the Standard Screens menu, choose Beta Geometry (or press F7).
The Beta Geometry windows appear.
For descriptions of these windows, Viewing blade angle distributions on page 63
7 Select the Lean Angle window.
8 From the Geometry menu, choose Blade Angles – Adjust Exit Lean Angle.
The Adjust Exit Lean Angle dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Adjust Exit Lean Angle dialog box" on page 204.
9 In the Required exit lean angle box, type the value of the lean angle at exit (also called the exit rake).
10 Select one of the options to adjust the blade angle to get the correct exit lean along the hub, the
shroud, or both.
 Adjust the hub
 Adjust the shroud
 Adjust both
11 For AxCent to continue adjusting the exit lean to the desired value, select the Automatically keep
adjusting to this exit lean check box.
12 Click Apply to view the results of your changes; click OK when you are done.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Adjusting exit lean angles 69

Editing wrap angles
Although you usually adjust the wrap and exit lean angles by modifying the blade angle distribution,
you can also adjust the wrap angle separately.
Most commonly, you may want to constrain the total wrap angle, possibly to meet some manufac-
turing requirement (for example, when the blades are highly wrapped or leaned, they may be difficult
or expensive to machine, case, or injection mold).
To edit the wrap angle

2 From the Geometry menu, choose Blade Angles – Beta.
The Beta Distribution window appears. (The images shown below are from the comp_rad_Com-
pex1.des example case.)
3 Activate either the hub or the shroud control points (you cannot adjust the wrap angle for both at the
at the same time)
4 From the Geometry menu, choose Blade Angles – Adjust Wrap Angle.
For a description of the Exit Theta window, see "Exit Theta dialog box" on page 280.
5 In the Enter hub or shroud exit theta (wrap) in degrees box, type the exit wrap angle. The entire beta
distribution (except the endpoints) is adjusted to give the desired wrap angle at the exit. If too large
a change is requested, the algorithm may not converge. If it does not converge, use a series of smaller
steps to reach the same exit wrap.
The exit theta is an absolute value, not the total wrap of the blade. To control the total wrap of the
blade, you must add the desired total wrap value to the corresponding entry theta value. This gives
you the theta value at the exit.
6 Click OK.
The adjustment appears in all other open windows, including the Beta Distribution window. The
changes are spread in a uniform manner over the blade angle distribution, but leave the endpoint val-
ues unchanged. As a result, the correct exit wrap angle results when the blade angle distribution is
integrated.
Tip: Tip: The Adjust Wrap Angle command in AxCent also allows for other adjustments. For
example, you can use it if the design requires no exit rake (that is, the hub exit wrap angle
must equal the shroud exit wrap angle). You do this by activating the hub control points,
and then specifying the same exit theta (wrap) value for the hub that you specified for the
shroud. When the wrap angles on the hub and shroud are identical, there is no lean at the
trailing edge of the blade.
7 Zoom in to any of the blade angle windows to inspect your results more closely.
8 You can also take a look at the numerical data by clicking on the toolbar.
The following example shows the data for the Beta Distribution window.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Editing wrap angles 71

Specifying blade thickness distribution
Specifying the blade thickness distribution is one of the components in the basic definition of the
blade geometry in your design. This can be a complicated design element, but one that can be easily
managed in AxCent.
As with blade angles, the amount of control you have over blade thickness depends on the blade gen-
eration option used for a particular segment. For options such as the NACA 65 airfoil section, thick-
nesses are defined along with the rest of the geometric parameters by choosing Blade Angles –
Blade Generation Parameters from the Geometry menu.
For blade generation options that allow you to independently define thickness, you can use the fol-
lowing procedures to view and edit the blade thickness distribution.
Viewing blade thickness distribution

You can view blade thickness distribution for your design by viewing the Thickness – Geometry
Standard Screen.
To view blade thickness distribution

2 From the Standard Screens menu, choose Thickness – Geometry.
AxCent displays the Thickness, % Blockage, Annulus Area, and Taper Ratio windows.
Use these windows to view blade thickness distribution for your design.
 The Thickness window displays the blade thickness that is defined the same way the
blade angle is defined, using Bezier polynomials that give the distributions of thickness
along the hub and shroud contours.
 The % Blockage window shows the percentage of blade blockage. This is a fraction of
the annulus area at each section that is occupied by the blades.
 The Taper Ratio window shows the hub thickness divided by the shroud thickness.
 The Annulus Area window shows the annulus area. Annulus area is determined on each
of the QOs shown in the meridional Contours window by calculating the area swept out
by each QO when it is rotated about the axis, and is provided with and without blade
blockage. The annulus area takes into account the angle between the flow path and the
QO.
Editing blade thickness distribution

The blade thicknesses at the inlet and exit of the impeller can be defined in your meanline design
and are used in AxCent to specify the endpoints of the hub and shroud thickness distribution. AxCent
gives each curve a default thickness distribution; however, the Bezier curves can be modified just
like all the other Bezier curves, so you can readily modify the thickness, as necessary.
To edit blade thickness, you can manually edit the Bezier curves or specify hub or scale factors by
which to scale the thickness distribution. Using the Scale Thickness option allows you to make the
thickness thinner or thicker when your distribution is fine.
To manually edit blade thickness distribution

2 From the Standard Screens menu, choose Thickness – Geometry.
AxCent displays the Thickness, % Blockage, Taper Ratio, and Annulus Area windows.
For pictures and descriptions of these windows, see Viewing blade thickness distribution on page 72.
3 Make sure the All Windows Overlay feature is turned on by choosing All Windows Overlay from
the View menu.
4 In the Thickness window, edit the hub thickness and the shroud thickness by manually moving
control points or by specifying exact control point values. To alternate between editing the hub and
shroud control points, press the H and S keys.
Similar to blade angle, blade thicknesses points on the interior of a blade are calculated by interpo-
lating between the corresponding values on the hub and shroud.
To scale the blade thickness distribution

2 From the Geometry menu, choose Thickness – Scale Thickness.
The Scale Blade Thickness Distribution dialog box appears.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Specifying blade thickness distribution 73

3 In the Hub scale factor box, type the hub scale factor by which to scale the thickness distribution.
4 In the Shroud scale factor box, type the shroud scale factor by which to scale the thickness
distribution.
5 Click Apply to view the results of edits; click OK to finish.

Modifying blade shapes
This procedure uses the Beta – Geometry Standard Screen for viewing and updating geometry
without viewing flow results. Use this procedure to modify geometry early in the design process.
You can refine the design later based on flow solver output using Pushbutton CFD.
Note: To change the number of blades, choose Loading from the Flow menu and then
specify the blade number in the Number of Main Blades box (on the Blade Loading
Options tab of the Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box). To specify the
number of blades in the Setup Segments dialog box, choose Set Up Segments from
the Setup menu.
A segment is defined as bladed if the number of main blades parameter is not zero (0) (accessed by
selecting Loading from the Flow menu). The following procedure can help you get started modi-
fying the shapes of blades in your design.
To modify blade shapes

1 In the Contours window, select to view the bladed segment that you want to modify.
2 From the Standard Screens menu, choose Beta – Geometry (or press F7).
AxCent displays four windows that display Beta geometry parameters:
 Beta Distribution window (with the shroud control points already activated)
 Theta (wrap angle) Distribution window
 Lean Angle window
 3D Model window
For descriptions of these windows, see "Viewing blade thickness distribution" on page 72.
3 In the Beta Distribution window, switch from editing the hub or shroud control points (by pressing
the H or S key).
4 Modify the blade shapes as necessary.
For more information, see "Making geometric adjustments" on page 41.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Modifying blade shapes 75

Staggering blades
Staggering is a method of adjusting or revising compressor performance. An example of using stag-
gering to adjust performance is to re-stagger the blades open to obtain a higher efficiency by better
performance matching with other stages, or to re-stagger the blades closed to obtain a better stall
margin. An example of using staggering to revise performance is to stagger the blades open (with a
lower value of stagger) to obtain higher flow and more engine thrust.
AxCent provides two procedures for staggering blades:
 Use the 3D procedure to rotate the blade after you have designed it. Although the blade
shape does not change in this procedure, the resulting blade may intersect the walls. This
procedure is recommended for movable blades. You can use the 3D procedure for both
axial and radial blades.
 Use the 2D procedure to stagger the blade sections when you begin a blade design.
Note, however, that when you change the stagger angle, the actual blade shape may
change as well.
To stagger the angle of an axial blade in 2D

1 In the Contours window, select the bladed segment to modify.
2 From the Geometry menu, choose Operations – Stagger Blade.

The Restagger Blade dialog box appears.
3 In the Stagger angle (Deg) box, type the amount to change the stagger angle of the blade.
Note: Changing this angle may result in a change in the blade shape.
4 Click OK.
AxCent shows the new stagger angle in the Contours window.

The following example shows the result of specifying a change in stagger angle of 3 degrees. This
view shows that the rotor blading was staggered about the hub of the leading edge.
The following example shows the result of specifying a change in stagger angle of 3 degrees. This
view shows that the rotor blading was staggered about the hub of the leading edge.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Staggering blades 77

To stagger the angle of a radial blade in 3D
1 In the Contours window, select the bladed segment to modify.
(The images shown below are from the Compex1 win.des example case.)
2 From the Geometry menu, choose Blade Angles – Restagger blade on axis.
For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, Blade Stagger Angle dialog box on page 220
3 To re-stagger the blade, select the Movable blade - restagger by ___ deg check box, and then type
the degrees by which you want to stagger the blades from the axis.
4 Use the options in the "Restagger Axis" section to define the re-stagger axis and to select constants
for Z, R, and Theta coordinates.
 Z/R – Type values for the Z and R coordinates of the hub and shroud.
 Constant Z / R / Theta – Select one of these check boxes to use a constant (as opposed
to a user-specified) value for the Z, R, or Theta coordinates.
 Theta relative to blade center line – Select this option to define theta in relation to
the center line of the blade.
 Absolute theta – Select this option to use an absolute theta as opposed to one relative
to the blade's center line.
5 In the "Restagger Angle Range" section, type the ideal minimum and maximum degrees for the re-
staggering range.
Note: This option is for documentation purposes only. The range that you enter does not
affect the blade geometry.

6 In the User variable name box, type a name for the blade angle that you have specified. If you type
a name here, it will be appended to the title of some flow plots (for example, the Absolute and
Relative Velocity plots).
7 Click OK.
AxCent displays the new stagger angle in the Contours window.
You can continue to adjust the stagger angle with the points in the Contours window, and view the
results in the 3D window.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Staggering blades 79

Specifying a swept leading edge and trailing edge
In AxCent, you can add a swept leading edge and trailing edge to your design.
Note that the following blade generation options do not support swept leading/trailing edges:
 Blade sections defined in Z, RTheta (Axial blades only)
 2D wedge diffuser
 Custom
For more information about these blade generation options, see "Specifying the type of blade gen-
eration" on page 54., and refer to AxCent Help.
To specify a swept leading / trailing edge

1 In the Contours window, select to view the impeller (or rotor) segment.
2 From the View menu, choose Display QOs.
The QO lines appear in the Contours window.
3 From the Geometry menu, choose Swept Leading Edge or Swept Trailing Edge.
The Swept Leading (or Trailing) Edge Parameters dialog box appears.
For a description of this dialog box, Swept Leading/Trailing Edge Parameters dialog box on page
411
4 Select the Use swept leading (or trailing) edge check box.
5 Select the type of leading or trailing edge you want to use:

 Blunt – The blade edge is not sharp, but just ends and keeps the same thickness.
 Rounded – An elliptical edge is fitted to the blade. The edge is cut back so that it doesn't
protrude beyond the segment boundaries.
 Sheared – The edge is sheared off at the segment boundaries. Unlike the blunt edge, a
sheared edge is not perpendicular to the blade; it is cut along a surface of revolution
instead.
 Bezier – The edge is controlled by an editable Bezier curve. You can use the Bezier
option to control the edge shape in detail. This option is especially useful for specifying
asymmetrical edges. (The disadvantage of using the Bezier option is the additional work
and attention required to make a suitable edge shape.)
6 If you are defining a swept leading edge, you can choose to use an old method that achieves a sheared
leading edge by shearing a blunt blade. To use this option, select the Use old style shearing check
box. This option appears for a sheared swept leading edge only.
If you do not shear off enough of the blade, this can leave you with a piece of blade missing where
the blunt blade doesn’t reach all the way to the inlet. If you don’t select this check box, the new meth-
od is used which will extend the blade surface if needed to achieve proper shearing.
7 To replace the existing swept edge with the new one you are specifying, select the Wipeout existing
swept leading (or trailing) edge curve check box. When you select this check box, the options
below it become available.
8 In the Shroud merge QO for swept leading (or trailing) edge and Hub merge QO for swept leading
(or trailing) edge boxes, specify the QO at which the swept edge is to touch the shroud and hub.
When a new swept edge is created, it is curved from hub to shroud.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Specifying a swept leading edge and trailing edge 81
9 To merge the newly created swept edge smoothly into the shroud, select the Force continuous slope
at shroud merge check box. There will be no corner where shroud and edge meet, as the edge
transitions smoothly into the shroud contour.
Caution: Take care when using this option to ensure that the resulting 3D blade shape is acceptable.
10 Click OK.
AxCent displays the swept leading or trailing edge in the Contours window.
The following image shows what a swept leading edge looks like in the Contours window.
Tip: You can graphically edit the angle of the swept leading or trailing edge by right-clicking the
Contours window, selecting Choose Data, selecting the Edit Swept Leading (or Trailing)
Edge check box, and then moving the control points.

Improving blade alignment for a swept leading edge
When a swept leading (or trailing edge) is used, each of the blade sections is shorted (cut off) to ac-
commodate the swept edge. The points on the blade surface are then redistributed such that they end
up on the remaining part of the blade.
A classic use of the swept leading edge is to round off the tip of the blade. This means that the blade
is cut at the tip, but not at the hub. If AxCent detects that nothing is cut from the hub section, it does
not redistribute the points. Doing so would possibly introduce some(small) interpolation errors. The
disadvantage is that the interpolation of all the other sections might result in a point distribution that
is not very compatible with the original point distribution on the hub. In this case, there is a sudden
kink in the hub to shroud lines, as shown below.
To fix this problem, use the following procedure to select the Swept LE hub blade shape follows
the rest of the blade check box, which forces AxCent to redistribute the points to all sections, in-
cluding the hub.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Improving blade alignment for a swept leading edge 83
To improve blade alignment for a swept leading edge
1 From the Geometry menu, choose Setup – Geometry Engine Options. The Geometry Engine Op-
tions dialog box appears.
For a description of this dialog box, Geometry Engine Options dialog box on page 295
2 Select the Swept LE hub blade shape follows the rest of the blade check box, and then click OK.
AxCent attempts to improve the alignment between the hub section and the rest of the blade.
Note: This option may not work equally well for all geometries, and in unusual situations
might make the geometry slightly worse.
The following example shows the effect of this option on the design (in comparison to the example
above). The kink at the hub is gone.

Setting bowed blading
In AxCent, you can set up bowed blading in your design using a ruled element blade. This option is
only available for designs using Independent Hub and Shroud type of blading.
The following diagram illustrates the geometric position of bowed blading.
To set bowed blading

1 From the Geometry menu, choose Bowed Blading – Bowed Blading Setup.
Note: This command is available only if the design is using the 1 Independent Hub and
Shroud blade generation option.
For more information, see "Specifying the type of blade generation" on page 54.
The Bowed Blading Parameters dialog box appears.
For a description of this dialog box, see "Bowed Blading Parameters dialog box" on page 239.
2 Select the Bowed blade check box. If you do not select this check box, the hub to shroud camber
line is defined by straight lines.
3 Select the bowed blading option you want to use.
 Select the Basic option to use basic bowed blading parameters. Use the boxes in this
section to specify circumferential distances at the inlet and exit at some proportional
distance from the hub.
 Select the Advanced option to use advanced bowed blading parameters. This option
allows you to have full access to Bezier curves to define bowing distributions for the
entire blade.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Setting bowed blading 85

 Select the Hub-Shroud Shapes option to define hub-to-shroud bow shapes. With this
option, you will add hub-shroud shapes and then manually adjust the shapes with Bezier
curves in the Hub to Shroud Bow Shape window.
4 If you selected the Basic option, click Apply to view the results, or click OK to close the Bowed
Blading Parameters dialog box when you are finished specifying the basic options.
Note: If you select either the Advanced or Hub-Shroud Shapes options, the Bowed
Blading Parameters dialog box automatically closed when you clicked the Edit Now
button.
5 If you selected the Basic or Advanced options, you can further edit the bowing distributions by
choosing Bowed Blading – Bow Distribution or Bowed Blading – Prop. Distance Distribution
from the Geometry menu.
 Bowed Distribution – Choose this command to manually adjust the distribution in the
Bow Distribution window.
 Prop. Distance Distribution – Choose this command to adjust the proportional distance
distribution in the Prop. Distance Distribution window.
6 If you selected the Hub-Shroud Shapes option, you can edit the shapes in the Hub to Shroud Bow
Shape window. (You can also access this window by choosing Bowed Blading – Bowed Blading
Setup from the Geometry menu.)
7 After you edit the blading distribution with any method, view the changes that you make in steps 5
or 6 above in the 3D Model window.

Stretching the axial length of segments
Use the following procedure to stretch the original axial length that was specified in the meanline
code for your design and to stretch the blades to match the flow path.
Note: This procedure stretches the axial length only; the inlet and exit widths remain the
same.
To stretch the axial length of segments

1 In the Contours window, select to view the segment that you want to modify.
The blade segment appears.(The images shown below are from the Compex3win.des example case.)
2 From the Geometry menu, choose Operations – Stretch Z Length.

For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, see "Stretch Segment dialog box" on page 410.
3 In the Enter amount of stretch box, type the amount of change in Z to stretch the flow path.
Note: To preserve the same exit flow area, do not select the Preserve Entry/Exit Slopes
check box. (The intent of the Z-stretch is to reduce blade loading, not to change the
exit flow area.)
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Stretching the axial length of segments 87
4 Click OK.
The change appears in the Contours window. The following picture shows the rotor segment in the
sample design stretched by 0.2 inches.
5 After the segment is stretched, you may need to edit the mid-span blade sections to move the trailing
edge points of the blade sections to the stretched position.

Copying and importing segments
Copy and import segments to move segment design data within the same AxCent design or between
different AxCent designs. Copying segments within the same file allows you to quickly create mul-
tiple segments that have a similar design. Copying or importing from another design is helpful when
design features in one file work well in another.
You can copy segment information in AxCent by:
 Copying one or more segments in the current design to create one or more new segments
in the current design.
 Importing or copying one or more segments from another design into the current design.
 Copying part of a segment from an existing design into an existing segment in the
current design.
Note: Unlike the other methods for copying or importing segment information, this last
method does not add a new segment to the design. Instead, it modifies an existing
segment with the attributes from the segment you are copying.
Each of these procedures is described below.
To copy segments from the current design or import segments from another de-
sign
1 Open the design that you want to modify.
2 From the Setup menu, choose Import/Copy Segment.
The Copy a Segment dialog box appears.
3 Select the appropriate option for copying or importing the segment:
 To copy segments from the current design, select the Make a copy of one of the
segments in this design option.
 To copy segments from another design, select the Copy a segment out of another
design option.
4 If you are copying a segment from the current design, skip to step 7.
If you are copying a segment from another design, the Open dialog box appears if the File name box
is blank. Otherwise, click the Browse button to open the Open dialog box.
5 Navigate to and then select the file from which you want to import segments.
6 Click Open.
The path and filename for the design appears in the File name box of the Copy a Segment dialog box.
7 Select the segments that you want to copy/import:
 To copy/import a single segment, select the segment in the Select Segment box.
 To copy/import a range of segments, select the Copy multiple segments check box, and
then specify the first and last segments in the range in the First Segment and Last
Segment boxes.
8 Click OK.
The Append the New Segment to the Design dialog box appears.
The options in this dialog box allow you to choose how you want to add the new segments to your
design.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Copying and importing segments 89

Note: For examples that show the results of selecting each option in the Append the New
Segment to the Design dialog box, see “Appending segments to designs.”
9 Under "Where is the new segment connected to the existing segments?", specify whether the
segment should be added to the beginning or the end:
 Connect upstream of existing segments
 Connect downstream of existing segments
10 Under "How is the new segment connected to the existing segments?", specify where the new
segment should be positioned and whether AxCent should move it adjacent to the existing design or
keep it in place by adding a duct or by modifying the end points.
11 Under "If the new segment doesn’t fit the existing segment exactly, which one is modified?", specify
which segment should be modified to make things fit properly when the new segment doesn’t fit the
existing design exactly.
12 If you do not want to place the segments directly next to the existing design, specify an offset in the
Z direction in the Manually shift the new segment in the Z direction before adding it box at the
bottom of the dialog box.
This is very useful if you are copying a segment from the current design and want to place it in an-
other location. It is also useful when copying from another file that uses a different frame of refer-
ence compared to the current design.
13 Click OK.
AxCent adds the segment to your current design as you’ve specified.
Note: If you need to modify the location of the segments and/or want to remove the
segments you’ve just added, select Set Up Segments from the Setup menu and
modify the new segments in the Setup Segments dialog box.
To copy part of a segment into an existing segment

1 In the Contours window, select to view the segment into which you want to copy information from
another segment.
2 From the Geometry menu, choose Operations – Bring in Model.
The Bring in Model dialog box appears.
The options in this dialog box allow you to copy hub and shroud information, and to specify whether
or not endpoints are to be used. You can also copy fluid dynamic loading parameters and swept lead-
ing edge specifications.
You can also choose to copy the endpoints of the desired contour; otherwise, the source shape is
scaled to fit between the endpoints in the current design.
3 Click the Select File button.
The Open dialog box appears.
4 Navigate to and then select the design from which you want to copy segment information.
5 Click Open.
The name and title of the selected file appears in the Bring in Model dialog box.
6 In the Choose Segment box, select the segment from which you want to copy information into the
current design.
7 Under "Select items to copy", select the information that you want to copy from the selected segment
into the current design.

Note: For detailed description of each option in the "Select items to copy" section, see the
Bring in Model dialog box topic.
8 Click OK.
AxCent copies the specified segment information into the currently selected segment in your design.
Appending segments to designs

This section illustrates the effects of copying and inserting segments using the different options in
the Append the New Segment to the Design dialog box.
For descriptions of each of the options available in this dialog box, see "Append the New Segment
to the Design dialog box" on page 205.
Suppose you want to append the bladed segment from the top design in the following example to the
bottom design.
In the Append the New Segment to the Design dialog box, the default option is to keep the copied
segment in the same location that it was in the top design above, and to add a duct between the end
of the old design and the new segment:

The copied segment is added to the bottom design, as shown below:
But what if the location in the top design is not suitable? For example, what if you wanted to add the
segment upstream rather than downstream in the bottom design? The options under "Where is the
new segment connected to the existing segments?" section in the Append the New Segment to the
Design dialog box let you specify adding the segment upstream of existing segments, but you cannot
simply copy the design to the same location as it was in the top design.
The simplest solution is to manually specify a Z shift in the box at the bottom of the dialog box:
The copied segment is copied to the correct location, upstream of the existing segments:

In both cases above, an extra duct was added between the new segment and the existing design. If
you do not want to add a duct, you have two choices. The first is to let AxCent move the copied seg-
ment so that it touches the existing design. The second is to modify the existing duct so that it match-
es the new segment. The options under "How is the new segment connected to the existing
segments" section in the Append the New Segment to the Design dialog box allow you to make this
choice.
To automatically line up the segments so that the copied segment touches the existing design, select
the Move the new segments directly next to the existing segment option:
Note that you cannot set a manual Z shift when this option is selected because AxCent controls the
final position of the added segment.
The copied segment is added directly next to the existing segment.
The other way is to keep the copied segment in its original location but modify either the segment
or the duct on the bottom design so that the two connect properly.
The options under "If the new segment doesn’t fit the existing segment exactly, which one is modi-
fied?" allow you to choose which segment should be modified: the new (copied) segment or the ex-
isting segment. Typically, you want to modify the duct rather than the bladed element by selecting
the The existing segment option:

Note that the Z shift is possible again, and might be necessary to get the segment in the correct lo-
cation.
The result shows the segment in its original place, and the duct from the bottom design is adjusted
to match it:
What if the new element does not match the existing design and you select the option to move it so
that it connects directly to the existing design? In that case, you will have to specify which of the
segments is to be modified The new segment or The existing segment). For example, if you copied
the bladed element of the bottom design to the front of the top design, you would have to choose
which side to change to make the slanted outlet of the copied segment match up with the straight
inlet of the top design. Again, you would normally modify the duct of the top design:
This specifies to match the inlet duct of the top design to the new bladed element added to it, as
shown below:

The option of inserting new segments inside an existing design (such as when you select Insert into
design after segment) is especially useful for multi-stage designs in which you must add stages.
In the design below, the first and last stage are not standard – the first stage has a special impeller,
and the last stage has a volute. By selecting Insert into design after segment and then selecting the
segment before the position of the new segment, you can replicate the middle stage. This segment
in this design, however, cannot be added to the front or to the back.
To add segments in the middle, you must make sure that the segments fit correctly. AxCent needs to
move the segments after the insertion point in both the Z and/or R direction to make room for the
new segments. If the segment being inserted is not sized properly, a considerable amount of stretch-
ing and shifting may be required to fit them in the correct location.

If necessary, make a copy of the design that you can edit so that the start and end radii of the stage
match the radii in the insertion location, resulting in a Z-only shift.
In the example above, copying the design was not required, and the segment could be copied direct-
ly.
First, using the Copy a segment dialog box, select a suitable range to copy.
Then, using the Append the new segment to the design dialog box, select the option for inserting the
multiple segments into the design, Insert into design after segment. In this example, the segments
are copied directly before their original location (in other words, segments 10 through 18 are to be
inserted after segment 9).

After the segment insertion has been completed, the additional stage appears below.

Adding flow paths and casing treatments
Adding flow paths and side ports

Use this procedure to add new flow path branches or side ports to your design. Flow paths are useful
for turbofan engines and for designs requiring auxiliary exits. Side ports are used for casing treat-
ments.
You can specify flow paths and side ports for inlet or exit and for the hub or shroud. Both can be
edited further using control points in the Contours window. For side ports, see Specifying side ports.
To add flow paths

1 Open the design.
2 From the Setup menu, select Flow Path Branches – Create New Branch.
3 The Create New Flow Path Branch dialog box appears.
4 Set the Inlet Connection and the Exit Connection using the drop-down list, and then select Hub/
Shroud Side Branch or Hub/Shroud Side Port for the inlet and exit branch connections.
5 Using the drop-down list, set the Initial number of segments for the new flow path branch
(maximum of 100).
6 Click OK.
The Setup segments dialog box appears.
7 Edit the segments in the Setup segments dialog box.
8 Click OK.
9 The segments appear in the Contours window, where you can continue to edit them using Bezier
control points.
Side ports appear as green lines on either hub or shroud.
You can continue to edit side ports using the Side Ports dialog box.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Adding flow paths and casing treatments 99
Specifying side ports
Use this procedure to add a flow path branch and then design a side port for casing treatment.
To support casing treatments, you can specify side ports that allow flow passages to branch off from
the side of a segment. You can use this feature to create many kinds of secondary flow paths, not just
flow paths for the casing treatment.
Side ports, injection slots, and vane slots

Side ports and injection slots resemble one another, but differ in important ways. Vane slots are sim-
ply holes in the blade.
Injection slots introduce an identical fluid as the primary flow at arbitrary points on a passage's wall
surface, while extraction slots are used to take the fluid from the same wall surface or blade. (See
this descriptive overview for injection and extraction slots.)
Side ports are openings in the hub or shroud to which a separate flow path branch can be connected.
They are used in casing treatments, one type of secondary flow path.
For injection/extraction slots, you can specify flow path entry and exit, but no geometry beyond the
size and location of the slots.
Both injection slots and side ports can be added to the hub or shroud, but side ports cannot be added
to the blade surface.
You can specify the geometry behind a side port, but not its flow conditions. You can specify the
flow rate of an injection/extraction slot, but not its geometry other than its size and location.
Use injection slots if you know the quantity and temperature of the flow being injected or extracted
(for example, the injection of a cooling flow).
Use side ports if you know the geometry, but not the flow conditions (for example, a leakage path
around an impeller). You can run a full CFD solution that includes the side port geometry. Note that
the extra complexity of adding a side port to the calculations slows down the CFD run.
Solvers
None of the three features can be solved by the Rapid Loading or MST solvers. Rapid loading and
MST solvers cannot solve side ports, injection slots, or vane slots.
No solver recognizes vane slots, which are a geometry-only feature.
The Numeca Fine/Turbo solver can solve side ports and their geometry.
The PBCFD solver can solve injection/extraction slots.
To add the flow branch to which the side port is connected, see "Adding flow paths and casing
treatments" on page 99.
To specify side ports

1 Open a design.
2 To create a new flow path branch, choose Flow path branches – Create new branch from the
Setup menu.
3 In the Create New Flow Path Branch dialog box that appears, specify the starting segment (under the
Inlet Connection section) and the ending segment (under the Exit Connection section) of the flow
path.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Create New Flow Path Branch dialog box" on page 274..
(In the example below, a casing treatment is being set up, in which a port on the impeller shroud wall
(2 Impeller) is being connected back to a port on the upstream segment on the shroud wall (1 seg-
ment 1).
The ports themselves have not been defined yet.
4 To begin to specify the ports, click the new button for each port, one port at a time.
5 In the Side Port dialog box that appears (with the impeller or segment name listed in the heading),
click Add New to add the new port, and specify its parameters.
To learn about this dialog box, Side ports dialog box on page 368.
In the example below, one 2mm wide side port has been added at 20% starting along the impeller
shroud (in the "Inlet Connection" section).
Another port has been added at 75% ending along the shroud of a segment (in the "Exit Connection"
section).
6 Click OK in the Side Ports dialog box after you specify each port, and return to the Create New Flow
Path dialog box.
7 Select the number of segments in the spin box for Initial number of segments in new flow path
branch, and then click OK.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Specifying side ports 101

8 In the Setup segments (branch n) dialog box that appears, specify the number of segments.
To learn about this dialog box, Setup Segments dialog box on page 366.
(In the example below, the segments (newbranch.1, newbranch.2, and newbranch.3) are set as
counter-clockwise (ccw).)
9 Click OK in the Setup segments dialog box.

The side port appears in the Contours window labeled alphabetically according to flow branch and
segment.
In the case below, the flow branch has two segments.
For the desired side port, continue to modify the shape using internal end points to change the hub
and shroud contours.
10 After selecting the side port, press h or s for the control points to appear.
If necessary, edit the shape using the control points.
11 To continue to edit the shape in the Contours window, activate the hub and shroud control points
using the Choose data dialog box.
12 To activate the red arrows indicating flow direction in the side ports, select Edit Segment Junction
Points on the Choose data dialog box.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Choose data/Choose data to show or edit dialog box" on page
262..
Double-click these arrows to activate the Side Ports dialog box at any time to further edit the side
ports.
13 To preview the branch in a 3D view, activate the shroud display (press the s key), and then use the
cutaway option (press the x key).
A cutaway view of the hub and shroud sides of the side port appear outlined in red below.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Specifying side ports 103

To add side ports before adding flow branches
1 Open a design and select the first segment.
2 From the Geometry menu, choose Side Ports.
3 In the Side Ports dialog box that appears, click Add New to add a side port.
4 For each side port added, specify the hub or shroud location, length and width, branch and
connection.
5 Click OK upon specifying the side ports.
View the side ports in the Contours window and in the 3D model window.
To delete side ports

6 Select the segment from which to delete the side port (this appears in green on the Contours
window).
7 Choose Flow path branches – branch n from the Setup menu.
8 In the Create New Flow Path Branch dialog box that appears, click the Delete This Branch button.
The flow branch disappears.
9 In the Geometry menu, choose Side Ports.
Note: If you have not specified flow path branches before side ports, begin the deletion
here.
10 In the Side Ports dialog box, select DELETE from the first drop-down list.
Specifying vane slots
Use this procedure to add vane slots to an impeller.
Vane slots are holes in the blade that you can specify along the width and length of a segment.
To specify vane slots

1 Select the impeller blade segment.
2 From the Geometry menu, choose Vane Slots.
3 In the Vane Slots dialog box that appears, click Add to begin to add vane slots.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Vane slots dialog box" on page 425.
4 After clicking Add, specify the start and end values for each vane slot that you have specified in the
table (%M start/end and %span start/end).
5 Click the following buttons to specify the vane slots:
 Insert – After selecting the vane slot row below the desired insertion place, click this
button to insert the new row.
 Delete – Delete the highlighted row.
 Apply – Preview the vane slots (in blue) on the Contours window.
6 Click here for a sample of the vane slots preview.
7 Click OK upon specifying the vane slots.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Specifying vane slots 105

Designing volutes
Introduction: Developing Volutes

In AxCent, you can add a volute either upstream or downstream of your machine. In addition, you
can edit the volute shapes and volute exits using Bezier curves.
The main goal in designing volutes in AxCent is to specify the flow shape of the area of the volute
– as opposed to specifying the shape of the material (the actual mechanical volute).
Note: If you generate an AxCent file from a meanline file, AxCent automatically transfers
the volute parameters into the program. These parameters are the volute nominal area
at zero degrees, the throat area (A7), and the exit area (A8). The rest of the volute
parameters are then specified in AxCent.
The following diagram illustrates some parameters that define a volute in AxCent.
The flow process of the volute can be understood by using conservation of mass and conservation
of angular momentum. Just as in a vaneless diffuser, the flow in a volute has a high swirl, but is not
guided by vanes as in a vaned diffuser. The equations are very similar to those for a vaneless diffuser.
For a typical compressor operating characteristic at constant speed, the tangential velocity leaving
the impeller and the tangential velocity leaving the diffuser are approximately constant. The effec-
tive velocity passing the volute throat, however, will depend on the mass flow and the local flow
area. For more information, refer to the Introduction to Turbomachinery textbook.
What do you want to do?

See the following procedures for defining volutes:
1 Adding volutes
2 Adding multiple cross-sections to volutes
3 Editing the volute using Bezier curves
4 Viewing volutes
5 Viewing the volute CFD grid
6 Exporting volutes
Also, see the following examples of volutes:
 Overhung volute example
 Symmetric volute example
 Cross-section of a parameterized volute looking at the tongue
 Dual exit volute example
 Volute with 45 degrees of wrap beyond 360 degrees
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Designing volutes 107

Adding volutes
Use the following procedure to add an upstream (Input) or downstream (Output) volute to your de-
sign.
You can also use the Volute Wizard to begin a volute design (choose Volute Wizard from the Setup
menu).
To add an upstream/downstream volute

1 Open the design.
2 From the Setup menu, choose Upstream/Downstream Volute.
The Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box appears.
3 On the General Parameters tab, select the volute type (in the "Select volute type" section):
 Overhung – For compressors (overhanging to one side).
 Asymmetric – For compressors (overhanging to one side). Allows detailed editing of
geometry parameters.
 None – For no volute.
 Symmetric – For pumps or blowers (symmetric).
 Advanced – For the Bezier-curve design of volute geometry.
4 Continue to specify values for the basic volute parameters on the General Parameters tab.
5 Depending on which volute type you select, specify the parameters on the following tabs:
 For tubochargers or pumps (or overhung shapes), use the Simple Shape tab.
 For asymmetric volutes, use the Asymmetric Shape tab.
 For Advanced volute types, use the Advanced tab.
 For Open Cascade asymmetric volutes, use the OCC Parameters tab.
 For splitters added to Open Cascade volutes, use the Splitter tab.
6 Specify the parameters on the Pipe Shape tab.
7 If you are using a dual exit, activate the dual exit type and specify its parameters on the Dual Exit tab.
8 Specify the tongue dimensions in the Settings section of the Tongue tab.
To view the tongue in the Contours window and the 3D window, click the Show 3D View of Tongue
button.
9 If you are using the Open Cascade platform, use the OCC Parameters tab to specify the related
parameters.
10 If you have checked Splitter Volute in the OCC Parameters tab, use the Splitter tab to define the
splitter volute.
11 Click Apply to view the parameters you have specified.
– or –
If you are done, click OK.
Importing volutes from CAD files
Use this feature to import volutes from CAD files into AxCent using the OCC features.
To import CAD files

1 Open an AxCent file (choose Open from the File menu, and select the file).
2 From the File menu, choose Import – Import volute from CAD.
3 In the Windows Open dialog box, select one of the following file formats:
 ACIS files (*.sat)
 IGES files (*.igs)
 Parasolid files (*.x_t)
 STEP files (*.stp)
4 Select the file and click Open.
The imported file appears in the OCC 3D model window.
5 Click to view the imported volute in an OCC window.
Note: If an error message appears in the absence of the OCC view, consult the following
procedure: "Troubleshooting Open CASCADE (OCC) in AxCent."
6 To view or to change the OCC 3D view, right-click the 3D window. and choose Volute CAD
Overlay from the shortcut menu that appears.
7 In the CAD Overlay Settings dialog box that appears, specify the appearance of the CAD overlay
and the existing AxCent model.
You can change the appearance of the imported volute and the AxCent model using the options in
this dialog box.
8 Click OK in the dialog box.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Importing volutes from CAD files 109
9 To add the imported volute to the current AxCent model, select the volute type on the General
parameters tab of the Volute Parameters dialog box.
10 Continue to specify the volute using the Volute Parameters dialog box.
Introduction: Editing the volute using Bezier curves
Once you have specified a volute in your design, you can continue to edit the volute using Bezier
curves in window views.
You can edit the following volute characteristics using control points that you select in the volute
windows:
 Area distribution (area plot window)
 Exit path (axial view window)
 Shape (contours window)(available for all volutes except for pumps_
 Tongue (tongue view window)
The windows for editing the volute appear when you choose Volute Views from the Standard Screen
menu.
Editing the volute shape using Bezier curves

Use this procedure to edit the shape of the volute using Bezier curves and control points.
The number of control points that appear and the number that you can specify depends upon the se-
lection of either the advanced or the asymmetric shape.
Note: This feature is not available for the Symmetric or for Overhung volute types
selected on the General Parameters tab of the Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog
box.
To edit the volute area

1 Open a case that includes a volute.
– or –
Add a volute to your existing design
2 From the Standard Screens menu, choose Volute Views.
The following volute windows appear (upper left to right, in clockwise order):
 Contours window
 3D window
 Axial view
 Volute Area window
 Volute tongue window
3 Right-click on the Contours window, and select Choose Data from the shortcut menu that appears.
The Choose Data to Edit dialog box appears.
4 Select Edit Shape, and click OK.
The volute contours window appears with control points.
The number of control points depends upon whether you have selected and Advanced or an Asym-
metric shape in the Volute Parameters dialog box. Additionally, if you have selected an Advanced
shape, the control points available depends upon whether or not you select a mirrored shape.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction: Editing the volute using Bezier curves 111
5 Click to view the asymmetric volute shape in the Contours window.
The twelve control points available for the asymmetric volute modify the length and radii of the ba-
sic shape, and correspond to the length and radius parameters on the Asymmetric Shape tab of the
Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box.
Each control point is constrained to move horizontally or vertically, depending upon its location in
the shape. For example, the L1 control point on the right moves up and down and controls the length.
The control point at the upper right can also modify L1 as well as R1. The point in the center mod-
ifies L1, L2, L3, L4, and L5.
Unmirrored Advanced volute shape Mirrored Advanced volute shape
In the unmirrored shape above, the default of ten editable Bezier points appear for editing the shape
of the volute. In the mirrored (or symmetrical) shape, the default of five editable control points ap-
pear. Note that in either case you cannot edit the bottom points at the exit pipe.
When you select the Advanced volute, the Contours window features the following design ele-
ments:
 Guide shape – This shape is a guide for the design, generating the other general shapes
and angles, but not itself associated with a particular area or angle of the volute.
 Cross-section angle – Displayed in red, this is the volute cross-section angle that is the
closest to the ideal of 180 degrees. (See the Axial view for the same angle, except from
an axial rather than a meridional perspective.)
 Cross-section shape – The gray bounding line describes the volute cross-section (or half
the distance of the entire volute wrap).
6 To increase the number of control points, click on the toolbar; to decrease them, click .
– or –
Edit the control points on the Curve/control points dialog box (access by choosing Edit Control
Points from the Edit menu).
For the unmirrored volute shape, a maximum of 13 points are available; for the mirrored shape, a
maximum of 6.
7 Click OK in this dialog box if you are using the dialog box for editing control points.
8 Edit the volute shape by dragging the control points.
As you drag a control point, you can view the change of shape in the 3D window, while viewing the
cross-section in the Contours window.
9 To view the Volute Area window without control points, press the p letter key.
To return to the Bezier view, press the same key.
Editing overhung volute shapes using tables

Use these procedures to edit the geometry of an overhung volute shape, and to save the data in a com-
ma-separated value (*.csv) file format. (A similar option is available for the Advanced volute shape
as well.)
Once you save the csv file, you can edit the file directly in text or in Excel format, and then reload
the file back into AxCent.
To edit the asymmetric volute shape in a table

1 Open the volute case file.
2 From the Setup menu, choose Downstream/Upstream Volute.
3 In the General parameters tab of the Volute Parameters dialog box that appears, select Overhung in
the "Select volute type" section, and click Apply.
To learn about this dialog box, see Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box – General parameters
tab on page 427.
4 In the Asymmetric Shape tab, click the Save parameter set to file button.
To learn about this tab, see "Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box – Asymmetric Shape tab"
on page 429..
5 In the Windows Save As dialog box, save the .csv file with your preferred name and location (by
clicking Save).
The (recommended) default file name includes the AxCent file name.
6 Click Apply in the Volute Parameters dialog box to view the edits in the Contours window.
– or –
Click Done to complete the edit.
To edit overhung volute shape data in a csv file

7 Right-click the csv data file, and select the program to open the file from the shortcut menu that
appears, whether this program is Excel (if already installed) or a text editor such as Notepad.
8 Edit the values for each cross-section directly in the csv file, and then save the file.
9 In AxCent,click Load parameter set from file on the Overhung Shape tab.
10 In the Windows Open dialog box, browse to and open the csv file.
The values that you edited in text format appear in the Overhung Shape tab.
11 Click Apply in the Volute Parameters dialog box to view the edits in the Contours window; click
OK to complete the edit.
Editing the volute exit path

Use this procedure to edit the volute exit path using Bezier curves. Using them, you can shape the
length, bend, and exit angle of the volute exit.
To edit the volute exit path

1 Open a case that includes a volute.
– or –
Add a volute to your existing design.
2 From the Standard Screen menu, choose Volute Views.
The following volute windows appear (upper left to right, in clockwise order):
 Contours window
 3D model window
 Axial view
 Volute Area window
 Volute tongue window
3 Right-click on the Volute axial window, and select Choose Data from the shortcut menu that
appears.
The Choose Data to Edit dialog box appears.
Select the check box for Edit Exit Path, and click OK.
Two control points appear for editing the bend and length of the volute exit.
4 Use the control points to shape the exit pipe as follows:

 Edit the bend of the exit pipe using the Bezier point in the center.
 Edit exit length and angle using the Bezier point at the end of the exit path .
5 View the changes as you make them in the 3D model window.
6 To view the Volute Area window without control points, press the p letter key.
To return to the Bezier view, press the same key.
Chapter 4: Creating and Linking to Meanline Designs

Introduction: Updating meanline information ...................................... 118
Linking AxCent designs to meanline designs ....................................... 119
Updating meanline designs with AxCent information ............................ 120
Introduction: Creating meanline files from AxCent designs ................... 121
Creating meanline CFD files ............................................................... 123
Creating meanline LAB files from CFD results ...................................... 125
Linking AxCent designs to MAX-PAC ................................................... 127
Introduction: Updating meanline information
By linking an AxCent design to a meanline design, you can apply geometric changes that you make
in AxCent to the meanline file.Once this link is established, you can then update the geometry in the
meanline file.
The information that is transferred between AxCent and the meanline program depends on whether
you are working with an axial or radial design.
Linked Radial designs

When you update radial meanline files with AxCent results, the following information is transferred
back to the radial meanline (.GEO) file in COMPAL, FANPAL, PUMPAL, or RITAL:
 Inducer geometry – Hub radius, tip radius, hub blade angle, RMS blade angle, tip blade
angle, inducer setback length (LEN1) and angle (PHI1), thickness, taper ratio, and blade
number.
 Impeller exit geometry – Radius, blade angle, tip depth, thickness, and blade number.
 Diffuser geometry – Inlet radius, inlet depth, exit radius, exit depth. Geometrical
parameters for each diffuser type are also preferred. Each segment after the impeller in
AxCent is matched to the corresponding diffuser in the meanline program.
 Calculated parameters – You select which of the following parameter values to transfer
between AxCent and the meanline program in the Link to Meanline dialog box. (To learn
about the dialog box, see "Link to Meanline Program dialog box" on page 303..) The
parameter values are transferred when you choose the Update Meanline command.
 Secondary zone parameters (these are transferred to and from the meanline program)
 AK (meridional velocity ratio), fluid dynamic inlet blockage, and front leakage (these
are transferred from AxCent to the meanline program)
 Axial thrust parameters (these are transferred from the meanline program to AxCent)
118 Chapter 4: Creating and Linking to Meanline Designs Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.
Linking AxCent designs to meanline designs
To link to a meanline design

1 In AxCent, open the design that you want to link to a meanline file.
2 From the Agile menu, choose Meanline – Link to.
The Link to Meanline program dialog box appears.
For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, see "Link to Meanline Program dialog box" on
page 303.
The dialog box title includes the name of the meanline program that corresponds to the type of ma-
chine in your design. For example, if your design is a radial compressor design, the name of the di-
alog box is “Link to Compal” or if an axial compressor design, then "Link to Axial."
3 In the Meanline file name box, specify the location and name of the meanline file to which you want
to link. Click the Browse button to choose the file. (If a link was established previously, the path and
name of the linked files appears in the Meanline file box).
4 To create the link between the current AxCent design and the specified meanline program file, select
the Enable link to meanline check box.
5 For radial designs, select the parameters that you want to be updated when the AxCent or meanline
file changes.
6 Click OK.
You can now make changes to your AxCent design and then, when you are ready, apply those chang-
es to the linked meanline file. For more information about applying changes to a linked meanline
file, see "Updating meanline designs with AxCent information" on page 120.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Linking AxCent designs to meanline designs 119
Updating meanline designs with AxCent information
After you have established a link between an AxCent design and a meanline design,you can update
the meanline design with changes you have made to the design geometry in AxCent (you can also
transfer some meanline updates to the AxCent design).
For a list of the information that you can transfer between the meanline and AxCent files, see "Link-
ing AxCent designs to meanline designs" on page 119.
For radial designs, you can also update a linked meanline file with the results of a CFD run.
Note: Before you update your meanline information, make sure the link is established to
the appropriate meanline file. For more information, see "Linking AxCent designs to
meanline designs" on page 119.
To update a meanline design with AxCent information

 From the Agile menu, choose Meanline – Update.
The meanline RADIAL program launches and AxCent applies the changes to the meanline file that
you specified in the Link to Meanline Program dialog box.
You can keep the meanline design open as you continue to make adjustments to your AxCent design.
To update a meanline design with CFD results (radial designs only)

1 From the Agile menu, choose Meanline – Update with CFD.
Note: If this command is not available, first choose Meanline– Update from the Agile
menu.
The Select CFD Run dialog box appears.
To learn about the dialog box, see "Select CFD Run dialog box" on page 334.
2 Select the CFD run you want to use.
3 Click OK.
AxCent uses the measurements of the flow field to update your meanline settings.
Introduction: Creating meanline files from AxCent designs
In AxCent, you can create different types of meanline files depending on your goals, the type of de-
sign you are working with, and the type of information you want to extract from your AxCent (.DES)
file.
 To create a meanline file that contains layout and geometry information based on
your radial or axial AxCent file, create a standard meanline file. For more information,
see Creating meanline files.
 To create a file that contains flow data from a CFD run, which you can use to create a
meanline file, create a CFD file. This file contains more CFD data than a LAB file
(below), and therefore, you won't need to specify the secondary mass flow and deviation
in the meanline program. This file only provides data for the impeller. Data from station
5 to station 8 are not included. This option is available for radial designs only. For more
information, see "Creating meanline CFD files" on page 123.
 To create a file based on CFD data that does not contain secondary mass flow and
deviation so you have the option of specifying these values in the meanline design,
create a LAB file. This file also does not contain properties at IGV locations (station 07
and 08), diffuser traverse, and exit elements (station 6, 7, and 8). This option is available
for radial designs only. For more information, see "Creating meanline LAB files from
CFD results" on page 125.
Note that creating different types of meanline files from AxCent isn't the same as linking your Ax-
Cent design to a meanline file and updating particular parameters.
Creating meanline files that contain different types of CFD data from AxCent is also helpful when
you want to perform data reduction with the meanline file depending on your goals. For more infor-
mation, refer to the “Overview: Data reduction with CFD” topic in Radial Help, available in COM-
PAL, FANPAL, and PUMPAL.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction: Creating meanline files from AxCent designs 121
Creating meanline files from AxCent designs
You can create a new meanline () file based on your AxCent design (.DES) file. The new meanline
file includes the layout and geometry from your AxCent file.
Note: Creating a meanline file from AxCent is different from linking an AxCent design to
a meanline file for the purpose of updating the meanline design with changes made
in AxCent. For more information, see "Linking AxCent designs to meanline designs"
on page 119.
Note: Creating a meanline file does not automatically use the CFD results to update your
meanline settings. It just transfers layout and geometry information. This is because
you may have multiple CFD runs and it is not obvious to AxCent which one should
be used. You need to explicitly select the CFD run that you want to use to update the
meanline file (using the Update Meanline with CFD command).
To create a meanline file from an AxCent design

1 In AxCent, open the design that you want to use to create a meanline file.
2 From the Agile menu, choose Meanline – Create New File.
The Create Meanline File dialog box appears.
3 Select the COMPAL file (.GEO) option to create a meanline design in COMPAL (for radial
compressors).
4 Click OK.
5 Specify the name and location for the new file.
6 Click Save. A new meanline file is created.
Creating meanline CFD files
In AxCent, you can create a meanline CFD file that contains flow data from a CFD run, which you
can use to create a meanline file. AxCent generates the file based on results compiled from a CFD
calculation. This file can then be imported into your meanline program for data reduction purposes.
This CFD file contains more CFD data than the LAB file; therefore, you do not need to specify the
secondary mass flow and deviation in the meanline file. This file only provides data for the impeller.
Data from station 5 to station 8 are not included.
When you use this procedure, AxCent extracts the following information for the CFD file that it cre-
ates:
 Mass flow (m): Mass flow rate at each cell of the streamwise grid planes "rotor TE" and
"rotor TE – 1".
 P1T: Mass averaged static pressure in each cell at the streamwise grid plane "rotor LE".
 P2: Mass averaged static pressure in each cell at streamwise grid planes "rotor TE" and
"rotorTE –1".
 TCOLL: Mass averaged total temperature in each cell at the streamwise grid plane "rotor
TE".
 P02relative: Mass averaged relative total pressure in each cell at stream wise grid planes
"rotor TE" and "rotorTE –1".
 Cm: Mass averaged absolute meridional velocity in each cell at stream wise grid planes
 Ct: Mass averaged absolute tangential velocity in each cell at streamwise grid planes
 Beta: Relative flow angle at each cell of the streamwise grid planes "rotor TE" and "rotor
TE – 1".
 : T-T efficiency at each cell of the streamwise grid planes "rotor TE" and "rotor TE –
1".
Note: The *.CFD file will only provide data for the impeller. Data from station 5 to station
8 are not included in the *.CFD file.
To learn more about how this information is interpreted in the meanline program, refer to the "Over-
view: Data reduction with CFD" topic in Radial Help from the meanline program.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Creating meanline CFD files 123
To create a meanline CFD file
1 Run a CFD calculation.
2 From the Agile menu, choose Meanline – Create with CFD.
3 Select the run from which you want to create the meanline file.
4 Click OK.
A Save As dialog box appears, with the Meanline CFD file (*.CFD) already specified in the Save
as type box.
5 Navigate to a location to save the file, and then type the name of the meanline CFD file in the File
name box.
6 Click Save.
Creating meanline LAB files from CFD results
In AxCent, you can create a meanline LAB file based on CFD data. The LAB file can then be used
in your meanline program for data reduction purposes.
The LAB file does not contain secondary mass flow and deviation; therefore, you have the option of
specifying these values in the meanline design. This file also doesn’t contain properties at IGV lo-
cations (station 07 and 08), diffuser traverse, and exit elements (station 6, 7, and 8).
Note: AxCent creates LAB files for a single flow point only.
When you use this procedure, AxCent extracts the following CFD information for the LAB file it
creates:
 Mass flow (m): Sum of mass flow in each grid cell on the first grid plane normal to
streamwise direction.
 P00 (inlet total pressure): Mass averaged P0 in each grid cell on the first grid plane
normal to streamwise direction.
 T00 (inlet total temperature): Mass averaged T0 in each grid cell on the first grid plane
normal to streamwise direction.
 P1T (impeller tip static pressure): Mass averaged P in each cell on the shroud line of the
rotor leading edge grid plane.
 P2 (impeller exit static pressure): Mass averaged P in each grid cell on the "rotor TE +
1" grid plane. The input here is pressure at RMS location, not at the tip.
 P5 (diffuser exit static pressure): Mass averaged P in each grid cell on the exit plane.
 TCOLL (exit total temperature): Mass averaged T00 in each grid cell on the exit plane.
 Power (for pump only):
 Power = m * P0/(Rho * h),
 m = Average mass flow at grid planes "rotor TE" and "rotor TE + 1".
 P0 = Mass averaged absolute total pressure difference between "rotor TE" plane and
"rotor LE" plane.
 Rho = Average density at planes "rotor TE" and "rotor TE + 1". iv. = Averaged
bulk efficiency at planes "rotor TE" and "rotor TE + 1".
To learn more about how this information is interpreted in the meanline program, refer to the "Over-
view: Data reduction with CFD" topic in Radial Help from the meanline program.
Note: To use this option, you must have an active CFD solution open in AxCent.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Creating meanline LAB files from CFD results 125
To create a meanline LAB file from CFD results
1 Run a CFD calculation.
2 From the Agile menu, choose Meanline – Create with LAB File.
3 From the drop-down list, select the run from which you want to create the meanline LAB file.
4 Click OK.
A Save As dialog box appears, with the Meanline LAB file (*.LAB) already specified in the Save
as type box.
5 Navigate to a location to save the file, and then type the name of the meanline LAB file in the File
name box.
6 Click Save.
The units of the LAB file are the same units that are used in the AxCent case. Therefore, make sure
that these units are compatible with your meanline design when loading the LAB file.
Note: This type of LAB file will not contain properties at IGV locations (station 07 and 08),
diffuser traverse, and exit elements (station 6,7 and 8).
Linking AxCent designs to MAX-PAC
Use this procedure to link an open AxCent design to the MAX-PAC program.
To link to a MAX-PAC file

1 In AxCent, open the design that you want to link to the MAX-PAC program.
2 From the Agile menu, choose CAM – Link to.
The Link to MAX-PAC dialog box appears.
3 In this dialog box, specify the location and name of the MAX-PAC file (*.max) to which you want
to link the open AxCent file.
4 Click Browse to choose the file.
(If a link was established previously, the path and name of the linked files appear in the file box).
Note: When browsing for an MAX-PAC file, be sure to select the MAX-PAC file (*.max)
option in the dialog box.
5 Click OK.
The MAX-PAC program opens, and the case appears in the MAX-PAC 3D model window.
6 After you change your AxCent design, choose the means by which to update the MAX-PAC file
from the items on the CAM Agile menu.
 Update – Update the MAX-PAC file manually after you have edited the AxCent file.
Choose this option each time you want apply you changes to MAX-PAC.
 Update always – Automatically update the MAX-PAC file upon changing the AxCent
file.
7 Continue to edit the design in AxCent, and to update the linked file in MAX-PAC.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Linking AxCent designs to MAX-PAC 127
Chapter 5: Performing Streamline Curvature
Calculations

Introduction to streamline curvature .................................................. 130
Viewing rapid loading analyses .......................................................... 131
Setting rapid loading parameters ....................................................... 133
Introduction to MST analyses ............................................................ 136
Performing MST analyses .................................................................. 137
Restarting rapid loading analyses ....................................................... 140
Introduction to streamline curvature
AxCent provides two methods for calculating the fluid dynamic loading of your design:
 Rapid Loading (or SST, for single-streamtube) analysis
 MST (multi-streamtube) analysis
Both approaches are fundamentally inviscid, although both permit an overall loss to be imposed on
the solution as an alternative to a two-zone model. They are also quasi-three-dimensional in the
sense that they use assumptions of linear velocity variation across the passage in order to calculate
the flow fields on the blade surfaces.
Note: Streamline curvature calculations are for subsonic flow only. They will not run for
high-speed, high power density machines.
Rapid Loading and MST do not replace viscous CFD (Computational Fluid Dynamics) analysis;
these analyses are used for analyzing the load on the blade and the flow distribution from hub to
shroud. They are an important step towards CFD analysis and can be used to develop a design to the
point where CFD can be used efficiently for the final refinements.
130 Chapter 5: Performing Streamline Curvature Calculations Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.
Viewing rapid loading analyses
Rapid loading (also called single-streamtube, or SST) analysis is based on a single streamline flow
analysis through the center of the passage. The calculation is extended out to the corners of the pas-
sage by assuming a linear velocity distribution hub-to-shroud and blade-to-blade.
In AxCent, the rapid loading analysis is recomputed automatically every time you change the geom-
etry, so that fluid dynamic results are available to provide you with instantaneous feedback.
The rapid loading calculation used in AxCent is a simplified form of quasi-3D inviscid flow analysis
through an impeller or stationary bladed segment, allowing for the inclusion of either a two-zone or
single-zone flow model consistent with the models in the Concepts NREC Meanline programs.
Note: Streamline curvature methods are less useful in general for axial machines than for
typical radial machines. If the incidence effect region and the deviation effect region
takes up the majority of the flow or even overlaps, then this region of ambiguity is
basically the whole passage. Radial machines tend to have longer and more confined
passages, so this error is less significant.
One should not regard the streamline curvature methods as exact. It is a design guide
for sufficiently confined (long passage) flows. No one can conclusively state exactly
which load limit is ideal or what distribution of loading is ideal. Only CFD can
quantify performance to that degree.
To help judge the aerodynamic quality of your blade design, select to view the Beta – Aero (F5)
Standard Screen:
These windows display the aerodynamic parameters on certain locations in the impeller, such as
shroud suction surface and hub mid-section.
 Beta Distribution – This window displays the blade angle (beta) distribution.
 Blade to Blade Loading – This window displays the blade-to-blade loading graph.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Viewing rapid loading analyses 131
 Relative/Absolute Mach Number – This window displays a graph that shows the ratio
between a velocity and the speed of sound in your design. Relative Mach Number is a
dimensionless variable that is defined as:
where
V = the speed of the flow
A = the local speed of sound within that fluid
 Pressure Coefficient – This window displays the pressure recovery coefficient at each
QO.
You can control the data that appears in any of these windows by right clicking in the window and
selecting Choose Data.
For compressors, take note of the lines that go into the yellow and red sections of the Blade to Blade
Loading and Pressure Coefficient plots. These sections represent excessive values for the variable
plotted on the vertical axis. Values in red are generally unacceptable and should be avoided. Values
in yellow represent lesser design problems, but should be avoided as much as possible.
Setting rapid loading parameters
Use the following procedure to run a rapid loading analysis.
To set rapid loading parameters

1 Open your design.
2 In the Contours window, select to view the impeller segment in your design.
3. From the Flow menu, choose Rapid Load Parameters.
or
Right-click the Contours window, and choose Rapid Loading Parameters from the shortcut menu
that appears.
The Rapid Loading Settings dialog box appears.
The name of the segment you selected appears at the top of the dialog box (“For Impeller”, in the
above example).
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Setting rapid loading parameters 133
4. In the Blade to blade calculations drop-down list box, select one of the following methods for
calculating rapid loading:
 Normal method – Select this option when you want to calculate normal to the blade
passage, which does not have data lines for pressure and suction surfaces start at the
same point (0%); however, the data lines along the middle of the passage do start at zero
and end at 100. Traditionally, rapid loading uses the normal method.
 Stanitz and Prian method – Select this option when you want to calculate loading in a
passage tangential direction.
Note: If you are running an MST analysis, MST uses the Stanitz and Prian method. If you
are running a rapid loading analysis, either one of these methods can provide
desirable results, depending on the type of case you are designing.
tan β
5. By default, RMS beta is calculated by linear interpolation of ----------- . To apply a precise RMS beta
R
calculation when you run the Rapid Loading solver, select the Precise RMS beta calculation check
box.
6. Click OK.
7. From the Flow menu, choose Run Rapid Loading.
AxCent runs your design through a rapid loading calculation.
As long as your solution is stable and the MST solution converges properly, there should be relative-
ly little sensitivity to the QO number or location.
8. To help judge the aerodynamic quality of your blade design, view any of the following parameter
windows:
 Relative-Absolute Velocities
 Blade-to-Blade Loading
 Pressure Coefficient
These windows display the aerodynamic parameters on certain locations in the impeller, such as
shroud suction surface and hub mid-section. You can control the data that appears in any of these
windows by right clicking in the window and selecting Choose Data.
Take note of the lines that go into the yellow and red sections of the plots. These sections represent
excessive values for the variable plotted on the vertical axis. Values in red are generally unacceptable
and should be avoided. Values in yellow represent lesser design problems, but should be avoided as
much as possible.
Note: Each time you adjust the impeller blade geometry, the rapid loading analysis is
automatically updated each time a change is made; therefore, manually choosing Run
Rapid Loading from the Flow menu each time you make an adjustment to your
design is not required.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Setting rapid loading parameters 135
Introduction to MST analyses
MST analysis is based on a quasi-three dimensional flow analysis with a streamline curvature meth-
od, used to determine the velocity distribution from hub to shroud and linearized blade-to-blade
calculations.
The MST calculation is a pure streamline curvature technique that solves a velocity gradient equa-
tion along quasi-orthogonals. Important first and second streamwise derivative information is ob-
tained from curve fits of approximate streamline locations. These approximations are refined with
subsequent iterations according to various damping and stability criteria. The method is known to
be comparatively stable, fast, and unique in its resulting calculations.
MST analysis breaks up the passage into a user-specified number of streamlines from hub to shroud.
AxCent typically uses between 7 and 11 streamlines, but it is possible to go even higher (although
the calculations will take longer to process). Theoretically, the MST method is a more accurate cal-
culation than the rapid loading method, although, for many designs, both the rapid loading and MST
methods produce quite similar results.
By performing an MST calculation before any CFD analysis, you can make the development of your
radial design more productive after you observe some of the following results:
 Obtain a more accurate distribution of incidence at a blade row inlet, particular for the
rotor inlet.
 Find significantly different incidence distributions than those originally conceived when
the design was made, where there are significant and abrupt curvature changes at the
inlet.
 View the continuous distribution of various parameters throughout the entire stage with
some certainty, such as the meridional velocity distribution, swirl angle distribution, and
surface velocity distributions.
 Evaluate the meridional velocity throughout the stage to analyze the performance of the
overall stage while viewing all local effects as well.
 Observe momentum deficit frequently found along the (rotor) shroud surface as a result
of low momentum secondary flow that develops in the rotor.
Performing MST analyses
Use the following procedures to perform an MST analysis on your design.
Note: MST does not account for the position of splitters or volutes.
To specify MST parameters

1 Open the design for which you want to perform an MST analysis.
2 In the Contours window, select to view the impeller (or rotor) segment.
3. From the Flow menu, choose MST Parameters.
– or –
Right-click the Contours window, and choose MST Parameters from the shortcut menu that ap-
pears.
The MST Parameters dialog box appears.
For a description of this dialog box, see "Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box" on page
285.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Performing MST analyses 137

Note: When you first view the MST Parameters dialog box, it displays the standard MST
parameters (as shown above). To view the advanced parameters in addition to the
standard parameters, click the Advanced button. To view just the standard
parameters again, click the Standard button.
Tip: You can also access this dialog box just before running an MST calculation by clicking the
MST Parameters button in the Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box.
4. Specify the parameters for the MST calculation. To view all the options, click the Advanced button.
5. To specify blade-loading options, click the Blade Loading button.
The Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box appears, which allows you to set blade loading,
fluid property, and flow modeling options.
For a description of this dialog box, see “Copy a Segment dialog box” on page 271.
Note: MST can only use the Stanitz and Prian method.
6. When you are finished specifying blade loading options, click OK to close the Fluid Dynamic
Loading Parameters dialog box.
7. Click OK to close the MST Parameters dialog box.
With the parameters specified, you can run the MST solver.
To run the MST solver
1 From the Flow menu, choose Run MST Solver (or click on the toolbar).
– or –
Right-click the Contours window and choose MST from the shortcut menu.
The Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box appears.
For a description of this dialog box, see “Bring in Model dialog box” on page 241.
2. Specify the segments and their related settings in this dialog box.
3. To begin the MST run, click OK in the Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box.
AxCent runs the MST calculation and briefly displays the MST Iteration dialog box, displaying the
status of the calculation.
If there are any problems encountered with the calculation, AxCent displays error messages indicat-
ing where the problems are located.
Note: QOs listed in this dialog box include upstream QOs.
When the calculation is finished, AxCent displays the MST results in all open aerodynamic plot win-
dows.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Performing MST analyses 139

Restarting rapid loading analyses
When you run an MST analysis, the results of the analysis are “frozen” until you run MST again.
Any changes you make to the geometry are not reflected in the MST results until you rerun MST. In
addition, automatic rapid loading analyses are not run until you specify to restart rapid loading anal-
yses.
Use the following procedure to restart automatic rapid loading analyses after you have performed an
MST analysis.
To restart rapid loading analyses
1. Open the design for which you want to restart rapid loading analysis.
2. From the Flow menu, choose Run Rapid Loading. Rapid loading analysis will resume when you
next make changes to the design’s geometry.
Chapter 6: Generating Flow Simulations with
Pushbutton CFD

Introduction to performing CFD calculations ....................................... 142
Introduction to setting boundary and initial conditions ......................... 144
Setting inlet boundary conditions ....................................................... 145
Setting exit boundary conditions ........................................................ 146
Setting initial conditions .................................................................... 147
Selecting CFD solver settings ............................................................. 149
Running CFD calculations .................................................................. 151
Selecting CFD view options ................................................................ 154
Performing multi-block CFD calculations ............................................. 155
Introduction to working with injection and extraction slots ................... 157
Managing CFD runs .......................................................................... 161
Introduction to performing CFD calculations
Since Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) is an important part of the blade design process, Con-
cepts NREC offers Pushbutton CFD®, an optional program that you can use to quickly and easily
perform CFD analysis within AxCent.
Pushbutton CFD provides three-dimensional analysis and full Navier-Stokes CFD tools with rapid
run times that allows you to create a large number of design iterations during a short period of time.
Default values are supplied for the grid topology, boundary conditions, and solver settings.
AxCent has integrated three CFD solvers: one from Dawes, a Multi-block solver developed inde-
pendently by Concepts NREC, and a Denton CFD solver.
 Dawes solver – This solver calls different executables for different designs. For
example, btob3d.exe is called for single blade rows without splitters, and btob3dmr.exe
for multi-blade rows. The governing equations used in this solver are the Reynolds-
Averaged Navier-Stokes Equations (thin layer approximation) and the Baldwin-Lomax 0
Equation turbulence model.
Numerical aspects of the Dawes solver are
 Central difference with the blending of 2nd and 4th order artificial dissipations
 Local stepping and implicit smoothing
 1-layer multi-grid acceleration
For meshing, the Dawes solver provides only the sheared H-grid, leading and trailing
edge clustering, and limited grid size. This solver has a limited range in the J direction
that imposes restrictions on a number of stages. The Dawes solver supports the Full 3D
and Blade-to-Blade CFD solutions; however, it does not support the Throughflow CFD
solution.
 Multi-block solver – This is the default solver used for Pushbutton CFD calculations,
and is sometimes referred to as the PBPlus solver. The Multi-block solver is a hybrid
multi-block structured grid full Navier-Stokes solver. It is the preferred solver for all
types of machines, including turbines, compressors, and fans. It is capable of handling
any number of grid blocks and any number of cells per block. It includes low-speed
preconditioning technology developed by Merkle et al. It can deal with all flow regimes
(compressible, incompressible, and low speed).
The Multi-block solver has a central difference scheme as in the Dawes solver. The
Multi-block solver also provides an upwind scheme, AUSM, by Dr. Meng-Sing Liou.
First and third orders of accuracy are available. Smoother and more accurate solutions
can be obtained by using the upwind schemes, especially for low head (inches of water)
and low speed machines such as axial fans and radial blowers. The alternative scheme,
central differencing, is not recommended for very low Mach number flows. Conse-
quently, the upwind schemes are recommended for these low speed turbomachines.
142 Chapter 6: Generating Flow Simulations with Pushbutton CFD Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.
The governing equations used in this solver are the Reynolds-Averaged full Navier-Stokes and Low
Mach number pre-conditioning equations, and the Spalart-Allmaras 1-equation, k-epsilon 2-equa-
tion, k-omega 2-equation, and SST 2-equation turbulence models.
Numerical aspects of the Multi-block solver are
 3rd order upwinding scheme – AUSM
 The acceleration techniques remain
 Characteristic inlet boundary condition
For meshing, the Multi-block solver can be used to generate H-grids, O-grids, C-grids, and OH-
grids, and supports an unlimited grid size. This solver also supports all of the available CFD solu-
tions: Blade-to-Blade, Full 3D, and Throughflow.
CFD analyses are usually performed at the final stage of the design process, after you have run your
design through a streamtube analysis (rapid loading or MST for radial designs, and for axial designs,
Blade-to-Blade or Throughflow); however, running a streamtube analysis before running CFD is not
a requirement.
MST assists you in configuring the blade shape and the flow path contours to obtain a design that
comes within recommended loading limits for the blades. CFD can then confirm that there are no
regions of separated or reversed flow. If there are regions of adverse flow conditions, you can return
to the meanline analysis and make a design change, or revise the blade and flow path shapes in Ax-
Cent. You can then confirm the design improvement using MST and then CFD.
Note: Pushbutton CFD and AxCent both use the same fluid property library; therefore,
when you run Pushbutton CFD, it will use the same fluid properties as specified in
your AxCent design.
To review a detailed validation study on the single block CFD solver available in Pushbutton CFD,
refer to “Application and Validation of CFD in a Turbomachinery Design System,” by Mark Ander-
son, Fahua Gu, and Paul D. MacLeod.
The following sections provide procedures for using CFD with AxCent.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction to performing CFD calculations 143
Introduction to setting boundary and initial conditions
Boundary conditions define the inlet and exit flow conditions that determine the flow field along
with the passage geometry. The inlet boundary conditions are applied on the inlet plane of the CFD
domain, and the exit boundary conditions are applied on the exit plane. Initial conditions provide the
starting point for the iterative CFD calculation. Initial conditions do not affect the converged solu-
tion, but they affect the stability and the speed of convergence of the CFD run.
For designs with compressible flows, you specify the inlet total properties of the flow and the exit
static pressure. Changing the exit static pressure will lead to different flow rates.
For designs with incompressible flows, you specify the inlet velocity components. The exit static
pressure is used only to construct the radial pressure gradient using the simplified radial equilibrium
equation.
To initialize the flow properly, you also need to provide the static pressures at the leading and trailing
edges of each bladed segment in the design.
If your AxCent design was imported from COMPAL, PUMPAL, FANPAL, or RITAL, both inlet and
exit boundary conditions as well as these static pressures were properly imported from the meanline
program. If your AxCent design was created through CADFIT or some other approach, the boundary
conditions can be set properly by AxCent if the solver works properly; otherwise, you must specify
them for your design.
The following procedures describe how to set inlet boundary conditions, exit boundary conditions,
and initial conditions.
Setting inlet boundary conditions
To set inlet boundary conditions

1 Open the design for which you want to set inlet boundary conditions.
2. From the CFD menu, choose Boundary Conditions.
The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears and displays the Boundary Conditions tab.
The values on the Boundary Conditions tab reflect the default inlet and exit boundary conditions rep-
resented by the intermediate values as determined by the simplified analyses (Banig, Rapid Loading,
or MST solvers) for the range of segments included in the CFD run. AxCent provides default values
for the exit static pressure. For descriptions of the options available on this tab, see "Boundary Con-
ditions dialog box – Front Leakage tab" on page 237.
3. In the Source of inflow values box (in the “Inflow values” section), select the source from which
boundary conditions are imported.
If you select the AxCent option, you are finished setting inlet boundary conditions.
If you select the User-specified option, continue on to step 4 to continue setting inlet boundary con-
ditions.
4. Use the Interpolation method box to select the method to curve fit the inlet boundary conditions from
hub to shroud: Constant, Linear, or Spline. If the inlet is uniform and you want the inlet boundary
conditions to remain constant from hub to shroud, select Constant; the values you enter in the first
row of the table are used for all other rows.
5. Use the options that appear below the table to select how you want to specify momentum, energy,
and angle values in the table.
6. Specify the inlet values for each row.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Setting inlet boundary conditions 145
Setting exit boundary conditions
Use the “Exit values” section at the bottom of the Boundary Conditions tab (of the Boundary Con-
ditions dialog box) to set the exit boundary conditions.
To set exit boundary conditions

1 Open the design for which you want to set exit boundary conditions.
The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears and displays the Boundary Conditions tab.
Use the “Exit values” section of the Boundary Conditions tab to set the exit boundary conditions.
For descriptions of the options in this section, see "Boundary Conditions dialog box – Front Leakage
tab" on page 237.
3. Select the method you want to use for specifying exit conditions:
Specify exit pressure – Select this option to specify exit pressure in the “Exit values” section. If you
select this option, use the rest of the boxes in the “Exit values” section to specify the exit boundary
conditions. For descriptions of the options in this section, see "Boundary Conditions dialog box –
Front Leakage tab" on page 237.
Specify mass flow – Select this option to specify mass flow in the “Mass flow” section. Selecting
this option enforces mass flow at the exit. If you select this option, specify the mass flow in the Mass
flow box. You are finished specifying exit boundary conditions.
4. When you are finished setting exit boundary conditions, click OK.
You can now run a CFD calculation with the new exit boundary conditions.
Setting initial conditions
Use the following procedure to set initial conditions. For more information, see Overview: Setting
boundary and initial conditions.
Note: If you are specifying casing rotations, or any combination of rotating and stationary
hub and shroud, refer to the procedure for Specifying hub and shroud rotation.
To set initial conditions

1 Open the design for which you want to set initial boundary conditions.
The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears.
3. Click the Initialization tab. For descriptions of the options available on this tab, see "CADFIT dialog
box" on page 243.
Use the Initialization tab to specify initialization values for the CFD run.
The “Inflow conditions” section at the top of the tab indicates your selection in the Source of inflow
values box on the Boundary Conditions tab: Inflow values from AxCent or Inflow values are user-
specified.
Note: If the inflow values come from AxCent, they are imported from the Fluid Properties
tab of the Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box. If the design was imported
from a meanline design, the values on the Fluid Properties tab are imported along
with other design information from the meanline program. You can edit the values on
the Fluid Properties tab.
4. Use the table in the “Inflow conditions” section to specify each element of the inflow condition for
your design.
5. If you selected AxCent in the Source of pressure values box (under “Exit values” on the Boundary
Conditions tab) and you want to use a three-dimensional flow field, select the Use three-
dimensional flow field from AxCent check box under “Flow field initialization”, and then select
whether or not you want to use optimized results: Optimized (one-zone model) or Non-optimized
results.
6. If you selected User-specified in the Source of pressure values box (under “Exit values” on the
Boundary Conditions tab), you can have AxCent automatically calculate the initial pressure
conditions by selecting the method that you want to use (Linear or Logarithmic) and then clicking
the Recalculate button. This updates the values in the Static Pressure table.
7. If you selected User-specified in the Source of pressure values box (under “Exit values” on the
Boundary Conditions tab) and you did not select to use a pressure distribution method in the
previous step, use the table in the “Static Pressure” section to specify the static pressure for each
bladed segment. The options in this section become available when there is more than one bladed
segment in the CFD model. These values are used for initializing the flow field.
8. In the Pressure type drop-down list, select the method for initializing the pressure for the flow field.
9. If necessary, select options on the other tabs in the Boundary Conditions dialog box:
 Options tab – Use this tab to specify various inlet and exit boundary condition options
for the CFD run. Pushbutton CFD defaults to a subsonic inlet flow and a subsonic exit
flow situation. The “subsonic” flow speed is defined in the absolute frame of reference.
In turbomachinery flows, absolute supersonic inlet or exit flows are not often
encountered. For descriptions of the options on this tab, click the Help button (or press
F1) while viewing the tab.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Setting initial conditions 147

Note: The INMACH, Vx inlet, and Vr inlet parameters on the Options tab are not used by
the Multi-block solver. They are used by the Dawes solver.
 Front Leakage tab – Use this tab to specify the front leakage boundary conditions for a
shrouded (closed) pump wheel. Leakage is the return path for a fraction of the flow that
leaves the main flow passage at the extraction slot, which then goes through a passage
between the shroud outer wall and casing, and then returns to the main flow passage at
the injection slot.
Note: If you specify front leakage boundary conditions on this tab, you can use the options
in the “Leakage warnings” section of the Start Pushbutton CFD Run dialog box to
specify how you want front leakage warnings to be reported. For more information,
see Running CFD calculations.
10. When you are finished setting boundary and initial conditions, click OK.
You can now select the solver settings you want to use for the CFD run. For more information, see
"Selecting CFD solver settings" on page 149.
Selecting CFD solver settings
Before you run a CFD calculation, select the type of CFD solver that you want to use and any other
settings needed for the calculation.
To select CFD solver settings

1 Open the design for which you want to select CFD calculation settings.
2. From the CFD menu, choose Grid.
The Grid dialog box appears and displays the Topology tab. For descriptions of the options available
on this tab, see "Pressure/Suction Results dialog box" on page 353.
3. On the Topology tab, select the type of CFD solution you want to use in the Solution box (under
“Grid and solution type”):
 Full 3D – Select this option to run a full 3D CFD solution.

 Blade-to-blade – Select this option to run a blade-to-blade CFD solution. When you
select this option, the At ___% span box below the Solution box becomes available.
Specify a % span number between 0 and 100. For more information, see “Introduction to
performing CFD calculations” on page 142.
Note: This option is not recommended for radial blade designs.
 Throughflow – For axial designs, select this option to generate one grid slice in the
streamwise direction, oriented from hub to shroud. This option should be used for axial
designs only. It is not available for the O- or OH-type grid.
4. Click OK.
5. From the CFD menu, choose Solver Settings.
The Solver Settings dialog box appears. For descriptions of the options available in this dialog box,
see “Remove Mid-Span Geometry Definition dialog box” on page 358.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Selecting CFD solver settings 149
The solution type you selected in the Grid dialog box is displayed in the title bar of the Solver Set-
tings dialog box.
6. On the Solver tab, select the type of CFD solver that you want to use: Dawes, Multi-block, or
Denton. For descriptions of these solvers, see "Introduction to performing CFD calculations" on
page 142..
Depending on the type of solver you’ve chosen, different tabs in the dialog box appear:
 Options tab – Use this tab to select the options for wall treatment, turbulence models,
time step multiplier, artificial compressibility scaling factor, artificial viscosity
coefficients, matrix parameters, schemes, and solver enhancements. For descriptions of
each of the options on this tab, see "Solver Settings dialog box – Options tab" on page
379.
 Multigrid tab – If you chose the Multi-block solver, use this tab to set the multigrid
convergence acceleration technique. For descriptions of each of the options on this tab,
see "Solver Settings – Multigrid tab" on page 383.
 Convergence Options tab – If you chose the Dawes or Multi-block solver, use this tab to
specify options to automatically stop CFD runs. If any one of the criteria is met, the
CFD run stops automatically. This tab is not available if you have selected to use the
Denton solver.
 Multi-Block tab – If you chose the Multi-block solver, use this tab to specify settings for
the Multi-block solver. For descriptions of each of the options on this tab, see
"Performing multi-block CFD calculations" on page 155.
 Loss Model tab – If you chose to use the Throughflow solution (on the Topology tab of
the Grid dialog box), use this tab to specify the loss and deviation models of axial
compressors and axial turbines with compressible fluids.
The following table indicates which tabs in the Solver Settings dialog box are available for each
solver.
Dawes Solver Multi-Block Solver Denton Solver
Solver tab
Options tab Not available
Convergence Options Not available

tab
Multigrid tab Not available Not available
Multiblock tab Not available Not available
Denton Options tab Not available Not available
Loss Model tab Not available Available for the Not available
Throughflow CFD
solution type only
7. When you are finished setting CFD options, click OK.
You are now ready to run a CFD calculation.
Running CFD calculations
When you are ready to analyze the computational fluid dynamics of your design, you can easily run
your design through a CFD solution in AxCent using Pushbutton CFD.
When you run the CFD solution, all the files for a given run are put in a sub-directory within the
CFD directory. Each subdirectory is named with the title of the CFD run.
Note: The location of the CFD directory is specified on the General tab of the AxCent
program’s Preferences dialog box.
You can choose to run a single CFD calculation on its own, or, if you want to run more than one CFD
solution at a time, you can run a batch of runs containing different geometry and settings. When you
run a batch, you can specify the time the batches of runs are to begin. Each job in the batch is started
sequentially and completed before the next job in the queue is run. This option enables you to run
batches of CFD runs in the evening after work or on the weekends.
After a batch run completes successfully, normal post processing is performed (including computa-
tion of the CFD Results Variables), but no interactive CFD view windows are opened. Batch runs
(and saved runs from previous interactive sessions) can be post- processed further by loading the
data from the CFD Results dialog box.
If you are not using a batch run, the solver is launched as soon as you set your CFD parameters and
click OK. Upon completion of the CFD run, the results file is post-processed to compute the desired
CFD Results Variables (see the CFD Runs command on the CFD menu). If it was not a batch run,
the data is loaded and 2D and 3D CFD View windows are displayed for review and analysis of the
solution.
To run CFD calculations

1 Open the design for which you want to run CFD calculations.
2. If you haven’t done so already, specify your CFD solver settings. For more information, see
"Selecting CFD solver settings" on page 149..
3. From the CFD menu, choose Start CFD.
The Start Pushbutton CFD Run dialog box appears and displays the Start CFD tab.
4. On the Start CFD tab, select the CFD parameters that you want to use.
For descriptions of the options on this tab, see "Start Full 3D PBPlus (AxCent grid) solver dialog
box – Start CFD tab" on page 399.
5. If you want to create a performance map for this CFD run, click the Map Generate Map tab;
otherwise, skip to the step 7.
For descriptions of the options on this tab, see "Start Full 3D PBPlus (AxCent grid) dialog box –
Generate Map tab" on page 403.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Running CFD calculations 151

To generate a performance map based upon a sequence of CFD runs with the same geometry, varying
in speed, flow, or pressure, select the Generate Map option. The following picture shows a typical
performance map for a radial centrifugal compressor.
7. When you have finished selecting CFD options, click OK.

Pushbutton CFD begins to run the CFD solution. While the solution is being calculated, a command
window appears that displays the status of the calculation.
If you are not running a CFD batch, the CFD results appear in four AxCent graph windows: A 3D
CFD window, a 2D Relative Mach Number window, a Residuals Plot (RMS / % Mass Error) win-
dow, and Geometry (Contours) window.
8. View the results for further analysis. For more information, see "Managing CFD runs" on page 161.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Running CFD calculations 153

Selecting CFD view options
You can select different parameters and options for viewing CFD information in CFD grid, 2D, and
3D windows. This is helpful when you need to view different CFD parameters for various sections
of your design. For example, you can plot the averaged CFD solution by meridional location, or view
colored CFD data in a 2D window.
To select CFD view options

1 Display one of the following types of CFD windows:
 3D CFD Grid window (from the CFD menu, choose View CFD Grid)
 2D CFD window (from the CFD menu, choose New 3D CFD View)
 3D CFD window (from the CFD menu, choose New 3D CFD View)
2. From the CFD menu, choose CFD View Options.
– or –
Right-click the CFD window and select CFD View Options from the shortcut menu that appears.
The CFD View Options dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to specify various ways to
view the CFD information. For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, see "Boundary Condi-
tions dialog box" on page 224.
3. Select the view options that you want to use.
4. Click Apply to view the changes in the CFD window without closing the dialog box; click OK to
apply the changes and close the dialog box.
Performing multi-block CFD calculations
Use the following procedure to run a CFD multi-block calculation.
To perform a multi-block CFD calculation

1 Open the design for which you want to run multi-block calculations.
2. From the CFD menu, choose Solver Settings.
The Solver Settings dialog box appears and displays the Solver tab. For descriptions of the options
in this dialog box, see "Append the New Segment to the Design dialog box" on page 205.
3. On the Solver tab, select Multi-block in the Solver box.
Note: If you have already selected to generate an O- or OH-grid in the Grid dialog box (on
the Topology tab, the Multi-block solver is automatically selected already; you
cannot change it (as shown in the above example). Only the Multi-block solver
supports O- and OH-grids.
4. Click the Multiblock tab.
For descriptions of the options on this tab, see "Solver Settings dialog box – Multi-block tab" on
page 387.
5. Under “Multiblock Scheme”, select the type of scheme to use with the Multi-block solver:
 Central Differencing
 3rd Order Upwinding
 1st Order Upwinding
6. To use Dr. Merkle's precondition matrix to artificially adjust the characteristic wave speeds of the
Euler equation system, select the Merkle preconditioning check box.
This option is recommended when the flow Mach number is low. For low Mach number flows, the
characteristic wave speeds are significantly different. If preconditioning is not activated, the CFD
run will show poor convergence and inaccurate solutions.
Note: For high-speed machines, it is recommended that you do not select the Merkle
preconditioning check box.
7. If you selected the Merkle preconditioning check box, use the Cut off Mach number box to
specify the cut off Mach number to use when the flow Mach number is low.
Cut off Mach numbers are used to avoid singularity, and the average Mach number of the flow field
should be a good choice. Smaller cut off Mach numbers give faster convergence, but can affect the
stability of the solution.
8. In the Solver precision box, select either the Single-precision or the Double-precision solver. The
double-precision solver takes more computer memory (RAM) to run than the single-precision
solver, but almost the same amount of CPU time. The double-precision option is recommended for
fans because the flow variables change only in the last one or two digits when single precision is
used.
9. In the Intermediate solutions every __ iterations box, specify how often the solver should write out
solutions to a file while the solver is executing. The purposes for this function are:
 To have a solution in case the CFD solver diverges.
 To view the flow field before the CFD run is done if your computer has two CPUs or
dual cores.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Performing multi-block CFD calculations 155
10. In the Update viscous stress every __ iterations box, specify how often to update the viscous stress;
otherwise, the solver updates the viscous stress every 10 Runge-Kutta iterations. (The default of 1 is
recommended.)
11. If you have chosen to run a throughflow solution and want to specify the percentage of iterations
after which to match the calculated loss with the model loss, type the percentage value in the Match
Throughflow Solver Loss Every ___ Iterations box. This option is an iterative method to remove the
numerical loss in the time marching solution of the Euler equation.
12. In the “Grid generalization and initialization” section, select the option that you want to use:
 Use Dawes style initialization by AxCent
 Use Optimized initialization (one zone model, tangential loading)
 Use Non-optimized AxCent results
13. When you are finished specifying solver settings, click OK.
Compressible flow CFD solvers provide solutions at the specified static pressure on the exit bound-
aries. The solver then ultimately determines the mass flow of the solution.
For radial designs, when you run rapid loading or MST analyses, the pressure information is speci-
fied for the boundary conditions. If you have not run rapid loading or MST for the design, you need
to specify the pressure for the boundary conditions.
For more information about setting boundary conditions, see "Introduction to setting boundary and
initial conditions" on page 144.
14. From the CFD menu, choose Start CFD (or click on the toolbar).
The Start Pushbutton CFD Run dialog box appears.
15. In the Maximum iterations box, specify the maximum iterations that you want to perform for the
CFD run. The Multi-block solver does not support design mass flow convergence. Solutions of
different mass flows are obtained by manually changing the back pressures.
16. Specify any other settings that you want to use for the CFD run. For information about the options
on each tab, see "Blade Stagger Angle dialog box" on page 220.
17. Click OK.
Pushbutton CFD begins to run the CFD solution and displays a command window, which shows the
calculation iterations.
When CFD has reached the final iteration, the window automatically closes, and AxCent displays
the results in four standard CFD windows:
 3D window
 Residual Plots window
 Meridional Velocities window
 Contours window
Introduction to working with injection and extraction slots
Injection slots allow you to introduce the same fluid as the primary flow at arbitrary points on the
passage’s wall surfaces. Extraction slots allow you to take the fluid out of the primary flow passage
at arbitrary points on the passage’s wall surface.
When you create an injection slot, you specify the amount of mass flow to be injected and the tem-
perature of the injected fluid. The flow goes into the primary flow passage with zero velocity relative
to the wall and at the temperature you specify. For each injection slot, we assume that there is no
streamwise variation in the temperature of the injected flow, and the mass is injected streamwise-
uniformly. For the slots on blade surfaces, radial variations in both temperature and mass flow rate
are allowed. For the slots on hub and shroud, both temperature and flow rate of the injected flow are
assumed to be circumferentially uniform. The enthalpy of the injected flow is calculated from the
specified temperature and the static pressure at the injection slot.
When you create an extraction slot, you specify the amount of mass flow to be extracted. An ex-
traction is specified as a negative mass flow. The flow will go out with the same velocity and enthal-
py as the primary flow at the extraction slot.
The geometric boundary of an injection or extraction slot is defined in terms of relative meridional
distance, and is internally converted to the closest QO locations. Slots on the pressure or suction
sides are further specified by radial spans. Hub and tip slots can be further specified by the pitchwise
spans, but currently it is assumed that the injected flow for an injection slot goes into the primary
flow uniformly in a 360 degree annulus.
You can create injection and extraction slots for both three-dimensional CFD and the Throughflow
solver. You can create any number of injection or extraction slots on a blade, hub, or shroud surface;
however, you cannot add slots on inlet or outlet faces.
The following procedures describe how to add, copy, modify, and delete injection and extraction
slots.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction to working with injection and extraction slots 157
Adding injection and extraction slots
Use the following procedure to add one or more injection or extraction slots to your design.
To add an injection or extraction slot

1 Open the design to which you want to add injection or extraction slots.
(The images shown below are from the Compex3 win.des example case.)
2. From the Geometry menu, choose Injection/Extraction Slots.

The Slot Selection dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Add Multiple User Defined Sections dialog box" on page 203.
This dialog box allows you to add, copy, modify, and delete injection and extraction slots in your
design. It lists all slots you have already added to this design, if any.
3. Click the Create button.
A new row for the slot appears with the parameters requiring specification in columns.
This dialog box allows you to specify the location (wall and segment) and size of the injection or
extraction slot.
4. Specify the geometric parameters for the injection or extraction slot.
5. When you are finished adding injection and extraction slots, click OK in the Slot Selection dialog
box.
6. When you are finished, click OK.
7. To add other injection or extraction slots, repeat steps 3–6.
AxCent displays the slots in the Contours window.
Copying injection and extraction slots

Use this procedure to create a new injection or extraction slot by copying another injection or ex-
traction slot in your design.
To copy an injection or extraction slot

1 Open the design that contains the injection slot that you want to copy.
For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, see "Add Multiple User Defined Sections dialog
box" on page 203..
3. In the list of slots, select the row for the slot that you want to copy.
4. Click the Copy button.
The copy appears below the slot selected for copying.
Note: You cannot have two slots co-existing in the same location.
5. Click Yes.
6. Specify the geometric parameters for the new slot.
7. When you are finished copying slots, click OK.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction to working with injection and extraction slots 159
Modifying injection and extraction slots
Use the following procedure to modify the geometric or distribution information for an injection or
extraction slot in your design.
To modify an injection or extraction slot

1 Open the design for which you want to modify injection or extraction slots.
3. Edit the slot features in the Slot Selection table.
4. When you are finished modifying the slots, click OK.
Deleting injection and extraction slots
To delete an injection or extraction slot
1. Open the design from which you want to delete injection slots.
3. Select the row for the slot you want to delete from the Slot Selection table (the row color changes
from blue to brown).
4. Click the Delete Slot button.
AxCent displays a message asking you whether you want to delete the slot.
5. Click OK.
The slot is deleted from the table.
6. To delete another slot, repeat steps 3 – 5.
7. When you are finished deleting slots, click OK in the dialog box.
Activating and deactivating injection and extraction slots

Use this procedure to select the injection and extraction slots to be included in the CFD solution.
Activated slots are included in the solution (if they fall within its bounds) while deactivated slots are
disregarded.
All of the injection and extraction slots that you create are automatically active unless you explicitly
select to deactivate them with this procedure. The slots that you deactivate remain inactive until you
choose to activate them again.
To activate or deactivate injection and extraction slots
1. Open the design for which you want to activate or deactivate injection and extraction slots.
3. Select the slots you want to activate or deactivate:
4. When you are finished selecting slots to activate or deactivate, click OK.
Managing CFD runs
After you have run more than one CFD run, use the following procedure to choose which CFD in-
formation to view in AxCent.
To manage CFD runs

1 Open the design for which you want to view or manage CFD information.
2. From the CFD menu, choose CFD Runs.
Note: This command is available only after you have run CFD or when you are viewing a
CFD grid.
The CFD Results dialog box appears.
This dialog box displays the status of the CFD runs for the current design. The variables used in the
CFD solution are listed in a table.
You can keep this dialog box open when you perform CFD runs as well, and control the runs using
the buttons provided.
For a list of the table parameters and description of the buttons, see "CFD Results dialog box" on
page 244..
3. To perform an action on a listed CFD run, select the run by clicking its name in the Parameter row.
4. Use the buttons at the bottom of the dialog box to manage your CFD runs (note that some buttons
affect the selected CFD run).
5. When you are finished managing CFD runs, click the Close button to close the dialog box.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Managing CFD runs 161

Chapter 7: Generating CFD Grids

Introduction to AxCent CFD grids ....................................................... 164
Generating H-Classic CFD grids .......................................................... 167
Generating C-type CFD grids ............................................................. 174
Generating OH- and OH-C-type CFD grids .......................................... 178
Viewing the CFD grid ........................................................................ 179
Previewing grid settings .................................................................... 180
Introduction to AxCent CFD grids
AxCent provides the following CFD grid generation options:
 The H-Classic grid is a sheared grid (before the smoothing option is used), with blade-
to-blade grid lines of a constant Z and R. It is the preferred grid type for radial machines
if a C-type grid (whether OC or OH-C) fails to run. The advantages of the classic H grid
are that the grid almost always runs, and runs faster, being much smaller than a default O
or OH grid.The primary advantage of using topologies other than the H-Classic is their
direct use of blade NURBS, which allows for the precise replication of CFD blade
geometry.
For more information, see "Generating H-Classic CFD grids" on page 167.
 C-type grids, or OC and OH-C grids, are variations of the O-type grid, in which the O-
block is not generated beyond the open leading or trailing edge. Instead of the O-block
encircling the blade, the C-block surrounds the blade only up to the open leading or
trailing edge. These C-type grid variations are the preferred grid types for radial
machines. They are designed to capture open leading and trailing edges.
For more information, see "Generating C-type CFD grids" on page 174.
The H- and C-grids are the preferred grid types for radial machines, while the O- and OH-type grids
are generally preferred for axial machines. You can, however, use whichever grid type meets the
needs of your particular design. Since the focus of this Guide is radial machine design, this chapter
describes the properties and generation of the H- and C-type grids. For detailed information about
O- and OH-grids, refer to the “Generating CFD grids” chapter in AxCent Help.
Vaneless space
If you are working with a radial design and the design does not already include a vaneless space at
the start or end (or both) and the vaneless space is required for CFD to run, AxCent automatically
adds the needed extra segments when it generates the grid for the design. AxCent uses the following
specifications to add the segments:
 The inlet extension segment is normally a constant-width extension, whose length equals
its width.
 The exit extension segment is 2.5 times its inlet width, and tapers from the full width to
65% of its width.
Note that these automatically added extensions do not already work or provide an ideal grid. You
can add explicit extensions to the design to control the shape in detail to obtain more realistic results.
164 Chapter 7: Generating CFD Grids Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

 Constant Theta – With this option, the inlet extension region has the same angle as the
LE, while the exit extension has the same angle as the TE. Constant Theta is the default
option and is usually sufficient for bladed and un-bladed segments.The following image
shows the grid lines for the Constant Theta option at the inlet.
 The following image shows the grid lines for the Constant Theta option at the exit. Note
the lines of constant in the grid.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction to AxCent CFD grids 165
 Constant R*Theta – With this option, the RTheta values of the inlet and exit extension
region grid lines are consistent and are the same as those for the leading edge and
trailing edge.

Generating H-Classic CFD grids
The H-Classic grid is a sheared grid (before the smoothing option is used), with blade-to-blade grid
lines of a constant Z and R. It is the preferred grid type for radial machines if a C-type grid (whether
OC or OH-C) fails to run. The advantages of the classic H grid are that the grid almost always runs,
and runs faster, being much smaller than a default O or OH grid.The primary advantage of using to-
pologies other than the H-Classic is their direct use of blade NURBS, which allows for the precise
replication of CFD blade geometry.
Because of this limitation, both the leading and trailing edges have cusps (and, thus, are wedge-
shaped). Tip clearance can be introduced into the H-type grid while the blade tip is wedged.
The sheared-H grid may generate non-physical entropy in regions with higher aspect ratio and skew
angle, especially around the leading and trailing edges. Consequently, using the H-type grid may sig-
nificantly reduce Pushbutton CFD accuracy.
Splitters can be adopted in the H grid. If you are using the Dawes solver, four cells are overlapped
in the pitchwise direction in the non-bladed region, and they go inside the splitter in the splitter re-
gion; there is no special treatment for splitters if you are using the Multiblock solver.
When you select to use an H-grid, AxCent provide default parameter values that should generate an
adequate grid for many designs; however, you should inspect the resulting grid for mesh quality. For
an H-type grid, there should be consistent grid spacing between the inlet extension and the impeller,
and between the impeller and the exit extension.
Note: Currently, smoothing elliptic grid generation options are not available for the H-type
grid.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Generating H-Classic CFD grids 167
To generate an H-Classic CFD grid type
1 Open the design for which you want to generate an H-Classic type CFD grid.
(The images shown below are from the comp_rad_Compex1 win.des example case.)
2 From the CFD menu, choose Grid.

The Grid dialog box appears and displays the Topology tab. For descriptions of the options in this
dialog box, see "Grid dialog box – Topology tab" on page 313.
Use the Topology tab to select the segments and type of surface grid that you want to generate.

3 Under "Segments" on the Topology tab, select the first and last segment to be included in H-grid
calculation.
4 If the blade sides come together in a sharp tip, select the Blunt edges at mid tip check box.If the
tip of a blade is blunt, a sharp approximation is made, as shown below.
If you do not select this check box, the sharp tip is made at the side of the blade that extends furthest.
Select this check box if it helps you create the best blade shape for your design. For example, se-
lecting this option can help you obtain a more accurate exit radius for a centrifugal wheel. To view
illustrations of the effects of using this option, see the "Mid tip example" topic in AxCent Help.
5 To maximize the geometric floating-point precision, select the Enhanced precision check box.
This is especially helpful for very small wheels. Clear this option to keep consistent with older runs.
Note: The Enhanced precision check box is available only if you are using the CFD Dawes
solver (which you select on the Solver tab of the Solver Settings dialog box).
6 In the Grid type box (in the "Solution" section), select H-Classic.
When you select the grid type, the "Row details" table on the right side of the dialog box displays
the required parameters to generate the type of grid you have selected and displays the default values
for each parameter. If the segments selected include more than one blade row, the table contains a
column for each row. The parameters you can specify for each row appear in the first column of the
table. AxCent determines default values for each cell. The parameters in the table differ depending
on the type of grid you selected to generate.
7 In the Solution box, select the type of CFD solution that you want to use. For descriptions of each
solution type, see "Grid dialog box – Topology tab" on page 313.
8 If you are using multiple grids, select Multiple grids and click Add >> to specify their number.

9 Make any necessary changes to the parameter values in the "Row details" table. For descriptions of
each parameter in this table, see "Grid dialog box – Topology tab" on page 313
If you are using multiple grids, click Setup to configure the multiple grids in the CFD Multiple
Grids Setup dialog box. (For a description of this dialog box, see "CFD Multiple Grids Setup" on
page 252
10 Click the Grid tab. For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, see "Grid dialog box – Grid
tab" on page 307
11 In the "Nodes" section, specify the number and spacing of grid nodes for the grid. For an H-grid, the
"Nodes" section allow you to specify the size of the grid. You can specify nodes for the Blade-to-
blade, Streamwise, and Hub-to-shroud.
The default grid size is 31 x 121 x 31.
For the Dawes solver (H-type grids only), the maximum size is 61 x 301 x 41 (I x J x K, where
I is the index in the blade-to-blade direction, J is the index in the streamwise direction, and K is the
index in the hub-to-shroud direction). This generates a grid that is large enough to analyze a single
blade row
For the Multi-block solver, there is neither a limitation in any direction nor on the total grid size.
Your computer memory and license put a limit on the maximum size.
12 To specify the node and spacing factor values per segment in the "Row details" table, select the Use
table check box and then type the values you want to use in the "Row details" table. For descriptions
of each parameter in this table, see "Grid dialog box – Grid tab" on page 307.
13 In the Multigrid level box in the "Scaling/defaults" section, select a grid level of 1, 2, or 3. This
option also appears as Levels of coarse grid on the Multigrid tab of the Solver Settings - Full 3D
dialog box.
14 Use the Scale factor box to scale the nodes in the grid in each direction when you click the Set
Default Grid button.
When you specify a scale factor, the resulting grid is (scale factor)2 multiplied by the calculated
number of nodes in the standard default grid. For best results, it is recommend that you first generate
the grid using a value of 1 as the scale factor, and then scale the grid later, as necessary.
Note: The Scale factor value does not affect the nodes in the hub and shroud directions,
which are either defined in the "Nodes" section, above, or are set to 2 for a blade-to-
blade analysis).
15 If you are generating the first grid for this design, or if you have changed any value on the Topology
tab for this grid (including the segment range), click the Set Default Grid button. Otherwise, go to
step 16.
Clicking the Set Default Grid button generates an initial grid based on the flowpath and blade ge-
ometry.
Note: When you click this button, any previous grid settings for the design are overwritten
by the new grid values.
A warning message appears that asks you to verify that you want to reset the grid.
16 Click Yes.
AxCent generates an initial grid based on the information you have specified, and then displays the
resulting set of parameters in the "Row details" table on the right side of the Grid tab.
17 Click the H-Grid Clearance tab. For descriptions of the options in this dialog box, see "Grid dialog
box – H-Grid Clearance tab" on page 318.
Use the options on the H-Grid Clearance tab to set up the number of cells in the tip clearance for the
CFD grid.
18 Specify the amount of tip clearance for the CFD grid.
If the design has a specified tip clearance (set in the Tip Clearance Settings dialog box), Pushbutton
CFD defaults to a single cell in the clearance with the specified distance. For an H-grid, if you spec-
ify tip clearance in the grid, the blade tip is reshaped as a cusp; the tip of the cusp has the same radius
as the original blade.
If you specify 0 (zero) here, there will be no tip clearance in the grid, even if tip clearance is specified
for the design. The grid tip clearance you specify is visible in the generated CFD grid.
The following image shows four cells of tip clearance specified for an H-grid:
19 When you are finished specifying grid settings, click OK.

20 From the CFD menu, choose View CFD Grid.
AxCent launches its CFD grid generator to create the default computational grid automatically. A
command window appears, which shows the progress of the calculations.

When the calculations are finished, the command window closes automatically, and the 3D CFD
Grid window appears.
21 If necessary, make adjustments to the view options for the window to view different parameters. In
particular, choosing to view the Surface plot colored by Grid Aspect Ratio and then by
Maximum Skew Angle will help you assess the quality of the grid. For more information about
setting CFD view options, see "Selecting CFD view options" on page 154.
22 Examine the grid to look for any areas that may need adjustment, make any adjustments as necessary
in the Grid dialog box, and then view the grid again.
23 Continue this process until you are satisfied with the grid.
Generating C-type CFD grids
The O-type grid is preferred for the area in the immediate vicinity of the blade in axial designs. The
outer boundary of the O-type grid is in the mid-passage. The O-type grid is one of the preferred grid
types for axial machines.
C-type grids, or OC and OH-C grids, are variations of the O-type grid, in which the O-block is not
generated beyond the open leading or trailing edge. Instead of the O-block encircling the blade, the
C-block surrounds the blade only up to the open leading or trailing edge. These C-type grid varia-
tions are the preferred grid types for radial machines. They are designed to capture open leading and
trailing edges.The C-type grid is a subset of the O-type that allows you to generate an improved grid
for designs that have sheared or blunt leading or trailing edges. To generate a C-type grid, you must
select to generate an O-type grid. If the design contains blades with sheared or blunt leading or trail-
ing edges, AxCent automatically applies the C-type grid option. You can also manually select the C-
type grid option if it is appropriate for your design.
Before you can view and apply settings to specific blade rows, you must first generate a preliminary
CFD O-type grid.
To generate an O- or C-type CFD grid

1 Open the design for which you want to generate an O-type CFD grid. (The images shown below are
from the comp_rad_Compex1.des example case.)
(The images shown below are from the comp_rad_Compex1.des example case.)
2 From the CFD menu, choose Grid.

The Grid dialog box appears open to the Topology tab. For descriptions of the options on this tab,
see "Grid dialog box – Topology tab" on page 313.
Use the Topology tab to select the segments and type of surface grid that you want to generate.
3 In the "Segments" section, select the first and last segments to be included in the grid.
Note: A C-grid will be generated only for bladed segments in the range of selected
segments.
4 In the Grid type box (in the "Solution" selection), select O Grid.

Note: Since the C-type grids are variations of the O-grid, you must select O-Grid as the
Grid type in order to generate an OC- or OH-C grid type. If the design has sheared
or blunt leading or trailing edges, AxCent will automatically select the C-grid option
for you. To manually select the C-type grid option, see step 15, below.
A message asks if you want to initialize the topology by generating a default O-grid.
5 Click Yes.
AxCent generates the new default grid and then displays the required parameters and their default
values in the "Row details" table on the right side of the dialog box.
When you select the grid type, the “Row details” table on the right side of the dialog box displays
the parameters required to generate the selected grid type and the default values for each parameter.
If the segments you have selected include more than one blade row, the table contains a column for
each row. The parameters you can specify for each row appear in the first column of the table. Ax-
Cent determines default values for each cell. The parameters in the table differ depending on the grid
type you selected to generate.
6 In the Solution box (under "Grid and solution type"), select the type of CFD solution that you want
to use. For descriptions of each solution type, see "Grid dialog box – Topology tab" on page 313. For
detailed information about the CFD solution options, see "Generating H-Classic CFD grids" on page
167.
7 Make any necessary changes to the parameter values in the "Row details" table. For detailed
information about the options in this table, see "Generating H-Classic CFD grids" on page 167
8 Select the Grid tab.For descriptions of the options on this tab, see "Grid dialog box – Grid tab" on
page 307.
Use the Grid tab to specify node and smoothing options for your grid.
9 In the "Nodes" section, specify the number and spacing of grid nodes for the grid in the Hub to
shroud boxes.
For O- and C-grids, AxCent provides node allocation options that determine the overall grid size per
blade row, and node spacing options that determine grid node distribution along the grid’s domain
boundaries for all blade rows or for a selected blade row.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Generating C-type CFD grids 175
The default grid size is 21 x 121 x 21. For the Multi-block solver, there is neither a limitation in any
direction nor on the total grid size. Your computer memory and license put a limit on the maximum
size.
10 In the Multigrid level box in the "Scaling/defaults" section, select a grid level of 1, 2, or 3. This
option also appears as Levels of coarse gird on the Multigrid tab of the Solver Settings – Full 3D
dialog box.
11 Use the Scale factor box to scale the nodes in the grid in each direction when you click the Set
Default Grid button.
When you specify a scale factor, the resulting grid is (scale factor)2 multiplied by the calculated
number of nodes in the standard default grid. For best results, it is recommended that you first gen-
erate the grid using a value of 1 as the scale factor, and then scale the grid later, as necessary.
blade analysis.
12 Click the Set Default Grid button to generate an initial grid based on the flowpath and blade
geometry.
Note: When you click this button, any previous grid settings for this design are overwritten
by the new grid values.
A warning message appears that asks you to verify that you want to reset the grid.
13 Click Yes.
AxCent generates an initial grid based on the information you have specified, and then displays the
resulting set of parameters in the "Row details" table on the right side of the Grid tab.
14 Make any necessary changes to the parameter values in the "Row details" table.
For detailed descriptions of each parameter that can appear in this table, see the Help topic, "O, O-
C-, OH-, and OH-C-grid generation parameters".
Note: The default values for the parameters in this table will generally yield an adequate
grid. Only expert users should make changes to these values, and most changes made
should be small.
15 If you are generating an O-type grid, go to step 17.
To manually change the grid type option for one or more blades in the design to the C-type, expand
the “Grid dimensions” group in the Row details table, and then select the O-C type option.
Note: AxCent automatically selects the O-C type option for blades with sheared blunt
leading or trailing edges. If you do not select the C-type manually, you do not need
to click the Set Default Grid button unless you make any other changes to the
Topology tab or are creating the first grid for your design.
If a blade is not sheared or does not have a blunt leading or trailing edge, AxCent will
not allow you to select the O-C type option for the blade.
16 If you made any changes to values in the “Row details” table, including selecting the O-C type
option for any blades, click the Update button at the bottom of the table to update all grid values
based on your changes.
If the design includes blades with sheared blunt leading or trailing edges, AxCent automatically se-
lects the O-C type option for those blades.

Note: If a blade is not sheared or does not have a blunt leading or trailing edge, AxCent will
not allow you to select the O-C type option for the blade.
17 In the Clearance cells box (on the left side of the tab), specify the number of computational cells to
use in the tip clearance. One or two cells are recommended for Pushbutton CFD applications. For
example, if the hub-to-shroud grid size is 21 nodes, and one cell is specified for the tip clearance
modeling, then 19 cells will be used to describe the blade, from hub to tip. Pushbutton CFD’s default
uses one cell in the clearance if a tip clearance is specified in the current design.
18 Use the options in the "Smoothing options" section to apply smoothing.
 To apply smoothing, make sure the Apply smoothing check box is selected and then
make any necessary adjustments to the smoothing options.
 To disable smoothing, clear the Apply smoothing check box.
19 When you are finished specifying grid settings, click OK.
You can now view the CFD grid in 3D, readjusting the grid whenever necessary by repeating the
steps listed above.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Generating C-type CFD grids 177
Generating OH- and OH-C-type CFD grids
The OH-type hybrid grid covers the same area as the O grid does; however, the area is divided into
two regions: the O grid is a thin layer around the blade surface, and the H grid covers the rest of the
area. By using the OH-hybrid gird, you remove the kinks on the blade-to-blade grid lines around the
mid-passage. The OH-type grid is one of the preferred grid types for axial machines.The primary
advantage of the OH over the O-grid type is its ability to control the grid quality both in the region
near the blade surface and in the middle of the passage. This advantage is especially critical for cases
with splitters.
To generate an OH-type grid

The procedure for generating an OH-type grid is identical to that for generating an O-type grid, with
the following exceptions:
 On the Topology tab of the Grid dialog box, select OH-grid in the Grid type box.
 In the “Row Details” table on the Grid tab, pay special attention to the Thickness and
Thickness Specification parameters.
Although the default values for these parameters will generally yield an adequate grid, you may
need to make minor adjustments in special cases.

Viewing the CFD grid
You can always view the CFD grid you have specified (whether for O-type, C-type, OH-type, OH-
C-type or H-Classic type) before you run the CFD solver.
To view the CFD grid

1 From the CFD menu, choose View CFD Grid(s).
If you specified multiple grids (in the Topology tab of the Grid dialog box), select either All Grids
(to view all multiple grids) or Grid x_x (to view a single grid among the multiple grids).
AxCent launches the CFD grid generator to create the default computational grid(s).
When the calculations are finished, the 3D CFD Grid window(s) appear.
2 If necessary, adjust the view options of the window to view different parameters.
In particular, choosing to view the Surface plot colored by Grid Aspect Ratio and then by Max-
imum Skew Angle will help you assess the quality of the grid.
3 Examine the grid for areas that may need adjustment, making any adjustments in the Grid dialog
box, and then view the grid again.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Viewing the CFD grid 179
Previewing grid settings
Use this procedure to select and to specify a grid row for preview.
To preview a grid setting

1 Open the case, and choose Grid from the CFD menu.
The Grid dialog box appears.
2 If the Preview button is unavailable on the Grid tab, click Set default grid in the "Scaling/defaults"
section.
3 If you select Show single row (available for multiple bladed segments only), select the row to
preview by clicking the row button in the Row details table above (Row 1, Row 2, etc.).
4 Use the spin box below the table to select the number of sections to preview.
5 Click the Preview button.
The Preview (Candidate grid) window appears alongside the Grid settings dialog box.
Note: Read-only parameters in the tables of the Grid settings dialog box are shaded.
6 After you have edited the grid parameters in this dialog box, click Preview (in the Grid settings
dialog box) to view the edited grid.
7 When you have specified the grid settings, select one of the options on the Save settings drop-down
list.
Note: If you select Save settings, preprocess grid, the 3D – CFD Grid window changes
appearance, from light blue (in preview mode) to dark blue (as when you choose
View CFD Grid from the CFD menu).

Chapter 8: Exporting information from AxCent

Exporting to table-based options ........................................................ 182
Exporting flow field information ......................................................... 183
Transferring a design to Numeca ....................................................... 184
Introduction: Preparing for CAD export .............................................. 185
Viewing 3D geometry before exporting to CAD ................................... 186
Exporting table-based output options ................................................. 188
Exporting to Concepts NREC formats .................................................. 190
Exporting to third-party programs ...................................................... 191
Exporting graphics-based 3D solids and surfaces ................................ 192
Exporting to table-based options
When you want to export geometry information from an AxCent design to meanline or surface for-
mats, you can save the geometry of a selected segment in a particular format to a text file. This is
useful when you want to import the information into another program or use it with the CADFIT
option.
To export to table-based options

1 Select a segment in the Contours window.
2 From the File menu, choose Export – Table-based.
The Machining/CFD Output File Parameters tab of the Table-Based Options dialog box appears.
For descriptions of this dialog box, see "Table Based Options dialog box – Machining/CFD Output
Parameters tab" on page 413.
Use this dialog box to select the format in which you want to export the data.
3 Under "Geometry output", select one of the following the export formats:
 Meanline and thickness – Select this option to save the file in machining file format
(.mch). For more information about this option, see the Machining/CFD Output File
Parameters dialog box topic.
 Surface – Select this option to save the file in surface file format (.sur). For more
information about this option, see the Machining/CFD Output File Parameters dialog box
topic.
 CFD (Meanline on QOs w/ slope) – Select this option to save the file in CFD meanline
format, which is similar to the meanline and thickness format (.mch) except that slope
information is also included.
 Custom (Python scripts) – Select this option to save the file in a custom or proprietary
format. You can define your own format in Python. (For examples, see the script
examples in the AxCent installation folder
at...\\Concepts\AXCENT\Macros\custom_cfd_variables.)
4 Continue to specify the options for these export files in the tab, and click OK.
The Windows Save As dialog box appears.
5 In the File name box of this dialog box, type the name of the export file, and click Save.
By default, the appropriate file extension for the export option you chose appears in the Save as type
box.
AxCent saves the formatted file to the directory you specified.
182 Chapter 8: Exporting information from AxCent Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.
Exporting flow field information
After you have run a rapid loading or MST calculation, you can save the flow field information in a
separate file to use the information with another program.
AxCent saves the file with flow field velocity and thermodynamic information. This file can be
opened in Pushbutton FEA™ (PBFEA) to create an ANSYS® or COSMOS/M® file, including nec-
essary information to perform pressure and thermal loading analyses.
To export flow field information

1 Run a Rapid loading, MST, or calculation.
2 In the Contours window, select a bladed segment.
3 From the File menu, choose Export – Concepts NREC Format.
The Concepts NREC Format dialog box dialog box appears.
For descriptions of the dialog box options, see "Concepts NREC Format dialog box – Flow File tab"
on page 269.
For radial designs, the MST option is selected by default.
4 If you are using a program that requires flow field data to be formatted in older versions of AxCent,
select the Old file format option.
If you are creating a flow field file for Pushbutton FEA, select the New relative values (required
for Stressprep/Axistress) option.
5 If the design contains splitters, the “Splitter handling” section displays that it recognizes the splitters
and allows you to use pressure side, mid passage, and suction side values from the main blades or
from one of the splitter passages.
The Rapid Load and MST solvers generate data for pressure side, mid passage, and suction side.
When a splitter is present, the splitter area can be handled in two ways:
 From the main blades, use the PS (pressure side), MP (mid passage), and SS (suction
side) .
 From one of the splitter passages, use the PS (pressure side), MP (mid passage), and SS
(suction side). In this case, either the PS or the SS ‘jumps’ from one of the main blades
to the splitter when the splitter starts.
This option affects only the location of the reported flow data. The actual pressure and temperature
values reported from the Rapid Load or MST solvers on the splitter and main blade are identical.
If you select the Do you want to do this? check box, the main blades will not have any odd geomet-
ric jumps in the data; however, the mid passage location will end up being on top of the splitter.
6 Click OK.
7 Specify the file and the directory in which you want to save the information.
8 Click Save.
AxCent saves the file in flow field format.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Exporting flow field information 183
Transferring a design to Numeca
Use this procedure to transfer a design to the Numeca Fine™/Turbo CFD solver (in the *.geomTurbo
file format). This procedure results in the generation of a hexahedral grid.
To transfer a design to Numeca

1 Open the file that you want to solve with the Fine Turbo solver.
2 Choose Numeca Format from the File menu.
– or –
Click on the toolbar menu.

The Transfer design to Numeca dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Transfer design to Numeca dialog box" on page 423..
3 Specify the following parameters in this dialog box:
 In the drop-down lists for First/Last Segment, the first and last segments for inclusion
in the Fine/Turbo file.
 In the “Geometry” section, the number of points to be exported (from LE to TE and from
Hub to Shroud) and the extension of the blade into the hub and the shroud (Extend
blade into the hub and shroud).
 In the “CFD” section, the CFD grid to be generated and its run title.
4 Click OK.
The command prompt window appears, indicating the opening of the Fine/Turbo Autogrid™ pro-
gram and the grid generation.
The CFD run entry appears on the table of the CFD Results dialog box.
To learn about this dialog box, see "CFD Results dialog box" on page 244..
Note: For instructions on using the Numeca Fine/Turbo program, consult Numeca online
Help (at http://portal.numeca.be/).
Introduction: Preparing for CAD export
Exporting your design to CAD output requires a clean and accurate view of the 3D model in AxCent,
which may require a number of readjustments in the design’s geometric representation.
Some AxCent options that improve the 3D display of the model also affect the model’s geometry.
These options are listed below. Because geometry options are not pre-set so that they can be adjusted
to a variety of designs, they will have different effects on different models. In addition, different
CAD programs interpret CAD files differently.
Refer to the following procedures for improving 3D representation and geometry in your designs for
CAD export:
 Making geometric adjustments on page 41.
 Specifying a swept leading edge and trailing edge(Refer to AxCent Help.)
 Improving blade alignment (Refer to AxCent Help.)
 Selecting the Smooth out the blade surface check box in the Geometry Engine Options
dialog box (from the Geometry menu, choose Setup – Geometry Engine Options).
 Editing the swept leading edge of a radial design(Refer to AxCent Help.)
AxCent exports CAD output files in IGES, STL, and STEP formats. Although these are standardized
interchange formats, using them to transfer data between any two systems may introduce some prob-
lems. AxCent is no exception to this, as the shapes it tries to represent – curved and twisted three-
dimensional turbomachinery blades – are complex and the capabilities of the receiving programs are
unknown.
Additionally, some CAD output features may not be supported. For example, AxCent can export
blades in the form of boundary-representation solids, something many systems do not support. On
such systems, a blade exported as a solid usually appears as a set of surfaces. In that case, exporting
the blade as surfaces often provides better results. AxCent also uses Rational B-Spline curves and
surfaces to represent a blade. If your CAD system does not support these, you will not be able to
import the file.
For these reasons, you may need to make a number of adjustments between the QOs and the geom-
etry options before exporting your design successfully.
Use the following procedures to view the 3D model to be sure that it is accurate before you export
it to CAD output.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction: Preparing for CAD export 185
Viewing 3D geometry before exporting to CAD
This may require readjustments in the design’s geometry, as described above.
To view the 3D model before exporting to CAD

1 Open a 3D model window of your design in AxCent (from the Window menu, choose New 3D
View).
2 From the Graphics menu, choose one of the following commands to examine a design for faults that
may cause problems in the IGES or STEP translation:
 Solid Only – Select this menu command to examine surface discrepancies, such as
transitions between the leading edge and the suction side of the blade, shown in the
example below, where faults required adjustments in the swept leading edge from a
tangential to a more linear trim.
 Hollow Wireframe – Select this menu command to examine the trim extents and sharp
surface intersections between the blade and the hub surface. In the example below, the
solid wireframe view on the left does not reveal the overextension of the root of the
blade into the hub cylinder. Only the hollow wireframe view shown on the right does
this.
The overextension in the design above can also be viewed in the single-blade hollow wireframe rep-
resentation, as shown below. In the example to the right, the blade has been corrected with the Im-
proved lean compensation check box, available in the Geometry Engine Options dialog box
(available by choosing Setup – Geometry Engine Options from the Geometry menu).
Note: You may need to view the design more than once, readjusting the output options and
the number of QOs to improve the 3D image prior to CAD translation.
3 When the 3D view of the model is satisfactory, export the file to CAD output. For more information,
see "Exporting graphics-based 3D solids and surfaces" on page 192.
Once your design has been exported to CAD as an IGES file, use the features in your CAD program
to correct it, if necessary.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Viewing 3D geometry before exporting to CAD 187
Exporting table-based output options
When you want to export geometry from an AxCent design, you can save the geometry of a selected
segment in a particular format to a text file. This is useful for importing the information into another
program or use it with the CADFIT option.
The table-based output includes formats for meanline and thickness, for surface, and for CFD mean-
line data for quasi orthogonals and for slopes.
To export table-based information

1 In the Contours window, select to view the segment for which you want to export the information.
2 From the File menu, choose Export – Table-based output options.
The Machining/CFD Output File Parameters tab appears.
For descriptions of this dialog box, see "Table Based Options dialog box – Machining/CFD Output
Parameters tab" on page 413.
3 Under the "Geometry output" section, select the export format you want to use. For a description of
each export format, see "Table Based Options dialog box – Machining/CFD Output Parameters tab"
on page 413..
 Meanline and thickness (*.mch) – Select this option to save the file in machining file
format (.mch). For more information about this option, see the Machining/CFD Output
File Parameters dialog box topic.
 Surface (*.sur) – Select this option to save the file in surface file format (.sur). For
more information about this option, see the Machining/CFD Output File Parameters
dialog box topic.
 CFD (Meanline on QOs w/ slope) (*.mch) – Select this option to save the file in CFD
meanline format, which is similar to the meanline and thickness format (.mch) except
that slope information is also included.
 Custom (Python scripts) (*.csv or )– Select this option to save the axial file in a custom
or proprietary format. You can define your own format in Python. (For examples, see the
script examples in the AxCent installation folder
at...\\Concepts\AXCENT\Macros\custom_cfd_variables.)
4 In the Number of points (LE to TE) box, type the number of points to use along the length of the
blade.
5 In the Number of points (H to S) box, type the number of points to use from hub to shroud.
6 To add an extra section at the top and bottom of the blade, select the Add sections to extend the
blade into the hub and shroud check box.
These sections are just inside the hub and shroud. Their purpose is to make sure that the blade gen-
erated from the sections will intersect with the hub and shroud surfaces of revolution. This will help
some CAD applications that work better if the blade intersects the hub and shroud than if the blade
just touches them.
7 If the design has blades that are made of ruled elements (that is, blades that default to two sections),
and when there are more than two sections selected, the Use pure interpolation for sections along
elements inside ruled blades check box is available.
Select this check box to create sections between the hub and shroud that are proportionally interpo-
lating from hub to shroud along the ruled lines. This allows you to create a pure ruled blade by ex-
tracting more than two sections whereby the sections in the middle are made by pure interpolation
between the outer two sections.
Note: The 1 Independent hub and shroud blading option (available in the Blade
Generation Options dialog box) generates blades that default to two sections. To
change the number of output sections used, change the number in the Number of
points (H to S) box in this dialog box.
In the case of a leaned blade, when you use this option, a slight bulge may appear at the inlet and
exit when projected in the ZR plane; however, the blade edges themselves are, in fact, perfectly
straight.
8 Click OK.
9 In the File name box, type the name of the export file. By default, the appropriate file extension for
the export option you chose appears in the Save as type box.
10 Click Save.
AxCent saves the formatted file to the directory you specified.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Exporting table-based output options 189
Exporting to Concepts NREC formats
When you want to export geometry information from an AxCent design to other Concepts NREC
programs, you can save the geometry of a selected segment in a particular format to a text file. This
is useful when you want to import the information into MAX-PAC, CADFIT, or Pushbutton FEA.
To export machine information

2 From the File menu, choose Export – Concepts NREC Format..
The CN Proprietary Transfer tab of the Concepts NREC Format dialog box appears.
For descriptions of this dialog box, see "Concepts NREC Format dialog box – CN Proprietary Trans-
fer tab" on page 267.
3 Under the "Geometry output" section, select on of the following export formats:
 MAX-PAC format (*.imp) – Select this option to generate files for rotor numerical
matching with the MAX-5, MAX-AB, and MAX-SI programs. For more information
about this option, see the Machining/CFD Output File Parameters dialog box topic.
 CADFIT (.fit) – Select this option to save the file in the format to be used with the
CADFIT option.
 PBFEA surface file (*.sur) – Select this option to produce an axial PBFEA surface file
that you can use with the Pushbutton FEA program.
4 Continue to specify the options for these export files in the dialog box, and click OK.
5 If you select MAX-PAC format, specify the settings for the output file (if necessary) in the MAX-
PAC Output File Options dialog box that appears, and then click OK.
6 In the File name box, type the name of the export file.
By default the file extension for the selected export appears in the Save as type box.
7 Click Save.
AxCent saves the formatted file to the selected directory.
Exporting to third-party programs
Use this procedure to export the AxCent file to a third-party programs , including the ANSYS, Nu-
meca, and Tecplot solvers.
To export to third-party programs

2 From the File menu, choose Export – 3rd Party Interface.
The Third Party Export dialog box appears.
For descriptions of this dialog box, see "Third Party Export dialog box" on page 417.
3 In the Proprietary Geometry tab of this dialog box under the "Geometry output" section, select one
of the following export formats:
 ANSYS/Fluent GTurbo (.tur) – Select this option to save the file in a format to be used
with the Ansys/FLUENT software.
 Numeca FINE/Turbo CFD (*.geomTurbo) – Select this option to save the file in a
format suitable for the Numeca FINE/Turbo CFD package.
 ANSYS/CFX-TurboGrid (*.curve) – Select this option to save the file in ANSYS/
TurboGrid format, the grid generator for CFX-TASCflow.
 Tecplot (IJK)(*.dat) – Select this option to save the file in IJK format, which is
readable by the Tecplot program.
4 Continue to specify the options for these export files in the dialog box, and click OK.
5 In the File name box, type the name of the export file.
The file extension for the export option that you selected appears in the Save as type box.
6 Click Save.
AxCent saves the formatted file to the specified directory.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Exporting to third-party programs 191

Exporting graphics-based 3D solids and surfaces
Use this procedure to export your CFD or FEA data to graphics-based 3D solid and surface formats,
including the following formats:
 ACIS
 IGES
 Parasolid
 STEP
 STL (stereolithography) file format.
Once you have verified that the geometry of your design is correct, you can export the geometry to
the formats listed above.
Note: Some third-party CAD systems may not support some STL features. For more
information, see "Introduction: Preparing for CAD export" on page 185.
To export geometry to an STL file

1 After examining the design in the 3D window and adjusting it, choose Export – Graphics-based
solids and surfaces from the File menu.
The CAD and CFD Geometry tab of the Graphics-based CFD solids and surfaces dialog box ap-
pears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "STL Output Options dialog box" on page 408.
2 In the drop-down list for File format on the CAD and CFD Geometry tab, specify the any of the
following outputs:
 ACIS (CadExch) – Export to the ACIS CAD exchanger format.
 IGES (AxCent) – Export to an IGES format in which AxCent directly translates the
geometry to IGES.
 IGES (Open CASCADE) – Export to an IGES format suitable for use on the Open
CASCADE platform. AxCent exported the geometry to Open CASCADE, which in turn
produces an IGES file.
 Parasolid (CadExch) – Export to the Parasolid exchanger format.
 STEP (Open CASCADE) – Export to the STEP format for use in Open CASCADE.
 STL – Export to the STL format (stereolithography).
3 To select the range of segments for the STL export, click the Set Segments button.
The Select Segment Range dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Select Segment Range dialog box" on page 363.
In the Select Segment dialog box, select First Segment and Last Segment, and click OK.
The segment range that you select appears in the STL output options dialog box.
Chapter 9: Using PBFEA in AxCent

What is Pushbutton FEA? .................................................................. 194
Specifying the PBFEA solver .............................................................. 195
Selecting Pushbutton FEA views ......................................................... 196
Animating 3D Pushbutton FEA models ................................................ 197
Viewing Pushbutton FEA™ results in a table ....................................... 198
What is Pushbutton FEA?
Pushbutton FEA™ is a preprocessing program designed to work with both commercial FEA solvers
and with PBFEA, the Concepts NREC solver. The PBFEA solver is a fully featured linear static FEA
solver of the Pushbutton FEA™ program specifically designed to run turbomachinery applications,
and is fully integrated into the AxCent environment. It performs structural analysis and includes pre-
processing that uses parameter variables, in addition to the PBFEA solver's postprocessing. Because
of its full integration and simple intuitive user interface, the PBFEA solver can be used by non-FEA
expert users. The solver is aimed at (although not limited to) the preliminary design phase of your
product development cycle. It is fast, accurate, and convenient.
Using the PBFEA solver, you can make structural analysis a concurrent part of your aerodynamic
design, identify and reject structurally inferior designs before using additional resources on them,
and reduce the number of design loops required to get a product to the marketplace.
194 Chapter 9: Using PBFEA in AxCent Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Specifying the PBFEA solver
Use this procedure to run the PBFEA solver in AxCent.
Before you run the PBFEA solver, be sure to specify the following characteristics:
1 Geometry (for radial and for axial dimensions)
2 Boundary conditions (for radial and for axial conditions)
3 Material properties and material reference temperature (for radial and for axial properties)
4 Aero loads (specify pressure and temperature loads for radial and for axial models)
Only after you specify the four characteristics above can you successfully run the PBFEA solver.
The required steps are also described in the Quickstart guides for axial and radial models.
To run the PBFEA solver

1 Select the bladed segment.
2 From the Mechanical menu, choose Project.
3 Specify the project settings in the Project dialog box, select PBFEA for the FEA Solver in the
Options tab., and click OK.
4 From the Mechanical menu, choose Run FEA.
The Solver Options dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box" on page 355.
5 Select the options in this dialog box, and click OK.
During the solver run, the Progress dialog box appears, followed by a command prompt window for
the PBFEA Solver.
After the solver run, the results appear in the 3D FEA window.
6 To change the views of these results for different parameters, refer to Selecting PBFEA view
options.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Specifying the PBFEA solver 195
Selecting Pushbutton FEA views
After you run the Pushbutton FEA solver, you can select a variety of options for viewing data. You
can select the geometry and the number of blades to be viewed, animate the view for modal analysis,
select a view according to contour or to surface, and select the type of stress and displacement to
view.
You can change the view of results using either a dialog box or the toolbar built in the 3D window.
To edit FEA view options

1 Select the 3D FEA window.
2 Right-click the window and select FEA View Options from the shortcut menu.
The Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box" on page 355.
3 Select the view options that you want to use.
4 Click Apply to view the changes in the FEA 3D window and keep the dialog box open.
– or –
Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
To select FEA view options from the 3D FEA window

5 Select the 3D FEA window.
6 Select the view options from the 3D FEA window toolbar.

Animating 3D Pushbutton FEA models
Once you generate the 3D model window for the PBFEA solver, you can animate the displacement
or deformity of the blade design, viewing the geometry both before and after the stress deformity at
the same time.
Note: Animation only works for modal analyses (selected on the Solver Options dialog
box).
To animate the 3D PBFEA model

1 Animate the model in the 3D PBFEA window using one of the following methods:
 Click on the toolbar in the window.

 Right-click the window view, and choose FEA View Options from the shortcut menu
that appears.
In the Options section of the Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box, select Animate, and then
click OK.
The displacement animation appears.
2 Adjust the animation speed on the toolbar by clicking to decrease or to increase the speed.
3 To stop the animation, click on the toolbar.

– or –
Press A on the keyboard.
– or –
Deselect (or clear) Animate in the Options section of the Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box,
and click OK.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Animating 3D Pushbutton FEA models 197
Viewing Pushbutton FEA™ results in a table
You can view the results of a Pushbutton FEA solver run in a table format, just as you can view the
CFD results for Pushbutton CFD. This format is useful for managing FEA solver runs, and for read-
ing a summary of the primary analysis results. The table format lets you compare the effects of geo-
metric and mesh modifications. You can also accumulate FEA run results, and select which run to
make current.
To view the FEA Results table

1 After you run the PBFEA solver, choose FEA runs from the Mechanical menu.
The FEA Results dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Choose data/Choose data to show or edit dialog box" on page
262.
2 Use the buttons to perform the following tasks:
 To activate one of the runs on the table, highlight the run column and click the Set
Active button.
 To delete a run, highlight the run column and click the Delete Run button.
 To generate a new 3D view, click the New 3D View button.
 To refresh the FEA grid, click the Refresh button. (A message appears, asking you
whether or not to refresh the full grid.)
 To close the FEA Results dialog box, click the Close button.

3D FEA window
The 3D FEA window displays a color contour plot of the results of the selected PBFEA run. It ap-
pears after you run the PBFEA solver.
The available window view that appears depends upon the FEA run:
 For modal analyses including cyclic boundary conditions, a 360° view appears (to select
modal analysis, check Modal on the Solver Options dialog box; for cyclic boundary
conditions, select Cyclic for Pie-slice cut face on the Boundary Conditions tab of the
Properties dialog box [for Pushbutton FEA only]).
 For modal analyses using coupled sets, a single pie slice model appears, displaying a
single blade.
 For thermal or static analyses, a single pie slice model appears, displaying one or more
blades (check Thermal or Static on the Solver Options dialog box).
You can also view this window by choosing 3D View from the Mechanical menu. You can select the
data that appears in the window in the Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box. You can also select
this data from the toolbar positioned directly above the 3D window.
Note: The 3D View command is available only when there is an active Pushbutton FEA run.
If you have run an analysis with a different FEA solver, or have used the View
FEA Grid command since the last Pushbutton FEA run, you must make a Pushbutton
FEA run active again in the FEA Results dialog box.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® 3D FEA window 199

Chapter 10: AxCent Dialog Box Reference

Add Multiple User Defined Sections dialog box .................................... 203
Adjust Exit Lean Angle dialog box ...................................................... 204
Append the New Segment to the Design dialog box ............................ 205
Blade Generation Options dialog box .................................................. 207
Blade Stagger Angle dialog box ......................................................... 220
Blade Surface Selection dialog box ..................................................... 222
Boundary Conditions dialog box ......................................................... 224
Bowed Blading Parameters dialog box ................................................ 239
Bring in Model dialog box .................................................................. 241
CADFIT dialog box ............................................................................ 243
CFD Results dialog box ...................................................................... 244
CFD Results Groups dialog box .......................................................... 248
CFD Multiple Grids Setup ................................................................... 252
CFD View Options dialog box ............................................................. 255
Choose Segment dialog box .............................................................. 260
Choose data/Choose data to show or edit dialog box ........................... 262
Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box ................................ 265
Concepts NREC Format dialog box ..................................................... 267
Copy a Segment dialog box ............................................................... 271
Create Meanline File dialog box ......................................................... 273
Create New Flow Path Branch dialog box ............................................ 274
Curve/Control Points dialog box ......................................................... 276
Entry Wrap Angle (Theta) dialog box ................................................. 279
Exit Theta dialog box ........................................................................ 280
FEA Results dialog box ...................................................................... 281
Fitting Method dialog box .................................................................. 284
Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box ..................................... 285
Geometry Engine Options dialog box .................................................. 295
Graphics-based 3D solids surfaces dialog box ..................................... 301
Grid dialog box ................................................................................. 307
Grid settings dialog box ..................................................................... 320
Graphics-based 3D solids/surfaces dialog box – CAD and CFD Geometry tab 326
Link to Meanline Program dialog box ................................................... 332
MAX-PAC Output File Options dialog box ............................................ 334
MAX-5/AB/SI File Parameters dialog box ............................................ 337
Stacking and Geometry Options for Midspan Sections dialog box .......... 338
MST Parameters dialog box ............................................................... 339
Preferences dialog box ...................................................................... 346
Pressure/Suction Results dialog box ................................................... 353
Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box ............................................ 355
Remove Mid-Span Geometry Definition dialog box .............................. 358
Restagger Blade dialog box ............................................................... 359
Select CFD Run dialog box ................................................................ 360
Concepts NREC Format dialog box – Flow File tab ............................... 361
Select Segment Range dialog box ...................................................... 363
Select Units Used dialog box .............................................................. 364
Setup Segments dialog box ............................................................... 366
Side ports dialog box ........................................................................ 368
Slot Selection dialog box ................................................................... 370
Solver Options dialog box .................................................................. 373
Solver Settings dialog box ................................................................. 375
Solver Settings dialog box – for Numeca Fine™/Turbo ......................... 391
Stacking and Geometry Options for Midspan Sections dialog box .......... 396
Start Pushbutton CFD Run dialog box ................................................. 397
STEP output options dialog box ......................................................... 406
STL Output Options dialog box .......................................................... 408
Stretch Segment dialog box ............................................................... 410
Swept Leading/Trailing Edge Parameters dialog box ............................ 411
Table Based Options dialog box – Machining/CFD Output Parameters tab 413
Third Party Export dialog box ............................................................ 417
Transfer design to Numeca dialog box ............................................... 423
Vane slots dialog box ........................................................................ 425
Input/Output Volute dialog box ......................................................... 426
202 Chapter 10: AxCent Dialog Box Reference Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.
Add Multiple User Defined Sections dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify a series of mid-span geometry defined cross-sections. When you spec-
ify the segments in this dialog box, AxCent measures and fits them to avoid conflicts in the geometry
and problems in quality.
Note: The Add Multiple User Defined Sections dialog box is recommended for most
segment additions, whether single or multiple.
Before you can use this option, you must first select the Arbitrary number of midspan sections
and stacking curve option in the Blade Generation Options dialog box.
To open this dialog box, select Mid Span Geometry Defn – Add Multiple Sections from the Ge-
ometry menu.
New sections
This section displays the mid-span cross-sections that you specify.
Add % span
In the box next to this button, type the percentage amount of span for the mid-section, and then click
the Add % Span button. For example, do this for 25, 50, and 75%.
When you click OK, AxCent displays the mid-span cross-sections as black lines in the Contours
window.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Add Multiple User Defined Sections dialog box 203
Adjust Exit Lean Angle dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the lean angle (when you are using the Independent hub and shroud
option for blade generation).
This dialog box appears when you select Blade Angles – Adjust Exit Lean Angle from the Geom-
etry menu. This menu item becomes available when you’ve chosen the 1 Independent hub and
shroud option in the Blade Generation Options dialog box and are viewing the Lean Angle param-
eter.
Required exit lean angle

In this box, type the lean angle at the exit (also known as the exit rake).
Adjust the hub

Select this option to get the correct exit lean by changing blade angles along the hub.
Adjust the shroud

Select this option to get the correct exit lean by changing blade angles along the shroud.
Adjust both
Select this option to get the correct exit lean by changing blade angles along both the hub and the
shroud.
Automatically keep adjusting to this exit lean

Select this check box to have AxCent automatically make adjustments to keep the exit lean at the
desired value.
Append the New Segment to the Design dialog box
This dialog box allows you to choose how to add a new segment to your design.
This dialog box appears after you click OK in the Copy a Segment dialog box.
Note: For examples that illustrate the effects of choosing the options in this dialog box, see
"Appending segments to designs" on page 91.
Where is the new segment connected to the existing segments?

Select whether the segments should be added at the beginning or at the end of the existing segments.
 Connect upstream of existing segments.
 Connect downstream of existing segments.
 Insert into design after segment:– Select to use the drop-down list for choosing the
existing segment after which to insert the new segment(s). Use this option insert
segments into the middle of a design.
How is the new segment connected to the existing segments?

Select where the new segments should be positioned and whether AxCent should move them adja-
cent to the existing design or keep them in place by adding a duct or by modifying the end points.
Note: These options are not available if you select Insert into design after segment above.
 If there is space between the segments, add a duct.
 Move the new segments directly next to the existing segment.
 Keep the new segment in its place.
If the new segment doesn’t fit the existing segment exactly, which one
is modified?
Select which segments should be modified to make things fit properly when the new segments do
not fit the existing design exactly.
 The new segment
 The existing segment
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Append the New Segment to the Design dialog box 205
Manually shift the new segment in the Z direction before adding it.
If you do not want to place the new segments directly next to the existing design, specify an offset
in the Z direction in this box.
This is very useful if you are copying a segment from the current design and want to place it in an-
other location. It is also useful when copying from another file that uses a different coordinate sys-
tem than that used by the current design..
Note: This option is not available if you select Insert into design after segment.
Blade Generation Options dialog box
This dialog box allows you to select the type of blading to use with your design.
This dialog box appears when you choose Blade Angles – Blade Generation Option (KBLADE)
from the Geometry menu.
Note: Switching back and forth between blade generation types may not yield the same
blade shape in the end. Some of the blade definition may be lost along the way and
have to be specified again.
Select one of the following options:
 1 Independent hub and shroud
 3 Explicit shroud, radial inlet, exit rake
 4 Fully radial
 5 2-D wheel with Bezier beta distribution
 6 2-D wheel with straight or circular arc blades
 NACA 65 Airfoil blades
 CETI (Patented)
 Arbitrary number of midspan sections and stacking curve
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Blade Generation Options dialog box 207
 Specify shroud and lean angle
 Use a separate blade generating sheet
 Use blade sections defined in Z, RTheta (Axial blades only)
 2D Wedge Diffuser
 Custom
 Specify hub and extrusion direction
 Radial 2D Nozzle
 Drilled Nozzle
 Pipe Diffuser
 Create a flank millable surface
 Use theta instead of beta curves
Note: AxCent puts no restriction on which blade generation option you can use for your
design elements. It is perfectly fine to use a blade generation option intended for
diffusers to define the shape of an impeller, or vice versa. The only constraint is the
geometric shapes each option is able to generate.
Tip: Tip: For help choosing the best type of blade generation option for your design, see Quick
Reference: Choosing the right blade generation option.

Select this option to create all types of flat blades. This option is typically used when there is no com-
pelling reason to choose one of the other options.
In its basic form, the blades are flat and the edges are straight; however it's possible to use the bowing
option to bow the blade and to use the swept leading and trailing edge options to change their me-
ridional shape.
It is important to keep track of the lean angle when using this option to avid creating blades with
unreasonably high lean.
Select this option to indicate that the hub and shroud beta are independent curves. With this option,
QOs (quasi-orthogonals) are blade-generating lines and represent straight lines in 3D space. AxCent
automatically selects this option as the default.
With this blade option, the hub and shroud contours are independently specified. Therefore, the dis-
tribution of blade angles and the variation of blade lean angle from entry to exit must be carefully
considered. Since completely different beta, and therefore, wrap (q) distributions can be generated
on both shroud surface and hub surface, care must be taken to ensure that the final blade geometry
can be manufactured. Stress limitations may impose limitations on the flexibility allowed in this
blade generation option.
To view a sample of a design using this type of blade generation, open the Compex1 win.des file that
is installed in your \\Program Files\Concepts\AxCent\Examples directory.
3 Explicit shroud, radial inlet, exit rake
Select this option to create a typical impeller shape. Since only the shroud blade angles need to be
defined, this option creates a blade that is somewhat easier to manipulate compared to a blade cre-
ated with the 1 Independent hub and shroud option.
The most common use for this blade is to quickly set up an initial shape for either the 1 Independent
hub and shroud or the Specify shroud and lean angle options.
Select this option to use a shroud beta curve that you specify. The hub beta is calculated by AxCent
to match the following:
 Radial inlet up to user specified Z value (Zrad)
 Continuous beta and d /dm at Z = Zrad

 User specified rake (exit lean angle)
 User specified exit beta for the hub
This blade option sets out the definition of the blade with full flexibility on the shroud surface only.
Thus, along that surface polygon points may be manipulated and the blade may be generated in any
desired shape.
The hub surface is generated from the blade surface in such a manner that, from the entry for radial
outflow impellers to a certain Z equal to the specified value of Zrad defined in the blade generation
parameters, the blade is generated by radial blade elements only. There is one limitation to this form
of generation, which is that the blade leading edge must be a radial line.
From Zrad to the blade exit, a Bezier distribution is automatically generated to produce a hub beta
distribution that results in a specified value of hub beta at the exit and blade lean angle or rake angle
at the exit. Once these two parameters for the hub have been specified and Zrad is fixed at the desired
location, further manipulations of the entire blade are carried out by defining the distribution of beta
along the shroud surface. To modify Zrad, exit blade angle, and exit lean angle, choose Blade Angles
– Blade Generation Parameters from the Geometry menu.
To view a sample design using this type of blade generation, open the Compex2 win.des file that is
installed in your \\Program Files\Concepts\AxCent\Examples directory.
4 Fully radial
Select this option to create blades suitable for turbines.
Centrifugal forces will match the blade direction, which is desirable for hot running turbine blades
that might otherwise deform.
Select this option to use radial blading where q (theta) is constant at any Z coordinate.
This option is typically used to define radial blading for a turbine.
Radial blading is defined as using the following parameters:
 At any z location, theta is constant.
 Can also be written tan(beta)/(rcos(phi)) is constant at any Z location which insures that
dtheta/dz is constant across the span of the blade.
 You specify beta distribution on the cylinder at maximum radius of impeller. Beta is
projected onto hub and shroud using constant tan(beta)/(rcos(phi)).
 Blade generating lines are constant Z lines.
 You can specify a Z location (zrad) for the start of beta=0 blading.
When designing a compressor with this option, you can set beta = 0 at a certain Z value defined in
the blade generation parameters. The ability to select this Z value establishes a constant radial outlet
blade angle at the exit of radial element centrifugal impellers. Usually such a Z value might be es-
tablished at the shroud exit Z or somewhere between the shroud exit and hub exit Z values. The beta
polygon points used to define the blade angle in this option are measured in degrees from axial, and
are on a cylinder of radius equal to the outer radius that is the entry radius of a radial inflow turbine,
or the exit radius of a compressor impeller.
Thus, in the plot of beta versus meridional distance, the polygon points do not always lie on the blade
angle at entry and exit since the plotted distribution of blade angle is the commonly defined form
used previously. Note that during manipulation of polygon points, the point moves in such a manner
that its meridional distance remains constant since the beta function is a Bezier distribution of the
value of blade angle against meridional distance only.
To view a sample of a design using this type of blade generation, open the Turbine win.des file that
is installed in your \\Program Files\Concepts\AxCent\Examples directory.
6 2-D wheel with straight or circular arc blades
Select this option to create a blade that must be a straight line or a circular arc. This blading type has
applications very similar to the 5 2-D wheel with Bezier beta distribution option.
Another use of this option is to create wedge diffusers, using a straight line as the center line and
using the thickness distribution to get the desired wedge shape.
Select this option to use either straight lines or circular arcs to define the blade angle. After you select
this option, select Blade Angles – Blade Generation Parameters from the Geometry menu to spec-
ify the blade angle parameters.
Using this option you can specify the following:
 Blades are straight lines or circular arcs
 The exit b and radius of curvature
Note: Remember that constant b is a log spiral, not a straight line, and make sure the blade
can get to the hub.
To view a s1ample of a design using this type of blade generation, open the Compex5 win.des
(straight blade) or Compex6 win.des (circular arc blade) files that were installed in your \\Program
Files\Concepts\AxCent\Examples directory.
NACA 65 Airfoil blades

Select this option to create both axial and radial cascade diffusers.
Select this option to use NACA 65 profiles to define the) blading. For radial diffusers, the Axial cas-
cades are conformably mapped according to a prescribed flow angle to the radial configuration. Af-
ter you select this option, choose NACA 65 from the Geometry menu to specify the Axial Airfoil
parameters.
CETI (Patented)
Use the CETI (Concepts NREC LLC) patented modification of NACA 65 profiles to define airfoil
diffuser vanes.
All airfoils designed and/or evaluated with the CETI diffuser option utilize Patent Number
5,368,440. A worldwide royalty free license is granted to all current Agile Products Support (APS)
subscribers.
The patented CETI(00)06 diffuser option is a CETI-modified NACA 650406 low solidity airfoil sys-
tem which covers re-stagger angles of 5° about the nominal design angle. It has its own shape and
thickness distribution.
Arbitrary number of midspan sections and stacking curve

Select this option to create blades with complex shapes where control over the whole blade shape is
required. Because this option allows for detailed control of the shape in the hub-to-shroud direction,
you can, for example, control the incidence along the blade’s entire leading edge.
You can also use this option to capture the shape of an existing blade that has been imported to CAD-
FIT, if the existing blade does not conform to any other AxCent blading model. This blading option
is not used when there is no need for the detailed control of the blade shape it provides. The great
amount of control of the blade shape makes it more laborious to use compared to simpler blading
options.
Select this option to use additional mid-span beta and thickness distributions to create arbitrary
sculpted blades. Using this option, you can define an unlimited number of mid-span geometric sec-
tions. Each section has an independent meridional curve defining its position, a blade angle distri-
bution, and a blade thickness distribution. AxCent joins all the sections to form a NURBS
representation of the blade. After you select this option, choose Mid Span Geometry Defn. – Add
Section from the Geometry menu to add a new geometry defining section.
Select this option to create all types of flat blades. This is an alternative to the 1 Independent hub
and shroud option, and used for the same types of wheel. With this option, lean is much easier to
control,but defining the hub-blade angle is more difficult.
Select this option to design a shroud blade angle distribution and a lean angle distribution, and then
have AxCent calculate the hub blade angle distribution automatically to match the desired lean angle
distribution.
Use a separate blade generating sheet

Create a blade when a bowed shape that can be flank milled is needed. Note that if a rounded LE ore
TE is used, these usually have to be point milled.
This blading option is designed specifically for the following purpose: the blade is flat (like that cre-
ated by the 1 Independent hub and shroud option), but blade generating lines are independent of
the QOs. If the QOs cut the blade generating lines under an angle, you obtain a bowed blade that still
can be flank milled using the proper tool orientation.
Select this option to use an independent pair of hub/shroud contours to specify the blade shape. The
blade generating lines are independent from the QOs.
The blade is defined using an alternate set of pair of contours, after which a cookie cutter-like shape
of the segment punches out the actual part of the blade. The most common use of the blade generat-
ing sheet is to produce a bowed blade by cutting off a bit at the front and back of a ruled element
blade. Cuts that are not aligned with the ruled elements produce a bowing along the cut. No scaling
is involved.
 MCA – The Multiple Circular Arc blade section type is used for compressor blade
design in the Mach number range from 1.1 to 1.3. The position of maximum thickness is
placed beyond the 50% chord position, typically 60% to 70% chord. The design
objective is to provide a lower camber in the forward section of the blade to control the
flow deceleration with minimal shock loss. The remaining amount of required blade
turning takes place over the rear part of the blade.
 Bezier – The Bezier blade section type is used to directly configure the shape of the
pressure and suction surfaces. This is the typical approach for turbine blade design, but
it can also be used for compressor design.
 NACA – The NACA blade section type is used for compressor design. NACA blade
sections are defined internally by camber line coordinates and a thickness distribution as
a function of percent of chord. With this type, you specify the values for LE and TE
radii, the required lift coefficient and the maximum thickness. AxCent computes the
blade section shape.
 Modified Pritchard – The Modified Pritchard blade section type is used for turbine
blade design, either for the nozzle or the rotor. With this type, you specify the chord
length, the inlet and exit blade angles, the LE and TE radii and the LE wedge angle.
Fourth order polynomials are used to shape the suction and pressure surfaces to meet the
required throat dimension and to prevent the blade passage from being smaller than the
throat.
You can also use the unguided turning angle after you select the Modified Pritchard option. In un-
guided turning, the flow is outside the blade passage, and the suction surface guides the flow without
help from the pressure surface. The unguided turning angle (alpha) is the change in the blade suction
surface angle between point A and point B, as shown in the illustration below.
Note: You must select one of the unguided turning options (Order Unguided Turning
Curve or Unguided Turning) in the parameter filter table of the Blade Section
Parameters window after you select the Modified Pritchard option in this dialog box
 Simple Airfoil – With the Simple Airfoil blade section type, you specify the chord
length, the LE and TE blade angles, and the LE and TE radii. The maximum thickness/
chord ratio is specified along with the position of the maximum thickness along the
chord. The blade surfaces are shaped with the use of Bezier control points to match these
requirements.
 Constant Passage – The Constant Passage blade section type is used in impulse turbine
design. With this blade section type, the blade passage remains constant along the
streamline.
 Spline – Select a blade type for axial machines that is represented as a spline for the SS
and PS lines. The spline type is used primarily for 3D geometry reconstruction by means
of Python scripts and the automated import option in AxCent. You cannot edit the spline
blade section shape of the Z-RTheta type directly, but must convert the spline blades into
Bezier curves. Your only editing option is to restagger the blade, and edit the blade using
Bezier control points or parameter tables.
 Camberline-thickness – Select a camberline thickness blade for axial machines.
Note: You cannot edit this blade type except by using a workaround. You must convert the
blade section to a radially based, non- Z-RTheta blade type geometry with multiple
span-wise locations. This will allow access to editable plots and tables for the mid-
camber angle distribution and thickness plots.
 Curvature-Controlled – Select this option to use curvature-defined blade profiles, in
which the curvature distributions are defined by the pressure and the suction sides.
Continue to specify the profile by selecting it from a repository that is stored in AxCent
using the Select reference profile dialog box.
For a description of the curvature-controlled method, see Overview: Fundamentals of curvature-
controlled blades in AxCent.
Note: For each type of blade section, you can view and edit the section's parameters in the
Blade Section Parameters window.
2D Wedge Diffuser
Select this option to create wedge diffusers. The highly specialized nature of this blading option
makes it unsuitable for other purposes.
Select this option to define a wedge diffuser for radial compressors and pumps. Selecting this option
creates a wedge-shaped blade defined in the X-Y plane. The wedge is sheared off at the exit. The
leading edge can be sheared, rounded, or blunt.
Custom
Select this option to use your own blade generation engine. In order for this option to become avail-
able, you must develop and register your own Python-based script in AxCent. The instructions for
this script are included in the user_blade.py file, which is part of the AxCent installation (enclosed
in the axcent.zip file available from the default \\Program Files\Concepts\AxCent location).

Select this option to define an extrusion direction from the blade using a vector. With this option,
you specify the shape along the hub and that shape is then projected onto the shroud along a vector
you specify.
This option is useful when you want to design a 2D blade and want some lean to the blade while still
being able to use molds for the blade the molds need to be pulled off in the direction of the vector;
each blade requires its own copy of the mold and each mold must each be pulled off in a different
direction). This option is also suitable for flank milling (if other geometry options are set suitably).
This option is used in situations similar to those in which you would use the 5 2-D wheel with Bezier
beta distribution option, except that the extraction vector is always along the axis of rotation.
Radial 2D Nozzle
Select this option to specify a 2D radial nozzle using the 2D Radial Nozzle Settings dialog box.
Drilled Nozzle
Select this option to specify a drilled nozzle for an axial turbine using the Pipe Diffuser/Drilled Noz-
zle dialog box.
Pipe Diffuser
Select this option to specify a pipe diffuser for a compeller using the Pipe diffuser nozzle and trum-
pet dialog box.
Create a flank millable surface

Select this check box to create a flank milled surface.
Note: If you select this option along with other blading options on this dialog box that may
interfere with the creation of a flank millable surface, a warning message will appear
with suggestions for possible fixes. Flank millable blade surfaces must be ruled. To
learn more about related guidelines, see "Overview to flank millable blades" in
AxCent F1 Help.
Use the options below to give the AxCent program fewer constraints in constructing the flank mill-
able surface.
Allow for point milled leading and trailing edges

Select this option for cases in which the rounded leading and trailing edges do not match the surface
ruling direction of the blade.
Allow more than two sections to represent the blade shape

Select this option for cases in which the ruled surface of the blade cannot be represented using only
a hub and shroud section of matching points.
Use theta instead of beta curves

Select this check box to use the wrap angle theta rather than the blade angle beta to specify the blade
shape.
Blade Stagger Angle dialog box
Use this dialog box to restagger blades around an arbitrary axis, or to design movable blades or mov-
able inlet guide vanes without changing their geometry.
Using this dialog box, you can re-stagger the entire blade in a 3D space. The blade is first constructed
and then rotated around a specified axis. The blade shape is not changed, only rotated. Gaps and in-
terferences between the blade and the hub or shroud can occur when using this method because once
constructed, the blade is simply rotated.
This dialog box appears when you choose Blade Angles – Restagger blade on axis from the Ge-
ometry menu.
Note: To re-stagger new axial blades in a 2D space, use the Restagger blade dialog box. For
more information, see "Staggering blades" on page 76.
Movable blade – restagger by ___ deg

Select the check box and type the degrees by which to stagger the blades from the axis.
Restagger Axis section

Use this section to define the restagger axis, and to select constants for Z, R, and Theta coordinates.
Z/R
Type values for the Z and R coordinates of the hub and shroud.
Constant Z / Constant R / Constant Theta

Select one of these check boxes to use a constant (as opposed to a user-specified) value for the Z, R,
or Theta coordinates.
Theta relative to blade center line

Select this option to define Theta in relation to the center line of the blade.
Absolute theta
Select this option to use an absolute Theta as opposed to one relative to the blade's center line.
Restagger Angle Range section
Min ___ deg / Max ___ deg

Type the ideal minimum and maximum degrees for the re-staggering range.
Note: This option is for documentation purposes only. The range that you enter does not
affect the blade geometry.
Use variable name

Type a name for the blade angle that you have specified. If you type a name here, it will be appended
to the title of some flow plots (for example, the Absolute and Relative Velocity plots).
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Blade Stagger Angle dialog box 221
Blade Surface Selection dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the surfaces and sections of a CAD import.
The dialog box appears when you click in the CADFIT toolbar menu.
Surfaces section
Select one of the following surfaces in this window:
 Blade surface (PS+SS) – Pressure surfaces and suction surfaces together.
 Pressure Surface – Separate pressure surface.
 Suction Surface – Separate suction surface.
 Leading Edge Surface – Separate leading edge surface.
Number of sections
Specify the number of isoline sections to appear in the selected blade surface.
Note: This option is only active when you collect surfaces in the surfaces section above.
Flow direction section

For the direction of the ruled isoline surface, select either V-Iso (V direction) or U-Iso (U direction).
Leading edge location section

Use the slide bar to select the leading edge location (in a range from 0 to 1.0).
Machine type section

Select either the Radial or Axial machine type.
Collect button
Click this button to add an element to the tree in the Surfaces section in the proper category (such as
PS + SS together or separate PS or SS or LE).
Delete button
Click to delete a surface element selected in the Surfaces window.
Create AutoCurves button

Click to create streamwise curves when the isoparameter curves (V-Iso or U-Iso) are not appropriate.
The Autocurve option automates the steps for creating streamwise curves along surfaces that are not
parameterized in the streamwise direction. If the parameterization is streamwise, you can create the
curves using Iso-U or Iso-V curves. The AutoCurve option uses the shroud curve, the hub curve, and
the blade surface(s). AxCent interpolates a series of intermediate curves between the shroud and hub
curves. Each of these curves is revolved to create a surface-of-revolution. Each surface-of-revolu-
tion is then intersected with the blade surfaces to create curves.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Blade Surface Selection dialog box 223
Boundary Conditions dialog box
Use the Boundary Conditions dialog box to specify inlet, exit, and initial boundary conditions. You
can also use this dialog box to define rotating wall boundary conditions, to specify the front leakage
boundary conditions for a shrouded (closed) pump wheel, and to specify other boundary condition
options.
To view this dialog box, choose Boundary Conditions from the CFD menu.
– or if you run the Blade-to-Blade solver –
Choose Blade-to-Blade Solver – Boundary Conditions from the Flow menu.
– or if you run the Throughflow solver –
Choose Throughflow Solver – Boundary Conditions from the Flow menu.
This dialog box includes the following tabs:
 "Boundary Conditions dialog box – Boundary Conditions tab" on page 225.
 "Boundary Conditions dialog box – Front Leakage tab" on page 237.
 "Boundary Conditions dialog box – Initialization tab" on page 230
 "Boundary Conditions dialog box – Options tab" on page 234.
Boundary Conditions dialog box – Boundary Conditions tab
The values on the Boundary Conditions tab of the Boundary Conditions dialog box reflect the de-
fault inlet and exit boundary conditions represented by the intermediate values as determined by the
simplified analyses (Banig, Rapid Loading, or MST solvers) for the range of segments included in
the CFD run. AxCent provides default values for the exit static pressure.
To access this tab, choose Boundary Conditions from the CFD menu.
– or when running the Blade-to-blade solver –
Choose Blade to Blade Solver – Boundary Conditions from the Flow menu.
– or when running the Throughflow solver –
Choose Blade to Throughflow Solver – Boundary Conditions from the Flow menu.
Inflow values section

Source of inflow values
Select the source from which boundary conditions are imported:
 AxCent – Select this option to use the inflow values calculated by AxCent. When you
select this option, the table below this box displays the inflow values for viewing
purposes only. You cannot edit the displayed values.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Boundary Conditions dialog box 225
Note: When you select this option, inflow values are imported from the Fluid Properties tab
of the Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box. If the design was imported
from a Concepts NREC meanline program, the values on the Fluid Properties tab are
imported along with other design information from the meanline program. You can
edit the values on the Fluid Properties tab.
If you select this option, you are finished setting inlet boundary conditions.
 User-specified – Select this option to specify the inflow values. When you select this
option, use the table below this box to specify the inflow values.
 Axially periodic – Select this option to match the inflow and outflow states with a
pressure change that is adjusted to the mass flow specified below.
Note: This option is only available for incompressible-flow machines (such as pumps and
hydro-turbines).
Interpolation method
Select the method to curve fit the inlet boundary conditions from hub to shroud, either as Constant,
Linear, or Spline. If the inlet is uniform and you want the inlet boundary conditions to remain con-
stant from hub to shroud, select Constant; the values you enter in the first row of the table are used
for all other rows.
This box is available when you select User-specified in the Source of inflow values box.
Inflow values table

Use this table to specify the inlet values for each row. If you selected AxCent in the Source of inflow
values box, the table displays the values for viewing purposes only.
Note: The table displays only columns for parameters that apply for the type of solver being
used. Columns that do not appear in this table appear in the Inflows value table on
the Initialization tab.
For compressible flows and gas/liquid two phase inlets, the pair (total pressure, total temperature)
cannot define a unique point on the T-s diagram (the basic diagram in thermodynamics). The pair
(total pressure, total temperature) defines the two-phase inlet boundary condition completely.
For compressible flows of rotors, the relative inflow angle sometimes is more adequate for some
applications.
% Span
The spanwise location where the inlet boundary conditions are applied. The hub is located at zero
percent span, and the tip is at 100 percent. This parameter is used for compressible flow only.
P0 (Pa)
The total pressure at the inlet – fixed as an inlet boundary condition. This parameter is used for com-
pressible flows only. For incompressible flows, this value is used to provide cavitation information;
it will not affect the solution. This column appears if you select the Specify inlet total pressure op-
tion in the “Momentum” section.
Mass Distr
The mass distribution of flow at the inlet. This is available when you select Specify inlet mass flow
in the Momentum section.
Mass Distr allows the user to control the distribution of mass flow in the spanwise direction. The
values are normalized so that the total mass flow equals what you specify in the "Mass flow" section.
For example, if you specify spanwise stations at 0 and 1, and mass distribution values of 25 and 75,
the mass flow will be linearly distributed in the spanwise direction, with the mass flow at the hub
equal to 0.5 times the specified mass flow, and 1.5 times the specified mass flow at the shroud (in
other words, 25 gets normalized to 0.5 and 75 gets normalized to 1.5).
T0 (K)
The total temperature at the inlet – fixed as an inlet boundary condition. This parameter is used for
compressible flows only. This column appears if you select the Specify inlet temperature option in
the “Energy” section.
HO (J/Kg)
The enthalpy at the inlet. This column appears if you select the Specify inlet enthalpy option in the
“Energy” section.
Ct (m/s)
The absolute tangential velocity at inlet, used for initializing the flow field only. This parameter is
used for both incompressible and compressible flow.
Cm (m/s)
The absolute meridional velocity at inlet, used for initializing the flow field only. This parameter is
available for pump designs with incompressible flow only.
Swirl (°)
The flow swirl angle at the inlet. Swirl ( ) = ATAN (Ct / Cm). This angle is measured from the me-
ridional surface. This parameter is used for compressible flows only.
Pitch (°)
The flow pitch angle at the inlet. This angle is measured from the horizontal surface. This parameter
is used for compressible flows only.
Momentum section
 Specify inlet total pressure – Select this option to specify inlet total pressure (P0).
 Specify inlet mass flow – Select this option to specify inlet mass flow (Mass Distr). If
you select this option, you can edit the value in the Mass flow box.
Energy section
 Specify inlet temperature – Select this option specify Inlet temperature (T0).
 Specify inlet enthalpy – Select this option to specify Inlet enthalpy (H0). This option is
recommended for two-phase inflow.
Angle section
 Use absolute swirl angle, Ct – Select this option to specify the absolute swirl angle
(Ct).
 Use relative swirl angle, Wt – Select this option to specify a relative swirl angle and
relative tangential velocity (Wt).
Mass flow section

Source of mass-flow value
From the drop-down list, select the source for mass-flow value, whether AxCent or User-specified.
 For the AxCent program to calculate the mass flow value, select AxCent.
 To type a value for mass flow in the Mass flow box, select User-specified
Mass flow
Type a value for mass flow. This box is available if you select any of the following options, and then
select User-specified in the Source of mass flow drop-down list:
 Specify inlet mass flow option in the "Momentum" section.
 Specify mass flow option in the "Exit values" section.
Exit values section

Use this section to specify exit boundary condition values.
Specify exit pressure

Select this option to specify exit pressure in this section.
Specify mass flow

Select this option to specify mass flow in the "Mass flow" section. This option enforces inlet mass
flow at the exit.
Source of pressure values

Select the source from which to obtain pressure values:
 AxCent – Select this option to use the exit static pressure values calculated by AxCent.
When you select this option, the other options in this section display the AxCent values.
You cannot edit the displayed values. If you select this option, you are finished setting
exit boundary conditions.
 User-specified – Select this option to specify the exit static pressure values. When. you
select this option, use the rest of the options in this section to specify exit pressure
values, as described below.
Pressure type
Select the method you want to use to specify the exit static pressure::
 Absolute Pressure – Select this option to specify the pressure (in Pa, Psi, etc.) as an
absolute (vs. relative) value.
 Pressure Ratio – Select this option to specify the exit static pressure as a ratio relative
to the inlet total pressure.
 Pressure Difference – Select this option to specify the difference in pressure relative to
the inlet total pressure (in Pa, Psi, etc.).
 Head – Select this option to specify the difference in pressure as “head”. This is
calculated by using the density of the fluid at inlet conditions by determining the height
of a fluid column required to produce the required pressure. This calculation depends on
the density of the fluid used. This option is commonly used for pumps.
 Head (H20) – Select this option to specify the difference in pressure as “head”, using
water as the fluid to calculate head (thus using water density rather than fluid density).
Exit pressure
Select the method for setting up pressure distributions at exit boundaries. The static pressure at the
exit is used as the downstream boundary condition.
 Hub fixed, radial equilibrium to shroud – Select this option to fix the pressure at hub.
The simplified radial equilibrium equation is then used to calculate the pressure for the
cells above the hub. The pressure is uniform in circumferential direction. Set the exit
pressure on the Initialization tab to this value. This option is recommended for flows
without separations in the hub region.
 Linear hub to shroud – Select this option to fix the pressures at hub and shroud. The
pressure on boundary faces in between is linearly interpolated radially. The pressure is
uniform in circumferential direction. This option is recommended for radial machines. It
is also applicable to mixed and axial flow machines when exit swirling is negligible, or
separations on the exit surfaces are expected to happen. Blade-to-Blade flow solvers use
this option as default. Set the exit pressure in the Initialization tab to the mean of these
values.
 Shroud fixed, radial equilibrium to hub – Select this option to fix the pressure at the
shroud. The simplified radial equilibrium equation is then used to calculate the pressure
for the cells below the shroud. The pressure is uniform in the circumferential direction.
Set the exit pressure in the Initialization tab to this value. Use this option for flows
without separations in the shroud region.
 Mid-span fixed, radial equilibrium – Select this option to fix the pressure at the mid-
span. The simplified radial equilibrium equation is then used to calculate the pressure
for the cells between the mid-span and the shroud and the mid-span and the hub. The
pressure is uniform in circumferential direction. Set the exit pressure in the Initialization
tab to this value. This option is recommended for all axial and mixed-flow machines.
Exit pressure at tip

If you selected User-specified in the Source of pressure values box, you can specify the exit tip pres-
sure in this box. This box is disabled and displays the AxCent or AXIAL values if one of those op-
tions is selected.
Exit pressure at midspan

If you selected User-specified from the Source of pressure values drop-down list box, you can spec-
ify the exit midspan pressure in this box. This box is disabled and displays the AxCent or AXIAL
values if one of those options is selected.
Exit pressure at hub

If you selected User-specified from the Source of pressure values drop-down list box, you can spec-
ify the exit hub pressure in this box. This box is disabled and displays the AxCent or AXIAL values
if one of those options is selected.
Boundary Conditions dialog box – Initialization tab
Use the Initialization tab of the Boundary Conditions dialog box to specify initialization values for
the CFD run.
Inflow values from AxCent section

This section indicates your selection in the Source of inflow values box on the Boundary Conditions
tab: "Inflow values from AxCent" or "Inflow values are user-specified".
Note: If the inflow values come from AxCent, they are imported from the Fluid Properties
tab of the Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box. If the design was imported
from a meanline design, the values on the Fluid Properties tab are imported along
with other design information from the meanline program. You can edit the values on
the Fluid Properties tab.
Inflow conditions table

Use the table to specify each element of the inflow condition for your design.
Note: This table displays columns for parameters that apply for the type of solver being
used. Columns that do not appear in this table appear in the table on the Boundary
Conditions tab.
For compressible flows and gas/liquid two-phase inlets, the pair (total pressure, total temperature)
cannot define a unique point on the T-s diagram (the basic diagram in thermodynamics). In such cas-
es, the pair (total pressure, total enthalpy) defines the two-phase inlet boundary condition complete-
ly.
For compressible flows of rotors, the relative inflow angle sometimes is more adequate for some ap-
plications.
% Span
The spanwise location where the inlet boundary conditions are applied. The hub is located at zero
percent span, and the tip is at 100 percent. This parameter is used for compressible flows only.
Ct (m/s)
The absolute tangential velocity at inlet, used for initializing the flow field only. This parameter is
used for compressible flows only.
Cm (m/s)
The absolute meridional velocity at inlet, used for initializing the flow field only. This parameter is
used for compressible flows only.
Swirl (°)
The flow swirl angle at the inlet. Swirl ( ) = ATAN (Ct / Cm). This angle is measured from the me-
ridional surface. This parameter is used for compressible flows only.
Pitch (°)
The flow pitch angle at the inlet. Swirl ( ) = ATAN (Ct / Cm). This angle is measured from the hor-
izontal surface. This parameter is used for incompressible flows only.
Flow field initialization section

Use three-dimensional flow field from AxCent
If you selected AxCent in the Source of pressure values box (under the “Exit values" section on the
Boundary Conditions tab) and you want to use a three-dimensional flow field, select this check box
and then select whether or not you want to use optimized results:
 Optimized (One-zone model)
 Non-optimized results
Note: To enable this section, you must first select H-Classic on the Topology tab (Grid
dialog box), and select AxCent as the source of pressure values in the "Exit values"
section of the Boundary Conditions tab.
Static Pressure section

If you select AxCent in the Source of pressure values box (under the “Exit values" section on the
Boundary Conditions tab), AxCent calculates the initial pressure using your preferred method of cal-
culation, whether Linear or Logarithmic (as listed below).
If you select User-specified in the Source of pressure values (under the “Exit values” section on the
Boundary Conditions tab) and do not select a pressure distribution method, use the table in this sec-
tion to specify the static pressure for each bladed segment. The options in this section are available
for more than one bladed segment in the CFD model. These values are used for initializing the flow
field.
 Linear – Calculates a linear distribution of static pressure throughout the machine based
on the inlet static pressure and the outlet static pressure.
 Logarithmic – Calculates a logarithmic distribution of static pressure throughout the
machine based on the inlet static pressure and the outlet static pressure.
 Recalculate button – Recalculate the pressure distribution.
When you select an option, click the Recalculate button to update the values in the Static Pressure
table.
Note: This section is enabled when you select User-specified in the Source of pressure
values box on the Boundary Conditions tab.
Pressure type
Select the type of pressure in this drop-down list for initializing the flow field:
 Absolute Pressure – Select this option to specify the pressure (in KPa) as an absolute
(vs. relative) value.
 Pressure Ratio – Select this option to specify the exit static pressure as a ratio relative
to the inlet total pressure.
 Pressure Difference – Select this option to specify the difference in pressure relative to
the inlet total pressure (in KPa).
 Head – Select this option to specify the difference in pressure as “head”. This is
calculated by using the density of the fluid at inlet conditions by determining the height
of a fluid column required to produce the required pressure. This calculation depends on
the density of the fluid used. This option is commonly used for pumps.
 Head (H20) – Select this option to specify the difference in pressure as “head”, using
water as the fluid to calculate head (thus using water density).
Static pressure table

This table is enabled when you select User-specified in the Source of pressure values box on the
Boundary Conditions tab. If you selected another option as the source, the table displays the values
from the selected source, but the values are not editable.
 Row number – Displays a column for each blade row.
 Inlet – The pressure at the interface or at the inlet surface for the first blade row.
 Leading edge – The pressure at the leading edge.
 Trailing edge – The pressure at the trailing edge.
 Exit – The pressure at the interface or at the exit surface of the last blade row.
Method section
Select one of the following methods for calculating the initial solution for the next generated grid:
 Uniform – Use constant methods, specifying them in the methods basis table below.
 Variable – Use variable pressure distribution and velocity vectors that are calculated
from the shape of the domain. This method is based on the grid geometry and mass flow
preservation. It uses a default set of options that should work correctly for most grids.
Method basis table
Using the drop-down list, select the method of calculation for each the following variables:
Variable Method basis
Pressure and Density Constant (inflow/outflow values) – The entire flow

field is set to a constant value equal to the value for the
user-specified inlet/exit pressure of the blade row.
Linear inlet to exit – Pressure is interpolated using the
linear function from inlet to exit.
Velocities (Vz, Vr, Vt) Constant inflow values – The tangential velocity (Vt) is
constant and set to the specified inflow value. The
meridional velocity vector is calculated from the grid
contour (Z - R).
Passage geometry – The tangential velocity is
calculated from the interpolated grid geometry.
Meridional velocity is based on mass flow preservation
in a stream-wise direction.
Damping function – Same as passage geometry, but
with the addition of a damping function that is used to
smooth local variations of velocity vectors.
Fluid (viscosity. Cp, gamma) Isentropic flow – The temperature is calculated based
on constant entropy assumption.
Constant rothalpy – The temperature is calculated
based on constant rothalpy assumption.
Pressure/density – The temperature is calculated
numerically from pressure and density functions.
Rothalpy Pressure/Velocities – Calculated based on the previous

variables.
Entropy Pressure/Fluid – Calculated based on the previous

variables.
Existing solution or grid*

Select this option to initialize the grid by interpolating flow field values from an existing CFD solu-
tion or from a previously generated grid with an initial solution.
This option is enabled only for solutions or grids that are compatible with the current grid settings.
The segment ranges must include the currently selected grid segment range. The list box contains
the titles of compatible CFD runs. Entries with an asterisk (*) designate grids with initial solutions
only.
Boundary Conditions dialog box – Options tab
Use the Options tab of the Boundary Conditions dialog box to specify various inlet and exit bound-
ary condition options for the CFD run. Pushbutton CFD defaults to a subsonic inlet flow and a sub-
sonic exit flow situation. The “subsonic” flow speed is defined in the absolute frame of reference. In
turbomachinery flows, absolute supersonic inlet or exit flows are not often encountered.
INMACH
Select whether the inlet boundary condition is subsonic or supersonic:
 Fixed inlet swirl angle (subsonic)
 Fixed inlet swirl velocity (supersonic)
Flow swirl angle is fixed at the inlet boundary if the flow is subsonic, while flow swirl velocity is
fixed for supersonic inflow.
Vx inlet
Select how Pushbutton CFD should obtain an initial guess of Vx at the inlet:
 From Vmerid and d(Vr)/dm = 0
 Meridional angle specified and fixed
Vr inlet
Select how Pushbutton CFD should obtain an initial guess of Vr at the inlet:
 From d(Vr)/dm = 0
 Meridional angle specified and fixed
Ps inlet
Select the method for streamwise extrapolating static pressure at the inlet:
 dp/dm = 0 at inlet
 d 2p/dm 2 = 0 at inlet (radial flow)
 Low speed inflow model/Pump inlet
Usually the second order derivative equal to 0 (zero) is recommended, especially for radial inflow
machines; however, if the inlet relative flow is transonic or supersonic, choose the dp/dm = 0 at in-
let option for this option works better for these types of relative flows.
Exit streamwise interpolation

Select the method for obtaining density and velocity component distribution at the exit boundary.
 Linear interpolation – The density and velocity components at the exit boundary will
be interpolated using the two cells just upstream of the boundary.
 Zero order interpolation – The density and velocity components at the exit boundary
will be set to the values in the cell adjacent to the boundary.
 Supersonic exit – The density and velocity components at the exit boundary will be
interpolated using the three cells just upstream of the boundary.
Mixing plane
This option specifies the type of mixing plane used when there is more than one bladed segment. A
mixing plane is used to transfer data between two blade rows: mass conserved or flux conserved.
Blade row interface

Use the options in this section to select the model for exchanging data between blade rows. Each
blade row can have a different rotation speed, or can be stationary, and each blade row can have any
number of splitters. These options are not available for single-blade row cases. The Pushbutton CFD
solvers are steady-state flow solvers and require special treatment of the flow between rotating and
non-rotating sections of blade rows.
 Circumferential Averaging – This model averages the flow variables in the pitchwise
direction at the interface between rotating and non-rotating segments.
 Frozen Rotor – This model freezes the relative positions of each blade row, and
exchanges the circumferential profiles upstream and downstream of the interface with
scaling. In other words, the wake typically sheds off the rotor suction side, remaining
fixed (or “frozen”) relative to the non-rotating downstream blade segments. This model
is recommended when the gap between blade rows is very narrow.
Non-reflective
Select one or more of these check boxes to use non-reflective boundary conditions. Non-reflective
boundary conditions are useful when the blade rows are closely spaced, when the inlet or exit is
short, or when one or more shocks cross the boundary.
Note: These check boxes are not available for incompressible flows.
 Inlet – Select this check box to apply non-reflective boundary conditions at the inlet.
This option is required if you specify mass flow at the inlet.
 Exit – Select this option to apply non-reflective boundary conditions at the exit. This
option is required if you specify mass flow at the exit.
 Mixing plane – Select this check box to apply non-reflective boundary conditions at the
mixing plane.
Note: The mixing plane option is not available for frozen rotor calculations.
Injection/extraction slot type

Select one of the following injection/extraction slot types:
 Zero momentum – Use injection/extraction as source terms in the mass and energy
conservation equations.
 Directional – Use injection/extraction as a boundary condition that includes the
momentum contribution. The direction of the momentum is determined by the offset
angle specified on the Slot Selection dialog box.
Per blade row data

Select this check box to define roughness for each blow row; otherwise, roughness will be defined
for all blade rows and segments.
If you select this check box, use the table to specify roughness (in mm) and partial admission (in %)
for each blade row.
Equivalent sand roughness [mm]

In this cell, specify the equivalent sand roughness. In contrast to the actual height of the protrusion,
this is a measure to describe the roughness of walls due to the distribution and density of the sands.
Partial admission %
In this cell, specify the percentage of partial admission.
Physically, the flow only goes through partial circumferential surface for the first several blade rows,
but the mass flow rate is the same for each blade row. The partial admission coefficient is defined
as the open area to the whole area.
Numerically, each blade row is fully open to the flow, but only part of the flow is passed to the down-
stream blade rows. This results in a step variation of mass flow over the machine.
This is modeled at the stage interface as an isentropic process, and the velocity triangle remains un-
changed.
The loss associated with the partial admission is accounted by a loss model.
Frozen rotor row clocking

Use the options in this table to control the relative positions of the blades (or rotational offset) in
adjacent blade rows.
Note: These options are available when you select Frozen Rotor for the Blade row
interface above.
Interface
The blade row interface to which you assign a rotational offset. (Read only.)
Ref Pitch (deg)

Reference pitch in degrees for each interface. (Read only.)
Clocking
Specify a rotational offset parameter ranging from 0 to 1. This represents a fraction of the larger of
the two pitches of the adjoining blade rows. The fraction is converted into a relative angular offset
that is applied to the downstream blade row.
For example, if you specify a relative shift of 0.2 for the first interface (Interface) based on a refer-
ence pitch of 30° (Ref Pitch [deg]), an absolute offset (Clocking) of 6° will be specified for each
block in the second blade row. The solver applies this offset to the frozen-rotor boundary condition.
All blocks in a given bladed row must have the same offset. In the first blade row, the blocks should
have a zero offset.
In post-processing, the grid blocks and geometry are transformed in 2D and 3D plots to visually rep-
resent the CFD calculation. This requires that a cumulative offset be applied to each successive blade
row. For example, if the second blade row is shifted by 10° relative to the first, and the third blade
row is shifted by 5° relative to the second, then in the plot views, the second blade row is shifted by
10° and the third by 15°.
Boundary Conditions dialog box – Front Leakage tab

Use the Front Leakage tab of the Boundary Conditions dialog box to specify the front leakage
boundary conditions for a shrouded (closed) pump wheel. Leakage is the return path for a fraction
of the flow that leaves the main flow passage at the extraction slot, which then goes through a pas-
sage between the shroud outer wall and casing, and then returns to the main flow passage at the in-
jection slot.
To access this tab, choose Boundary Conditions from the CFD menu, and then click the Front
Leakage tab.
Selected segment
From this drop-down list box, select the rotating bladed segment to which to apply front leakage pa-
rameters.
Mass flow
In this box, specify the amount of mass flow that will go through the return path. This value can be
obtained either from Agile link or from a value that you specify (User specified).
Pressure
In this box, specify the static pressure at the injection slot (in the left box), and the static pressure at
the extraction slot (in the right box). For pumps, these two values are not used.
Temperature
In this box, specify the static temperature at the injection slot (in the left box), and the static tem-
perature at the extraction slot (in the right box). For pumps, these two values are not used.
From Agile
Select this option to use Agile default values.
User specified
Select this option to specify your own values for the parameters.
Injection slot / Extraction slot

The injection slot and extraction slot are circular surfaces defined by Extension and Gap.
 Extension – In this box, specify the meridional distance between the injection/extraction
slot and the leading/trailing edge.
 Gap – In this box, specify the size of the gap measured in meridional distance.
Perform leakage calculations

Select this check box to take into account the flow leaving the primary passage and the flow coming
into the passage. You can then specify where (in the Slot Selection dialog box) and how much flow
(in the Mass flow box on this tab) leaves or joins the primary passage. For shrouded wheels, the flow
goes through the cavity between the casing and the outer wall of the shroud. This flow is called leak-
age flow. Pushbutton CFD cannot simulate the flow in this cavity unless this option is selected.
Bowed Blading Parameters dialog box
Use this dialog box to set up bowed blading for your blade design. This option is only for designs
using Independent Hub and Shroud type of blading.
This dialog box appears when you choose Bowed Blading – Bowed Blading Setup from the Ge-
ometry menu. You can then view the bow distribution and the proportional distance distribution.
Bowed blade
Select this check box to activate the bowed blading options. If you do not select this check box, the
hub to shroud camber line is defined by straight lines.
Basic
Select this option to use basic bowed blading parameters. Use the boxes in this section to specify
circumferential distances at the inlet and exit at some proportional distance from the hub.
Entry R delta Theta

The amount of bowing from a straight line at the leading edge of the blade, such as 1.2 mm.
Entry prop. dist. from hub

The proportional distance from hub to shroud (0 = hub, 1 = shroud) where the peak of the bowing
occurs at the leading edge of the blade. Values between 0.3 and 0.7 are recommended.
Exit R delta Theta

The amount of bowing from a straight line at the trailing edge of the blade.
Exit prop. dist. from hub

The proportional distance from hub to shroud (0 = hub, 1 = shroud) where the peak of the bowing
occurs at the trailing edge of the blade. Values between 0.3 and 0.7 are recommended.
Advanced
Select this option to use advanced bowed blading parameters. This option allows you to have full
access to Bezier curves to define bowing distributions for the entire blade.
Percent M from LE to end of bow

Type the percent of meridional distance where the bowing ends when you want to bow the inducer
only, such as 50%. A straight blade is produced after the specified %M.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Bowed Blading Parameters dialog box 239
Edit Now button
After you type a value in the Percent M from LE to end of bow box, click the Edit Now button. The
following windows appear so that you can edit the bowing distribution by moving plot points:
 Prop Distance Distribution window
 Bow Distribution window
Note: You can also edit the bowing distribution by selecting Bowed Blading – Bow
Distribution or Bowed Blading – Prop. Distance Distribution from the Geometry
menu
Hub-Shroud shapes
Select this option to define the hub-to-shroud bow shapes. With this option, you will add hub-shroud
shapes and then manually adjust the shapes with Bezier curves in the Hub to Shroud Bow Shape win-
dow.
Number of user-defined hub-shroud shapes

The number of hub-shroud shapes you want to define. For each hub-shroud shape, a row will appear
in the table to thr right of this box..
Hub-shroud shapes table

For each hub-shroud shape that you have specified, type the values for %M rms (or percentage of
meridional distance along the RMS [root-mean-square] contour).
Edit Now button

After you specify values in the Hub-shroud shapes table, click the Edit Now button.The Hub to
Shroud Bow Shape window appears so that you can edit the shapes with Bezier points.
Bring in Model dialog box
Use this dialog box to copy information from an existing design into a design that you currently have
open in AxCent. The options in this dialog box allow you to copy hub and shroud information, and
to specify whether or not endpoints are to be used. You can also copy fluid dynamic loading param-
eters and swept leading edge specifications.
You can also choose to copy the endpoints of the desired contour; otherwise, the source shape is
scaled to fit between the endpoints in the current design.
This dialog box appears when you choose Operations – Bring in Model from the Geometry menu.
Note: You can also import segments by choosing Import/Copy Segment from the Setup
menu.
Select File button

Click this button to select the file from which to copy the design information. After you select the
file, the name of the file appears in the box next to this button.
Design title
Displays the title of the design from which you want to copy information.
Choose segment
Select the segment from which you want to copy information into the current segment, The infor-
mation that is copied depends on your selections in the "Select items to copy" section.
Select items to copy section
Hub contour
Select this check box to copy the hub contour information from the specified segment.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Bring in Model dialog box 241
Shroud contour
Select this check box to copy the shroud contour information from the specified segment.
When you select either contour option, you can then specify whether to copy the contour information
into the hub contour (Hub) or shroud contour (Shroud) of your current design. You can also choose
to copy the endpoints (Copy endpoints) of the desired contour; otherwise, the source shape is scaled
to fit between the endpoints in the current design.
Hub beta distribution

Select this check box to copy the hub beta distribution from the specified segment.
Shroud beta distribution

Select this check box to copy the shroud beta distribution from the specified segment.
When you select either beta distribution option, you can then specify whether to copy the beta dis-
tribution information into the hub beta distribution (Hub) or shroud beta distribution (Shroud) of
your current design. You can also choose to copy the endpoints (Copy endpoints) of the desired beta
distribution; otherwise, the source shape is scaled to fit between the endpoints in the current design
(the inlet and exit blade angles do not change).
Hub thickness distribution

Select this check box to copy the hub thickness distribution from the specified segment.
Shroud thickness distribution

Select this check box to copy the shroud thickness distribution from the specified segment.
When you select either thickness distribution option, you can then specify whether to copy the thick-
ness distribution information into the hub thickness distribution (Hub) or shroud thickness distribu-
tion (Shroud) of your current design. You can also choose to copy the endpoints (Copy endpoints)
of the desired thickness distribution; otherwise, the source shape is scaled to fit between the end-
points in the current design (the thicknesses at the leading and trailing edge do not change).
Parameters
Select this check box to copy fluid loading parameters as well as geometry from the selected segment
into your design.
Swept leading edge

Select this check box to copy swept leading edge parameters from the selected segment into your
design.
CADFIT dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the number of control points to be included in the file that you are
importing to CADFIT.
Number of points on PS/SS sides

Specify the number of points on both the pressure and suction sides.
Number of points on LE
Specify the number of points on the leading edge.
Number of blades
Specify the number of blades.
Launch Cadfit button

Click to start the CADFIT program. The design appears in the CADFIT windows.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® CADFIT dialog box 243

CFD Results dialog box
The CFD Results dialog box displays the status of the CFD runs for the current design. The variables
used in the CFD solution are listed in a table. You can keep this dialog box open when you perform
CFD runs as well, and control the runs using the buttons provided.
The dialog box also allows you to view the CFD line plots for individual parameters that are listed
on the run tables
This dialog box appears when you choose CFD Runs from the CFD menu.
– or –

– or –
Click the Run Map button on the Generate Map tab of the Start Full 3D PBPlus (AxCent grid) dia-
log box.
Variables table
The table displays the status of each CFD run for the current design in the following tabs (each tab
represents a group of CFD results that you can configure on the CFD Results Group dialog box):
 All – The results of all CFD runs.
 Grids – A built-in results group containing grids.
 Solution – A built-in group containing only successfully completed solutions.
 Custom – A user-specified results group for which you can specify group name, solver
runs and line plots.
 Auto group – A user-specified results group for which you can specify group name and
filter criteria.
Note: The status of the solution is indicated by the color of its column: red indicates that
the solution has not run, blue indicates active, gray indicates finished and active.
To perform an action on a listed CFD run, select the run by clicking its name in the Parameter row.
For each listed run, the table lists the following information:
 Parameter – The name of the design and the run.
You can view a multiple solution by highlighting the row containing the parameter variable in the
run table of the CFD Results dialog box. The solution results appear as separate lines on the line plot.
 Status – The status of the CFD run.
 Grid Nodes – The dimensions of the grid.
 Iterations – The number of iterations completed.
 Started – The time the run began.
 Results– The version of solution you are viewing. For this release of AxCent, this
column always displays “Final”.
 Path – The full path of the directory that contains the CFD files generated for the run.
 A list of selected mass-averaged values computed at specified streamwise grid slices.
These values are computed automatically when each run finishes (either the maximum
number of iterations or when the solver is stopped). If necessary, use the scroll bar to
view all of the values.
Note: The variables listed here are determined by the contents of the CFD Results Variable
file that you specify in the Preferences dialog box. For more information, see "Setting
preferences" on page 39.
 Mass Flow Rate – The mass flow rate reported by the solver for the run. It corresponds
to the mass flow rate from the convergence plot.
Buttons
Use the buttons below to manage your CFD runs (note that some buttons affect the selected CFD
run).
Group section
Plot
Click this button to select the map plots for display. Customized map plots are created on the Plot
tab of the CFD Results Groups dialog box.
To learn about this dialog box, see "CFD Results Groups dialog box" on page 248.
Parameters
Click this button to open the CFD Results Variable dialog box and edit the variables used in the se-
lected CFD run.
To learn about this dialog box, see "CFD Results Variables dialog box" in AxCent Help.
Manage
Click this button to customize the CFD results using the CFD Results Groups dialog box.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® CFD Results dialog box 245
Selection section
Note: To activate the buttons for New 3D View, New 2D View, and New Line Plot, you must
select at least one variable row in the runs table. Multiple selections are also
supported.
Set Active
Click this button to make the selected CFD run active. If the solution data is not loaded, the solution
file is read and the 2D and 3D CFD windows are set to display data from this run. If you do not al-
ready have the 2D or 3D windows open, Pushbutton CFD opens these windows for the run.
Design
Click this button to apply CFD throughflow solution data to a new AxCent design file. This design
is created from span-wise parameters that are extracted from the CFD solution. Continue to specify
the parameter data in the Apply CFD Results dialog box that appears.
View Log
Click this button to view the CFD solver output in text format.
3D View
Click this button to a open a new 3D CFD window showing a filled contour plot of the selected CFD
run.
2D View
Click this button to select a 2D CFD window displaying a filled contour plot of the selected CFD
run. The views consists of three-dimensional grid slices projected onto two-dimensional surfaces.
Select one of the options for directions of the grid slice:
 Blade-to-blade slice
 Streamwise slice
 Hub-to-shroud slice
 Blade-to-blade average – This 2D view displays all averaged grid slices (identified by J).
Along with the 3D View and Line Plot buttons below, this button is activated when you select a sin-
gle variable or multiple variable rows in the tables above.
Line Plot
Click this button to select one of the following options for a CFD line plot window:
 Streamwise
 Hub-to-Shroud
 Pressure/Suction
 Multi-line sampling
 Combined plot – Select this option to view multiple solutions for a parameter
highlighted on the run table (the options that are listed below this heading are identical
to those listed above).
The Combined Plot option appears under the following conditions:
 When you select the same variable among multiple solutions (by selecting a table row
across multiple columns).
 When you select a variable for which a Line Plot View is already displayed, and the
selected variable can be added to the existing plot.
Move
Click this button to move the folder containing the run to another location on the computer. By using
this button to move the run, the run will continue to appear in this table after the move.
Export
Click this button to save the results in a file format to generate a model of the results, including grid
connectivity and boundary conditions.
You have the option of exporting the grids in any of the following formats:
PLOT3D Solution Files (.q)
PLOT3D Grid Files (.xyz)
PLOT3D Binary Files (*.*)
PLOT3D Text Files (*.*)
Paraview files (.vtm)
CGNS (CFD General Notation System) (.cgns)
Tecplot File (*.tec)
Boundary Conditions (*.xml)
Throughflow Template (*.xml)
Remove...
Click to remove a column for a solver run selected (or highlighted) on the table.
Results section
Refresh
Click this button to select the CFD runs to be refreshed in the CFD Results Selection dialog box.
Note: Refreshing multiple solutions can take a long time.
Repair
Click this button to locate the solution file associated with the current CFD run if AxCent has not
found the solution file (indicated by the Finished - Not Found run status).
Note: When you specify the solution file with this button, the solution is not active in the
CFD windows unless you activate it by selecting the run and then clicking the Set
Active button. This feature also works for multiple selections.
Stop Solver
Click this button to cancel a CFD run or remove it from the batch queue if the run is Pending. Push-
button CFD stops the solver at the next multiple of 10 iterations.
Close
Click this button to close the dialog box.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® CFD Results dialog box 247
CFD Results Groups dialog box
Use this dialog box to manage CFD results groups and map plots.
You can specify and save CFD map plots containing data from several CFD runs.
The map plots operate on a specific group of CFD runs.
The CFD Results Group dialog box appears when you choose Map Plot from the CFD menu.
– or –
When you click Plot – New Plot or Manage in the Group section of the CFD Results dialog box.
– or –
Right-click a CFD map plot and select Choose Data from the shortcut menu.
CFD results groups list

The list box contains both default and user-specified CFD results groups.
To view its attributes and its content, highlight a group from the list box.
For user-defined groups (such as customized or auto groups), use the check box to select the group
to edit or delete.
To specify a new custom group (Custom) or auto group (Auto), select new ...
Delete button
Delete a Custom or Auto group when you select it in the group list.
Apply/Add button
The Add button appears for newly created groups; Apply appears for existing Custom or Auto
groups when you highlight the group and select its name in the Name box.
Click Add to specify the name and attributes of the new group (when selected in the Name window).
Click Apply to save the changes to a selected group.
If you highlight new in the list box, add the new group to the list under the name specified in the
Name box.
If you highlight a Custom or Auto group in the same list box, click Apply after you have specified
the group in the dialog box.
Built-in/Custom/Auto
Select one of the following options for the group type:
 Built-in – Built-in CFD results groups that cannot be edited or selected as a group type.
The names of these groups cannot be changed.
 Custom – User-specified results groups, or design-specific groups of CFD results. In
addition to the group name, you can specify CFD runs on the Contents tab and specify
plots on the Plots tab.
 Auto group – A CFD group that utilizes a user-specified filter for the updating of results
data. An auto group can only be changed using the Filter section. These are applicable to
any design.
Name
Type the name of the selected CFD results group in this box. To apply the changes, select the name
in this box when you click Apply.
Filter section
From the drop-down lists in the Filter table, select the criteria for filtering results data.
Note: This section is only available for Auto group.
Status
Select the status of the solver run:
 <any>
 Finished
 Grid only
 Imported
 Not found
 Pending
 Running
Topology
Select a filter for the grid topology:
 <any>
 H-Classic
 HH-Grid
 HX-Grid
 O-Grid
 OH-Grid
 Unstructured
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® CFD Results Groups dialog box 249
Solution
Select a filter for the solution type:
 <any>
 Full 3D
 Blade-to-Blade
 Throughflow
Solver
Select a filter for the solver type:
 <any>
 Multi-block
Content tab
Use this tab to select a list of CFD runs. Checked boxes are runs currently included in the selected
group.
Note: This tab can be edited for Custom results groups only.
Plots tab
Use this tab to edit the map plots of a results group.
The plots list box displays the currently defined map plots. Select the map plots to be edited in this
box. To define a new plot, select new...
 Delete button – Click to delete a plot selected by check box.
 Add/Apply button – Click to save the changes to a plot when highlighted in the list and
selected in the Plot section. Click Add to add a newly created plot; click Apply to
complete specifying an existing plot.
Plot section
In this section, specify the name of the plot, the plot description, and the variables for the plot lines.
The plot name and description will appear in the window view of the map plot.
Note: The multiple lines appear only if the CFD results group includes runs with Speed or
Mass Flow variables specified in the Generate Map tab of the Start Full 3D PBPlus
dialog box.
 Plot name box – Specify a name for the customized plot in this box. When specified, the
name appears in the list of plots above. The name appears in the caption of the plot view
window.
 Plot description box – The default description in this box is "Y [variable] as function of
X [variable]." The description depends upon the variables that you select in the X and Y
drop-down lists. The description appears in the plot area of the view window, and can be
also edited.
 X:/Y: – Select the parameter variables to appear as the X, Y coordinates of the plot.
 Lines by: – Select the following variables for the lines that display the following
characteristics:
 None
 RPM
 Target mass flow
Parameters tab
This read-only tab displays all available CFD variables specified in the CFD Results Variables dialog
box.
To learn about this dialog box, see "CFD Results Variables dialog box" in AxCent Help.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® CFD Results Groups dialog box 251
CFD Multiple Grids Setup
Use these dialog boxes to specify the multiple grid settings or to edit the settings for CFD solvers.
You can edit the key parameters (such as span-wise nodes, multigrid levels, and clearance cells) in
the table of this dialog box.
The CFD Multiple Grids Setup dialog box appears when you click Setup under the Row de-
tails table of the Topology tab of the Grid dialog box.
[case_file_name_Run_#]
The run title is displayed at the top of the dialog box.
Apply to all button

After you change a value in a single table cell, click this button to apply the value to the entire col-
umn of the table (if the column can be edited).
This button becomes enabled only when you select an editable cell.
Table (CFD Multiple Grids Setup dialog box)

The table for the CFD Multiple Grids Setup dialog box contains the following columns (blue column
headings indicate editable values):
 Run – The suffix that identifies each multiple grid and the solver solution for this grid.
It is also appended to the run title, and used in a folder name for the grid files and the
solver solution files.
 Section/Segment – The section or segment selected for the run (as specified on the
Topology tab). This column appears for sections when you run blade section
optimization, but for segments in all other instances.
 Grid – Grid type (as specified in the "Solution" section of the Topology tab).
 Solution – Solution type (as specified on the Topology tab).
 Hub to Shroud – Specify the number of spanwise nodes in this column.
 Multigrid – Specify the multiple grids.
 Scale – Specify the scale factor for the grid (also specified as Scale factor in the
"Scaling/defaults" section of the Grid tab).
 Clearance – Specify the number of clearance cells for each grid in the solver run (as in
the "Clearance cells" section of the Grid tab).
Table (CFD Start Setup dialog box)

The table for the CFD Start Setup dialog box contains the following columns:
 Run – The suffix that identifies each multiple grid and the solver solution for this grid.
It is also appended to the run title, and used in a folder name for the grid files and the
solver solution files.
 Segment – The segment selected for the run (as specified on the Topology tab).
 Grid – Grid type (as specified on the Topology tab under the "Solutions" section).
 Solution – Solution type (as specified on the Topology tab).
 Iterations – Specify the number of iterations in this column (also specified on the Start
CFD tab).
 Solver – Solver type.
 Hosts – Specify one or more MPI hosts to be used by the CFD solver. This column
appears only when MPI is enabled.
 OpenMP – Specify the number of the OpenMP threads to be used by the solver run (also
specified as OpenMP threads on the Start CFD tab).
Run folder location (Root directory\\CFD\User_name\case_name_Run_#) – Click this hy-
perlink to navigate to the directory containing all of the CFD solver files for the multiple grid case.
Include in CFD results table under group – Select to include the multiple grid data in the CFD
Results dialog box, either in a folder for Solutions or for optimization (the default name being
Opt_1, Opt_2, etc.).
To learn about this dialog box, see "CFD Results dialog box" on page 244.
Separate grid views – Select this check box to display separate grid views. Otherwise, the multi-
ple CFD grids appear in a single window view.
Separate residuals plots – Select this check box to display CFD residual and convergence plots
in separate views for each grid. Otherwise, all grid convergence is plotted in a single window view.
Use MPI – Select this check box for the solver instances to run under MPI, utilizing the hosts that
you specify in the Hosts column above.
By default, the hosts configured on the Parallel tab of the Preferences dialog box are automatically
assigned according to the size of the grid and the number of iterations.
More Setup button

Click to continue optimization setup, using the following dialog boxes:
 Multiple Grids – Continue to set up multiple grids in the Grid dialog box.
 Boundary Conditions – Change boundary conditions in the Boundary Conditions dialog
box.
 Solver – Change solver settings in the Solver Settings dialog box.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® CFD Multiple Grids Setup 253
 Multiple Grids – Continue to set up multiple grids in the Grid dialog box. (For this
dialog box, see see "Grid dialog box" on page 307. )
 Boundary Conditions – Change boundary conditions in the Boundary Conditions dialog
box. (To learn about this dialog box, see "Boundary Conditions dialog box" on page 224.
)
 Solver – Change solver settings in the Solver Settings dialog box. (To learn about this
dialog box, see "Solver Settings dialog box" on page 375.)
Run
Click to run the optimization.
CFD View Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to customize the 2D and 3D CFD windows for your design.
To view this dialog box, open a CFD window, and then choose CFD View Options from the CFD
menu.
– or –
Right-click any CFD window and choose CFD View Options from the shortcut menu.
Note: The CFD View Options command becomes available after you open one of the
following CFD view windows: CFD Grid window, 2D CFD window, or 3D CFD
window
Options section
Select the following display options:
 Geometry – Display machine geometry along with the CFD grid and data. The geometry
appears in 3D CFD windows only.
 Volute – Display the volute when the design contains one.
 Hood – Display the hood when the design contains one.
 Blade STL – Display the blade in an STL (stereolithographic) format.
This option is active only when you have an STL file in the CFD directory.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® CFD View Options dialog box 255
 Grid Lines – Display the lines of the CFD grid.
 Link all views – Apply all the settings you select in this dialog box (except in the 2D
View/3D View windows) to all other CFD windows for the current design. This option is
useful for comparing the same grid slices from two or more different CFD runs.
Periodic repeats section

Select the number of blade passages to include in the grid.
 One Passage – A single blade passage appears.
 Two Passages – Two contiguous blade passages appear.
 All Passages – All blade passages appear, rotated around the entire wheel.
Solution section
Select an option for the CFD solution.
 Original – Select a grid used by the flow solver for the CFD solution.
 Interpolated – Select a grid generated by the postprocessor to average the CFD solution
data. In this option, the CFD line plots use the interpolated grid while a sheared H-grid
attempts to mimic the original grid's density.
 Iteration – This displays the number of completed solver iterations corresponding to the
results that appear in the current view. For grid-only runs, this value will be 0.
 Grids – From the drop-down list, select to display either All Grids or a single grid
(Grid 1_x). This option is available when you specify multiple grids in the Grid tab.
Scope section
Select the options for the display of grid slices.
Slice index
Specify the location of the grid slice by index number, using either the spin box or slide rule. The
range can be from 1 (one) to the maximum grid size in the Slice direction. This option becomes ac-
tive after the Single grid slice check box is selected. For quick selection, use the slide rule near the
spin box. When you use the slide rule, AxCent visibly applies the changes immediately.
Direction
After you select the Single Slice check box, this drop-down list box becomes active, allowing you
to indicate the orientation of the grid slice that appears. The choices for orientation are Blade-to-
Blade, Streamwise, or Hub-to-Shroud.
Averaging
Select one of the following averaging methods for the selected variable of each streamwise grid lo-
cation:
 None
 Area-weighted
 Mass-weighted
 Mass-momentum-energy – This option takes a complex flow field and constructs a
homogeneous flow field with the same mass flow, momentum, and energy.
Boundary
Selection a specific grid plane to display in the current view.
Data section
In this section, choose the style of plot to draw from the following options in the drop-down list:
Note: Vectors, Contours3D and Streamlines are shown only for the first passage in 2D view
(in case multiple passages are selected).
 Arbitrary slice – This option displays data on an arbitrary cutting plane in the 3D view,
and also enables the Show cutting plane check box below.
Use this feature to customize grid slices, which are normally aligned in either a meridional or in an
IJK direction.
 Contours
 Contours 3D
 Meridional slice
 Points
 Streamlines – This option enables the Seed section below.
 Surface
 Vectors – This option enables the Vector section below.
Colored by
Choose the scalar CFD solution variable by which to color the plot. If you choose None, the CFD
computational grid appears without coloring.
To select a filter for the variables to appear, move your cursor over the to the right of the Colored
by box. This menu displays the following filter options:
Note: For a full list of the variables when you select each option, press F1 while viewing
the CFD View Options dialog box.
Move the cursor over to select one of the filters for the parameter variables listed below:
 All – Select the list of all available parameters.
 Flow Properties
 Thermodynamics
 Machine Performance
 Grid Geometry
 FEA Aero Loads
 None – Select for no parameter options to appear in the “Colored By” drop-down list.
Show cutting plane

Select this check box to manipulate a representation of the arbitrary cutting plane in the 3D view.
To move the plane along its normal vector, single-click and drag the plane; to rotate the plane, drag
the cones at either end of the normal vector.
Without cutting plane With cutting plane
Basis
If you select Vectors as the plot style, select one of the vector variables to be displayed from the
drop-down list.
Vector section
Scale factor
Specify a value by which to scale the velocity vector lengths. The default scale factor of 1 (one) en-
sures that the displayed vectors do not overlap excessively. This box becomes active when you select
Vector as the plot style.
Skip
Specify the number of vectors to skip for all grid directions. The default Vector skip of 0 (zero)
draws vectors in every cell. A Vector skip of 1 (one) draws vectors in every other cell. This box be-
comes active when you select Vector as the plot style.
Seed section
Specify the seed points, or the locations where the construction of a streamline begins. The stream-
line is generated by integrating the local velocity vector both forward and backward.
The option is activated when you select Streamlines in the Data section above.
 Plane – In the drop-down list, select the direction of the plane, whether I (Blade-to-
Blade) J (Streamwise), or K (Hub-to-Shroud).
 Offset – In the spin box, select the offset number. The offset is added to the center plane
of each block. For example, if the seed plane is a J plane, its index is Jmax/
2+seed_offset. The default is 0.
 Skip – In the spin box, select the number of points to skip when generating seed points
from the seed plane. The default is 1.
Shortcut button
Click this button to create customized toolbar buttons and alerts for the CFD solver run. When you
click this button, the CFD Shortcuts and Alerts dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "CFD Shortcuts and Alerts dialog box" in AxCent Help.
Choose Segment dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the segments that you want to view in a parameter window.
This dialog box appears in the following instances:
 When you select Choose Segment from the View menu.
 When you click on the toolbar menu.

 When you right-click the 3D model window, and select Choose Segments from the
shortcut menu.
The options below appear for the 3D model window. To view the editing of options at any time, click
Apply.
3D View Options section
Draw Rotating Interface Lines

Display the lines (in black) between rotating parts.
Draw Volute
Display the volute.
Volute Options button

Click to select the volute display from the Choose parts of volute to view dialog box.
Draw Shroud
Display the shroud.
Shroud Transparency Factor

Type a value for the shroud's degree of transparency between 0 (minimum transparency) and 1 (max-
imum transparency).
Draw All Periodic Repeats of Blades

Select to display the complete number of blades in the design. To display a single blade, leave this
option unselected.
Show a Cross Section of Duct Work
Display a cross-section or cutaway view of the design. This option is identical to selecting Cutaway
view on the shortcut menu.
Show MAX-AB blade extensions

Display the blade extensions for the Concepts CAM program, MAX-AB.
Parameters for extensions button

Click this button to specify blade extensions for MAX-AB on the MAX-PAC file parameters dialog
box.
To learn about this dialog box, see "MAX-5/AB/SI File Parameters dialog box" in AxCent Help.
3D View Options for blades with stacking curves
Show Defining Sections

Select this check box to display the defining sections of blades with stacking curves.
Show Stacking Curves

Select this check box to display the stacking curves. This option is available for all blades with mid-
span sections.
Visible Segments section

This section lists the segments that you can select to appear in the 3D window.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Choose Segment dialog box 261
Choose data/Choose data to show or edit dialog box
Use this dialog box to view segment data or activate control points.
This dialog box appears when you choose Choose Data from the View menu.
– or –
Click in the AxCent toolbar menu.

– or –
Right-click in a window and choose Choose Data from the shortcut menu that appears.
Note: The options on this dialog box are dynamically generated and are based on the
currently active data in the contour and parameter windows.
Depending on the type of parameter window you have opened, your choices for which contours to
view will vary. The title of this dialog box will vary as well, such as "Choose Desired Data," "Choose
Data to Show or Edit," or "Choose Location." Some parameter windows allow you to show or hide
certain control points only.
Sections
Typically, you can choose to show, hide, or edit the following control points:
 Hub / Mean / Shroud (Pressure, Mean, and Suction) – These options are used to select
the pressure and/or the suction surface for the plotted variation of fillet radius along the
surface. It is also used to edit the plot through the use of Bezier control points on the
curve.
 Show__% Span
 Surface symbols
 Optimal curves
 Streamlines
 Streamtubes
 Segment Junction Points
 Adjacent Segments
 Backface/bore
 Stacking Curve
 Splitter Swept Leading Edge
 Sections
 Blades
 Tip/Hub Clearance
 Flow cuts
Show data on edges

Select this check box to display the hub and shroud edge on the Blade Section Curvatures window.
Show two blades

Select this check box to view two blades. This option is available when you are editing axial blade
sections and will show the throat line.
Show covered area

Select to view the covered area of the blades. This option is available when you select Show two
blades.
Show parameters in the graph

Select this check box to view the profile parameters in text format. Using this option, you can turn
the text output on or off.
Display/Edit optimal curves

Select these check boxes to display and/or edit the specified "optimal" distribution, such as for blade-
to-blade loading. The optimum distributions are used when running optimization. When you specify
the desired results, the optimizer approaches them as closely as possible. These options appear after
you start the optimization configuration process for a segment.
Show ___% M rms

Select these check boxes to edit the hub-to-shroud taper curves. These check boxes appear if you
selected the User Controlled Hub to Shroud Taper option in the Thickness Distribution Options
dialog box. or the Hub-Shroud Shape option in the Bowed Blading Parameters dialog box.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Bowed Blading Parameters dialog box" in AxCent Help.
Volute section (for Contours window)

Use the options in this section to specify the display of volute data on the Contours window.
The Start and End angles limit the display of volute cross-sections to those sections within the spec-
ified range. 0° is at the smallest cross section (under the tongue) and 360° is at the largest (at the
throat.) Angles greater than 360° refer to cross-sections in the exit pipe section of the volute.
Show Volute
Select this check box to display the volute in the Contours window.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Choose data/Choose data to show or edit dialog box 263
Show Volute Labels
Select to display the angles (in degrees) of each volute cross section around the scroll.
Show Dual Exit Contours

Select to display the dual exits of a volute.
Start°
Specify the degree point near the start of the volute (or under the tongue) at which the volute is to be
displayed.
End°
Specify the degree point near the end of the volute (or throat) at which the volute is to be displayed.
Volute section (for volute plot area window)

Edit the control points for the volute section.
Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box
Use this dialog box to choose which segments to use when you perform an MST (multi -streamtube)
analysis. The calculation runs from a starting segment to an ending segment, and you can specify to
use the same starting and ending segments.
This dialog box appears when you choose Run MST Solver from the Flow menu
– or –

– or –
Right-click a graph and select MST from the shortcut menu that appears).
Start Segment
Select the segment that you want to use as the starting segment for the MST calculation.
End Segment
Select the segment that you want to use as the ending segment for the MST calculation.
Initialize From
Select how you want the MST run to be initialized:
 Rapid Load – Use the rapid loading results to initialize the MST run. This is the default
option.
 Current MST run – Use the current MST run to initialize the next run.
 MST overlay run – Use an MST overlay run to initialize the next run.
If the geometries and flow conditions are close to what you want, choosing to initialize with an ex-
isting MST run will give a much faster convergence.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box 265
MST Always: automatically rerun to update results
Select the MST Always check box to automatically re-run MST after you edit the selected segments
using Bezier points.
Run selected segments simultaneously

Select this check box when you want to use a multi-segment MST run where all segments are run
simultaneously with continuous streamlines. Otherwise, each segment runs individually using exit
conditions from one segment and applying them as inlet conditions to the next. For a simultaneous
run, the parameters from the first segment are used to control the iterations.
Show convergence plot after run

Select this check box for AxCent to display the MST Convergence plot after completing the MST
calculation.
MST Parameters button

Click this button to open the MST Parameters dialog box. To learn about this dialog box, see "MST
Parameters dialog box" on page 339.
Blade Loading button

Click this button to open the Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box. To learn about this di-
alog box, see see "Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box" on page 285.
Concepts NREC Format dialog box
Use this dialog box to export information for your machine in different formats into a separate file
so that you can use it with another program.
This Concepts NREC Format dialog box appears when you choose Export – Concepts NREC For-
mat from the File menu.
The dialog box contains the following tabs:
 CN proprietary transfer tab – Export the AxCent file into MAX-PAC, CADFIT, or
PBFEA surface file formats.
 Flow file tab – Export flow file data.
 AxCent 6.6 tab – Save the AxCent file to an earlier version of AxCent.
Concepts NREC Format dialog box – CN Proprietary Transfer tab

Use this tab of the Concepts NREC format dialog box to export information to other Concepts NREC
programs, including MAX-PAC, CADFIT, and Pushbutton FEA.
Geometry output section

Select one of the following Concepts NREC formats for export
 MAX-PAC format (*.imp) – Select this option to generate files for rotor numerical
matching with the MAX-5, MAX-AB, and MAX-SI programs. For more information
about this option, see the Machining/CFD Output File Parameters dialog box topic.
 CADFIT (.fit) – Select this option to save the file in the format to be used with the
CADFIT option.
 PBFEA surface file (*.sur) – Select this option to produce an axial PBFEA surface file
that you can use with the Pushbutton FEA program.
Number of points (LE to TE)

Type the number of points to use along the length of the blade.
Number of points (H to S)
Type the number of points to use from hub to shroud.
this option is disabled if you select Output user def sections.
Add underlying ruled surfaces

Select the check box to add underlying ruled surfaces to the table-based file export after you select
Surface.
Output user def sections

Select this check box to export user-defined sections to the table-based export file instead of speci-
fying the number of points from the hub to shroud.
Add sections to extend the blade into the hub and shroud
Select this check box to add extra sections at the top and bottom of the blade. (Options for specifying
the percentages for hub and shroud extension appear when you select this check box.)
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Concepts NREC Format dialog box 267
The sections are inside the hub and shroud. They ensure that the blade generated from the sections
will intersect with the hub and shroud surfaces of revolution. This will help some CAD applications
that work better if the blade intersects the hub and shroud than if the blade just touches them.
Note: This option is available only for *.mch and *.sur files and for *.geomTurbo and for
*.dat files.
Hub/shroud extension
Specify percentage values for both hub and shroud extensions when you select the check box above.
Add an extended table of contour points along hub and shroud

Select this option to reconstruct a full flow path when tip clearance is active. This option adds a pair
of tables containing R,Z data along the hub and the shroud, including the up and downstream seg-
ments, if these segments are present.
*.dat files.
Alternate Coordinate System

After you select Surface or CFD for geometry output, select this option to change the coordinate
system using the Choose Coordinate System dialog box.
(Alternate coordinate systems are not available for the Meanline and thickness geometry output.)
To learn about this dialog box, "Choose Coordinate System dialog box" in AxCent Help.
Setup button
Click this button to change the coordinate system using the Choose Coordinate System dialog box.
Concepts NREC Format dialog box – Flow File tab
Use the Flow File tab of the Concepts NREC Format dialog box to select the type of flow informa-
tion to save to a (.FLO) file.
This dialog box appears when you choose Export – Save Flow Field File from the File menu.
Select flow solution for segments x to y

Select the type of flow solution from which to save the flow information
 Rapid load – The current rapid loading calculation. (You must use the Stanitz-Prian
loading calculation for all bladed segments).
 MST – The last MST run.
 CFD – The currently active CFD run.
Note: You can export only 3D H-grid CFD solutions to a Flow file. You cannot export O-,
OC-, or OH-grid CFD solutions.
If you select this option, the Output all data points between pressure and suction side check box
becomes available. Select this check box to provide a more detailed pressure/temperature field on
the hub and shroud surfaces in the .FLO file.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Concepts NREC Format dialog box 269
Old file format
Select this option if you are using a program that expects flow field data to be formatted as it was in
older versions of AxCent. In the old file, format, pressure, temperature, enthalpy, and velocity ap-
pear in absolute values. This option should be used to output data for programs that expect the old
format.
New relative values (required for Pushbutton FEA)

Select this option if you are creating a flow field file for Pushbutton FEA (PBFEA). For rotating el-
ements, pressures, temperatures, enthalpies, and velocities are in relative values (that is, in the rotat-
ing frame of reference). There are also a few extra fields in this output file format, such as a direction
of rotation indicator for each element. This is the preferred format for PBFEA.
Splitter handling
If the design includes splitters, this section displays the splitters and allows you to use pressure side,
mid passage, and suction side values from the main blades or from one of the splitter passages.
The Rapid Load and MST solvers output data for pressure side, mid passage, and suction side. When
a splitter is present, the splitter area can be handled in two ways:
 Use the PS (pressure side), MP (mid passage), and SS (suction side) from the main
blades.
 Use the PS (pressure side), MP (mid passage), and SS (suction side) from one of the
splitter passages. In this case, either the PS or the SS 'jumps' from one of the main blades
This option only affects the location of the reported flow data. The actual pressure, temperature, etc.,
If you select the Do you want to do this? check box, the main blades won’t have any odd geometric
jumps in the data; however, the mid passage location will end up being on top of the splitter.
Concepts NREC Format dialog box – AxCent 6.6 tab

Use this tab of the Concepts NREC Format dialog box to export the design to an earlier version of
AxCent, or version 6.6.
Click Browse to locate the version 6.6 file in which to export the design.
Copy a Segment dialog box
This dialog box allows you to select the segments to copy either from the current design or from an-
other design into the current design. This dialog box appears when you choose Import/Copy Seg-
ment from the Setup menu.
When you click OK, the Append the New Segment to the Design dialog box appears so that you can
choose how to add the segment to the design.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Append the New Segment to the Design dialog box" on page
205.
Make a copy of one of the segments in this design

Select this option to copy segments from the current design.
Copy a segment out of another design

Select this option to copy segments from another design.
When you select this option, the Open dialog box automatically appears so that you can select the
design from which you want to copy a segment. The name and location of the file you choose ap-
pears in the File name box. To select the design file from which to copy/import the segment, click
the Browse button.
File name
Displays the name and location of the file you choose to copy a segment from (when you select the
Copy a segment out of another design option).
Design name
Displays the name of the design from which you are copying a segment.
Select Segment
Select the segment that you want to copy from the specified design file.
Copy multiple segments

Select this check box to copy a range of segments (for example, segments 2 to 4) rather than a single
segment.
When you select this check box, the First Segment and Last Segment boxes appear so that you can
choose the range of segments that you want to copy or import.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Copy a Segment dialog box 271
First Segment
Select the first segment in the range of segments that you want to copy. This box appears when you
select the Copy multiple segments check box.
Last Segment
Select the last segment in the range of segments that you want to copy. This box appears when you
select the Copy multiple segments check box.
Create Meanline File dialog box
Use this dialog box select the type of meanline file you want to create from your radial or axial Ax-
Cent design. This dialog box appears when you choose Meanline– Create New File from the Agile
menu.
 COMPAL file (.GEO) – Select this option to create a meanline design in COMPAL (for
radial compressors)
 AXIAL file (.AXL) – Select this option to create a meanline design in AXIAL (for axial
turbines, expanders, pumps, compressors, and fans).
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Create Meanline File dialog box 273
Create New Flow Path Branch dialog box
Use this dialog box to add a new flow path or to add side ports, which you can edit with Bezier points
in the Contours window after you specify the path in this dialog box. You can also create multiple
flow paths or branches with this dialog box, and bladed elements within each flow path. These flow
paths are especially useful for turbofan engines and auxiliary exits in other designs. You can also
specify the start and end of a flow path branch. Each branch is labeled with a single letter (a, b, c, etc).
This dialog box is available when you choose Flow Path Branches – Create New Branch from the
Setup menu.
Inlet/Exit Connection
Select one of the following options for the inlet:
 none (open inlet/exit) – Do not create a flow path branch at the inlet/exit.
 Stage number and component – Create a flow path branch (this enables options for the
hub side or shroud side branches).
Note: Options will vary in this drop-down list according to the design selected.
Hub/Shroud Side Branch

Add a flow path to the hub or shroud side.
Hub/Shroud Wall Port

Add a side port on the hub or the shroud side; you can edit each port's size and location later using
the Side Port dialog box.
Initial number of segments in new flow path branch

Set a number of segments in the new flow path, which you can change (maximum of 100). When
you click OK, these segments will appear in the table of the Setup segments dialog box.
Note: This option appears before you have added a flow path branch to your design.
new button
From the drop-down list, select the existing side port and click new to edit it in the Side ports dialog
box (the selected segment appears in the dialog box title).
The new button is enabled when you select an option for Hub or Shroud Wall Port above.
Setup Branch Segments button

Click this button to edit the existing branch segments, or insert new ones. The Setup segments dialog
box appears.
This option appears when you select a branch (Branch a, b, etc.) under Flow Path Branches of the
Setup menu.
Delete This Branch

Delete the flow path branch.
This option appears when you select a branch (Branch a, b, etc.) under Flow Path Branches of
the Setup menu.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Create New Flow Path Branch dialog box 275
Curve/Control Points dialog box
Use this dialog box to edit control points for the hub and shroud.
This dialog box appears when you have either the hub or shroud control points available (available
to edit), and then choose Edit Control Points from the Edit menu.
The table portion of this dialog box lists the control points of the curve. AxCent keeps track of the
control points by numbering them.
You can edit any value that does not appear in bold.
Note: Values that appear in bold are the endpoints and cannot be edited directly in this
dialog box. To edit endpoints, click the Endpoints button and make your changes in
the Change Junction Points dialog box.
The control points that you can edit in the Curve/Control Points dialog box depend on the window/
graph that you are viewing
In this window you can edit these control points
Contours in the meridional view ZR
Beta distributions %M Beta
Thickness distributions %M Thickness
button
Click this button to increase the number of control points.
button
Click this button to decrease the number of control points.
Endpoints button
Click this button to view the Change Junction Points dialog box in order to edit the junction points.
Reverse button
Click this button to reverse the order of the values in the second column.
This button appears only when you are editing control points in the Beta Distribution and Thickness
windows for radial designs only.
Constraints button
Click this button to set curvature constraints using the Curvature Constraints dialog box that appears.
Constraint options for hub or shroud include pressure side, suction side, throat, and leading and trail-
ing edges.
Note: This button is only available when you are using the Modified Pritchard axial blade
section type with curvature controlled surfaces. (You can select the Modified
Pritchard option on the Blade generation options dialog box, and the Control
Curvature option on the Blade Section Parameters window.) To learn about the
options for blade generation, see "Blade Generation Options dialog box" on page
207.
%M Fixed/Free button
Click this button to allow the values in the %M column to be repositioned (changing from bold to
regular style text). When the values appear in bold, the Bezier point %M position is maintained as
the point is moved. When in regular style, the %M position can change.
This button appears only when you are editing control points in the Beta Distribution and Thickness
windows for radial designs only.
Scale button
Click this button to scale the control point values according to the scale factors you specify in the
boxes below the button.
%M or Z factor
Specifies scale factor for the first column. %M is not scaled for beta or thickness. Z is scaled for ge-
ometry meridional view.
Beta, Thickness, or R factor

Specifies scale factor for the second column for beta, thickness, or R.
Move button
Click this button to move all control points by a fixed offset that you specify in the offset boxes be-
low the button.
%M or Z offset
Specifies the offset for the first column. %M is not offset for beta or thickness. Z is offset for geom-
etry meridional view.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Curve/Control Points dialog box 277
Beta, Thickness, or R offset
Specifies the offset for the second column for beta, thickness, or R.
Mirror button
Click this button to mirror the meridional view about the values specified in the boxes below this
button. For beta and thickness distributions, this option mirrors the plot about the beta or thickness
value. This option does not mirror about %M.
%M or Z mirror
Select this option to specify the mirror reference for the first column. %M is not used for beta or
thickness. Z is used for meridional view.
Beta, Thickness, or R mirror

Select this option to specify the mirror reference for the second column for beta, thickness, or R.
Curve – File button

Click this button to export the set of points along the curve to a text (.txt) file.
File – Curve button

Click this button to import a set of points along the curve from a text (.txt) file to fit the curve to these
points. The file should contain a pair of coordinates on each line, ordered along the curve.
Entry Wrap Angle (Theta) dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify a value of Theta at the hub or shroud of the impeller leading or trailing
edge. The difference between the hub and shroud entry theta sets the entry lean angle. This dialog
box appears when you select Blade Angles – Entry Theta from the Geometry menu.
If the hub and shroud angles are specified separately, their relative position determines the blade
lean. Changing the Theta value for either the hub or shroud does not change the hub or shroud shape,
but it does move them relative to each other, so the blade gets more or less lean.
By specifying the lean angle and its location (exit or entry), you can select the location of the blade
when outputting the geometry to use in another program. For example, you can specify that Theta=0
at the hub trailing edge point.
Entry hub theta

In this box, type the value of the wrap angle (theta) on the hub at the leading edge of the blade.
Entry shroud theta

In this box, type the value of the wrap angle (theta) on the shroud at the leading edge of the blade.
Set Theta reference at exit, not entry

Select this check box to have AxCent define theta for the hub and shroud at the trailing edge. Clear
this check box to have AxCent define theta for the hub and shroud at the leading edge.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Entry Wrap Angle (Theta) dialog box 279
Exit Theta dialog box
Use this dialog box to modify the blade angle distribution to achieve a desired exit wrap angle.
This dialog box appears when you select Blade Angles – Adjust Wrap Angle from the Geometry
menu. To activate this menu item, view the Beta Distribution of an impeller and activate the hub or
shroud control points.
Enter hub/shroud entry theta (wrap) in degrees

In this box, type the exit wrap angle. The entire beta distribution (except the endpoints) is adjusted
to give the desired wrap angle at the exit. If too large a change is requested, the algorithm may not
converge. If it does not converge, use a series of smaller steps to reach the same exit wrap.
FEA Results dialog box
Use the FEA Results dialog box to compare results and high-level grid parameters for FEA runs and
grid generation attempts in the current design. Some of the main model design parameters and grid
parameters appear in the table along with significant results from completed FEA analyses.
The dialog box contains three tabs containing the following FEA data:
 All – All table entries.
 Grids – Grid generation only.
 Solutions – All solved cases.
Note: This dialog box is available when you use the Pushbutton FEA solver or when you
generate a grid for any solver.
To view this dialog box, choose FEA Runs from the Mechanical menu.
FEA Results table

The table displays the status of each FEA run for the current design. To perform an action on a listed
FEA run, select the run by clicking the blank cell above the run's column.
 Status – The status of the FEA run.
 Run – The name of the design and the identifying number of the run.
 Thermal – Indicates whether a thermal analysis was generated for the run. You select
the analysis types for the run in the Solver Options dialog box when you are using the
Pushbutton FEA solver.
To learn about the Solver Options dialog box, see "Solver Options dialog box" on page 373.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® FEA Results dialog box 281
 Static – Indicates whether a static analysis was generated for the run. You select the
analysis types for the run in the Solver Options dialog box when you are using the
 Modal – Indicates whether a modal analysis was generated for the run. You select the
 Segment – The selected segment as defined in the Setup Segments dialog box.
 Material – The material property set selected from the materials database. (This
database is specified on the Options tab (radial) or Options tab (axial) of the Project
dialog box.)
 Speed – The design speed multiplied by the Rotational Speed Multiplier (as specified on
the General tab of the Properties dialog box).
 Path – The full path of the directory that contains the FEA files generated for the run.
 Solver – This is either the solver intended for the grid generation file, or the solver used
to solve the analysis.
 Version – The AxCent version used to generated the run.
 CFD Run – The CFD analysis used to generate boundary conditions for the particular
FEA analysis or grid generation. MST analysis is also listed when relevant. (For the
CFD analysis, see the tables of the CFD Results dialog box.)
 A list of parameter values for the run, including node and element counts,model mass,
inertia, and temperature values, and frequency values. If necessary, use the scroll bar to
 Run Time– The total time it took to generate the run.
Buttons
Use the buttons at the bottom of the dialog box to manage your FEA runs (note that some buttons
affect the selected FEA run).
Group section
Parameters
Click this button to view and edit the results variables using the FEA Result Variable dialog box.
Selection section
Set Active
Click this button to make the selected FEA run active. If the solution data is not loaded, the solution
file is read and the Model window is displays data from this run.
New 3D View
Click this button to a open a new 3D FEA Model window showing a filled contour plot of the se-
lected run.
Export
Click this button to export the FEA geometry and grid parameters to an xml file (in a *.mech_xml
format).
Delete Run
Click this button to delete the selected FEA run from the current design and from the dialog box. In
order to add the run back into the results dialog box, you must run the calculation again.
Note: The FEA run data will not be removed from the FEA directory. You need to
periodically clean these files out of the directory to avoid filling up the available disk
space.
Results section
Refresh
Click this button to refresh the grid with the selected FEA run.
Close
Close the FEA Results dialog box.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® FEA Results dialog box 283
Fitting Method dialog box
Use the Fitting Method dialog box to select the CADFIT method you want to use for the geometry
data you are importing into AxCent.
This dialog box appears when select the CADFIT file you want to use in the Open dialog box and
then click Open.
Data in this file is titled

Displays the name of the CADFIT file you are importing into AxCent.
Use the following fitting method
Meanline-thickness
Specifies to fit meanline-thickness data. This option is automatically selected when you are fitting
meanline-thickness data. It is not available when you are using a .sur file (typically used with axial
designs).
Surface sections
Specifies to generate profile sections. This option is available when the CADFIT file you selected
contains surface data.
Convert surface sections to meanline-thickness then fit

Specifies to convert surface sections to meanline-thickness first, and then perform a fit. This option
is available when the CADFIT file you selected contains surface data.
Use raw data directly without fitting

Import the blade shape directly as a set of data points that can fit only the flow path contours for the
hub and shroud. The blade shape that is imported is a set of data points that can only describe the
blade surface. This option is suitable for running CFD for an existing blade shape.
Using this option, you can edit the point data directly in AxCent, but you cannot convert the blade
to another blade type. The interpolation in the meanline information will be imprecise, depending
on whether you are importing meanline thickness or surface data. If meanline thickness data is im-
ported, the surface data will be crudely interpolated, and vice versa. The results should be used for
reference only.
Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify your fluid dynamic loading parameters.
This dialog box appears when you select Loading from the Flow menu. You can also access this
dialog box by clicking the Blade Loading button in the MST Parameters dialog box and Choose
Segments for MST Calculation dialog box.
All options in this dialog box should be specified before running Rapid Loading or MST.
However, there are a few exceptions:
 You can set either volume or mass flow, and AxCent will calculate one from the other
based on the density predicted (also, make sure the correct fluid is selected first). That
density is based on the settings in the Fluid Properties tab (the fluid and the inlet
conditions).
 You do not need to specify an entry reference velocity to run the solvers; it's only used to
calculate pressure coefficient results.
 Likewise, the Ak calculation method for MST only affects the Ak calculation, not the
solver itself, and only for MST.
Note: For the fluid, viscosity is ignored by Rapid Loading and MST.
This dialog box contains the following tabs:
 Specify the mass flow, volumetric flow, RPM, and number of blades – see "Blade
Loading Options tab" on page 286. .
 Specify fluid modeling properties used in your design, including setting the exit flow
angle for each blade row – see "Flow Modeling" on page 288..
 Specify incompressible or compressible fluid properties – see "Fluid Properties tab" on
page 292. .
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box 285
Blade Loading Options tab
You can specify a number of blade loading options for your design in AxCent. These options include
mass flow, volumetric flow, RPM, and number of blades. You can specify blade loading options
when creating a new design in the Blade Loading Options (wizard) dialog box or in the Blade Load-
ing Options tab of the Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box.
To access these options for an existing design, choose Loading from the Flow menu. You can also
access these options by clicking the Blade Loading button in the MST Parameters dialog box and
the Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box.
Volumetric Flow Rate

Type the volumetric flow rate for the selected segment. The mass flow is updated based on inlet den-
sity.
Mass Flow
Type the mass flow rate for the selected segment. The volume flow is updated based on inlet density.
To automatically update the mass flow rate for all segments in the design to the value you entered
in the Mass Flow box, select the Copy mass flow to all segments check box.
RPM
Type the rotational speed of the selected segment here (0 for stationary component).
Number of Main Blades

Type the number of main blades for the selected segment here (0 for an unbladed segment). This
specifies the number of blades at the inlet to the segment. Splitter blades can be added by selecting
Splitters from the Geometry menu.
Mean Inlet Swirl (CTheta)

Type the inlet tangential velocity at the RMS radius.
R(CTheta) difference
Type the difference in the product radius * tangential velocity between the shroud and hub for the
selected segment. Type a 0 (zero) value for a free-vortex swirl distribution.
Use reference velocity to find Cp

Select this check box to use the hub and shroud reference velocity to calculate pressure recovery co-
efficients. If you do not select this option, AxCent uses internal calculated values of hub and tip rel-
ative velocity.
The hub and shroud reference velocities represent reference relative velocities calculated originally
in COMPAL, FANPAL, PUMPAL, AXIAL, or RITAL. These appear only when changes to the pa-
rameters are requested. The reason the reference velocities are independently specified rather than
calculated within the loading is to ensure absolute consistencies of the resultant values of pressure
coefficients between COMPAL, FANPAL, PUMPAL, AXIAL, RITAL, and AxCent. When you be-
gin to work with a design based on meanline codes, these references are present.
Entry hub reference velocity

Type the reference velocity at the hub that is used in the Cp calculation.
Entry shroud reference velocity

Type the reference velocity at the shroud that is used in the Cp calculation.
Blade to Blade calculations

Select the method to use in rapid loading for the blade-to-blade calculation. The default is passage
normal; another option is Stanitz/Prian that calculates loading in a passage tangential direction.
Transfer exit results downstream

Select this check box when you want the exit total pressure, total temperature, and tangential veloc-
ity from the selected segment to be transferred as the inlet conditions to the next downstream seg-
ment after calculations are run.
The velocity is assumed to vary linearly from the pressure to the suction side when interpreting input
for the downstream section. This is true for both MST and Rapid Loading. Once the solution enters
an unbladed region, there is no longer any gradient in the tangential direction.
Suppress choke messages in uncovered portion of blade

Select this check box when you want to suppress error messages reporting choke when the choke
occurs near the exit of the blade row in the uncovered portion.
Ak calculation for MST
In this section, select the type of method to use in order to calculate the Ak (meridional velocity ratio)
at the inlet.
 Upstream of blading – Calculates data just before the blade starts.
 Onboard blading – Calculates data at the start of the blade.
Flow Modeling
In AxCent, you can specify fluid modeling properties used in your design, including setting the exit
flow angle for each blade row. These options are available when you are creating a new design in
the Flow Modeling (wizard) dialog box and also in the Flow Modeling tab of the Fluid Dynamic
Loading Parameters dialog box.
To access these options for an existing design, select Loading from the Flow menu, and then click
the Flow Modeling tab. You can also access these options by clicking the Blade Loading button in
the MST Parameters dialog box and Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box.
Note: These parameters are used only in the streamline curvature solvers.
Primary zone exit flow angles section

 Single angle – Use a single flow angle across the entire exit. If deviation is specified, it
is the deviation relative to average of hub and shroud exit blade angle.
Note: To set a constant deviation for a design with a varying exit blade angle, you should
not select the Single angle option. When you select this option a constant exit flow
angle is created. Even if you set the deviation, it will create a constant exit flow angle
based on that deviation and the average blade angle.
Instead, select the Hub + shroud option and set the deviation to the same value for
the hub and the shroud.
 Hub + shroud – Use a separate exit flow angles (or deviations) for the hub and the
shroud.
 Relative flow angle – Use a relative flow angle as the primary zone exit flow angle.
 Deviation – Use deviation relative to average of hub and shroud exit blade angle.
 Slip factor – Use the slip factor to set up exit flow deviation. The rapid loading and
MST solvers will honor this slip factor. Note that when the two-zone model is used, the
slip factor is calculated from the mixed out flow, not the primary flow.
Exit flow angle / deviation

Type value for the exit flow angle or deviation. For a two-zone model, this value is for the primary
zone exit flow angle that usually comes from the meanline code and is not changed in AxCent.
Hub exit flow angle / deviation

Type the value for the primary zone hub exit flow angle or deviation.
Shroud exit flow angle / deviation

Type the value for the primary zone exit shroud flow angle or deviation.
Incidence effects until Q.O.

Type the QO number where incidence effects are no longer felt in the flow angle calculation.
The flow angle at the inlet is determined by the angular momentum of the incoming flow. The inci-
dence gradually reduces until it reaches zero at the specified QO. From the Incidence merge method
drop-down list box, select one of the options to specify the method by which the incidence is re-
duced.
Streamline curvature methods basically prescribe a flow angle. The "Incidence effects until QO" is
the region assigned where the flow transitions from the inflow angle at the leading edge to the blade
angle. Nominally, a distance of one pitch length is reasonable. The same principle is applied to the
trailing edge. A region of the blade (referred to as "deviation effect until QO") is assigned where the
flow deviates away from the blade angle to the input value for the deviation angle at the trailing edge.
Again, a region of one pitch length is about right for this section. It is generally recognized that the
results are less accurate in these regions than for the rest of the passage.
Note: It is possible for the deviation to start before the incidence effect ends. That is,
AxCent allows an Incidence effects until QO larger value than the Deviation/
Secondary zone starts at QO value. This means the flow angle will start deviating
before it has been able to match the blade angle.
Incidence merge method
This option allows you to control how incidence changes to or from zero at the start and end of the
blade. From this drop-down list box, select one of the following options:
 Smooth incidence – Select this option to reduce the incidence quadratically until it
reaches zero. This is the default and preferred method.
 Smooth flow angle – Select this option to change the flow angle quadratically such that
dFlow/dM matches the dBeta/dM at the merge point. This option is used for those cases
where blade angles near the leading edge change so rapidly that a smooth incidence leads
to bad flow angles. You can check this by opening a Flow/Blade Angle plot.
Note: There are a few unusual cases where it is better to smooth the flow angles. For
example, NACA 65 blades have a blade angle distribution that peaks at the very
beginning and end of the blade. This is inherent in the way NACA 65 blades work,
and not normally a problem because the affected area is too short to be significant;
however, when a flow angle is calculated by adding an incidence to a blade angles,
the effect is a very uneven flow angle. In such a case, you must choose between a
smooth flow angle and a smooth incidence angle. A smooth flow angle will work
better for the flow solvers.
Deviation starts at QO (single-zone)/Secondary zone starts at QO (primary zone)

Type the QO number where the secondary zone (or deviation for single-zone modeling) begins.
At the start of the deviation QO, the deviation will start growing from zero to your specified devia-
tion angle. When the single zone model is used, the same two options for "Incidence merge" are
available (above).
For the two-zone model, specify the primary zone deviation. That deviation is assumed to be due to
wake building up along the blade changing the flow angles.
The shape of the wake is calculated using four constraints:
3 The size of the wake at the start QO (normally zero).
4 The size of the wake at the TE, determined by the fraction of the exit area blocked by the wake
(which is specified in the Area fraction for secondary zone box).
5 The rate of change at the start (dTheta/dM) is assumed zero.
6 The rate of change at the TE is calculated such that it matches the deviation set for the primary zone.
You can select between three options for building the wake shape from these constraints from the
Secondary zone distribution drop-down list box.
Deviation merge method

This option allows you to control how deviation changes to or from zero at the start and end of the
blade. This option is similar to the Incidence merge method. This option is available when you are
not using the two-zone model (clear the Use two-zone model check box). The two-zone model has
its own way of modeling the exit flow, independent of the rest.
Loss Coefficient/Polytropic Efficiency

Specify a value for the loss coefficient in the case of single-zone modeling.
In the case of a rotating component in which ideal gas or incompressible flow is being used, specify
a value for polytropic efficiency instead.
Use two-zone model

Select this check box if you want to use the two-zone model for the selected segment.
Area fraction for secondary zone
Type the value that you want to use for the secondary zone area fraction at the impeller exit. This
information usually comes from your meanline code and is not changed in AxCent.
Mass fraction in secondary zone

Type the value that you want to use for the secondary zone mass fraction at the impeller exit. This
information usually comes from your meanline code and is not changed in AxCent.
Secondary zone distribution

From this drop-down list box, select the secondary zone distribution that you want to use. The de-
fault is Cubic which sets the secondary zone blockage to 0 (zero) at the beginning QO, and sets the
exit slope to match the deviation and the exit value to match the area fraction.
Select one of the following options for the secondary zone distribution:
 Cubic – The cubic polynomial matches the exit slope required to give the BETA2P
specified.
 Howard Osborne Distribution – This distribution always produces 5° of deviation and
is not recommended.
 Arbitrary – A user-defined secondary zone distribution option to define the wake Theta
versus %M. When Arbitrary is selected, a Bezier curve is generated for the secondary
zone (with AxCent enforcing the four wake constraints on the curve). To view the shape,
select Flow Angle – Secondary Zone from the Flow menu to view the Secondary Zone
window. To change the shape, edit either the hub or shroud curve in the same plot. Note
that the first two Bezier points cannot be moved to ensure a zero starting value and a
zero starting slope (to preserve the inlet velocity triangle) and the final two points
cannot be moved in order to ensure a match to the exit deviation and blockage. To
change the shape of the curve, add more points and move the intermediate points.
Blockage at secondary zone start

Type the value that you want to use as the area fraction at the secondary zone start. Non-zero values
are not recommended, however, to get consistency with the inlet blockage used in the meanline code,
you may want to specify a value here.
Use blockage in single zone

Select this check box to add fluid blockage (rather than just blade blockage) to the one (1) zone mod-
el. When this option is active, a layer of essentially stationary fluid is assumed to reduce the available
area in the flow passage. This option has two parameters:
Fluid blockage at leading edge

The fraction of the passage blocked by the stationary fluid at the leading edge.
Fluid blockage at trailing edge

The fraction of the passage blocked at the trailing edge of the blade. The blockage is assumed to vary
linearly from LE to TE.
Fluid Properties tab
In AxCent, you can select the type of fluid (or gas) that you want to use with your design and it prop-
erties. Fluid properties can be specified when you're creating a new design in the Fluid Model dialog
box, the Fluid Properties (wizard) dialog box, and the Fluid Properties tab of the Fluid Dynamic
Loading Parameters dialog box. These fluid properties are also used in COMPAL, FANPAL, PUMP-
AL, AXIAL, and RITAL. The programs use the same GASP64.DLL file that can replace your com-
pany's routines, if desired.
The Fluid Properties tab (of the Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box) appears when you
choose Loading from the Flow menu.
These options also appear when you click the Blade Loading button in the MST Parameters dialog
box and Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box.
Compressible
Select this check box to use compressible flow models.
Incompressible properties section

In this section, specify the incompressible fluid properties if you are not using compressible fluid
properties (the Compressible check box is not selected).
Density
Type the density value (kg/m3) to use for the incompressible fluid.
Specific heat, Cp
Type the specific heat value (CP00 = CPT00/CPT02M) to use for the incompressible fluid.
Speed of sound
Type the value for the speed of sound to use for the incompressible fluid.
Kinematic viscosity
Type the kinematic viscosity (P00, T00) to use for the incompressible fluid.
Compressible properties section

In this section, specify the type of compressible fluid and its properties.
Fluid option
From this drop-down list box, select the type of fluid that you want to use.
The following options allow you to set either the enthalpy or the temperature in the inlet conditions.
Temperature is usually specified, but there are some cases (for example, condensing steam) where
the (P0, T0) pair does not fully identify the thermodynamic state. In such cases (P0, H0) can be used
to fully specify the thermodynamic state.
Inlet total enthalpy (H00)

Type the inlet total enthalpy (H00) for the fluid.
Inlet total temperature (T00)

Type the inlet total temperature (T00) for the fluid.
Inlet total pressure (P00)

Type the inlet total pressure (P00) for the fluid.
Ratio of specific heats (Kappa)

Type the ratio of specific heats for the fluid.
Gas constant (R)

Type the gas constant for the fluid.
Absolute Viscosity
This box appears when you select Ideal gas (K is constant) from the Fluid option drop-down list
box. Type the absolute viscosity for the fluid. Absolute viscosity (also called dynamic viscosity) is
the coefficient of viscosity for Newtonian fluids.
Cp Polynomial button
This button appears when you select Specific Heat Polynomial from the Fluid option drop-down
list box. When you click this button, the Enter Power Law Equation dialog box appears, allowing
you to specify the parameters for the specific heat polynomial.
Gas Name button
This button appears when you select User Supplied Real Fluid from the Fluid option drop-down
list box. When you click this button, the Enter the Gas Name dialog box appears, allowing you to
specify the name of your fluid.
Gas Composition button

This button appears when you select DBR Real Fluid, Fast DBR Real Fluid, or NIST Real Fluid
from the Fluid option drop-down list box.
When you click this button, the DBR Real Gas Properties dialog box or NIST Real Gas Properties
dialog box appears, allowing you to specify the DBR or NIST fluid properties.
Refrigerant
This option appears when you select DBR Real Fluid or Fast DBR Real Fluid from the Fluid op-
tion drop-down list box. Select this option if the DBR fluid is of refrigerant properties.
Hydrocarbon
This option appears when you select DBR Real Fluid or Fast DBR Real Fluid from the Fluid op-
tion drop-down list box. Select this option if the DBR fluid is of hydrocarbon properties.
Edit K Model button

This button appears when you select Two-Point Real Gas from the Fluid option drop-down list box.
When you click this button, the Enter Power Law Equation dialog box appears, allowing you to spec-
ify the power law equation for Kappa (T in K).
Edit Z Model button

This button appears when you select Two-Point Real Gas from the Fluid option drop-down list box.
When you click this button, the Enter Power Law Equation dialog box appears, allowing you to spec-
ify the power law equation for Z (T in K).
Set Humidity button

This button appears when you select Humid Air from the Fluid option drop-down list box. When
you click this button, the Set Humidity dialog box appears, which allows you to specify the humidity
option you want to use.
Table File Name button

This button appears when you select Mollier Table from the Fluid option drop-down list box. When
you click this button, the Open dialog box appears so that you can select the Mollier table that you
want to use.
Geometry Engine Options dialog box
This dialog box allows you to fine tune the behavior of the AxCent geometry generation. In many
cases the difference is small, but in some cases you can improve the result significantly. The options
are set individually for each segment in the design.
This dialog box appears when you select Setup – Geometry Engine Options from the Geometry
menu.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Geometry Engine Options dialog box 295
Improved lean compensation
Select this check box to control the way lean is handled. Blades are defined using normal thickness.
If the blade leans over, the top and bottom of the blade will not end precisely at the hub and shroud
surfaces. At both hub and shroud, one side of the blade will stick out slightly while the other half is
a little too short.
A blade with normal thickness The blade after lean compensation
Although lean compensation is always performed in the construction of the geometry, the option for
improved lean compensation can provides a more sophisticated form of lean compensation, contain-
ing the following advantages:
 Better handling of difficult cases.
 Smoother shapes.
The disadvantage is that it can fail and produce bad or bizarre geometry.
In the event that the 3D window view displays poor results (such as, for example, gaps or spikes),
turn the option on or off whenever necessary.
Improved bowing (useful for thick blades)

Select this check box to use an alternative method of calculating the surfaces of bowed blades, much
the same way as the lean compensation. This method provides better results if the blade is very thick
and one side has to stretch a lot while the other one is compressed severely.
If you use bowed blading, you can simply switch this option on and off to see which of the results
(in 3D view) you like best.
Swept LE: hub blade shape follows the rest of the blade
Select this check box to always redistribute the points on the hub, even if nothing is cut off the hub.
The advantages are that the point distribution will always match the other sections. This can improve
the blade shape. The disadvantage is that an extra processing step is done on the hub section when
it might not be necessary. Every step will add a small amount of imprecision to the results.
Smooth out the blade surface

Select this check box to spread out the blade surface points evenly along the blade in the leading to
trailing edge direction.
Normally, the surface point distribution is based on the QO distribution of the design. In some cases,
this can lead to a wide variation in distance between the surfaces points. For example, strongly ta-
pered blades may have a ‘gap’ along the shroud directly after the leading edge. By redistributing the
points with this option the gap will disappear.
This option often improves the quality of IGES and other output files. Most forms of geometric pro-
cessing work better when the input points are evenly spaced.
Smooth out the LE/TE to blade surface transition

Select this check box to smooth out irregularity that may occur when ruled elements are oriented
differently at the blade/edge boundary. If the difference is significant, the fit between the edge and
blade will not be completely smooth. In practical terms, there might be a slight irregularity at the
blade/edge boundary that may or may not be severe enough to bother you.
This option smooths out the irregularity by making sure that each section of the edge (both leading
and trailing) is matched to the corresponding blade section. The effect is that the edges are no longer
made up of pure ruled elements – each section is individually matched to the blade.
Improved leading edge shearing for inducer like blades

Select this check box to improve the leading edges of inducer-like blades, especially those that ap-
pear to be near tangential at the leading edge.
Swept LE and TE may extend outside of the blade

Select this check box to allow the swept leading and trailing edges to extend outside the blade.
Nurbs fitting method

From this drop-down list box, select one of the following options for a nurbs fitting method.
 Standard – Select this option to build a Nurbs surface directly from the points that are
viewed in the AxCent 3D wireframe display. The number of QOs specified directly
controls this method. The disadvantage to the Standard method is the "wobble" effect
behind any rounded leading edges.
 Alternate – Select this option to use a method that fits the Nurbs surfaces to the same
points as the Standard method. The Alternate method is only suitable for a certain class
of shapes. The disadvantage of this method is in the representation of rounded edges.
 Stabilized fit (recommended) – Select this option to generate a set of points used as
source data, which are independent of the QO’s. Instead of QO’s, the Stabilized fit
method uses smoothly changing point densities to avoid the "wobble" effect of the
standard method. It provides the most consistently reliable CAD translation of all three
Nurbs fitting methods.
Passage area calculation

Select one of the following methods for calculating the passage area plot:
Simple trapezoid
This method assumes a simple trapezoidal shape of the passage. This method is simple and fast, but
less precise than the other methods.
Nurbs-based passage area calculation

This method provides a NURBS surface calculation of the blade to get the blade shape in detail. This
method uses detailed 3D geometry to get more accurate results, but cannot do splitter passage area.
Use rolled out geometry sections

This method cuts up the passage in a number of constant % span surfaces. Each of those surfaces is
"flattened out" and the passage width is then calculated along the passage. The information of all the
sections is then combined to get the passage area.
This method provides the following advantages and disadvantages:
 Works with difficult geometries where the other methods may fail, for example, sharp
bends.
 Takes detailed blade shape into account.
 Handles splitters well.
 The "flattening" is an approximate process that will introduce a small amount of error.
Rounded edge construction method (LE, TE, and splitter sections)

Select one of the following methods for constructing rounded edges for the LE, TE, and splitter.
Note: The new and old options for cut back edges (Cut back edges (new) and Cut back
edges (old)) perform the same edge calculation differently. Each option sets different
priorities for geometric features, performs iterative solutions differently, and
performs calculations in a different order. Because the new cut back option works
better for a majority of cases, it is the default option.
 Cut back edge (new) – The edges are cut back far enough so that no part of the blade
extends outside of the segment.
In the illustration below, an overlay of the blunt blade illustrates the effect of the cutback edge for
the blade section along the shroud. The edge is cut back so that it does not extend beyond the Z=-
4.5 line, the exact location where the segment begins at the shroud.
 Cut back edge (old) – The edges are cut back far enough so that no part of the blade
sticks outside of the segment.
 Internal edge – The rounded edge is constructed so that its tip exactly touches the tip of
the blunt blade.
In the internal edge option, the blade tip appears at the end of the black line in the illustration for the
cut back edge above, resulting in the sides of the blade extending slightly outside the blue and red
dashed lines.
 External edge – The blunt blade is constructed first, with the edge fitted on top of it.
The external edges are placed above the blunt blade, effectively lengthening the blade.
In this example, the same blade used in the cutback example appears with an external edge, resulting
in the projection of the blade beyond Z=-4.5:
Note: You can view the blade edge in the Z,R Theta window by zooming in to the LE.
Graphics-based 3D solids surfaces dialog box
Use this dialog box to export solids and surface files to CAD and FEA formats.
The Graphics-based 3D solids surfaces dialog box appears when you Export – Graphics-based 3D
solids/surfaces from the File menu.
The dialog box contains two tabs:
 CAD and CFD Geometry tab – Specify the file format for the export of CAD or CFD
data.
 FEA-Based Geometry tab – Specify the format of FEA data.
Graphics-based 3D solids/surfaces dialog box – CAD and CFD Geometry

tab
Use this tab of the Graphics-based 3D solids/surfaces dialog box to export your geometry to a num-
ber of CAD formats (including ACIS, IGES, Parasolid, and STEP).
File format
From the drop-down list, select one of the following file formats for export:
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Graphics-based 3D solids surfaces dialog box 301
geometry to IGES.
Identification section
Use this section to specify information that identifies the person who created the design (and their
organization) and the name of the product being designed. This information is used to label the re-
sulting IGES file for future identification. The information you specify in this section does not affect
the geometry of the design being exported to the IGES file.
Author
The name of the author. By default, your Windows systems ID appears in the Input/Output Volute
Parameters dialog box – Advanced tab. You can edit this information if you want to specify another
author for the file.
Organization
The name of the author’s organization.
Product
A description of the geometry being exported.
Units section
Select the unit of length to use for the IGES file (for example, millimeters, centimeters, or inches).
By default, this box displays the unit specified for the design in AxCent, but you can change it here
for the IGES output.
Note: The Units box provides some units options that are not normally available in AxCent
(for example, ft).
Select one of the following options for hot/cold output:
 Output Hot (operating) shape – Define the blade geometry when subject to higher
temperatures during operation.
This option is suitable for performance analysis.Blades can change shape slightly because of centrif-
ugal force.
 Output Cold (machined) shape – Define the blade geometry after it has been machined
or manufactured.
This option is suitable for the preparation of drawings for manufacturing.
Note: The hot and cold output options are only available after you have run the hot-to-cold
calculations under the Mechanical menu.
Segments
The box below the hot-cold output options displays the names of the first and last segments that will
be exported to the output file. It also indicates whether you have chosen to exclude rotating and/or
non-rotating blades from the output file.
To change the range of segments and to select whether rotating or non-rotating blades should be in-
cluded, click the Set Segments button and make your selections in the Select Segment Range dialog
box.
Select section
In this section, specify the part of the design that you want to export and the format in which to export
it.
Blade
Select the type of blade to export: Main blade, one of the Splitters, All blades, or None. Choose
None if you don’t want to export any blades at all (such as when you want to export only the hub
and shroud contours). The choices available depend on the type of blades available in the segment.
as
Select the representation of the blade for the export file:
 Solid
 Surfaces – This is the default option.
 Wireframe
 Guide curves – A minimal set of curves outlining the blade
 Cross-sections – A set of surfaces that are lengthwise cross-sections of the blade
 Cross-section contours – The edges of the cross-section surfaces
 Solid flow volume –
Note: Not all CAD programs can interpret IGES solids appropriately. The last three
representation options can be used to manually reconstruct the blade surface in a
CAD program. The option that works best will depend on the capabilities of your
CAD system.
Note: To use the tools in your CAD system to produce surfaces or solids, export the blade
information in Wireframe Guide curves format.
Pressure and suction surfaces only

Select this option to export only the working surface of the blade. The blade is then open at the top,
bottom, and at the trailing edge.
Close blade on all sides

Select this option to export the blade closed on all sides. This option is automatically used if you
select the Solid blade output option. You must select this option if you select the Surfaces blade out-
put option (surfaces are turned into a solid by the CAD system).
Include hub surface

Select this check box to include the surface of the hub in the export file.
Include shroud surface

Select this check box to include the surface of the shroud in the export file. This check box is not
available for an open wheel, since the shroud is at some distance from the blading, and its exact po-
sition is unknown.
For unbladed segments, this check box and the Include hub surface check box are the only avail-
able check boxes in this section.
Include blade tip surface of revolution
Select this check box to include the surface of revolution defined from the Tip Clearance curve re-
volved 360 degrees about the rotational axis. This option is available only if you have specified tip
clearance in the geometry definition of the blade.
Extend blade into the hub and shroud

Select this check box to make the blade surface slightly larger so that it extends into the hub and
shroud surface. This will make it easier for some CAD programs to intersect this surface with a sur-
face of revolution that represents the hub or shroud.
Full repeat of all blades

Select this check box to write all instances of the blade into the file. When not selected, only one
instance will be written. Most CAD software can perform the copy/translate operation at a later time.
This option becomes available when you select Solid in the "as" box.
Add backface/bore
Select this check box to include backface/bore geometry. This option appears only if you have back-
face/bore specified in your design via Pushbutton FEA.
Stress geometry
Select to include stress geometry in the export.
Tweak section
Use the options in this section to increase the quality of the information being exported to an IGES
file. These options are not available for unbladed segments, due to the fact that the exported hub and
shroud contour information is not affected by any of these options.
Use separate LE and TE surfaces

Select this option to export four separate surfaces instead of a single continuous surface around the
blade. Selecting this option disables the options below except for Tolerance and Put intermediate
sections in ruled blades.
The four separate surfaces exported for this option are pressure and suction sides and LE and TE.
Note: This option is required for exporting the simple circular fillet type that you can select
on the Fillets dialog box.
Tolerance
Type a value in this box for the tolerance to use to get a smoother surface. If this value is set too low,
there is very little room left to obtain a smooth surface. It might happen that in trying to get the sur-
face very accurate in one place a larger inaccuracy is introduced in other places. By default, AxCent
sets the tolerance to 0.05 mm (or 0.002 inch), which is about the minimum. By increasing the toler-
ance the surfaces get somewhat less accurate, but smoother.
Note: Smoother, less detailed surfaces are easier to handle for CAD systems. The tolerance
setting should be neither excessively small nor excessively large. A little
experimentation might be needed to find out what works best for your type of blade
geometry and your CAD system.
Explicit surface boundaries

Select this check box when you want to specify an explicit boundary curve around each surface. For
some CAD programs, this option can make it easier to determine the correct boundary of the surface,
and to match up individual surfaces.
Split boundary curves at LE
Select this check box to split the blade design into two curves joined at the leading and trailing edge.
In AxCent, boundary curves are a single curve starting and finishing at the trailing edge. Selecting
this option can make it easier for the geometry to be interpreted by CAD software.
Produce surfaces without ‘poles’

Select this check box to set the surfaces of a blade on a rectangular grid.
If this check box is not selected, AxCent produces top and bottom surfaces with poles converging at
both the leading and trailing edges of the blade (similar to how longitudinal lines converge at the
north and south poles of the earth). Only some CAD packages can interpret these grid lines accurate-
ly, however, the resulting collapsing isolines can be difficult for some CAD packages to interpret.
Flatten top and bottom of blades

Select this check box when you want the top and bottom sides of the blade to be flattened. Use this
option if the CAD system you want to import the IGES file into has difficulty interpreting curved
blades.
The top and bottom sides of a blade are normally very thin, however, they are slightly curved to
match the hub and shroud contours as the blade rotates. This is also true for the trailing edge of the
blade. For blades that are very thin compared to the diameter of the impeller, the curvature is very
small and making the sides flat may not cause a problem in the CAD system. Depending on the CAD
system, evaluate whether or not it’s necessary to remove the curvature.
Use Surf-of Rev whenever possible

Select this check box to use the surface of revolution method when this is possible (sometimes CAD
programs cannot determine exactly which patch should be cut from the surface of revolution).
A small section cut from a surface of revolution can simply and accurately represent a surface used
to construct an entire blade. Examples are the top surface of the blade or a sheared trailing edge.
If you do not select this option, the IGES output uses more general free-form surfaces when only a
small part of the surface of revolution would be used as the actual surface.
Put intermediate sections in ruled blades

Select this check box to include the intermediate section geometry in the IGES file. Some CAD pro-
grams work better with this additional information.
CTAADS compatible output

Select this check box to generate IGES files optimized for use by the CTAADS program. This option
should not be used for any other purpose.
Share geometry between blades

Select this check box to export a single copy of the blade geometry to the IGES file. This option is
recommended for smaller IGES files.
If you do not select this check box, a full model of the wheel containing multiple copies of the blade
is exported, with each blade offset to a different location. This duplication of information results in
a larger IGES file.
Alternative coordinate system for output section

Use this section to specify a coordinate system for the IGES output when the model requires a sys-
tem other than the default global cylindrical system of AxCent. (The default AxCent convention is
+Z for axis of rotation, Y axis = 0 degrees [X=0, Y=1], and -X axis =90 degrees [X=-1, Y=0].) If
you do not select this option, the global Z remains the axis of rotation by default.
Use this section to change the coordinate system to align the AxCent IGES export with a coordinate
system (such as the global Cartesian) used by the CAD program or other 3rd party program to which
you are exporting the geometry. Many CAD software programs use a local coordinate system based
on the global Cartesian coordinate system.
Note: It may be more convenient to orient the geometry using the local coordinate system
of the software to which you are exporting the file instead of using the options in this
section.
Use different coordinate system

Select this check box to specify an alternative coordinate system in the IGES export using the
Choose Coordinate System dialog box. Using this dialog box, you can change the axis of rotation
and the orientation of the coordinate system with respect to the 0 and 90 degree axes.
Configure button
Click this button to open the Choose Coordinate System dialog box to specify the components of the
alternative coordinate system.
Graphics-based 3D Solids/Surfaces dialog box – FEA-Based Geometry

tab
Use this tab of the Graphics-based 3D solids/surfaces dialog box to export an AxCent file to FEA-
based geometry.
File Format
geometry to IGES.
 STL – Export to the STL format (stereolithography).
Select segment
From the drop-down list, select the segment to be exported. The bladed segments that are available
in the design are listed in this drop-down list.
Output File Name

Click Browse to specify the file name and location of the file export.
Grid dialog box
Use the Grid dialog box to generate CFD grids, whether for O-type, C-type (or O-C and OH-C), OH-
type, OH-C-type, or H-type grids, or to generate a grid in the Numeca (*.geomTurbo) file format.
This dialog box appears when you choose Grid from the CFD menu.
Choose Blade-to-Blade Solver – Grid from the Flow menu.
Choose Throughflow Solver – Grid from the Flow menu.
– or if you are transferring the design to the Numeca solver.
Check Generate grid and then click Setup in the CFD section of the Transfer design to NUMECA
dialog box.
 "Grid dialog box – Topology tab" on page 313.
 "Grid dialog box – Grid tab" on page 307
 "Grid dialog box – H-Grid Clearance tab" on page 318.
Grid dialog box – Grid tab

Use the Grid tab of the Grid dialog box to specify node, tip clearance, smoothing, and vaneless space
options for your grid.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Grid dialog box 307

If you are using the Numeca solver, the Grid tab appears as follows:
Note: If you select Multiple grids on the Topology dialog box, multiple Grid tabs appear
(titled Grid 1_1, Grid 1_2, etc.).
Nodes section
This section displays the nodes options, depending on the type of grid you have chosen on the To-
pology tab.
H-grid nodes
Nodes for the H-Classic grid allow you to specify the size of the grid. You can specify nodes for the
Blade-to-blade, Streamwise, and Hub-to-shroud. The default size is 31 x 121 x 31. There is no
grid size limitation for the Multi-block solver. Your license decides the size of grids you can run.
Use table
Select this check box to use the values specified in the "Row details" table on the right pane for node
specification.
Nodes
In the nodes boxes, type the number of grid points that you want to use in the CFD computation for
the blade-to-blade, total streamwise, and hub-to-shroud, and direction. Note that the number should
be x n+1.
Spacing factor
Spacing factor refers to the stretching of grid cells midway between bounding surfaces. In these box-
es, type the grid stretching factors for the blade-to-blade, total streamwise, and hub-to-shroud direc-
tion. The computational grid is automatically clustered toward the bounding surfaces. A value of 1.0
represents a uniform grid; values of 1.2 to 1.5 are common. Values exceeding 1.5 represent a very
strong stretching, and are not recommended.
O- or OH-grid nodes
For O- and OH-grids, AxCent provides node allocation options that determine the overall grid size
per blade row, and node spacing options that determine grid node distribution along the grid’s do-
main boundaries for all blade rows or for a selected blade row.
For O- and OH-grids, you specify the number and spacing of grid nodes in the Hub to shroud boxes
in the "Nodes" section and then click the Set Default Grid button to have AxCent generate default
values for the grid generation parameters, which are displayed in the "Row details" table on the right
side of the tab. For more information, see the "Row details table" section below.
Note: If you have not already generated a grid for the design, the "Row details" section will
be blank. You must first specify the number and spacing of grid nodes for the grid in
the Hub to shroud boxes (under "Nodes"), enter a scale factor in the Scale factor box,
and then click the Set Default Grid button.
For descriptions of each parameter available in the Row details table for O- and OH-grids, refer to
the AxCent Help topic "O, O-C-, OH-, and OH-C-grid generation parameters".
Scaling/defaults section
Use the options in this section to specify the scaling factor for the grid and to generate a set of default
values for the grid based on the values you've entered in the "Nodes" and "Scaling / defaults" sec-
tions.
Multigrid level
Select the level of multi-grid acceleration: 1, 2, or 3. This option also appears as Levels of coarse
grid on the Multigrid tab of the Solver Settings – Full 3D dialog box and on the Grid tab of the Grid
dialog box.
Scale factor
Type a scale factor for the grid. The value you enter here scales the nodes in each direction when you
click the Set Default Grid button.
blade analysis.
Set Default Grid button

Click this button to generate default values for the grid based on the grid type selected on the Topol-
ogy tab and on the values specified in the "Nodes" and "Scaling / defaults" sections.
When you click Set Default Grid, AxCent calculates the values for the grid and displays them in
the "Row details" table on the right side of the dialog box.
Note: Clicking this button overwrites any existing grid settings specified in the "Row
details" section.
The button is split into two further options that appear on a drop-down menu, Each row and Row
[1+]. This drop-down menu appears when grid settings already specified appear in the "Row details"
table to the right. The row numbers are dynamically generated according to the number of rows in a
given design, beginning with Row 1.
Each row
Select to reset the entire grid. This option preserves the topology selection for each row.

Row [1+]
Select a single row in the grid to be reset. This option is recommended for specifying a separate to-
pology for a single row.
Clearance cells section

Specify the number of computational cells to use in the tip clearance.
One or two cells are usually recommended for Pushbutton CFD applications. If the hub-to-shroud
grid size is 21 nodes, and one cell is specified for the tip clearance modeling, then 19 cells are used
to describe the blade from hub to tip. If you specify a tip clearance, the default is one clearance cell.
However, if the number of clearance cells is incompatible with the number of coarse grid levels in
the multigrid scheme, the implicit solver will fail. For example, four clearance cells should be used
for the default setting of two coarse grid levels. If the implicit solver is selected and the number of
clearance cells is incompatible, a warning message appears.
This box appears for O- and OH-grids only. For H-Classic grids, you specify grid tip clearance set-
tings on the H-Grid Clearance tab.
Script section
Use this section to configure the exported Numeca script.
Note: This section appears only for the Numeca option.
For an explanation of templates and scripts that are used in Numeca software, click here.
Select the following options for the creation of the Numeca file(*.geomTurbo format):
 Redirect console output to file –
 Pause after each step –
Start from:
From the drop-down list, select one of the following file types in which to export the grid data, and
then browse to the file in the box directly below:
 design.geomTurbo – Fine/Turbo file format.
 Geometry file (*.geomTurbo) – Fine/Turbo file format.
 Project file (*.trb) – Fine/Turbo template file format.
 Template file (*.trb) – Fine/Turbo template file format.
Smoothing section
Apply smoothing
Select this check box to activate the smoothing option. (This check box is selected by default.)
Smoothing improves grid quality by making cells more orthogonal, smoothing volume differences,
and eliminating overspills from initial transfinite interpolation.
Note: This option is not available when you select the H-Classic Grid on the Topology tab.
When you select this check box, the Aspect ratio box (see below) becomes available.
Aspect ratio
You can either specify the target maximum aspect ratio that the smoother should achieve, or you can
have the smoother calculate the aspect ratio.
 To specify the aspect ratio, type the target maximum aspect ratio in the box. The default
value is 20, which biases the nodes towards the blade surface.
 To have the smoother calculate the aspect ratio, select the variable check box.
Clustering intensity
Select the amount of clustering intensity that you want to use:weak, medium, or strong.
The clustering intensity occurs near the wall/blade surface (or in the case of the OH-grid, the outer
boundary of the inner O-grid).
This option has two effects:
 Attracts grid points to the wall/blade surface.
 Makes the grid angle more perpendicular to the wall/blade surface.
Number of cores to use

The number of CPUs to be used for smoothing. By default, the number in this box is the number of
cores on the computer on which you are running AxCent. You can select a lower number if you wish
to use fewer cores.
Parallel section
Number of threads
In the spin box, select the number of parallel threads. This feature controls parallel grid generation,
including transfinite interpolation, smoothing, initialization, and file output.
Row details table section

This table displays the detailed node values for the type of grid you have selected. The table contains
a column for each segment/row included in the grid. The first column displays the name of each pa-
rameter you can view or edit for the grid. AxCent displays default values for each cell in the table.
You can change these defaults by typing new values in the table. The parameters in the table differ
depending on the type of grid you selected to generate.
H-grid row details

For H-grids, the "Row details" table displays a column for each segment included in the grid (as se-
lected on the Topology tab) and the following parameters. You can edit the values in this table if you
select the Use table check box in the "Nodes' section (on the left side of the tab).
Note: For designs that include volutes, the "Row details" table" is slightly different than
that for non-volute designs. For more information, see "H-grid row details for
designs with volutes" below.
H-grid row details for designs with volutes

If you are generating an H-grid and the design for which you are generating the grid includes a vo-
lute, the "Row details" table displays parameters organized into groups.
The default values for the parameters displayed in these groups will generally yield an adequate grid.
Only expert users should make changes to these values, and most changes made should be small.
For information on how to use the "Row details" table to view and edit parameter values, see the
"Working with the Row details table" topic in AxCent Help.
O- and OH-grid row details

For O- and OH-grids, the "Row details" table displays parameters organized into groups.
The default values for the parameters displayed in these groups will generally yield an adequate grid.
Only expert users should make changes to these values, and most changes made should be small.

For information on how to use the "Row details" table to view and edit parameter values, see see
"Grid dialog box" on page 307..
For descriptions of each parameter available in the Row details table for O- and OH-grids, refer to
the AxCent Help topic "O, O-C-, OH-, and OH-C-grid generation parameters".
Update button
After you make each change to the "Row details" table, click this button to save your changes. In
some cases, when you click Update after making a change, the available options in the table change
to reflect the change you made.
Preview button
Click this button to generate a preview of the grid and to open the Grid Settings dialog box.
__ grid sections
Select the number of sections for preview in the spin box.
Show all parameters

Select this check box to view all O- and OH-grid parameters in the "Row details" table when you
use the Multiblock solver (selected on the Solver tab).
Expert mode
Select this check box to use the more detailed values of the expert mode when you use either of the
Numeca solvers. The parameters for this mode include streamwise and azimuthal parameters for in-
let, outlet and blade.
Note: If you leave this tab before specifying the values in the "Row details" table, a warning
message appears asking you to initialize the values before leaving the Grid tab.
Show single row

Select this check box to view a single row in the table. You can scroll through the row to be viewed
by clicking the row above (Row 1, Row 2, etc.).
Grid dialog box – Topology tab
Use the Topology tab of the Grid dialog box to select the segments and type of surface grid that you
want to generate. You can also select the use of multiple grids on this tab.
To access this tab, choose Grid from the CFD menu.
– or when running the Blade-to-blade solver –
Choose Blade to Blade Solver – Grid from the Flow menu.
– or when running the Throughflow solver –
Choose Blade to Throughflow Solver – Grid from the Flow menu.
Segments section
Use the boxes in the Segments section to select the first and last segments to be included in the grid
calculations.
Start segment
Specify the first segment to be included in the CFD analysis.
Note: The first segment that you specify must be either an unbladed segment (such as a
duct) or an upstream volute, depending on the design.
End segment
Specify the segment at which the CFD grid calculation ends.
Blunt edges at mid tip

Select this check box to set the sharp tip in the middle of the blade when the CFD grid is generated
and the blade sides come together in a sharp tip. If the tip of a blade is blunt, a sharp approximation

is made. When this option is not selected, the sharp tip is made at the side of the blade that extends
furthest.
Select this option if it helps you create the best blade shape for your design. For example, selecting
this option can help you obtain a more accurate exit radius for a centrifugal wheel.
To view illustrations of the effects of using this option, see Mid tip example.
To view illustrations of the effects of using this option, see the AxCent Help topic "Mid tip exam-
ple."
This option is available for H-type grids only; it is not available for O and OH grids.
Enhanced precision
[Q: Will this be deleted?]
Select this check box to maximize the geometric floating-point precision. This is especially helpful
for very small wheels. Clear this option to keep consistent with older runs.
Solution section
Use the options in this section to specify the type of grid you want to generate and the type of CFD
solution to use.
Solver
This read-only window indicates the type of solver being used.
Grid type
Select the type of grid you want to generate:
 H-Classic Grid – Select this option to use a grid that is adequate for passage areas with
rectangular topographies.
 O-Grid – Select this option to use an O-grid for the area in the immediate vicinity of the
blade. The outer boundary of the O grid is in the mid-passage. An H-type grid can be
attached to the O-grid upstream or downstream.
You also select the O-grid option if you want to use a C-type grid. The C-type grids (OC or OH-C)
are a subset of the O-grid that do not surround the blade entirely. To generate a C-grid, first select
O-Grid in this box, and then select O-C-type for the Topology parameter in the "Grid dimensions"
group in the Row details table of the Grid tab.
 OH-Grid – Select this option to use a hybrid grid that combines both H-type and O-type
grid elements. The OH-hybrid grid covers the same area as the O grid does; however, the
area is divided into two regions: the O grid is a thin layer around the blade surface, and
the H grid covers the rest of the area.
You must also select the OH-Grid option if you want to use an OH-C-grid. The OH-C-grid is a
subset of the OH-grid in which the O-block is open at the sheared or blunt LE or TE. To select the
OH-C-grid, first select OH-grid in this box, and then select OH-C-type for the Topology parameter
in the "Grid dimensions" group in the Row details table of the Grid tab. Smoothing is recommended
for the OH-C grid, because it preserves the surface of rotation along the open edge.
 Mixed – This option appears only if you assign two or more different values for the
Topology parameter to blade rows in your design (in the "Grid dimensions" group in the
"Row details table" of the Grid tab).
For more information about each grid type, see Overview: AxCent CFD grids.
For more information about each grid type, see "Introduction to AxCent CFD grids" on page 164.
When you select the grid type, the Row Details table on the right side of the dialog box displays the
required parameters to generate the type of grid you’ve selected and displays the default values for
each parameter. The parameters in the table will differ, depending on the type of grid you've chosen.
Some parameters values can be selected individually for each blade row in the design.
Solution
Select the CFD solution type:
 Blade-to-Blade – Select this option to run a blade-to-blade CFD solution. When you
select this option, the At ___ % span box below the Solution box becomes available (for
the Topology tab only). Specify a % span number between 0 and 100. For more
information, see the " Performing blade-to-blade CFD calculations" topic in AxCent
Help.
At ___ % span
This box becomes available when you select the Blade-to-Blade type solution. Specify a % span
number between 0 and 100. For example, if you type 50 in the box, this specifies a blade-to-blade
solution location with 50% of the area above and below the streamsheet grid. 0% is the hub, and
100% is the shroud.
Multiple grids
Use the multiple grid feature to launch a series of CFD solutions that run in parallel. This feature
allows multiple blade-to-blade solutions to be run at various spanwise locations. It also allows for
solutions using different grid densities and grid topologies. The convergence of the solutions is
tracked simultaneously in the real-time convergence plot.
All results appear in the CFD Results dialog box, and can be read and plotted like any standard CFD
run. Multiple grids are especially suitable for axial compressors and turbines that are running blade-
to-blade solutions. The feature is also useful for other turbomachinery.
Select the check box to add multiple grids to the CFD setup. The basic grid parameters appear in the
Row details table, and the multiple Grid tabs containing the detailed grid settings appear on the di-
alog box.
Add >>> button

Click this button to add the currently selected grid topology and solution type to the multiple grids.
When you click this button, a new grid tab appears for each grid that you add to the multiple grid
setup (numbered Grid 1_1, Grid 1_2, etc.).
Two drop-down options for adding multiple grids also appear:
 Each Row – Add the grid as currently defined in the Solution drop-down box above to
each row (these rows appear in a column in the Row details table to the right).
 Row # – Add the multiple grids to an individual row.
Row details table

This table displays the parameters required to generate the type of grid you’ve selected. If the seg-
ments you have selected include more than one blade row, the table contains a column for each row.
The parameters you can specify for each row appear in the first column of the table. AxCent deter-
mines default values for each cell. The parameters in the table differ depending on the type of grid
you selected to generate.

Bladed segment
Select the segment to be bladed. If there is only one bladed segment in the design, this cell displays
the name of the bladed segment.
Leading trailing edge cusps

Select this check box to include leading and trailing edge cusps in the grid to avoid zig-zag patterns
in streamwise grid lines. Selecting this check box has the side effect of changing the inlet and exit
blade angles; therefore, using this option is not recommended in designs that have off-design condi-
tions when there are large incidence angles.
This parameter appears only if you selected H-Grid in the Grid type box.
Inlet extension styles /Exit extension styles

For each of these parameters, select the type of style to use for the inlet/exit extension of the bladed
segments in the grid domain. The Manual Early Turning style is the default style, unless AxCent
recognizes the design as being obviously axial, in which case the Axial/Twisted style is the default.
 Early turning-chord based – This option is not available for H-type grids. It is suitable
only for O- and OH-type grids. With this option, the inlet and exit extensions smoothly
bend to the axial direction, starting somewhere inside the passage, based on percentage
of chord. The advantage of this extension is that more orthogonal grids can be created.
 Manual Early Turning –
This is the default option for all grids when you pass a meanline design (whether from COMPAL,
PUMPAL, FANPAL, RITAL, AXIAL) to the AxCent program.
Use this option to specify early turning for the inlet or the exit extensions. When you select Manual
early turning, you must specify values for the following parameters in the "Row details" table:
 start turning – Ratio of the area between the blades to the throat distance:
 end turning – Ratio of the area beyond the blades to the blade pitch:
 turning left at end – Ratio of lambda at end to lambda at start:
 pos at end – Ratio of the center of the blade passage to the blade pitch:
 lean control – Fraction of lean and bow of edge that is left at end.
The following rows appear for multiple grids if they are being specified.
 Run suffix –This suffix identifies each one of the multiple grids.
 Solver – Select one of the solver types in the drop-down list.
 Grid type – Select the grid type in the drop-down list (H-Classic, HH, HX, O, OH,
Unstructured).
 Solution – Select the solution in the drop-down list (Blade-to-blade, Full 3D,
Throughflow).
 Span [%] – Specify the percentage amount of the span.
Remove button
Click this button to remove the selected grid from the table and from the multiple grids setup. Select
the grid to be removed by clicking on the column for the multiple grid in the Row Details table.
Setup button
Click to set up the grids in the CFD Multiple Grids Setup dialog box.

Grid dialog box – H-Grid Clearance tab
Use the H-Grid Clearance tab of the Grid dialog box to set up the CFD tip clearance you want to use
for the H-grid.
Note: This tab is available only if you selected H-Classic Grid in the Grid type box on the
Topology tab of the Grid dialog box. It is only available for Full 3D solutions.
Use AxCent defaults for open wheel

Select this check box to apply AxCent’s default CFD values for all blade rows. This check box is
already selected if you selected the default values for the grid in the Use Defaults dialog box. If this
option is selected, the specific clearance options are not available.
User defined (single blade row) section

In this section, specify your own values for constant clearance, tapered clearance, and unducted
wheel. The options in this section become active when you clear (unselect) the Use AxCent defaults
for open wheel check box.
Constant clearance
Select this option and then type the amount in the Clearance box to specify the constant tip clearance
value. The tip clearance remains constant from LE to TE, and is extracted automatically from Ax-
Cent if the current machine is an open wheel. The tip is equal to 0 (zero) for a closed wheel.
Tapered Clearance
Select this option to use a tapered clearance by which to model the particular grid line. The tapered
clearance varies from LE to TE. The Average clearance, Leading edge clearance, and Trailing edge
clearance boxes are for information purposes only and do not become active when you select this
option.
Unducted wheel
Select this option to include an unducted wheel (or open, unshrouded impeller) in the CFD grid cal-
culation. An unducted wheel is synonymous with an unducted impeller (or rotor) or an unducted fan.
An unducted wheel is an impeller (or rotor) that has no shroud.
When you select this option, the following two options are enabled.
Model up to R
In this box, specify the radius of the computational domain. Because the wheel is unducted, you must
include a region near the impeller (or rotor) in the analysis. This is where you can specify how far
out from the impeller (or rotor) the computational domain will extend. This should be at least two to
three times the radius of the impeller (or rotor).
Use ambient P0, T0 at that R

Select this check box to specify the boundary conditions. This option uses the inlet T0 and P0 as the
boundary conditions at the far-field boundary. Ambient values are always used.
Cells in clearance
Specify the number of computational cells to use in the tip clearance. One or two cells are recom-
mended for Pushbutton CFD applications. For example, if the hub-to-shroud grid size is 21 nodes,
and one cell is specified for the tip clearance modeling, then 19 cells will be used to describe the
blade, from hub to tip. Pushbutton CFD’s default uses one cell in the clearance if a tip clearance is
specified in the current design.
Blade tip thickness factors

This table allows you to model the blade tip region by the tip clearance factor. Each number in the
table represents a particular node. Type the value of the blade tip region in the cell beside each spe-
cific node. A value of 1.0 represents full blade thickness. Values less than 1.0 are used to model the
tapered blade tip region to 0 (zero) thickness at the tip.

Grid settings dialog box
Use this dialog box to interactively edit the settings of a grid that appears in a 3D preview window.
The Grid settings dialog box appears when you click Preview on the Grid tab of the Grid dialog box.
The Preview window, which is interactive with this dialog box, also appears.
– or –
For advanced topology grids, choose View CFD Grids from the CFD menu, select the 3D – CFD
Grid window, and then click on the toolbar menu.

The Grid settings dialog box contains the following tabs:
 Geometry tab
 Grid tab
 Rows tab
Note: Shaded rows in each table indicate the parameter is read-only. You can also use the
tooltips feature to read descriptions of each parameter in the tables.
Geometry tab
The parameters on this tab are identical to those on the Row details table of the Topology tab of the
Grid dialog box, except that the parameters displayed in this tab are for a single row.
To view the parameters on this tab, see "Grid dialog box – Topology tab" on page 313.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Grid settings dialog box 321
Grid tab
This tab displays the settings that apply to all grids that you have selected on the Grid dialog box.
Parameters
 Topology – This row identifies the grid type, whether Mixed for advanced topologies or
H-classic for legacy H-grids.
 Default Row Topology – These options appear in the Grid Type drop down list of the
Topology tab. They identify the default topology for each row when you click the Set
default grid button.
Select the type of grid you want to generate:
 H-Classic Grid – Select this option to use a grid that is adequate for passage areas with
rectangular topographies.
 O-Grid – Select this option to use an O-grid for the area in the immediate vicinity of the
blade. The outer boundary of the O grid is in the mid-passage. An H-type grid can be
attached to the O-grid upstream or downstream.
You also select the O-grid option if you want to use a C-type grid. The C-type grids (OC or OH-C)
are a subset of the O-grid that do not surround the blade entirely. To generate a C-grid, first select
O-Grid in this box, and then select O-C-type for the Topology parameter in the "Grid dimensions"
group in the Row details table of the Grid tab.
 OH-Grid – Select this option to use a hybrid grid that combines both H-type and O-type
grid elements. The OH-hybrid grid covers the same area as the O grid does; however, the
area is divided into two regions: the O grid is a thin layer around the blade surface, and
the H grid covers the rest of the area.
You must also select the OH-Grid option if you want to use an OH-C-grid. The OH-C-grid is a
subset of the OH-grid in which the O-block is open at the sheared or blunt LE or TE. To select the
OH-C-grid, first select OH-grid in this box, and then select OH-C-type for the Topology parameter
in the "Grid dimensions" group in the Row details table of the Grid tab. Smoothing is recommended
for the OH-C grid, because it preserves the surface of rotation along the open edge.
 Mixed – This option appears only if you assign two or more different values for the
Topology parameter to blade rows in your design (in the "Grid dimensions" group in the
"Row details table" of the Grid tab).
 Solution Type – Select the CFD solution type, whether Full 3D, Blade-to-blade, or
Throughflow (these options also appear in the "Solution" section of the Topology tab of
the Grid dialog box).
 Total Blocks – Displays the total number of blocks to be previewed (read-only).
 Total Blade Rows – These blade rows also appear as columns in the Row details table
for the Topology and Grid tabs of the Grid dialog box (read-only).
Dimensions
 Multigrid Level – Select the level of multi-grid acceleration: 1, 2, or 3. This option also
appears as Levels of coarse grid on the Multigrid tab of the Solver Settings – Full 3D
dialog box and on the Grid tab of the Grid dialog box.
 Scaling Factor – Type a scale factor for the grid. The value you enter here scales the
nodes in each direction when you click the Set Default Grid button. The Scale factor
value does not affect the nodes in the hub and shroud directions, which are either defined
in the "Nodes" section, above, or are set to 2 for a blade-to-blade analysis.
 Hub-to-Shroud Sections – Specify the number of nodes in the hub-to-shroud direction.
The number should be 2 to the power of Multigrid level x n=1. (This option also appears
under the "Nodes" section of the Grid tab.)
 Preview Sections – Specify the number of hub-to-shroud sections to be generated for the
preview window.
 Cells in Clearance – Specify the number of computational cells to use in the tip
clearance. One or two cells are usually recommended for Pushbutton CFD applications.
If the hub-to-shroud grid size is 21 nodes, and one cell is specified for the tip clearance
modeling, then 19 cells are used to describe the blade from hub to tip. If you specify a
tip clearance, the default is one clearance cell.However, if the number of clearance cells
is incompatible with the number of coarse grid levels in the multigrid scheme, the
implicit solver will fail. For example, four clearance cells should be used for the default
setting of two coarse grid levels. If the implicit solver is selected and the number of
clearance cells is incompatible, a warning message appears.This box appears for O- and
OH-grids only. For H-Classic grids, you specify grid tip clearance settings on the H-Grid
Clearance tab.
Nodes distribution
 Hub-to-Shroud Spacing – Specify nodes for hub-to-shroud spacing in the advanced
topology grids, whether Constant, Exponentially Centered, or Exponentially Spread.
 Hub-to-Shroud Factor – Specify the exponential hub-to-shroud spacing factor (this
factor also appears in the "Nodes" section of the Grid tab of the Grid dialog box).
Rows tab
This tab displays the current settings for the selected grid row. The parameters are identical to those
displayed on the Row details table of the Grid tab.
You can view parameter definitions for each row using tool tips. The definitions also appear in the
list below.
To view the parameters on this tab, see "Grid dialog box – Grid tab" on page 307.
Save settings drop-down list
From the drop-down list, check one of the following options for saving the settings:
 Save settings, close preview – Save the current grid settings, and close the Grid settings
dialog box and the preview mode window.
 Save settings, keep preview – Save the current grid settings, but keep the preview mode
window open.
 Save settings, preprocess grid – Save the current grid settings, close the dialog box and
generate the full grid with an initial solution and an entry in the table of the CFD Results
dialog box.
 Reset settings ... – Generate the default grid settings for the current row. This option is
equivalent to ‘Set Default Grid’ dropdown option on Grid/Grid property page.
Preview
Click to regenerate the current grid row using the current settings, and to update the grid preview.
Cancel
Click to exit the grid preview mode without saving the settings. When the preview mode is selected
from the View CFD Grid menu command, the original grid is restored in the view.
Graphics-based 3D solids/surfaces dialog box – CAD and CFD Geometry tab
Use this tab of the Graphics-based 3D solids/surfaces dialog box to export your geometry to a num-
ber of CAD formats (including ACIS, IGES, Parasolid, and STEP).
File format
geometry to IGES.
Identification section
Use this section to specify information that identifies the person who created the design (and their
organization) and the name of the product being designed. This information is used to label the re-
sulting IGES file for future identification. The information you specify in this section does not affect
the geometry of the design being exported to the IGES file.
Author
The name of the author. By default, your Windows systems ID appears in the Input/Output Volute
Parameters dialog box – Advanced tab. You can edit this information if you want to specify another
author for the file.
Organization
The name of the author’s organization.
Product
A description of the geometry being exported.
Units section
Select the unit of length to use for the IGES file (for example, millimeters, centimeters, or inches).
By default, this box displays the unit specified for the design in AxCent, but you can change it here
for the IGES output.
Note: The Units box provides some units options that are not normally available in AxCent
(for example, ft).
Select one of the following options for hot/cold output:
 Output Hot (operating) shape – Define the blade geometry when subject to higher
temperatures during operation.
This option is suitable for performance analysis.Blades can change shape slightly because of centrif-
ugal force.
 Output Cold (machined) shape – Define the blade geometry after it has been machined
or manufactured.
This option is suitable for the preparation of drawings for manufacturing.
Note: The hot and cold output options are only available after you have run the hot-to-cold
calculations under the Mechanical menu.
Segments
The box below the hot-cold output options displays the names of the first and last segments that will
be exported to the output file. It also indicates whether you have chosen to exclude rotating and/or
non-rotating blades from the output file.
To change the range of segments and to select whether rotating or non-rotating blades should be in-
cluded, click the Set Segments button and make your selections in the Select Segment Range dialog
box.
Select section
In this section, specify the part of the design that you want to export and the format in which to export
it.
Blade
Select the type of blade to export: Main blade, one of the Splitters, All blades, or None. Choose
None if you don’t want to export any blades at all (such as when you want to export only the hub
and shroud contours). The choices available depend on the type of blades available in the segment.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Graphics-based 3D solids/surfaces dialog box – CAD and CFD Geometry tab 327
as
Select the representation of the blade for the export file:
 Solid
 Surfaces – This is the default option.
 Wireframe
 Guide curves – A minimal set of curves outlining the blade
 Cross-sections – A set of surfaces that are lengthwise cross-sections of the blade
 Cross-section contours – The edges of the cross-section surfaces
 Solid flow volume –
Note: Not all CAD programs can interpret IGES solids appropriately. The last three
representation options can be used to manually reconstruct the blade surface in a
CAD program. The option that works best will depend on the capabilities of your
CAD system.
Note: To use the tools in your CAD system to produce surfaces or solids, export the blade
information in Wireframe Guide curves format.
Pressure and suction surfaces only

Select this option to export only the working surface of the blade. The blade is then open at the top,
bottom, and at the trailing edge.
Close blade on all sides

Select this option to export the blade closed on all sides. This option is automatically used if you
select the Solid blade output option. You must select this option if you select the Surfaces blade out-
put option (surfaces are turned into a solid by the CAD system).
Include hub surface

Select this check box to include the surface of the hub in the export file.

Select this check box to include the surface of the shroud in the export file. This check box is not
available for an open wheel, since the shroud is at some distance from the blading, and its exact po-
sition is unknown.
Include blade tip surface of revolution

Select this check box to include the surface of revolution defined from the Tip Clearance curve re-
volved 360 degrees about the rotational axis. This option is available only if you have specified tip
clearance in the geometry definition of the blade.

This option becomes available when you select Solid in the "as" box.
Add backface/bore
Select this check box to include backface/bore geometry. This option appears only if you have back-
face/bore specified in your design via Pushbutton FEA.
Stress geometry
Select to include stress geometry in the export.
Tweak section
Use the options in this section to increase the quality of the information being exported to an IGES
file. These options are not available for unbladed segments, due to the fact that the exported hub and
shroud contour information is not affected by any of these options.
Use separate LE and TE surfaces

Select this option to export four separate surfaces instead of a single continuous surface around the
blade. Selecting this option disables the options below except for Tolerance and Put intermediate
sections in ruled blades.
The four separate surfaces exported for this option are pressure and suction sides and LE and TE.
Note: This option is required for exporting the simple circular fillet type that you can select
on the Fillets dialog box.
Tolerance
Type a value in this box for the tolerance to use to get a smoother surface. If this value is set too low,
there is very little room left to obtain a smooth surface. It might happen that in trying to get the sur-
face very accurate in one place a larger inaccuracy is introduced in other places. By default, AxCent
sets the tolerance to 0.05 mm (or 0.002 inch), which is about the minimum. By increasing the toler-
ance the surfaces get somewhat less accurate, but smoother.
Note: Smoother, less detailed surfaces are easier to handle for CAD systems. The tolerance
setting should be neither excessively small nor excessively large. A little
experimentation might be needed to find out what works best for your type of blade
geometry and your CAD system.
Explicit surface boundaries

Select this check box when you want to specify an explicit boundary curve around each surface. For
some CAD programs, this option can make it easier to determine the correct boundary of the surface,
and to match up individual surfaces.
Split boundary curves at LE

Select this check box to split the blade design into two curves joined at the leading and trailing edge.
In AxCent, boundary curves are a single curve starting and finishing at the trailing edge. Selecting
this option can make it easier for the geometry to be interpreted by CAD software.
Produce surfaces without ‘poles’

Select this check box to set the surfaces of a blade on a rectangular grid.
If this check box is not selected, AxCent produces top and bottom surfaces with poles converging at
both the leading and trailing edges of the blade (similar to how longitudinal lines converge at the
north and south poles of the earth). Only some CAD packages can interpret these grid lines accurate-
ly, however, the resulting collapsing isolines can be difficult for some CAD packages to interpret.
Flatten top and bottom of blades

Select this check box when you want the top and bottom sides of the blade to be flattened. Use this
option if the CAD system you want to import the IGES file into has difficulty interpreting curved
blades.
The top and bottom sides of a blade are normally very thin, however, they are slightly curved to
match the hub and shroud contours as the blade rotates. This is also true for the trailing edge of the
blade. For blades that are very thin compared to the diameter of the impeller, the curvature is very
small and making the sides flat may not cause a problem in the CAD system. Depending on the CAD
system, evaluate whether or not it’s necessary to remove the curvature.
Use Surf-of Rev whenever possible

Select this check box to use the surface of revolution method when this is possible (sometimes CAD
programs cannot determine exactly which patch should be cut from the surface of revolution).
A small section cut from a surface of revolution can simply and accurately represent a surface used
to construct an entire blade. Examples are the top surface of the blade or a sheared trailing edge.
If you do not select this option, the IGES output uses more general free-form surfaces when only a
small part of the surface of revolution would be used as the actual surface.
Put intermediate sections in ruled blades

Select this check box to include the intermediate section geometry in the IGES file. Some CAD pro-
grams work better with this additional information.
CTAADS compatible output

Select this check box to generate IGES files optimized for use by the CTAADS program. This option
should not be used for any other purpose.
Share geometry between blades

Select this check box to export a single copy of the blade geometry to the IGES file. This option is
recommended for smaller IGES files.
If you do not select this check box, a full model of the wheel containing multiple copies of the blade
is exported, with each blade offset to a different location. This duplication of information results in
a larger IGES file.
Alternative coordinate system for output section
Use this section to specify a coordinate system for the IGES output when the model requires a sys-
tem other than the default global cylindrical system of AxCent. (The default AxCent convention is
+Z for axis of rotation, Y axis = 0 degrees [X=0, Y=1], and -X axis =90 degrees [X=-1, Y=0].) If
you do not select this option, the global Z remains the axis of rotation by default.
Use this section to change the coordinate system to align the AxCent IGES export with a coordinate
system (such as the global Cartesian) used by the CAD program or other 3rd party program to which
you are exporting the geometry. Many CAD software programs use a local coordinate system based
on the global Cartesian coordinate system.
Note: It may be more convenient to orient the geometry using the local coordinate system
of the software to which you are exporting the file instead of using the options in this
section.
Use different coordinate system

Select this check box to specify an alternative coordinate system in the IGES export using the
Choose Coordinate System dialog box. Using this dialog box, you can change the axis of rotation
and the orientation of the coordinate system with respect to the 0 and 90 degree axes.
Configure button
Click this button to open the Choose Coordinate System dialog box to specify the components of the
alternative coordinate system.
Link to Meanline Program dialog box
This dialog box allows you to link your AxCent (.DES) file to your meanline (.GEO or .AXL) file,
so that you can apply geometric changes that you make in AxCent to the meanline file.
This dialog box appears when you choose Link to from the Agile – Meanline menu.
Note: The dialog box title includes the name of the meanline program that corresponds to
the type of machine in your design. For example, if your design is a compressor
design, the name of the dialog box is “Link to Compal”. For axial designs, the name
of the dialog box is "Link to Axial".
Meanline file name

Displays the name of the meanline file that is linked to this design. If you launched AxCent from the
meanline program or if you have already established a link to a meanline file, the meanline file's path
and name appears here. Otherwise, this box is blank. To select the meanline file to link to this design,
click the Browse button.
Note: When browsing for an AXIAL meanline file, be sure to select the AXIAL Files
(*.axl) option in the Files of type box.
Enable link to meanline

Select this check box to create the link between this design and the specified meanline program file.
Parameters to update
If you are linking the AxCent design to a radial meanline design, select the parameters that you want
to be updated when the AxCent or meanline file changes.
Automatically update secondary zone parameters

Select this check box to transfer these parameter values from AxCent to the meanline file. The Ax-
Cent values will be used in the meanline file unless the meanline file specifies to estimate secondary
zone parameters from other meanline parameters.
Automatically update meridional velocity ratio

Select this check box to transfer these parameter values from AxCent to the meanline file. Note that
these parameters are transferred only if there is an MST solution that has sufficient detail in its solu-
tion to make an Ak estimate.
Automatically update fluid dynamic inlet blockage
Select this check box to transfer the value for the Inlet Aerodynamic Blockage (BLCK1) parameter
from AxCent to the meanline file.
Automatically update axial thrust parameters

Select this check box to transfer these parameter values from the meanline file to AxCent. AxCent’s
axial thrust calculation will be a combination of these numbers with data from flow solvers.
Update front leakage data automatically

Select this check box to transfer these parameters from AxCent to the meanline file.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Link to Meanline Program dialog box 333
MAX-PAC Output File Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to control the generation of MAX 5, MAX AB, and MAX-SI output files. The
options in this dialog box mainly serve to address specific needs that might be found in some envi-
ronments. In most cases, it is best to leave all options at their default settings.
The following output files are generated:

 Blade shape file (.BLA, .IMP, or .SPI)
 Edge information file (.EDG or .EDS)
 Boundary contours file (.BND)
This dialog box appears when you choose Export – Concepts NREC Format from the File menu,
and then click OKin the CN Proprietary Transfer tab of the Concepts NREC Format dialog box that
appears.
Leading and trailing edge method section

In this section, select the method to use to construct the leading and trailing edges.
Leading edge / Trailing edge
The following methods are available for creating leading and trailing edges. Note that these leading
and trailing edge settings affect only rounded edges, and do not affect blunt and sheared edges.
From the drop-down list boxes, select one of the following methods:
 Use AxCent edge points – This option sends over the LE/TE points generated by
AxCent. This is the preferred method.
 Cut back edge
 Internal edge
 External edge
 Blunt edge – Select this option to turn rounded edges in AxCent into blunt edges in the
machining file.
Refer to your machining software documentation for descriptions on how these different types of
edges are implemented.
Coordinate system section

Normally the output data for the blade uses the same coordinate system as used inside AxCent. The
group of options in this section allows you to translate the blade into a different coordinate system.
This is useful if the people doing the machining prefer a specific orientation of the coordinate sys-
tem.
Z = ____ at _____ and Theta = ____ at _____

The four reference points available are the leading and trailing edge points at both the hub and the
shroud. The options in this group give you the option to put Z and/or Theta at such a point to a spe-
cific reference value.
Use separate Z / theta reference for splitters

Normally the reference points on the main blade are used, even if a splitter blade is output; however,
if you select one of these check boxes, the points on the actual blade being output, rather than the
main blade, is placed at the specified value.
The Use separate theta reference for splitters check box has another effect when no reference
point is selected in the list above (that is, Use AxCent values is chosen). If selected, a frame of ref-
erence relative to the splitter blade is used for outputting splitter blades. This means you have to be
sure to rotate the splitter data by the correct number of degrees to offset it from the main blade. If
this option is not selected, the splitter data is output in the same frame of reference as the main blade;
it is already rotated with the correct offset relative to the main blade.
Put pressure and suction side points in the same meridional (Z,R) position
When you output a MAX file and translate the X,Y,Z to Z,R,Theta, you get two surface points for
each point in the blade center line. These points differ in all three values since thickness is applied
normal to the meanline surface.
This option lets you output a pair of surface points that differ only in theta. This is done by fitting a
curve through the surface points and finding the curve point at each Z,R.
Note that by using this option, rounded edges may not fit properly.
This option is not available for the Use AxCent edge points method for either LE or TE.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® MAX-PAC Output File Options dialog box 335
Blade extension section
This section allows you to add an extension to the blade, which is sometimes useful when machining
a blade. It allows the machining software to continue the cutting path smoothing at the end of a blunt
trailing edge.
It is usually better to use the features of the machining software to do this rather than use this exten-
sion option in AxCent. The machining software is more specialized for this type of problem and usu-
ally does a better job.
No extension
Select this option to apply no blade extension.
Straight line
Select this option to specify to continue with a straight blade section.
Constant beta curve

Select this option to specify to continue with a constant blade angle beta.
Hub extension length

In this box, type the amount of hub extension length for a straight or constant beta curve.
Shroud extension length

In this box, type the amount of shroud extension length for a straight or constant beta curve.
Number of points
In this box, type the number of points to use for a constant beta curve extension.
Output units section
Override units
Select this check box to use of a different system of units for the machining files rather than what is
already specified for the design in AxCent. Note that the output file does not contain any indication
of the units used. It is important to make sure the machining software knows which system of units
to use.
MAX-5/AB/SI File Parameters dialog box
This dialog box allows you to specify the blade extension options that you want to export for a se-
lected segment to use with the MAX-PAC program.
This dialog appears when you select the Max5/MaxAB format option in the Machining/CFD Out-
put File Parameters dialog box (when exporting machine information).
This dialog box also appears when you select Setup – MAX-PAC Extensions from the Geometry
menu.
Blade extensions section

In this section, select the type of blade extension that you want to export. Examples of each type of
blade extension are also provided.
 No extension
Select this option to put no extension of the blades beyond the trailing edge.
 Straight line
Select this option to put straight-line extensions of the blades beyond the trailing edge.
 Constant beta curve
Select this option to extend the blades at a constant blade angle (log spiral) beyond the trailing edge.
Hub extension length

Type the meridional length of the blade extension on the hub. This option is not available for No
extension type of blade extension.
Shroud extension length

Type the meridional length of the blade extension on the shroud. This option is not available for No
extension type of blade extension.
Number of points
Type the number of data points in the blade extension region. This option is available for the Con-
stant beta curve type of blade extension only.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® MAX-5/AB/SI File Parameters dialog box 337
Stacking and Geometry Options for Midspan Sections dialog box
Use this dialog box to stack sections meridionally along the leading and/or trailing edge. For more
information and an illustration of how meridional stacking appears in AxCent, see the topic "Merid-
ional stacking example" in AxCent Help.
Note: For information on selecting the blade generation option, see "Specifying the type of
blade generation" on page 54.
This dialog box appears when you choose Mid-Span Geometry Defn. – Stacking and Geometry
Options from the Geometry menu.
Stacking options section
Enable meridional stacking along the leading edge

Select this check box to use meridional stacking along the leading edge. If meridional stacking is on,
a green line in the contour plot indicates the effects of the meridional stacking.
Enable meridional stacking along the trailing edge

Select this check box to use meridional stacking along the trailing edge.
Geometry options section
Improved thickness calculation

Select this check box to use improved thickness calculation, especially for blades with large thick-
ness changes.
This option activates a more precise but slower algorithm to calculate blade thickness in interpolated
sections, and is specific to blade generation for midspan sections and stacking curves.
Rounded edge construction postponed as long as possible

Select this check box to postpone the edge construction. The postponement of the edge construction
can improve compatibility with other programs that construct the LE.
MST Parameters dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters of an MST (multi-streamtube) calculation (the title of
this dialog box indicates the segment being selected in parentheses). As you specify the MST param-
eters, you should consider the fundamental mathematics of streamline curvature, including stability,
damping, and convergence.
Note: The title of this dialog box indicates in parentheses the segment being selected (for
example, MST Parameters dialog box (Impeller)).
This dialog box appears when you select MST Parameters from the Flow menu, or when you click
the MST Parameters button in the Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box.
Note: When you first view this dialog box, only the standard MST parameters appear. To
view the advanced parameters in addition to the standard parameters, click the
Advanced button. To view just the standard parameters again, click the Standard
button.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® MST Parameters dialog box 339
Number of streamlines
Type the number of streamlines you want to use in a MST calculation. This option is a standard pa-
rameter.
 Default = 7
 Maximum=21
 Minimum = 3
 Suggested Minimum = 7
Number of QOs inside segment

Type the number of independent QOs when you select the User-controlled QOs option below. This
box displays the number of QOs (quasi orthogonals) that the MST solver uses in a segment, exclud-
ing the upstream or downstream QOs.
Use
Select one of the following options for the QOs used by the MST solver.
 Geometry QOs – QOs also used for the geometry. The QOs that you select with this
option are identical to those used for the geometry and are not independent of the
geometry, as are the two following options below.
 Automatic QOs – QOs calculated by the MST solver. When you select this option, the
MST solver estimates the number as well and the distribution of the QOs. The advantage
of this option is that no further user specification is required, the disadvantage is that the
QOs the solver generates may not be the best suited for the particular design.
 User-controlled QOs – Specify the number of independent QOs in the box for Number
of QOs inside segment. When you select this option, you can create and edit the QOs
that are independent of the geometry. You can also graphically edit the QOs on the
Contours window, changing their distribution as well as their number.
Number of QOs upstream

Type the number of upstream quasi-orthogonals that you want to use in the MST calculation. This
value is needed in order to capture upstream and downstream curvature, and to remove arbitrary end
conditions from curve fitting away from the region.
This option is an advanced parameter.
 Default = 3
 No maximum is suggested
 Suggested minimum = 4
Number of QOs downstream

Type the number of downstream quasi-orthogonals that you want to use in the MST calculation. This
value is needed in order to remove arbitrary end conditions from curve fitting away from the region.
 Default = 2
 No maximum is suggested
 Suggested minimum = 4
Maximum number of iterations

Type the maximum number of iterations that you want to use in the MST calculation. In order to
derive this value, examine the convergence history and results of your design.
This option is a standard parameter.
 Default = 15
 No maximum limit
 Suggested = 30
Maximum streamline shift

Type the maximum number of streamline shifts to use in the MST calculation. The iterations stop
when the maximum streamline shift goes below this value. This option is an advanced parameter.
We recommend specifying a very small number, such as 0.000001 in order to avoid any artificial
convergence of one section while others are still being processed.
Maximum number of divergences

Type the maximum amount of divergences to use in the MST calculation to allow for a number of
total streamline shift increases. Iterations stop when this value is reached.
 Default = a high number
 No maximum limit
 Suggested = Use a high enough number so that the iterations do not stop prematurely
(such as 200).
Convergence acceleration
Type the value that you want to use for acceleration of convergence. A number between 0 and 1 ac-
celerates the convergence by reducing damping as solution converges. This option is an advanced
parameter.
We recommend that you not use this option for continuous multisegment calculations (at least at
this time). This may be inappropriate for large-scale calculations.
Mass flow accuracy

Type the value that you want to use for mass flow accuracy in the MST calculation. This value sat-
isfies the continuity equation at the mean streamline, and loops on the mean streamline velocity until
the mass flow accuracy is met (or 50 iterations are exceeded).
 Default = 0.0005
 Suggested maximum value = 0.000001
We recommend specifying a very small number, such as 0.000001 in order to avoid any artificial
convergence of one section while others are still being processed.
Damping factor
Type the value that you want to use as the damping factor in the MST calculation. This value damp-
ens the subsequent streamline shifts to ensure numerical stability. Large values lead to numerical in-
stabilities. If the MST calculation fails to converge, try reducing this number first.
 Default = 0.15 (suggested value, typical for a single element calculation)
 Suggested minimum = 0.1 (need more iterations for good accuracy)
 Suggested maximum = .25 (0.30 absolute max)
Streamline curvature damping (DAMPSL)
Type the value that you want to use as the damping factor for streamline curvature in the MST cal-
culation. Slopes and curvatures are dampened between final values from Bernstein-Bezier fit and
linear distribution (along local quasi-orthogonals), between established hub and shroud contour val-
ues. This option is a standard parameter.
This value is used to decrease "wiggles" in streamline slopes and curvatures that could contribute to
numerical instabilities.
Specify a value anywhere from 0 (zero) to 0.85. A value of 0 corresponds to a virtual elimination of
the active streamline slope and curvature-modeling process, where 0.85 corresponds to a fairly re-
sponsive calculation (at zero, the wall values of slope and curvature are used linearly throughout; at
a value of 1 (one) they are not used at all).
 fnew = DAMPSL (fB-Bezier) + (1 - DAMPSL) fLinear QO
 Default value = 0.5 (Excellent for many single element calculations and is often
frequently the case for many components of the continuous multi-streamtube, multi-
component calculation.
Note: Specifying values between the 0.2 to 0.85 range is not uncommon. A 0 (zero) value
is set when there is clearly something very drastic happening with the geometry and
operator interference has been necessitated.
Number of smoothing/fitting
Type the number of smoothing and fitting iterations that you want to use with the MST calculation.
This value smooths the streamlines out to avoid "wiggles" in the streamtube shapes that can lead to
instability. Use the least square fit Bernstein-Bezier curves for this option.
 Default = 1 (suggested)
 Maximum allowed = 9
 Suggested maximum = 2
Fast streamline fit

Select this check box to specify an alternative streamline fitting method for the MST streamlines that
is faster than the original method. The result is almost always extremely close to the original fitting
method. The new fitting method is faster and more robust compared to the original, and it is recom-
mended this option be switched on. Normally there is no significant difference in the MST results if
this setting is changed.
Streamline smoothing factor (SMOOTHK)

Type the streamline-smoothing factor that you want to use with the MST calculation. This value de-
termines the number of allowed streamline shifts between the dampened streamline locations
(damping factor) and the least square fit Bernstein-Bezier fit positions. Experiment with various val-
ues.
For example, rnew = SMOOTHK (rbezier fit) + (1 - SMOOTHK )rdamped
 Default value = 0.05
 Suggested maximum = 0.2
Two zone mixing
Select this check box when you want to use a mixing calculation at the exit of each blade row. This
option is a standard parameter.
Beta from Theta fit section

In this section, choose the type of method that you want to use to fit the theta distribution along
streamlines (d(theta)/dm) during the MST calculation. This option is an advanced parameter.
 Cubic spline – This option fits the beta near the leading edge of a bowed blade. There
may be slight differences between Cubic spline and Bezier fitting. This method is
recommended, particularly for bowed blades.
 Bezier – This option fits Bezier to theta values in order to find d(theta)/dm to calculate
blade angles on streamlines. This option tends to produce smoother results due to the
smooth nature of the Bezier curves.
 Geometric constant span beta – This option calculates beta values based on the
geometry, not the streamline. The geometry beta is interpolated as a function of Z and R.
Since this method doesn’t use streamlines, the beta may be somewhat inaccurate,
therefore, use this option with caution. The advantage of this method is that beta depends
on streamline position only, not on the shape of the streamline. For this reason the
calculation can be more stable in difficult cases.
Note: To force MST to use a fixed beta for each blade location (as a last resort to stabilize
a difficult case), select the Geometric constant span beta check box from the "Beta
from Theta fit" section. Otherwise this option is not recommended because it
discounts the streamline direction.
Distributed entry values

Select this check box when you want to specify distribution from hub to shroud of inlet conditions
(P0, T0, and RCq). This option is an advanced parameter.
Num. Values H-S

Type the number of data points across the span where inlet conditions (P0, T0, Ctheta) are specified
if you’ve chosen to use Distributed entry values. This option is an advanced parameter.
Adjust button
Click this button to adjust distributed entry conditions in the Distributed Values dialog box.
Continuous multi-segment MST options section

In this section, specify the options you want to use when running MST calculations in continuous
multi-segment mode. When you run a MST calculation for only one segment, or run multiple seg-
ments independently, these options are ignored. These options are advanced MST parameters.
Order to fit to Cm
In this box, type the value for the order of fit to Cm in order for AxCent to calculate streamwise gra-
dients of meridional velocity for continuous multi-segment runs.
This is the modeling of the Cm variation in a forward marching direction through the stage. Lower
order means a linear interpolation, which is not recommended; higher order variations are frequently
less accurate and inappropriate. However, in some instances, a high order value as high as 10 can be
appropriate.
To find the dCm/dm, AxCent fits a Bezier curve of the specified order to Cm (m) and then uses the
Bezier to find the meridional derivative.
Independent streamline curvature damping for each segment

Select this check box to set independent streamline curvature damping on a segment-by-segment ba-
sis.
When used, this option uses the same MST parameters for each individual element, applying general
variables for the first element or component controls, but sets the value of streamwise curvature
damping by the value based on the other component specifications.
For example, continuous multi-segment MST normally uses the MST parameters in the first element
for the whole run. If you select this check box, then the streamline curvature damping parameter is
not taken only from the first segment. Instead, it will use the streamline curvature damping values
for each individual segment.
Uniform stiffness streamline fit

Select this check box to use a fitting method that behaves uniformly over the entire streamline
length. This is generally much more stable as well as considerably faster; however, it is less sensitive
to detail, which might be a problem in some cases.
Normally the streamline fit is adaptive – it concentrates on parts of the streamline where lots of
things seem to be happening. This means it captures much detail, but is also very vulnerable to going
out of control at places where the flow conditions try to force a sudden streamline jump. This is why
it is recommended that you select this check box because, in almost all cases, multi-segment MST
will run better with this option on.
Slope and curvature at segment junctions

Select the type of method you want to use to determine hub and shroud slope and curvature at a junc-
tion between segments.
 Upstream value - Looks at the upstream section to determine hub and shroud slope and
curvature.
 Average value - Takes the average of the upstream and downstream segments for slope
and curvature.
 Downstream value - Looks at the downstream section to determine hub and shroud
slope and curvature.
Blade Loading button

Click this button to open the Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Fluid Dynamic Loading Parameters dialog box" on page 285.
Advanced/Standard button
Click the Advanced button to view advanced and standard parameters in this dialog box; click the
Standard button to view just the standard parameters for MST calculations.
Copy to All button

Click this button to set the same MST parameters for all segments.
Fast Defaults button

Click this button to select default values for a subset of the MST parameters. This option tries to get
very short runtimes and is used when many runs are needed, for example, when doing optimization.
Std. Defaults button
Click this button to try to get stable convergence and more accurate results. The standard defaults
should be reasonable for most designs.
Preferences dialog box
Use the Preferences dialog box to specify preferences for the AxCent application, such as where to
store CFD files, and what colors and fonts to use in 3D model windows.
This dialog box appears when you choose Preferences from the File menu, or Preferences from the
Graphics menu.
The Preferences dialog box contains the following tabs:
 see "Preferences dialog box – General tab" on page 348..
 see "Preferences dialog box – 3D tab" on page 346..
 see "Preferences dialog box – Fonts tab" on page 350.
 see "Preferences dialog box – Parallel tab" on page 351..
Preferences dialog box – 3D tab

The 3D tab of the Preferences dialog box enables you to specify the default 3D options you want
AxCent to use when generating 3D models of your design.
To access this tab, choose Preferences from the File menu, and then click the 3D tab.
Colors section
Use the options in this section to specify the default colors to use for the background, wireframe, and
wireframe background of a 3D rendered image. A color swatch appears next to each element show-
ing the current color being used.
 Background – The color of the background behind the 3D model.
 Wireframe – The color of the wireframe (when viewing it for a 3D model).
 Wireframe background – The background color for the wireframe.
To change the color, select the 3D element, click the Change Color button, and then select the color
you want in the Color dialog box.
Note: You can also change the color of these elements on the fly by selecting Colors and
then the appropriate element from the Graphics menu.
Show Triad
Select this check box to view the XYZ triad in the 3D window.
Show Update Rate

Select this check box to display the animation update rate (frames/sec) at the bottom of the 3D win-
dow. This information appears when you animate the model in the 3D window (from the Graphics
menu, choose Animate and then choose Spin or Demo).
Lighting
Select this check box to view lighting and shadow effects in the 3D model; otherwise the model ap-
pears completely gray.
Software Rendering
Select this check box to use OpenGL software to perform 3D rendering in the 3D model window,
even when hardware 3D graphics support is not available. Select this check box if you are having
trouble viewing 3D models in AxCent.
Enable display lists

Select this check box to speed up 3D rendering by keeping some pre-calculated graphics data. The
performance of this option depends on the video card you are using in your computer.
Font button
Click this button to select the font to use for labels in the 3D model window.
Number of Render Points section

Use the options in this section to specify the number of points to use for rendering:
Hub circumference
Type the number of points around the circumference to represent the hub in the 3D model window.
Hub to shroud
Type the number of blade cross sections to use to represent the blades in the 3D model.
Zoom Factor
Type the factor by which to zoom for the Zoom In and Zoom Out toolbar buttons.
Renderer Info
This box displays the OpenGL rendered vendor and version information.
Update all 3D views on OK

Select this check box to update all current 3D views with your new settings once you click OK in
the Preferences dialog box; otherwise, changes apply only to new 3D views you open after you click
OK.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Preferences dialog box 347

Preferences dialog box – General tab
The General tab of the Preferences dialog box allows you to specify the location of layout templates,
CFD directory, and CFD Results Variable file.
To access this tab, choose Preferences from the File menu.
Directories and Files section

Use this section to specify the directories where you want to save AxCent information.
To specify a new location for any directory, type the path of the new location or click next to
the directory’s box to search for the new location.
 Layout Templates – The directory where Standard Screen layout files are stored. The
default location for this directory is \\Program Files\Concepts\AxCent\Layouts.
 CFD Directory – The directory where new CFD run files are created. The default
location for this directory is \\Program Files\Concepts\AxCent\CFD.
 CFD Volute directory – This directory is no longer used by AxCent.
 CFD Results Variables File – The file that stores the list of CFD results variables to
compute. The default location for this file is \\Program
Files\Concepts\AxCent\CFDvars.txt.
 NIST Fluid Directory – The directory that stores the NIST fluid files. The default
location for this directory is \\Program Files\Concepts\NIST.
Note: If you change the location of the NIST directory to a directory where there are no .fld
or .mix files, the Fluid cells in the NIST Real Fluid Properties dialog box will have
none as the only fluid option.
In order to use or create a mixture, the NIST directory that you specify must contain
the HMX.BNC file (which was installed in the default NIST directory when you
installed AxCent).
 FEA Results Directory – This directory stores the FEA results. The default file path for
this directory is:\\Users\user\AppData\Local\Concepts\AxCent\Stress.
 FEA Results Variables File – This directory stores the variables of the FEA results.
Note: editing the file path that appears in this box is not recommended.
 Blade Repository Directory – This directory stores standard axial blade profiles that
are shared with the Axial meanline program.(The default location is
\\ProgramData\Concepts\bladeRepository.)
Number of undo steps to store

Type the number of steps you want AxCent to remember for the Undo command. Limiting this to a
small number is recommended to reduce memory allocation.

Preferences dialog box – Fonts tab
Use the Fonts tab of the Preferences dialog box to change the fonts in the 2D map plots that appear
in the AxCent program.
To access this tab, choose Preferences from the File menu.
Click the following buttons to change the fonts used in the AxCent windows in the Font dialog box.
Standard Font
For number and parameter labels on 2D map plots; for the triad and file name in the 3D model win-
dow.
Data Text
For 2D windows displaying geometric data in text format (click to switch between text and
graph in a selected window).
Annotation Font
For text describing map plots (such as on the Edit Blade Sections window).
Legend Font
For describing the line plots (for hub, shroud, pressure and suction sides) in 2D parameter windows.
Preferences dialog box – Parallel tab
Use the Parallel tab of the Preferences dialog box to configure multiple computers for MPI, includ-
ing the number of threads used for parallel CFD solver operations run by Pushbutton CFD.
When you start a new CFD run using MPI, AxCent stores the data for multiple hosts in an XML
configuration file, generates an MPI machine file in the current CFD run directory, and updates the
batch file for launching the CFD solver under MPI. The MPI configuration is stored in XML files
located in the user application folder (located in [local drive]\Users\[name]\Document\Con-
cepts\AXCENT\xml) .
The Parallel tab appears when you click the Change button for MPI processes and hosts on the
Start CFD tab of the Start Full 3D PBPlus solver dialog box.
– or –
When you choose Preferences from the File menu or from the Graphics menu.
MPI table
Use this table to view the MPI configuration. A complete list of computers on the network appears
when you click the row labeled Network. The MPI network appears in the following columns:
 Host – A list of the computers configured in the MPI network. The default is the local
computer used as host, which always appears on the table.
 Access – The domain name.
 MPI – The test status, whether successful or failed.

 CFD processes – The number of CFD parallel processes to be run under MPI on the
corresponding machine.
Note: If you specify more than one (1>) process in this column, you will be required to
provide user name and password credentials at the console window when you add
computers to the network or when you test the network.
Make default
Select this check box to save the current configuration on the MPI table as the default configuration
for the user.
Add button
Click this button to add a computer to the MPI network using the Add/Test Network Computer dia-
log box that appears.
Test button
Click this split button to test either a selected network host (Selected Host) or the entire MPI con-
figuration (All Configured ) using the Add/Test Network Computer dialog box that appears.
Remove button
Click to remove a row selected on the MPI table.
Reset button
Click to reset the MPI configuration.
Multithreading table
This table contains the parallelized AxCent features.
Make default
Click this button to set the current multithreading configuration as the default setting.
Reset button
Click this button to reset the number of threads on the Multithreading table so that they are identical
to the number of processors on the current machine.
Pressure/Suction Results dialog box
Use this dialog box to plot streamwise CFD quantities at a fixed span and a fixed number of grid
nodes off the blade surface.
This dialog box appears when you choose Line Plot – Pressure/Suction from the CFD menu.
– or –
When you right-click the Pressure/Suction plot window and chose Line Plot Options from the
shortcut menu.
Scalar
Select the parameter that you want to view in the plot. To filter the parameters available in the Scalar
box, first click the button.
Note: For a complete list of the variables available when you select each option, see "CFD
View Options dialog box" on page 255.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Pressure/Suction Results dialog box 353
Grid point from surface
Specify the number of grid points from the surface of the blade from which to extract the data and
show in the plot. The plot will show two streamwise data sets, starting at the number of grid points
you specify here from both the pressure and suction surfaces of the blade.
K – Spanwise grid
Specify the spanwise (hub-to-tip) grid to fix for this plot.
Show mid passage

Select this check box to include a third data set, plotted from the mid passage grid point at the spec-
ified span.
Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to customize the display of data in the 3D FEA window.
This dialog box appears when you right-click this window and choose FEA View Options from the
shortcut menu that appears.
Options section
Select the check boxes for the following display options:
 Draw Geometry –Display the machine geometry along with the FEA grid and data. The
geometry appears in the 3D FEA window only. (Or click on the 3D FEA window
toolbar to display the same geometry.)
 Draw Volute – Display the volute, if a volute is included in the design.
 Draw Grid Lines – Display the lines of the FEA grid. (Or click on the toolbar.)
 Draw Midside Lines – Display the midside lines of the FEA grid. (Or click on the
toolbar.)
 Link All Views – Apply all the settings you have selected in this dialog box (except in
the 2D View/3D View windows) to all the other FEA windows for your current design.
This is useful for comparing the same grid slices from two or more different FEA runs.
 Animate – Animate the FEA plot (or click on the 3D FEA window toolbar). The 3D
plot rotates only when you select the Modal analysis in the Solver Options dialog box.

Select the number of blades to include in the grid. These options are available for 3D PBFEA views
only. They are also available on the 3D FEA window toolbar.
 Draw One Blade – The FEA grid and data appear in a single blade passage. (Or click
on the 3D FEA window toolbar.)
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box 355
 Draw Two Blades – The FEA grid and data appear in two contiguous blade passages.
(Or click on the toolbar.)

 Draw All Blades – The FEA grid and data are rotated and displayed around the entire
wheel (all blade passages appear). This option is available for modal non-constraint
equations, when you select the Modal analysis in the Solver Options dialog box. (Or
click on the toolbar.)
Plot data section

In this section, choose the style of plot to draw, whether Surface or Contours.
Colored by
Choose the FEA solution variable by which to color the plot. The options available depend upon
which solvers were used during the run (as selected in the Solver Options dialog box). (You can also
choose the options listed below in the toolbar of the 3D PBFEA window.)
Note: The modal displacement options listed below (Modal Displacement Magnitude and
Modal Displacement in X/Y/Z) only appear when you select Modal for analysis in
the Solver Options dialog box.
 Node Number – The grid node number.
 Displacement in X/Y/Z – The static analysis displacement components for X, Y, or Z.
 Total Displacement – The vector sum of the static analysis displacement components.
 Stress XX/YY/ZZ/XY/YZ/ZX – The direct and shear stresses.
 Von Mises Stress – The Von Mises equivalent stress criterion, the standard method for
determining an axis-independent equivalent.
 Principal Stress 1/2/3 – The three principal stresses.
 Temperature –Temperature.
 Modal Displacement Magnitude – The vector sum of the displacements specific to the
modal analysis. This option depends upon which modal result you select in the Solver
Options dialog box.
 Modal Displacement in X/Y/Z – The modal analysis displacement components for X, Y,
or Z.
Displacement Scale Factor
Displacements (or deformities) are very small relative to the overall dimensions of the model. You
must scale them to better view the displaced shape. The displacement scale factor is applied to the
displacements used in producing the distorted geometry. Like the Vector Scale Factor used for
viewing CFD results (see the CFD View Options dialog box), it is a visualization tool. (You can also
change the displacement scale on the toolbar of the 3D PBFEA model window.
Type a value for this factor and then select from the drop-down list one of the following displace-
ment results to be viewed:
 Geometry – Undisplaced geometry in solid wireframe before calculation of the stress.
(Or click on the 3D FEA window toolbar.)
 Displaced Geometry – Geometry with the calculated displacements. (Or click on

the toolbar.)
 Displaced Geometry + Wireframe – Both solid and displaced (or distorted) geometry as
well as hollow wireframe (or undisplaced) geometry. This options is useful for viewing
the effects of the distorted geometry.(Or click on the toolbar.)
Mode
Select the grid node number to view the frequency and the HRM (Harmonic Index or nodal diame-
ter). This option is only available when you select Modal Displacement Magnitude or Modal Dis-
placement in X/Y/Z in the "Colored by" drop-down list above. Use this option to select the
calculated mode number and view the relative displacements for that specific mode. (You can also
make these selections in the mode window on the 3D FEA window toolbar.)
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box 357
Remove Mid-Span Geometry Definition dialog box
This dialog box allows you to remove mid-span geometry cross-sections that you have specified.
To access this dialog box, choose Mid-Span Geometry Defn. – Remove Section from the Geom-
etry menu. This menu command is available for selected segments that contain mid-span geometry
cross sections only.
Choose section to remove

Select the mid-span section that you want to remove. AxCent redefines the blading by fitting a
NURBS surface to the remaining sections.
Restagger Blade dialog box
Use this dialog box to change the stagger angle of an axial blade. It appears when you choose Op-
erations – Stagger Blade from the Geometry menu.
Use this dialog box to restagger blade sections in a two-dimensional design space. Use this method
when you begin an axial blade design. Note that when you change the stagger angle, the actual blade
shape may change as well.
Note: To re-stagger radial blades, or to re-stagger axial blades in a 3D space, use the Blade
Stagger Angle dialog box. For more information, see "Staggering blades" on page 76.
Stagger angle (Deg)

Type the amount to change the stagger angle of the axial blade.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Restagger Blade dialog box 359
Select CFD Run dialog box
Use this dialog box to select a CFD run from which you want to create a meanline file. This CFD
run will then be used to figure out some of the flow parameters to be used in the meanline file that
is created.
This dialog box appears when you choose Meanline – Create with CFD or Meanline – Create
with LAB file from the Agile menu.
Select the finished CFD run from the drop-down list.
CFD or LAB file
– or –
When you choose choose Meanline – Create Multipoint with LAB file from the Agile menu.
Select the CFD run from the window.
Multipoint with LAB file
Concepts NREC Format dialog box – Flow File tab
Use the Flow File tab of the Concepts NREC Format dialog box to select the type of flow informa-
tion to save to a (.FLO) file.
This dialog box appears when you choose Export – Save Flow Field File from the File menu.
Select flow solution for segments x to y

Select the type of flow solution from which to save the flow information
 Rapid load – The current rapid loading calculation. (You must use the Stanitz-Prian
loading calculation for all bladed segments).
Note: You can export only 3D H-grid CFD solutions to a Flow file. You cannot export O-,
OC-, or OH-grid CFD solutions.
If you select this option, the Output all data points between pressure and suction side check box
becomes available. Select this check box to provide a more detailed pressure/temperature field on
the hub and shroud surfaces in the .FLO file.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Concepts NREC Format dialog box – Flow File tab 361
Old file format
Select this option if you are using a program that expects flow field data to be formatted as it was in
older versions of AxCent. In the old file, format, pressure, temperature, enthalpy, and velocity ap-
pear in absolute values. This option should be used to output data for programs that expect the old
format.
New relative values (required for Pushbutton FEA)

Select this option if you are creating a flow field file for Pushbutton FEA (PBFEA). For rotating el-
ements, pressures, temperatures, enthalpies, and velocities are in relative values (that is, in the rotat-
ing frame of reference). There are also a few extra fields in this output file format, such as a direction
of rotation indicator for each element. This is the preferred format for PBFEA.
Splitter handling
If the design includes splitters, this section displays the splitters and allows you to use pressure side,
mid passage, and suction side values from the main blades or from one of the splitter passages.
blades.
This option only affects the location of the reported flow data. The actual pressure, temperature, etc.,
If you select the Do you want to do this? check box, the main blades won’t have any odd geometric
jumps in the data; however, the mid passage location will end up being on top of the splitter.
Select Segment Range dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the range of segments for export to a CAD file, whether for IGES, STL,
or STEP file formats. This dialog box lets you select which blades you want to include in the IGES
and STEP export files, whether all blades, only rotating blades, only non-rotating blades, or no
blades. You can then output the stationary and rotating blades to separate CAD export files.
This dialog box appears when you click the Set Segments button in the IGES Output Options dialog
box, STL Output Options dialog box, or STEP Output Options dialog box .
First segment
Select the first segment of the range to include in the IGES, STL, or STEP file.
Last segment
Select the last segment to include in the IGES, STL, or STEP file.
Output rotating blades

Select this check box to include rotating blades in the IGES or STEP files. (This option is not avail-
able for the STL format.)
Output non-rotating blades

Select this check box to include non-rotating blades in the IGES file. (This option is not available
for the STL format.)
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Select Segment Range dialog box 363
Select Units Used dialog box
The options available in this dialog box allow you to specify the units that you want to use while
developing your design.
This dialog box appears when you choose General – Unit System from the Setup menu. (This dia-
log box is similar to the Select Units Used dialog box that appears when you use the AxCent wizard
to create a new design.)
Unit system
Select the system of units to use for the design: Metric or English.
Choose units
Select the units that you want to use for each measuring parameter. Depending on the unit system
you choose, the following options are available.
Metric English
Length m (Meters) in (Inches)

cm (Centimeters)
mm (Millimeters)
Temperature K (Kelvin) R (Rankine)

C (Celsius) F (Fahrenheit)
Metric English
Pressure Pa (Pascal) psi (Pound-force per square inch)

Kpa (Kilopascal)
Kg/cm2 (Kilogram per square
centimeter)
Kg/m2 (Kilogram per square meter)
Stress Mpa (Megapascal) Ksi (Kip per square inch)

Kg/cm2 (Kilogram per square
centimeter)
Kg/m2 (Kilogram per square meter)
Mass flow Kg/s (Kilogram per second) lbm/s (Pound mass per second)
Kg/min (Kilogram per minute) lbm/min (Pound mass per minute)
Kg/hr (Kilogram per hour) lbm/hr (Pound mass per hour)
Volume flow m^3/s (Cubic meters per second) ft^3/s (Cubic feet per second)
m^3/min (Cubic meters per minute) ft^3/min (Cubic feet per minute)
m^3/hr (Cubic meters per hour) ft^3/hr (Cubic feet per hour)
gal/min (Gallons per minute)
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Select Units Used dialog box 365
Setup Segments dialog box
Use this dialog box to add, edit, apply constraints, match, or remove segments from your design.
This dialog box appears when you choose Set Up Segments from the Setup menu. It also appears
when you finish designing flow paths on the Create New Flow Path Branch dialog box.
Design title
In this box, type the name of the design.
Machine type
Select the type of turbo-machine being designed: Compressor, Pump, Fan, Turbine, or Hydro-
Turbine.
Insert segments at start button

Insert a segment before the impeller.
Add segment button

Add a segment below the selected segment row.
Delete segment button

Delete a segment before the impeller.
Table section
The table displays the segments currently in the design. The first column displays the name of the
segment. You can edit the information in this cell to change the name of the segment. The other col-
umns that appear in the table depend on the parameter selected.
Segment label
This column allows you to specify the label for the segment.
Blades/RPM
Select this option to specify the number of blades and RPM (rotational speed) for each segment. For
unbladed segments, the number of blades is set to 0 (zero). For non-rotating segments, the RPM is
set to 0 (zero).
You can apply the following settings with this option:
 # of full blades – Specifies the number of full blades for the segment.
 RPM – Specifies the RPM (rotational speed) for the segment.
 DoR – Specifies the direction of rotation for the segment, either as clockwise (cw) or
counterclockwise (ccw).
 # QOs – Specifies the number of QOs in the segment.
Junction points
Select this option to specify junction points between the segments. The points shown for a segment
are the inlet junction points for that segment, and also the outlet junction points for the segment be-
fore it. There is one extra line that shows the outlet of the last segment.
You can apply the following junction points:
 Hub Z
 Hub R
 Shroud Z
 Shroud R
Note: In this section, the dimensions provided are for the computational segment. That is,
the impeller segment goes all the way to the Shroud R (even though there is a tip
clearance).
Constraints
Select this option to put constraints on the shape of the curve at the junction point for each segment.
The curve must always end at the junction points. In addition, you can apply constraints for the slope
or both the slope and curvature. Constraints are set independently for the inlet and outlet of each seg-
ment.
You can apply constraints at the following junction points:
 Fix endpoint – First point is fixed
 Fix endpoint, slope – First point is fixed, second point is constrained by slope.
 Fix point, slope, curve – First point is fixed; second point is constrained by slope, third
point by curvature.
Matching
Select this option to specify matching between segments. Hub and shroud matching are set separate-
ly. For each segment, the row shows how it matches the previous segment at the inlet. This is also
how the previous segment will match this one at the outlet. The first row is empty, since there is no
previous segment for it.
You can match by one of the following options:
 None – No matching (default)
 Slope – Matching slopes
 Slope, curvature – Matching slopes and curvatures
Hub/Shroud Rotation button

Click this button to specify the independent rotation or non-rotation of hub and shroud in the Hub
and Shroud Rotation dialog box that appears.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Setup Segments dialog box 367
Side ports dialog box
Use this dialog box to change the size and location of existing side ports for a selected segment, or
to create new side ports.
The Side ports dialog box appears when you choose Side Ports from the Geometry menu.
– or –
When you click new on the Create New Flow Path Branch dialog box (after the addition of a side
port).
– or –
When you click a red arrow after selecting Edit Segment Junction Points on the Choose data to
edit dialog box.
In the table, specify the following start and end parameters for the side ports:
 segment – This read-only column indicates the segment number.
From the drop-down list next to the segment column, select the location on either hub or shroud, or
select deletion of the side port (DELETE).
 %M – Specify the percentage of the meridional length along the hub or shroud where the
port is centered.
 width – Specify an absolute value for the side port width.
 connect – Select starts (for the port to start at this segment), ends (for the branch to end
at this segment) or none (or unknown).
 branch – Specify the flow branch to which the port is connected. Branches are labeled
alphabetically (a,b,c,etc.).
Note: A port can also be unconnected to a branch.
 connect order – For the connection order, select either the order of hub to shroud or
shroud to hub.
This option sets the order by which the hub and the shroud of the new branch are joined to the port
downstream along the contour.
For example, if you select shroud to hub, the shroud for the new branch comes first and the hub of
the new branch comes second. Eithelr order will work, but sometimes a branch will flip the hub and
shroud when connecting two ports. In such a case you can reverse the order at one end.
Below are two side ports connected on the hub side by a flow branch labeled a that consists of three
segments:
Below are two side ports on the shroud side connected to a flow branch that is divided into three
segments.
Its flow begins on the impeller and ends on the upstream segment.
Control points for both the shroud and hub side, and junction points between the flow branch seg-
ments, have been activated on the Choose data dialog box.
Add New button

Click to add new rows for side ports in the table above.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Side ports dialog box 369
Slot Selection dialog box
Use this dialog box to create, to modify, to activate, to copy, and to delete the injection or extraction
slots in a design.
This dialog box becomes available when you select Injection/Extraction Slots from the Geometry
menu.
Note: To view the flow attributes of the injection/extraction slots, see "Selecting CFD view
options" on page 154. or view the Plot Data section in the CFD View Options dialog
box.
Slot selection table

Patch – This column indicates the presence of the injection or extraction slot according to number.
(Read-only.)
Segment – From the drop-down list, select the numbered segment or component where the injection
or extraction slot is to be located.
Wall – From the drop-down list, select the wall where the injection or extraction slot is to be located:
 Hub
 Tip
 Pressure Side (blade)
 Suction Side (blade)
Note: You can create injection and extraction slots on bladed segments only for the pressure
side or suction side .
Meridional Beginning/End – Use these columns to define the slot location by specifying the dis-
tance for the meridional beginning and ending along the flow.
For example, specifying 0 for Meridional Beginning and 1 for Meridional End indicates that the dis-
tance is from the start to the end of the entire segment. Specifying .33 and .66 indicates that the dis-
tance is the middle third of the segment.
Spanwise Beginning/End – If you select a blade option in the Wall column (Pressure Side or Suc-
tion Side), type the values that define the measurements of the slot from hub to tip (spanwise).
Temperature (K) – For injection slots, specify the radial variation of temperature of the injected
fluid for the point. For extraction slots, the temperature is assumed to be the same as the temperature
of the fluid in the channel. You can only enter a positive value in this column.
Note: The value that you enter has no effect on the extraction function.
%Span – Specify the relative position of the point within the slot on the blade surface (0 = bottom
of the slot, 100 = top of the slot).
Note: The rows for specifying individual distributions of the span percentage only appear
when you select %Distribution.
%Distribution – From the drop-down list, select one of the options for radial mass flow distribution
of the injected or extracted fluid for the point. The actual injected or extracted mass flow will be pro-
portional to this function normalized.
 Uniform – Select the uniform distribution of the radial mass flow.
 %Distribution – Select this option to specify percentages for individual distribution for
each distribution row. When you select this option, five additional rows appear in which
you can specify the percentages.
%Open – This parameter determines the density of slot distribution in the entire slot area. Type a
percentage for the amount of the slot area to be open for the mass flow.
For example, specifying 25% results in 25% of the slot area being open and the remaining 75% of
the area being solid (to simulate cooling holes distributed over the solid surface region).
Offset Angle – Specify the direction of the injected/extracted flow relative to the blade surface. If
the offset angle is zero, the injection/extraction is normal to the blade surface. Positive values result
in a downstream offset. If the angle is a positive number, the angle inclines downstream (in the me-
ridional direction); negative values result in an angle that inclines upstream. If the slot is located on
the hub or shroud rather than on the blade, the positive angle follows the flow direction.
In this example, an offset angle of 20° appears for slots on the blade on both suction and pressure
sides. On the shroud, the slot distribution (or Slot percent open) has been set at 25%.
Mass Flow – Type a value for the mass flow rate (for injection slots, type only positive values, for
extraction slots, negative values).
Activate – Select this check box to activate the slot. To deactivate the slot, clear the checkbox.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Slot Selection dialog box 371
Create button
Click to create a new injection slot, which will appear in the slot selection table
Delete slot button

Click to delete an injection slot selected in the table.
New Distributions button

Click to add the radial mass flow distribution of the injected or extracted fluid for the point. The ac-
tual mass flow will be proportional to the specified distribution, but will be scaled so that the total
mass flow through the slot matches the mass flow specified in the table.
Each time you click this button, five distribution rows appear in white beneath the slot row (in blue)
for specifying the distribution percentages.
Copy button
Click to copy a selected slot.
Cancel button
Click to cancel the creation of injection slots.
Solver Options dialog box
Use the Solver Options dialog box to specify the PBFEA solver.
This dialog box appears when you select the PBFEA solver (on the Options tab of the Project dialog
box) and then choose Run FEA from the Mechanical menu. It also appears after you run PBFEA
when you click on the 3D FEA window toolbar).

After the completion of the PBFEA solver run, you can view the results from the analyses you select
on this dialog box on the 3D FEA window.
Analyses section
Use the options in this section to select the types of analyses to be generated with the solver run:
 Thermal– Select this option to run a thermal analysis using the thermal boundary
conditions, including those that may be mapped from the CFD, MST or Rapid loading
solution.
Note: When you select both Thermal and Static analyses, first the thermal solver runs, then
the Static solver uses the calculated nodal temperatures to determine the effects of
thermal strain that are added to the displacement results.
 Static– Select this option to run a static analysis using the pre-set loads and constraints.
If you have also selected the Thermal check box, selecting this option also calculates
thermal strains based on the temperatures calculated in the thermal analysis.
 Ref. Temperature – Specify the temperature to which all nodal temperatures are
referenced.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Solver Options dialog box 373
Reference Temperature only applies directly to Static analysis. In a static analysis, temperatures can
only be supplied from the results of a thermal analysis as a nodal temperature. Reference temperature
is subtracted from the nodal temperature to provide the delta T value used to calculate thermal ex-
pansions and finally to calculate stress.
 Modal – Select this check box to run an eigen value/vector solution.
If you also select the Static check box, this option uses a pre-stress condition supplied by that result.
If you also select the Thermal check box, this option also calculates thermal strains based on the
temperatures calculated in the thermal analysis.
Note: Stress-stiffening effects are automatically applied when you select both Static and
Modal analyses. To run the Modal solver without stress-stiffening, select the Modal
solver alone.
 Number of Modes – If you select the Modal check box, use this box to specify the
number of frequencies for the solver to extract.
Note the following conditions for number of modes and boundary types used for the pie slice face:
 For coupled boundaries, the total number of modes run equals the number of modes
specified with this option.
 For cyclic boundaries, the number of modes result as follows:
 N for even number of bladed sectors = ([N/2] + 1) x number of modes.
 N for odd number of bladed sectors = ([(N-1) / 2] + 1) x number of modes.
Advanced Modal Features section

If you select Modal above, the following features become available for selection. Select the follow-
ing checkboxes for these features:
 Lumped Mass Matrix – Use a lumped mass matrix, which is a simplified solution.This
check box is available only when the No Mid Side Nodes check box is selected on the
Options tab of the Project dialog box.
 Spin Softening – Apply spin softening. Spin softening accounts for large deflections and
their effects on the frequency that occur in a modal analysis using the small deflection
methods that FEA assumes, as in the following equation:
where K is stiffness matrix, M is mass matrix, and omega () is angular velocity.
Caution: Because the two options above generate large output files, they should be used with dis-
cretion.
 Normalized Modal Stresses – Calculate and write the normalized model stresses to the
file.
 Normalized Modal Strains – Calculate and write the normalized model strains to the
file.
Solver Settings dialog box
Use the Solver Settings dialog box to select CFD solver settings (including the type of solver to use)
for your CFD calculation.
To view this dialog box, choose Solver Settings from the CFD menu.
Choose Blade-to-Blade Solver – Solver Settings from the Flow menu.
Choose Throughflow Solver – Solver Settings from the Flow menu.
The tabs available in this dialog box depend on the type of CFD solution you are running and the
type of solver you choose on the Solver tab.
 see "Solver Settings dialog box – Solver tab" on page 376.
 see "Solver Settings dialog box – Options tab" on page 379..
 see "Solver Settings dialog box – Convergence Options tab" on page 385.
 see "Solver Settings – Multigrid tab" on page 383..
 see "Solver Settings dialog box – Multi-block tab" on page 387.
The following tabs appear for the Numeca FineTurbo and Fine/Open solvers:
 "Solver Settings dialog box – Solver tab" on page 376
 "Solver Settings dialog box – for Numeca Fine™/Turbo" on page 391
 "Solver Settings – Numerical Model tab" on page 393
 "Solver Settings dialog box – Control Variables tab" on page 394
The following table indicates which tabs in the Solver Settings dialog box are available for each
solver.
Multi-block solver
Solver tab
Options tab
Convergence Options tab
Multigrid tab
Multi-block tab
The following tabs are available for the Numeca solvers.
Solver tab
Configuration tab
Numerical Model tab
Numerical Parameters tab (For Fine/Open only.)
Control Variables tab
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Solver Settings dialog box 375
Output Variables tab
Solver Settings dialog box – Solver tab

Use the Solver tab of the Solver Settings dialog box to select the type of CFD solver you want to use
for a CFD calculation.
To view this dialog box, choose Solver Settings from the CFD menu.
– or when you are running the Blade-to-Blade solver –
Choose Blade-to-Blade Solver – Solver Settings from the Flow menu.
– or when you are running the Throughflow solver –
Choose Throughflow Solver – Solver Settings from the Flow menu.
Solver
Select the CFD solver. Depending on the type of CFD solution you have selected (on the Topology
tab of the Grid dialog box) and the type of case that you are using, a particular CFD solver may not
be available.
 Multi-block – This is the default solver used for Pushbutton CFD calculations (also
called the PBPlus solver). This is a hybrid multi-block structured grid full Navier-Stokes
solver. It is the preferred solver for all types of machines, including turbines,
compressors, and fans. It is capable of handling any number of grid blocks and any
number of cells per block. It includes low-speed preconditioning technology developed
by Merkle et al. It can deal with all flow regimes (compressible, incompressible, and low
speed).
Note: If you have already selected to generate an O- or OH-grid in the Grid dialog box (the
Multi-block solver is automatically selected on the Topology tab, and cannot be
changed). Only the Multi-block solver supports O- and OH-grids.
 Fine/Turbo™ – This is the solver developed by Numeca. Click here for a description of
this solver.
Note: For descriptions of parameters used in Fine/Turbo solutions, consult the Fine™/
Turbo Help (for v.11) on the Numeca Fine/Turbo Online Documentation Platform.
 Fine/Open™ – This is another solver developed by Numeca. Click here for a
description of this solver.
For more information about CFD solvers, see "Introduction to performing CFD calculations" on
page 142.
Executable
This read-only list displays the executable used for the solver that you have selected above.
[Q: does the list disappear with deletion of Dawes and Denton options?]
 b2b3d – Dawes solver.
 cambridge_denton – Denton solver.
 pbplusX – Multi-block solver.
 transonicMRFDyMFoam – OpenFOAM solver.
Grid section
Use this section to select the segments and topology of the grid.
 Start/End – Select the beginning and ending segments from the drop-down lists.
 Topology – Select the grid topology available in the drop-down list.
 Change button – Click this button to change the grid topology on the Grid dialog box
that appears.
Solution section
Use this section to select the CFD solution.
Select the CFD solution type:
 Blade-to-Blade – Select this option to run a blade-to-blade CFD solution. When you
select this option, the At ___ % span box below the Solution box becomes available (for
the Topology tab only). Specify a % span number between 0 and 100. For more
information, see the " Performing blade-to-blade CFD calculations" topic in AxCent
Help.
Loss Models button
Click this button to specify the loss models (for the Throughflow solver only) on the Throughflow
Loss Models dialog box.
Span %
This box becomes available when you select the Blade-to-Blade type solution. Specify a % span
number between 0 and 100. For example, if you type 50 in the box, this specifies a blade-to-blade
solution location with 50% of the area above and below the streamsheet grid. 0% is the hub, and
100% is the shroud.
Solver Settings dialog box – Denton Solver tab

Use this dialog box to specify values for the Denton solver.
The Denton Solver tab of the Solver Settings dialog box appears when you have selected the Denton
solver from the Solver drop-down list box on the Solver tab for running CFD calculations. To access
these options, select Solver Settings from the CFD menu, select Denton on the Solver tab, and then
select the Denton Solver tab.
In the table, type a value for each of the Denton options you want to use in the CFD calculation.
Name
This column displays the symbol for the option.
Value
This column allows you to specify values for each Denton solver option.
Description
This column provides short descriptions of the options.
Solver Settings dialog box – Options tab

Use the Options tab of the Solver Settings dialog box to select options for running a blade-to-blade
calculation, a throughflow calculation, or a CFD calculation.
Wall treatment
Select the type of boundary condition (turbulent, laminar, or inviscid) to use with the CFD solver.
For a usual CFD calculation, the wall boundary condition is assumed to be turbulent, and the wall
function (Log law) is used for the calculation of shear stress on the wall.
 Log law hub/case shear stress
 Inviscid hub
 Inviscid case (Case refers to the shroud, either rotating or not)
 Inviscid hub/case (Hub refers to the rotor hub) – This model explicitly captures wall
losses and tip clearance and does not double-count them. It is recommended for use with
the throughflow solver.
 Laminar hub/case shear stress
Turbulence models
Select one of the following turbulence models (in the order as they appear in the drop-down list).
 Original Dawes Baldwin-Lomax model – This option implements the original
turbulence model in the Dawes CFD code. The model may give inaccurate results for
cases where the first grid point is in the laminar sub-region near a wall.
 CETI Full Baldwin-Lomax model – This option implements the CETI Full Baldwin-
Lomax model, which corrects the wall stress calculation by modifying the wall stress
when the first grid point is in the laminar sub-region near a wall.
 Spalart-Allmaras 1-equation model – This option implements the Spalart-Allmaras 1-
equation turbulence model.
 Inviscid (Euler) solution – This option is for solving the Euler flow equations (that is,
no dissipation terms).
 Laminar solution – When this option is selected, no turbulence models are enabled. The
solution is calculated from the Navier-Stokes equations, using the molecular viscosity
input by the user or calculated from the property routines.
 k-epsilon 2-equation model – This option implements the k-epsilon 2-equation
turbulence model, which can automatically switch between high and low Reynolds
number options according to the grid density near the surface.
 k-omega 2-equation model – This option implements the k-omega 2-equation
turbulence model, which can automatically switch between high and low Reynolds
number options according to the grid density near the surface.
The K-omega model is recommended for blades with shock boundary layer interaction. The recom-
mended setting for y+ is in the order of 1.
 SST 2-equation model – This option implements the SST 2-equation turbulence model.
This is a two-layer model with correction for the shear stress transport effect. In the sub-
layer, it implements the low Reynolds number k-epsilon model and smoothly switches to
the k-omega model in the outer region. This model requires a very fine grid near the
surface, preferably y + < 3.
Here are some general guidelines for setting the value of y+ for all turbulence models:
7 For direct modeling of the turbulent boundary layer, specify y+ in an order of 1.
8 Avoid using a y+ above 300.
9 Avoid using a y+ within the range of 10 to 20. (For all turbulence models, any y+ number between
10 and 20 is the least accurate value.)
10 Assuming you have followed guidelines 1) to 3) above, use as small a y+ as possible.
(For more discussion of the best settings for y+, see the FAQ "Is my y+ in the "good" range?"
in Evaluating CFD results.)
Turbulence model mixing length scale

The maximum eddy length scale in the turbulence model. This scale is a function of the percent axial
chord length. The default value assumes the largest eddy is approximately 10% of the axial chord
length, which is the recommended value. For a purely laminar solution, specify 0.
This box is enabled when you select either the Original Dawes Baldwin-Lomax model or CETI
Full Baldwin-Lomax model option.
Ratio of turbulence viscosity to molecular viscosity at inlet

Specify the ratio for the Spalart-Allmaras 1-equation model. This ratio determines the turbulence
level of the incoming flow; the flow around the blade is relatively insensitive to this parameter. The
default value is 10.
This box is enabled when you select the Spalart-Allmaras 1-equation model option.
Turbulence inlet intensity

Specify a percentage for turbulence inlet intensity for the k-epsilon )Launder-Sharma) model, k-
omega 2-equation model, or SST 2-equation model. For moderately turbulent inlet flows, this pa-
rameter is typically between one and five percent. For highly turbulent inlet flows, it can be as high
as ten percent or more. The default value is 1 percent.
Turbulence intensity is defined as the ratio of the RMS of the turbulent velocity fluctuations to the
mean velocity (or inlet reference velocity).
This box is enabled wen you select the k-epsilon 2-equation model, k-omega 2-equation model,
or SST 2-equation model option.
Note: For more information about turbulence inlet intensity, refer to http://www.cfd-
online.com/Wiki/Turbulence_intensity.
Time step multiplier

A multiplying factor value (CFL number) for the time step factor (as specified on the Multigrid tab).
This is the main parameter controlling numerical stability of the solver, and its magnitude depends
on the scheme you selected.
Typical values are:
 0.5 ~ 0.7 for the Original B-to-B 3D scheme
 2 for Two-stage Runge-Kutta scheme
 4 for Four-stage Runge-Kutta scheme
 3 for the Implicit solver
For complicated impeller flow fields, such as when a large recirculation region is present in the blade
passage, or when there is more than one blade row in the CFD model, a smaller value is recommend-
ed. As this number decreases, the required number of iterations to achieve a converged solution in-
creases.
Artificial compressibility scaling factor (Rb)

The scaling factor (Rb) for the artificial compressibility formulation. This value yields different con-
vergence speeds and artificial dissipation terms. The recommended value is 3.0, which generally
provides the best convergence rate. This option is used for CFD incompressible flows only.
Artificial viscosity coefficients section

Use this section to specify the coefficients of the second and fourth order artificial viscosity. The
default values are detailed in the following table.
Flow type Scheme AV2 Value AV4 Value AVA Value
Compressible flow Original B-to-B 3D 1 0.01 2
Flow type Scheme AV2 Value AV4 Value AVA Value
Two-stage Runge-Kutta 0.25 0.003906 N/A
Four-stage Runge-Kutta 0.25 0.003906 N/A
Incompressible flow N/A 0.003906 N/A
These values are recommended by the numerical algorithms used in the BTOB3D solver and should
not be altered. An excessive amount of artificial viscosity due to increasing these three coefficients
can lead to the computational results being dominated by numerical viscosity instead of realistic
flow viscosity.
Note: The AVA value is used only for the central difference scheme. It is not used for
upwinding schemes.
Factored matrix free parameters section

Use this section to specify the free parameters in the factored matrices in I, J, and K directions, re-
spectively, used for residual smoothing. The default value of all three parameters is 1.0. These de-
fault values are recommended by the numerical algorithm and its stability analysis used in the solver.
Schemes section
Select the scheme you want to use:
 Original B-to-B 3D
 Two-stage Runge-Kutta
 Four-stage Runge-Kutta
 Implicit (Gauss-Seidel)– This scheme can produce a significantly faster convergence
rate. After you select this option, specify the values for the Time step multiplier option
above. 15 for Min and for Max is a typical (and also default) value.
CETI solver enhancements section

Select the Concepts ETI solver enhancement options that you want to use:
 Energy diffusion terms – The energy dissipation is the work done by the viscous force.
An example is the work done by the wall shear stress, which is crucial for efficiency
prediction. The original Dawes code does not have this term. The Dawes solver
enhanced by Concepts NREC partly calculates this work. The Multi-block solver
computes this work completely.
 Solution smoothness – Selecting this option smooths the residuals on either side of the
leading edge in the streamwise direction. This option does not apply to the Multi-block
solver.
 Incidence blending – For turbines, selecting this option ensures that the stream surface
will be aligned to the inflow. For compressors, this option corrects the blade force
computation according to the incidence. This option is available only when you are
running a throughflow solution.
 Reverse flow control – Select this check box to use a slip wall at the exit surface when
back flow occurs on the exit surface. If you are using the Multi-block solver, this check
box is enabled but not selected by default.
Solver Settings – Multigrid tab
The Multigrid tab of the Solver Settings dialog box allows you to set the multigrid convergence ac-
celeration technique. This tab is available only if you chose to use the Multi-Block solver.
By default, Pushbutton CFD uses the multigrid convergence acceleration technique to provide con-
vergence acceleration. Specifying 0 (zero) levels of coarse grid (in the Level of coarse grid box)
turns off the multigrid algorithm. For coupled runs (more than one blade row in the CFD model), the
multigrid algorithm is available in the Multi-block solver.
Levels of coarse grid

Select the coarse grid level you want to use in the solver: 1, 2, or 3. 1 is the default value. 2 is the
recommended value. If you are running a finer grid, consider selecting 3. Each higher value you se-
lect doubles the spacing of the grid. The higher the number you select, the more space there is be-
tween lines in the grid, the more stable the iterations will be, and the slower the grid generation will
be.
A benefit of using a higher level of coarse grid is that the initial field will be improved when the
value in the Number of pre-steps box is not zero. The pre-steps iterate on the highest level of coarse
grid first for the specified number of steps, then the solution is interpolated to the next finer level of
grid, and so on, until the finest grid level is reached. This process is called the Full Multigrid (FMG)
procedure. After this process is finished, the initial field of the finest grid has been improved signifi-
cantly, resulting in more stable convergence for normal multi-grid accelerations (Full Approxima-
tion Storage - FAS).
To have more levels of coarse grid, the dimensions of the finest grid have to be set such that the
coarse grids can be constructed by doubling the mesh spacing. Therefore, the number of cells in each
direction (specified in the “Nodes” section of the Grid dialog box) must be a multiple of 2L, with L
being the level of coarse grid. For example, specifying 9 nodes in the I direction allows three levels
of coarse grids (23 + 1 = 9) in the I direction. For more information about specifying grid node di-
mensions, see the procedures for generating CFD grids.
Note: You can also specify the level of coarse grid in the Multigrid level box on the Grid
tab of the Grid dialog box. If you select a multigrid level in either location that is
incompatible with the grid node dimensions, when you click OK in the Grid dialog
box, AxCent automatically calculates the node dimension changes that need to be
made and allows you to make the suggested changes or to change the multigrid level
so that it is compatible.
Number of pre-steps
The number of iterations to pre-compute a multigrid solution on a first level coarse grid, before start-
ing the full multigrid solution procedure on a fine grid. The number of pre-steps required depends
on how many levels of coarse grid are being used. This value is typically set between 1000 and 2000.
Time step factors for coarse grid

The time step multiplier for the coarse mesh. This value is typically set between 1.0 and 2.0. The
time step multiplier of the coarse grid is the product of this value multiplied by the value in the Time
step multiplier box (on the Options tab).
Artificial viscosity coefficient

This value is used for the central difference scheme to pass the artificial viscosity from the fine grid
to the next layer of the coarse grid. This value is not used for upwinding schemes.
Multigrid cycle (V and W)

Select wether to use the V or W multigrid cycling strategy. In most cases, the W cycle is recommend-
ed because it does more work on coarse grid levels than the V cycle, and can result in faster conver-
gence, with some increase in the work required for each cycle.
Post-restriction iterations
The number of iterations to be made at coarse grid.levels. 1 iteration is both the minimum and rec-
ommended value.
Post-prolongation iterations
The number of iterations to be made at coarse grid levels after a correction has been applied from
the next coarser level. This option only applies when more than one coarse level is being used. This
parameter can be set to 0, but 1 is the recommended value.
Solver Settings dialog box – Convergence Options tab

The Convergence Options tab of the Solver Settings dialog box provides some options to automati-
cally stop CFD runs. If any one of the criteria is met, the CFD run stops automatically.
Note: This tab is not available with the Denton solver.
Residual convergence section

Stop CFD calculation when residuals are reduced by
Select this check box to stop the CFD run when the residual is reduced by the order you specify in
the Orders of magnitude drop-down list box.
Mass flow convergence section
Stop CFD calculations when mass flow error is less than
Select this check box to stop the CFD run when the overall mass flow error is less than the percentage
you specify in the % box.
Convergence to specific mass flow section

In this section, specify how you want to force compressible CFD runs to converge to a specified
mass flow. This section is only available for compressors using the Dawes solver. For the Multi-
block solver, pump CFD runs always converge to the specified mass flow as fixed by the inlet me-
ridional velocity. For fans, the Multi-block solver does not support design mass flow convergence.
Solutions of different mass flows are obtained by manually changing the back pressures.
Tip: Recommended: Run a map instead of using this option.
Activate design mass flow rate convergence

Select this check box to converge CFD to the specified mass flow either by automatically adjusting
exit pressure or by adjusting exit velocity. This option is not recommended.
Design mass flow rate

The mass flow rate is extracted from AxCent automatically and is listed here for informational pur-
poses only.
Pressure adjustment
Select this option to force compressible CFD runs to converge to a specified mass flow by automat-
ically adjusting the back pressure.
Exit pressure interpolation range

In this box, type the range allowed for the pressure to vary.
Velocity adjustment
Select this option to force compressible CFD runs to converge to a specified mass flow by automat-
ically adjusting the velocity on the exit boundary.
Solver Settings dialog box – Multi-block tab
Use the Multi-block tab of the Solver Settings dialog box to specify settings for the Multi-Block
solver.
The Multi-block solver is a Merkle-preconditioned structured-grid solver dealing with all the flow
regimes (compressible, incompressible, and low speed) with the capability to handle any number of
blocks and any number of cells per block. This tab is available only with the Multi-block solver.
Multi-block scheme section

Select the type of scheme to use with the Multi-block solver:
 Central Differencing – Central difference is about twice as fast as the upwinding
scheme and is good to use for higher-pressure ratio and high-speed machines.
 3rd Order Upwinding (AUSM) – Third order means third order of accuracy in space,
whereby less diffusion provides for more accuracy. The upwind schemes (AUSM of Dr.
Mengsing Liou) run somewhat more slowly, but are more accurate for all the machines.
Upwind schemes are recommended for all machines except pumps.
 1st Order Upwinding (AUSM) – First order means first order of accuracy in space.
Because of the higher numerical diffusion, it is suggested to use this option only for
refining the initial field when the higher order scheme has difficulty converging.
 Compressible (recommended) – The solver is recommended for machine types other
than pumps or hydroturbines. (For pumps and hydroturbines that do not use water or
ideal liquid, no recommendation is made.)
 Incompressible – This solver is recommended for water or ideal liquid fluid types.
Start run in 1st order for __ iterations

Specify the iterations to be run using the first-order scheme before switching to the selected higher-
order schemes, whether second-order central difference or third-order AUSM.
Use table-based thermodynamic functions

Select this check box to use a table-based interpolation scheme that replaces real-gas thermodynamic
functions, then specify the iterations in the box for Run first order for ____ iterations below.
Note: This option is not available for solutions with incompressible fluids or ideal gas
(fluid properties are selected on the Fluid Properties tab of the Fluid dynamic loading
parameters dialog box).
Run first order for ____ iterations

Type the number of iterations to be run at the beginning of the calculation using a first order scheme.
This parameter helps to overcome transient states that are outside the range of the tables. (The ac-
ceptable range is between 1 and 10000.)
Merkle Preconditioning
Select this check box to use Dr. Merkle's preconditioning matrix to artificially adjust the character-
istic wave speeds of the Euler equation system.
This option is recommended when the flow Mach number is low. For low Mach number flows, the
characteristic wave speeds are significantly different. If preconditioning is not activated, the CFD
run will show poor convergence and inaccurate solutions.
Note: For high-speed machines, it is recommended that you do not select the Merkle
preconditioning check box.
Cut off Mach number <0...1>

If you selected the Merkle Preconditioning check box, use this box to specify the cut off Mach
number to use when the flow Mach number is low.
Cut off Mach numbers are used to avoid singularity, and the average Mach number of the flow field
should be a good choice. Smaller cut off Mach numbers give faster convergence, but can affect the
stability of the solution.
Global residual smoothing

Select this check box to enable globally implicit residual smoothing, and then specify the following
parameters:
 Iterations – The number of smoothing iterations. More iterations provide more stability,
but increase the run time. The default value is 4 iterations.
 Epsilon – The "strength" of the smoothing. Specify a parameter ranging from zero (no
smoothing) to one (full smoothing).
Some designs, particularly highly loaded transonic machines, are unstable with full smoothing. The
default value is 0.65, which generally works in these cases. Below this value, the time step must be
reduced; the time-step limit is roughly linear with epsilon, down to a CFL number of 0.5 at epsilon
of zero.
Solver Precision
Select whether you want to use the Single-precision solver, or the Double-precision solver. The dou-
ble-precision solver takes more computer memory (RAM) to run than the single-precision solver,
but almost the same amount of CPU time (with Windows 2000 or XP). This double-precision option
is recommended for fans because the flow variables change only in the last one or two digits when
single precision is used.
Intermediate Solutions Every ___ Iterations

Specify how often the solver should write out solutions to a file while the solver is executing. The
purposes for this function are:
 To have a solution in case the CFD solver diverges.
 To view the flow field before the CFD run is done if your computer has two CPUs or
dual cores.
Update Viscous Stress Every ___ Iterations

Specify how often to update the viscous stress; otherwise, the solver updates the viscous stress every
three Runge-Kutta iterations.
Note: For flows with a dominated turbulence, the update should be done more often than 5
iterations. Cases that diverge very late in the run can sometimes benefit from setting
this option to 1. If you are using the Multi-grid options, we recommend that you set
this option to 3 or lower because faster convergence requires more frequent updates
for the viscous terms.
Match Throughflow Solver Loss Every ___ Iterations

If you have chosen to run a throughflow solution and want to specify the percentage of iterations
after which to match the calculated loss with the model loss, type the percentage value in the box.
This option is an iterative method to adjust the model loss to account for the numerical loss in the
time marching solution of the Euler equation.
Grid generation and initialization section

Use Dawes Style Initialization by AxCent
If you are generating an O-, C-, or OH-grid,.this option is automatically selected. It is the only option
available for O-, C-, and OH- grids. This option tells AxCent to generate the grid and initialize it
using the same initialization method used by the Dawes solver. This option allows you to select the
double precision option in the Solver Precision box (see above).
Use Optimized Initialization (one zone model, tangential loading)

Select this option to have AxCent generate the grid and initialize the flow field directly. If MST is
active, it will be used to generate the initial flow field; otherwise, rapid loading will be used. The
following solver settings are changed to allow for the flow field to be most suitable for initializing
the CFD solver:
 The two zone model, if active, is switched off
 In rapid loading, the blade-to-blade solution will be calculated using the Stanitz and
Prian method
These changes almost always improve the quality of the initial flow field.
This option is not available for O-, C-, and OH-grids.
Use Non-optimized AxCent results
Select this option for AxCent to generate the grid and initialize the flow field, but not change any of
the solver settings. MST is used if it is active; otherwise, rapid loading is used.
Use this option only if you want to avoid the delay of re-running the solver or if, for some reason,
the optimized version doesn't converge. In general, it is better to use the optimized initialization.
This option is not available for O-, C-, and OH-grids.
Solver Settings dialog box – for Numeca Fine™/Turbo
Solver Settings – Configuration tab

Use this tab of the Solver Settings dialog box to specify the flow model for the Numeca solver op-
tion.
The name of this tab changes to Physical Configuration if you have selected the Fine/Open solv-
er on the Solver tab.
For FINE/Turbo (Configuration tab) For FINE/Open (Physical Configuration tab)
Fluid Model section

In the Type drop-down list, select one of the following fluid models provided by Numeca/FINE™/
Turbo:
 Calorically Perfect Gas
 Condensable Fluid
 Incompressible Fluid
 Real Gas
Time Configuration section

Select one of the following options for time configuration or for steady-state computation:
 Steady – The number of iterations and the convergence criterion (expressed as a base-ten
logarithm).
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Solver Settings dialog box – for Numeca Fine™/Turbo 391
 Unsteady – The physical time step, the number of time steps, and the number of steady
iterations for initialization. See the following articles from the Fine/Turbo online
documentation:
 Choice of the physical time step
 The interface for an unsteady computation
 Harmonic – The harmonic method.
Mathematical Model section

Use this section to specify the mathematical models.
Mathematical Model
From the drop-down list, select one of the following model options:
 Euler
 Laminar Navier-Stokes
 Turbulent Navier-Stokes
Modeling of turbulence
From the drop-down list, select one of the following model options:
 Baldwin-Lomax
 EARSM
 K-epsilon
 K-omega
 SARC
 S-BSL-EARSM
 Shear stress
 Spalart-Allmaras
 SST
 v2f model
Note: Some options listed above are available for the Fine/Open solver only.
Low Speed Flow (M < 0.3)

Select the check box to use the preconditioning for low speed flow. For incompressible cases, Fine/
Turbo turns on this feature automatically.
Reynolds Number Related Info (for FINE/Turbo only )

Specify the following values for the Reynolds number (the default values that appear are derived
from AxCent data):
 Characteristic length – Radius of the shroud at the inlet.
 Characteristic velocity – Average inlet velocity.
 Characteristic density
Reference Parameters section (for FINE/Open only)

Specify the values for Reference length and Reference velocity.
Solver Settings – Numerical Model tab
Use this tab of the Solver Settings dialog box to specify the numerical model when you are using
Numeca/Fine Turbo.
CFL number
Specify the CFL (Courant-Frederichs-Levy) number for the non-dimensional time-step. The default
for this number is 3.
CPU Booster
Check this box to use Fine/Turbo CPUBooster™. This is the Fine/Turbo accelerated solver.
Multigrid parameters section

Use this section to specify the multigrid parameters or pre-steps. in the Number of grid levels
spin box.
Coarse grid initialization

Check this box to implement the coarse grid initialization pre-steps as used in the Fine/Turbo pro-
gram.
Solver Settings dialog box – Control Variables tab
Use this tab of the Solver Settings dialog box to specify control variables for iterations and initial-
izations when you use Numeca Fine/Turbo.
Iterations section
Specify the following iteration parameters:
 Maximum number of iterations – Specify the maximum iterations to be run by the
Fine/Turbo solver.
 Convergence criteria – Specify a value for the convergence criteria, or a reduction in a
residual to the power of 10.
Steady Initialization section
Specify the following parameters for initialization with a steady solution:
 Number of steady iterations – Specify the number of iterations.
 Save steady solution every [ ] iterations – Specify the number of iterations to be run
before the solution is saved.
Output files section

Specify the number of iterations after which the solution is to be saved in the output file.
Save solution every [ ] iterations

Specify the number of iterations to be run before the solution is saved.
Minimum output
Check this box to ensure the minimum output of iterations.
Solver precision
Select either Single or Double solver precision.
Stacking and Geometry Options for Midspan Sections dialog box
Use this dialog box to stack sections meridionally along the leading and/or trailing edge. For more
information and an illustration of how meridional stacking appears in AxCent, see the topic "Merid-
ional stacking example" in AxCent Help.
Note: For information on selecting the blade generation option, see "Specifying the type of
blade generation" on page 54.
This dialog box appears when you choose Mid-Span Geometry Defn. – Stacking and Geometry
Options from the Geometry menu.
Stacking options section
Enable meridional stacking along the leading edge

Select this check box to use meridional stacking along the leading edge. If meridional stacking is on,
a green line in the contour plot indicates the effects of the meridional stacking.
Enable meridional stacking along the trailing edge

Select this check box to use meridional stacking along the trailing edge.
Geometry options section
Improved thickness calculation

Select this check box to use improved thickness calculation, especially for blades with large thick-
ness changes.
This option activates a more precise but slower algorithm to calculate blade thickness in interpolated
sections, and is specific to blade generation for midspan sections and stacking curves.
Rounded edge construction postponed as long as possible

Select this check box to postpone the edge construction. The postponement of the edge construction
can improve compatibility with other programs that construct the LE.
Start Pushbutton CFD Run dialog box
Use this dialog box to start a CFD run using Pushbutton CFD. This dialog box also allows you to
control the execution of the CFD solver. When you press OK, the CFD input files are written to the
proper directory for the run. (The CFD directory is specified in the Preferences dialog box). For more
information, see Overview: Performing CFD calculations.
For more information, see "Introduction to performing CFD calculations" on page 142.
This dialog box appears when you choose Start CFD from the CFD menu (or click on the tool-
bar).
Choose Blade-to-Blade Solver – Start Solver from the Flow menu.
Choose Throughflow Solver – Start Solver from the Flow menu.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Start Pushbutton CFD Run dialog box 397
Depending on the type of CFD solution you've chosen on the Grid dialog box and the type of CFD
solver you've chosen on the Solver Settings dialog box, the title of the Start Pushbutton CFD Run
dialog box changes to reflect your selections.
 see "Start Full 3D PBPlus (AxCent grid) solver dialog box – Start CFD tab" on page
399..
 see "Start Full 3D PBPlus (AxCent grid) dialog box – Generate Map tab" on page 403..
Start Full 3D PBPlus (AxCent grid) solver dialog box – Start CFD tab
Use the Start CFD tab of the Start Full 3D PBPlus (AxCent grid) dialog box to set up the parameters
for a CFD calculation.
This tab appears when you choose Start CFD from the CFD menu (or click on the toolbar
menu).
– or if you use the Blade-to-Blade solver –
Choose Blade-to-Blade Solver – Start Solver from the Flow menu.
– or use the Throughflow solver –
Choose Throughflow Solver – Start Solver from the Flow menu.
Run parameters section

Title
Specify the title to use for the CFD run. The title is used to name the sub-directory where the CFD
input, history, and output files are to be created. The title is also used to identify the run within Ax-
Cent. The drop-down list box contains the titles of all existing runs for the design. It is helpful to
give meaningful names to your CFD runs, such as "ECKARDT demo – Coarse Grid". The title of
an existing run cannot be modified; editing the title causes AxCent to create a new CFD run.
Steady/Unsteady
 Steady – The number of iterations and the convergence criterion (expressed as a base-ten
logarithm).
 Unsteady – The physical time step, the number of time steps, and the number of steady
iterations for initialization.
If you select Steady, specify a value for Iterations below. If you select Unsteady, specify a value
for Subiterations.and specify values in the boxes for Time step(s).
Time step (s)

Specify the number of time steps if you selected Unsteady.
Iterations
In this box, type the maximum iterations to be run. It normally takes about 2,000 iterations to con-
verge to within +- 2% of the design flow by selecting the Activate design mass flow convergence
check box (on the Convergence Options tab of the Solver Settings dialog box). If this check box is
not selected, fewer iterations may be required.
The  check box is
available only for the Dawes solver. The Multi-block solver does not support design mass flow con-
vergence. Solutions of different mass flows are obtained by adjusting the back pressure (by choosing
Boundary Conditions from the CFD menu, and then making changes on the Pressure tab of the
Boundary Conditions dialog box).
Solver priority
From the drop-down list box, select either Normal or Background to specify your computer’s
scheduling priority of the CFD solver process. Select Normal for a minimum of elapsed time, or
Background so that the CFD solver runs while you perform other design work.
Plot residuals
Select this check box to have the CFD Residual window display the residuals of the CFD run when
the solver begins. Even if the residuals are not plotted, they are saved in the history file and can be
plotted later if desired.
Batch:
Select this check box when you want to begin the CFD solver process at a specified time. You can
also set up a series of runs to begin at a specified time, varying in geometry and settings.
Start first run at

If you selected the Batch run check box, specify the time to start the first job in a batch of runs.
AxCent must be running to start batch jobs. According to its placement in the queue, each job is run
separately to completion before the next job in the queue is started.
Pause on error
Select this check box to have CFD runs pause if there is any error. To continue with the CFD calcu-
lation, press ENTER with the PBPlus command window in the forefront.
Use MPI processes/hosts
Select this check box to specify the number of MPI (Message Passing Interface) processes for the
multi-core computer to use when running the Multi-block solver. The number specified in this box
multiplied by the number specified in the box for the OpenMP threads corresponds to the number of
cores dedicated to the run.
Using multiple processes reduces the time of the solver run by breaking up the solution into two or
more pieces at the block level, and then solving each piece in a separate process. The grid must be
composed of sufficient blocks to support the number of specified processes. For example, a case
with two blade rows using an H-grid topology can use at most two processes, while the same case
using an OH topology can use up to ten processes.
Setup button
Click this button to change the configuration of the MPI network in the Parallel tab of the Preferenc-
es dialog box that appears.
OpenMP threads
Specify the number of threads of execution for the multi-core computer when running the Multi-
block solver. The number that you specify in this box corresponds to the number of cores dedicated
to the run.
Multiple threads reduce the time the multi-core computer takes for the solver run by running two or
more tasks at once. It provides significant performance improvements for real gas cases, incom-
pressible flows, and quasi-3D solutions. You can save up to 40% of computing time when you use
two threads on a machine with a Core Duo processor.
The number that you specify in this box, multiplied by the number specified for MPI processes, cor-
responds to the number of cores dedicated to the run. Regardless of the number of cores available,
the solver always uses the number of threads specified in the OpenMP threads box.
Note: If you select NIST as a fluid property (in the Fluid Properties tab), make sure that
you set the OpenMP threads to 1.
The default environmental variable for OpenMP thread binding is KMP_AFFINITY=scatter, as de-
fined in cbatch.cpp (which is called at every run). However, you can change the default option “scat-
ter” according to the conditions of your hardware.
Repository
Use this option to select the repository for the CFD run if you have one or more distributed CFD
repositories configured and mapped to your machine.
Note: This option is not available if you have only one repository on a local drive.
From the drop-down list box, select the repository:
 Local – This is the CFD run location on the local machine. The path for this directory
appears on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
 [Network repository]– These are the shared repositories that you can create on the
network. The names of the repositories that appear here indicate the ones that you have
created.
Initial Conditions section

In this section, select the source for the grid, initial solution, and boundary conditions for the CFD
run. If an existing CFD run or an existing grid is specified in the Title box above, the default option
is to start from this run, after which the solution file is specified automatically. Otherwise, the default
option generates a new grid using current grid settings (as specified on the Grid and Boundary Con-
ditions dialog boxes).
 Default – Generate a new grid and initialize the flow field using the values and options
specified in the Boundary Conditions dialog box.
 Existing solution or existing grid*– Use the initial flow field from an existing solution
or existing grid that appears in the table of the CFD Results dialog box. The asterisk (*)
indicates grids with an initial solution only.
Note: This option is available after the completion of a CFD run or a generated a grid.
Note: A compatible solution is when the segment range of the solution includes the segment
range for the currently active CFD grid or solution.
 Existing solution file – Initialize the run from the solution file of a previous CFD run
(to search for the file, use the Browse button). The file you specify here is not one that is
listed in the table of CFD runs. To load an existing solution for post-processing, type 0
(zero) in the Maximum iterations box.
Generate new grid using current settings

Select this check box to regenerate the grid; to skip the grid regeneration, leave this option unselect-
ed.
Note: When this option is selected, an interpolation in three dimensional space is made
from the old solution onto the newly defined grid. This works from one old grid
setting to another, such as from a coarse grid to a fine grid, or from one topology to
another, such as from the H- grid to OH-grid. As long as the old and new solution fill
approximately the same volumetric domain, the interpolation can be done
successfully. For this reason, the blade rows used in the solution must be the same.
Apply current boundary conditions

Select this check box to apply the current boundary-condition settings to the new solver run, over-
riding the settings of the old run. If you leave the box unselected, the boundary condition data from
the old run are used instead.
Note: Changes in injection or extraction conditions for a restart run are not supported.
Leakage warnings section

In this section, specify how you want leakage warnings to be reported.
Note: This section does not apply to axial machines.
Report in separate messages

Select this option to have leakage warnings appear in separate messages.
Save to file
Select this option to have leakage warnings listed and saved in a specified file.
Ignore
Select this option to ignore all leakage warnings.
Run/Run Map button

Click to run the CFD solution, or if you have selected the Generate map with multiple CFD runs
check box, click Run Map to run the multiple performance maps. The CFD Results dialog box ap-
pears when you click Run Map.
Start Full 3D PBPlus (AxCent grid) dialog box – Generate Map tab
Use this tab of the Start Full 3D PBPlus (AxCent grid) dialog box to specify the options for gener-
ating a CFD map, including multiple line plots.
To access this tab, choose Start CFD from the CFD menu, and then click the Generate Map tab.
Generate map with multiple CFD runs

Select this option to create a performance map based on multiple CFD runs with the same geometry,
varying in speed, flow, or pressure. This option allows for the running of several CFD solutions in
batch mode.
Selecting this check box enables all other options on this tab.
Include in results table under group:

Select the check box to choose either an individual and customized map (Map_x) or all solutions
(Solutions) of multiple grids.
The resulting CFD run titles appear in the list box below.
Speed Lines section

Define the speed lines in this section.
Speed lines table
Use this table to define the rotational speed for each run, and to specify values for Fraction and
RPM for each line row.
Lines
Select the number of speed lines for the solver run. The number you select determines the number
of line rows on the table.
Space evenly button

Click to interpolate the values between the current maximum and current minimum and then sort
them.
Boundary Conditions section

First drop-down list
In the first drop-down list box, select the type of map generation mode you want to use among the
following options:
 Exit characteristic – This activates the Plot button (click to set parameters on the Map
dialog box).
To learn about this dialog box, see "Map dialog box" in AxCent F1 Help.
 Exit static pressure
 Inlet total pressure
 Mass flow
For incompressible flows, the flow rate is exclusively determined by the inlet boundary condition,
which is the value of Cm (meridional velocity) as specified on the Boundary Conditions tab of the
Boundary Conditions dialog box.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Boundary Conditions dialog box" on page 224.
Second drop-down list

In the second drop-down list box, select one of the following options for specifying values for a par-
ticular parameter.
 Relative to inlet total pressure
 Relative to exit static pressure
Boundary Conditions table

Use this table to specify pressure or mass flow values either as fractions or as absolute values, de-
pending upon what conditions you select in this section.
The parameters that appear in the table depend on whether you have selected Relative to inlet total
pressure or Relative to exit static pressure.
Sampling
Change the number of values on the table.
Plot button
This button is activated when you select Exit characteristic in the first drop-down list above.
Click this button to specify exit characteristics in the Map dialog box.
Space evenly button
Click to interpolate the values between the current maximum and current minimum and then sort
them. (The selection of Exit characteristic disables this button.0
Run/Run Map button

Click to run the CFD solution, or if you have selected the Generate map with multiple CFD runs
check box, click Run Map to run the multiple performance maps. The CFD Results dialog box ap-
pears when you click Run Map.
STEP output options dialog box
Use this dialog box to export data to a STEP file format (.stp) .
The dialog box becomes available when you choose Export – Export STEP file (.stp) from the File
menu.
Turn off graphic display

Select this option to turn off the display of the exported segments in the Open CASCADE 3D graph-
ics window.
This option is recommended for running the Turbo OPT II program remotely or for problems in dis-
playing the Open CASCADE window.
Segment
The Segment box displays the first and last segments to be exported to the STEP file. It also indicates
the exclusion of rotating and non-rotating blades from the output file.
To change the range of segments and to select rotating or non-rotating blades, click the Set Seg-
ments button and make your selections in the Select Segment Range dialog box.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Select Segment Range dialog box" on page 363.
Select section
In this section, select the check boxes beside the following parts to include them in the STEP export
file.
Include hub surface

Include the surface of the hub in the STEP export file.

Include the surface of the shroud. This option is not available for an open wheel, since the shroud is
at some distance from the blading, with its exact position unknown.
Select OCC Volute
Include the OCC volute in the STEP export file.


Add mechanical geometry

Select to add the mechanical geometry to the file.
Add backface/bore
Include backface/bore geometry. This option appears only if you specify a backface/bore in your de-
sign via Pushbutton FEA.
Stress Geometry
Include stress geometry.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® STEP output options dialog box 407
STL Output Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to configure an STL (stereo lithography) output file to export the CFD or FEA
geometry data to a third-party CAD program. Whereas in STL output the CFD geometry is repre-
sented as a negative space, the FEA geometry is represented as a metal solid.
This dialog box appears when you choose Export – Export STL file from the File menu.
Turn off graphic display

Select this option to turn off the display of the exported segments in the Open CASCADE 3D graph-
ics window.
This option is recommended for running the Turbo OPT II program remotely or for problems in dis-
playing the Open CASCADE window.
STL output for:

CFD– Generate the flow path volume for a third-party CFD solution.
FEA– Generate the metal components for a third-party FEA solution.
Segment
The Segment box displays the first and last segments to be exported to the STL file.
Set Segments button

To change the range of segments and to select rotating or non-rotating blades, click the Set Segments
button and select the range to export in the Select Segment Range dialog box.
To learn about the Select Segment Range dialog box, see "Select Segment Range dialog box" on
page 363.
Write all segments as a single patch .STL file

Select the check box to generate all segments as a single patch STL file. This option is useful when
you are exporting segment data to CAD programs than cannot handle multiple-patch STL files.
By default, the STL file is generated in multiple patches according to the choice of sub-segments (in
the "Sub-segments" section below). For example, inlet and exit planes, hub and shroud surfaces,
blade rows, and mixing planes are all generated as separate patches. Using multiple patches is useful
when assigning boundary conditions to individual surfaces. However, if the user selects the single-
patch option, all selected segments are written as a single patch.
Write additional .stl_info file

Select this check box to create an additional STL data file.
Select OCC volute

Select this check box to include the OCC volute in the STL export file. Be sure to include the volute
in the range of selected segments.
By default, the AxCent volute is exported when the volute is included in the selected segment range.
However, if the OCC-style volute is generated by the method used on the OCC tab (clicking the
View Volute button), select this option to include the OCC volute in the STL export file.
Sub-segments section
Select any of the following sub-segments for inclusion in the STL export file.
 Add inlet/exit planes
 Add hub surface
 Add blade rows
 Add mixing planes
 Add shroud surface
 Single blade
Precision section
Specify the precision of the STL file in this section. The values for precision are non-dimensional.
The smaller the number that you specify for precision, the larger the number of elements in the STL
file. More elements represent the geometry more accurately.
 Overall precision – Type a value for the precision of the overall file.
 Blade row precision – Select the check box to specify a greater precision for the blade
only, and then specify its value. This option is recommended for blades with complex
shapes.
Segment names
For multiple-patch STL files, select either Default or User-specified (customized) segment names.
Note: This option is not available for single-patch files.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® STL Output Options dialog box 409
Stretch Segment dialog box
This dialog box allows you to stretch the original axial length that was specified in your meanline
code. The hub and shroud Z widths are for informational purposes only and cannot be edited.
This dialog box appears when you select Operations – Stretch Z Length from the Geometry menu.
Current hub z extent

Displays the current Z width for the hub. This information cannot be edited.
Current shroud z extent

Displays the current Z width for the shroud. This information cannot be edited.
Enter amount of stretch

Type the amount of change in z to stretch the flow path.
Preserve entry/exit slopes

Select this check box to preserve your entry and exit slope information; thereby keeping the same
entry and exit slopes after the segment is stretched.
Swept Leading/Trailing Edge Parameters dialog box
This dialog box allows you to define a curved leading or trailing edge.
Note that the following blade generation options do not support swept leading/trailing edges:
 Blade sections defined in Z, RTheta (axial blades only)
 2D wedge diffuser
 Custom
This dialog box appears when you select Swept Leading Edge or Swept Trailing Edge from the
Geometry menu. This menu item becomes available when you select the impeller (or rotor) segment.
Use swept leading/trailing edge

Select this check box to apply swept leading or trailing edge to your design. Once a swept leading/
trailing edge has been created, you can turn this option off; however, switching it off does not delete
the swept leading/trailing edge; the option is simply no longer active. When switching it back on,
the same swept leading/trailing edge options become active.
Leading/Trailing edge type

Select the type of leading/trailing edge you want to apply:
 Blunt – The blade edge is not sharp, but just ends and keeps the same thickness.
 Rounded – An elliptical edge is fitted to the blade. The edge is cut back so that it doesn't
protrude beyond the segment boundaries.
 Sheared – The edge is sheared off at the segment boundaries. Unlike the blunt edge, a
sheared edge is not perpendicular to the blade; it is cut along a surface of revolution
instead.
 Bezier– The edge is controlled by an editable Bezier curve. You can use the Bezier
option to control the edge shape in detail. This option is especially useful for specifying
asymmetrical edges. (The disadvantage of using the Bezier option is the additional work
and attention required to make a suitable edge shape.)
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Swept Leading/Trailing Edge Parameters dialog box 411
Use old style shearing
Select this check box to use an old method that achieves a sheared leading edge by shearing a blunt
blade. If you do not shear off enough of the blade, this can leave you with a piece of blade missing
where the blunt blade doesn’t reach all the way to the inlet. If you don’t select this check box, the
new method is used which will extend the blade surface if needed to achieve proper shearing.
Note: This option appears for sheared swept leading edges only.
Wipe out existing curve

Select this check box to replace the existing swept edge with a new one.
Shroud merge QO for swept leading/trailing edge

In this box, specify the QO at which the swept edge is to touch the shroud. When a new swept edge
is created, it is curved from hub to shroud.
Hub merge QO for swept leading/trailing edge

In this box, specify the QO at which the swept edge is to touch the hub.
Force continuous slope at shroud merge

Select this check box to merge the newly created swept edge smoothly into the shroud contour.
There will be no corner where shroud and edge meet, as the edge transitions smoothly into the shroud
contour.
Caution: Take care when using this option to make sure the resulting 3D blade shape is acceptable.
Table Based Options dialog box – Machining/CFD Output Parameters tab
Use this tab of the Table Based Options dialog box to export information for your machine in differ-
ent formats into a separate file, so that you can use it with another program.
This dialog box appears when you choose Export – Table-based from the File menu. This menu
item becomes available when you select a segment of your design.

In this section, select the type of format in which you want to export the CFD machining informa-
tion.
Meanline and thickness

Select this option to save the file in machining file format (.mch).
When you select this option, the geometric coordinates are generated along both the shroud and the
hub, and as many mid-span sections as desired. You can specify to use up to 500 points to define the
meanline geometry.
AxCent starts by defining the total meridional distance from leading edge to trailing edge, for both
the hub and the shroud. The data proceeds from the leading edge to the trailing edge, in separate
blocks for the shroud, mid-span section, and for the hub.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Table Based Options dialog box – Machining/CFD Output Parameters tab 413
Each block lists the polar coordinates R and THETA (degrees), as well as Z, blade thickness (TN),
blade angle, (BETA, in degrees), and percent meridional distance.
The polygon points that define the Bezier distribution of the upstream and downstream segments are
at the end of the file.
Surface
Select this option to save the file in the surface file format (.sur). When you select this option, you
can specify to include up to 200 points on each surface of the blade. The units currently being used
in AxCent will be used in the file.
A surface (.sur) file can be used both for input (for CADFIT) or for output (for a machining file). It
contains either XYZ or Z-R-Theta data. The input file can contain either data type, but the output
file always uses one format containing both data types. The CADFIT program reads the header of
the input surface file and interprets each column accordingly. In the input file, data columns are in-
terpreted according to the header lines (I X Y Z ….) directly above the data. The labels for characters
are as follows:
 V – A non-dimensional parameter used to specify the height up the blade. The Hub is 0.0
and the Tip is 1.0. This parameter assumes that all points fall on a constant plane of
constant v.
Note: This parameter only appears in surface files for axial cases (when you select
Axistress surface for geometry output below).
 I – Index,or point number (optional)
 X – x coordinate
 Y – y coordinate
 Z – z coordinate
 R – Radius
 T – Theta (in degrees)
Note: The surface file format does not use RTheta data (radius * theta). Be sure to convert
RTheta data either to Z-R-Theta or to XYZ data using t=(180/PI)*(rtheta/r ).
The 3D rendered view uses the same data as the surface file so it can be used for visual inspection
of the surface data.
Surface file data is presented beginning with shroud contours and moving toward hub contours.
Splitter blade geometry is then presented, if splitters are used in the design. Coordinates are present-
ed first for the leading edge shape, then for the leading surface (or pressure surface for compressors
and pumps), and finally for the trailing surface.
You can specify the points that define the leading edge curve and surfaces. Straight lines connect
correspondingly numbered points on each spanwise section. Points where the surface extends for-
ward from the merge point of the leading edge curve are suppressed so that the actual number of
points in the file may differ slightly from the number of points requested. Generally, this includes
only coordinate position 1, but may include position 2 when the number of points of either the major
or minor axis ratio of the leading edge is very large.
A surface file uses both Cartesian and polar coordinates. These are related as follows:
 Z is common between two coordinates.
 Theta equals zero.
 Y equals R, The X coordinate is positive in the direction of rotation.
You may need to modify the coordinate definitions for later use in procedures with different defini-
tions.
CFD (Meanline on QOs w/ slope)
Select this option to save the file in CFD meanline format, which is similar to the meanline and thick-
ness format (.mch) except that slope information is also included.
Custom (Python scripts)

Select this option to save the file in a custom or proprietary format. You can define your own format
with Python script. AxCent provides two pre-defined .csv custom formats:
 Comma separated values (camberline)
 Comma separated values (surface)
For your custom format script to appear in the list of options in the box, place the scripts in the Ax-
Cent installation directory. The next time AxCent starts, your script will be listed here.


Surface.

*.dat files.

*.dat files.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Table Based Options dialog box – Machining/CFD Output Parameters tab 415
Setup button
Third Party Export dialog box
Use this dialog box to export the AxCent files to third party programs.
The Third Party Export dialog box appears when you choose Export – Third Party Interface from
the File menu.
 Proprietary geometry tab – Export to ANSYS, Numeca Fine™/Turbo, and Tecplot file
formats.
 Pro/E format tab – Export to Pro/Engineer.
Third Party Export dialog box – Proprietary Geometry tab

Use this tab of the Third Party Export dialog box to export AxCent files to third-party geometric out-
put, including ANSYS/CFX TurboGrid, ANSYS/Fluent G-Turbo/Gambit, Numeca Fine™/Turbo,
and Tecplot.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Third Party Export dialog box 417
Select one of the following third-party formats to which to export the AxCent file:
 ANSYS/Fluent GTurbo (.tur) – Select this option to save the file in a format to be used
with the Ansys/FLUENT software.
 Numeca FINE/Turbo CFD (*.geomTurbo) – Select this option to save the file in a
format suitable for the Numeca FINE/Turbo CFD package.
 ANSYS/CFX-TurboGrid (*.curve) – Select this option to save the file in ANSYS/
TurboGrid format, the grid generator for CFX-TASCflow.
 Tecplot (IJK)(*.dat) – Select this option to save the file in IJK format, which is
readable by the Tecplot program.


Surface.

*.dat files.

*.dat files.

Setup button
Third Party Export dialog box – Pro/Engineer format tab

Use this tab of the Third Party Export dialog box to generate Pro/Engineer® files.
Note: This tab is only available for radial designs.

See the Creating Pro/E files topic for complete instructions on how to generate Pro/Engineer files.
Output directory section

In the available box, specify the directory to which to save the Pro/Engineer files (or click Browse
to select the directory). If you do not select the Collect curves into blade files check box (below),
each generated file contains only a single curve, so, to represent an impeller, a whole set of files are
created. Since many automatically named files may be created, specify a separate directory for each
design so that all files are saved to a single location.
Overwrite existing files

Select this check box when you want to replace any file that already exists in the directory you spec-
ified in the Output directory box. This option does not delete any files that it does not overwrite.
Collect curves into blade files

Select this check box to write all curves that are part of a specific blade into a single file. Curves that
do not belong to a specific blade (hub and shroud curves) are written to the flowpath.ibl file. For
example, for design that has a main blade and splitters, if this check box is selected, three .ibl files
would be generated: one for the flow path, one for the main blade, and one for the splitter (some ad-
ditional .txt files might also be created if this check box is selected). This check box is selected by
default.
Optional filename prefix

Type a prefix for the file name (for example, stage3a_flowpath.ibl, stage3a_mainblade.ibl, etc.).
Contours section
In this section, specify the range of segments to export for the hub and shroud contours. The whole
range is a single curve in the file.
Output hub (.ibl)

Select this check box to create a hub_profile.ibl file, containing the hub contour over the specified
range of segments.
Output shroud (.ibl)

Select this check box to create a shroud_profile.ibl file, containing the shroud contour over the
specified range of segments.
First segment
From the drop-down list boxes, select the first segment to go into the hub_profile.ibl file, and the
first segment to go into the shroud_profile.ibl file, respectively.
Last segment
From the drop-down list boxes, select the last segment to go into the hub_profile.ibl file, and the
last segment to go into the shroud_profile.ibl file, respectively.
Map (R,Z) to (X,Y)

Select this option to output R, Z coordinates as X, Y coordinates.
Map (R,Z) to (Y,Z)

Select this option to output R, Z coordinates as Y, Z coordinates.
From LE to TE/From TE to LE
Select to output the coordinates from either the leading edge to trailing edge, or from the trailing
edge to leading edge.
Add nose_table.txt using ___ points

Select this check box and specify the number of points to use, to create a file containing the contour
of the nose cone for the impeller.
Add full hub shape (hubshape.ibl)
Select this check box to create a hubshap.ibl file that contains the shape of the hub, including the
backface and bore parts.
Note: This check box appears only if a backface/bore shape has been defined for the design.
Add full hub shape (hubshape.txt)

Select this check box to create a hubshap.txtl file that contains the shape of the hub, including the
backface and bore parts.
Note: This check box appears only if a backface/bore shape has been defined for the design.
Add tip clearance contours

Select this check box to add an additional ZR curve for each hub or tip gap that shows where the
blade ends.
Blades section
Blades
From the drop-down list box, select the blades that you want to include in the file. You can select
main blades, splitters, or all blades. The default is Main blade.
Sections
From the drop-down list box, select the cross sections or individual cross section to include in the
file. You can choose the Hub and shroud, Shroud, or Hub.
Leading edge (.ibl)

Select this check box to include the leading edge curve of the blade cross section.
Trailing edge (.ibl)

Select this check box to include the trailing edge curve of the blade cross section.
Pressure surface (.ibl)

Select this check box to include the pressure surface curve of the blade cross section.
Suction surface (.ibl)

Select this check box to include the suction surface curve of the blade cross section.
Combine into one surface curve

Select this check box to combine the blade curves (leading and trailing edge, and pressure and suc-
tion surface) into one surface curve.
Center line (.ibl)

Select this check box to include the centerline curve of the blade cross section.
CTAADS input file (.ibl)

Select this check box to generate an input file for the Concepts NREC cooled turbine program, CTA-
ADS.
Table (.txt)
Select this check box to generate a text file with a fixed formatted table, containing centerline and
thickness information of the blade cross section. This is a .txt file (not an .ibl file).
Extend blade into hub

Select this check box to specify the extension of the blade into the hub. (The default is 5%.) Extend-
ing the blade into the hub surfaces can improve intersection in a CAD program.
Extend blade into shroud

Select this check box to specify the extension of the blade into the shroud. (The default is 5%.) Ex-
tending the blade into the shroud surfaces can improve intersection in a CAD program.
Orientation section
In AxCent, the usual convention for the Z-axis of the coordinate system is for the working fluid to
flow in the positive Z direction. The flow is displayed from left to right on the screen. This section
allows you to use an alternative orientation: that of the impeller disk at Z=0, with the rest of the im-
peller in the positive Z direction. For pumps and compressors that usually means an orientation with
the flow in the negative Z direction. For turbines it means flow in the positive Z direction.
As in the AxCent design

Select this option to use the same coordinate system that AxCent uses when displaying orientation
(as described above).
Disk at Z=0, impeller upward

Select this option to use the coordinate system where the 'disk' of the impeller is at Z=0, and the rest
of the impeller has positive Z coordinates, as if the impeller sits on its back on a table.
Stabilize hub points near disk

Select this check box to ensure that no points on the hub protrude into the disk.
Number format (in .txt files) section

Click the Number of decimal places button to select the numbering format for the output text files.
The following options are available in the drop-down list that appears:
 varies – Allow the number of digits in the text files to vary.
 1 to 5 digits – Select the number of digits to appear in the text files.

Number of points (Hub to Shroud)

Type the number of blade sections from hub to shroud. The minimum is 2, the hub section and the
shroud section. The number increases for intermediate sections that may have been used in the MST
calculations.
Transfer design to Numeca dialog box
Use this dialog box to transfer a design to the Numeca solver in the file format of the FineTurbo
program (*.geomTurbo).
The Transfer design to Numeca dialog box appears when you choose Numeca Format from the File
menu.
– or –
When you click on the toolbar menu.

– or –
When you choose View Grid from the CFD menu (after selecting Fine/Turbo for CFD solver on
the Solver settings dialog box).
To learn about this dialog box, see "Solver Settings dialog box" on page 375..
Use the following options to configure the Numeca file:
First/Last segment – Use the drop-down lists to select the first and last segments to be included
in the exported file.
Geometry section
Extend blade into the hub and shroud – Check this box to extend the blade into the hub and
the shroud.
After you check this box, use the Hub% and Shroud% boxes that appear to specify the percentage
of the total blade length to be extended into the hub or the shroud.
Specify the following number of points (from a minimum of 2 to a maximum of 200):
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Transfer design to Numeca dialog box 423
 Number of points (LE to TE) – Points defining the blade from the leading edge to the
trailing edge.
 Number of points (H to S) – Points defining the blade from the hub to the shroud.
CFD section
 Generate grid – Check this box to enable the Setup button.
Click Setup to view and edit the Numeca grid settings in the Grid dialog box. The grid is generated
after you export the design to the Numeca solver.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Grid dialog box" on page 307..
 Run title – The CFD run name. Leave the default name, or type another name in the box.
Note: The file name is identical to the one in the Title box in the Start CFD dialog box.
Vane slots dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify vane slots for an impeller blade.
The Vane slots dialog box appears when you choose Vane Slots from the Geometry menu.
In the table, specify the following start and end parameters for the vane slots:
 %M start/end – Specify the vane slot length as a percentage of the blade length from
inlet to outlet.
 %span start/end – Specify the vane slot width as a percentage of the blade span from
hub to shroud.
Use the following buttons to specify the number of slots on the table:
 Add button – Add a vane slot row.
 Insert button – Insert a row above a row selected in the table.
 Delete button – Delete a selected row.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Vane slots dialog box 425
Input/Output Volute dialog box
Use this dialog box to design volutes for the downstream or the upstream.
The dialog box is available when you choose Upstream Volute or Downstream Volute from the
Setup menu.
Note: The parameters of this dialog box change according to whether you select an
upstream or a downstream volute.
The Input/Output Volute dialog box contains the following tabs:
 General parameters tab
 Simple Shape tab
 Asymmetric Shape tab
 Advanced tab
 Pipe Shape tab
 Dual Exit tab
 Tongue tab
 OCC Parameters tab
 Splitter tab
Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box – General parameters tab
Use the General parameters tab of the Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box to select the volute
type and to define its parameters.
Select volute type section

Select the type of volute to be designed.
 Overhung – Typically used for compressors (overhangs to one side).
 Asymmetric – For detailed editing of geometry parameters. Used for compressors
(overhangs to one side).
 None – Do not include a volute in the design.
 Symmetric – Uses a symmetrical type volute, which can be used for pump shapes.
 Advanced – For Bezier-curve design of volute geometry.
 Nurbs fit – Design the volute using Nurbs (Non-Uniform Rational Bezier Spline)
surfaces. Click here to learn about NURBS geometry.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Input/Output Volute dialog box 427
Each choice gives you different methods to design the cross-section of the volute. A small schematic
diagram appears to the right of these choices to show which variables are available to you with that
design method. The second tab from the left (Advanced or Asymmetric Shape tab) also changes de-
pending on the type of volute that you select.
Select tongue type section

Include a tongue in the volute by selecting Formed tongue, or select the absence of a tongue by se-
lecting Tongue-less.
When you select Formed tongue, you must specify the tongue's dimensions on the Tongue tab that
appears.
Input/Output Length
Type the length of the exit pipe. The length is the meanline or centerline length.
Transition Length as __% of Output Length

Type the percentage value as a percentage of the total output length. This is the portion of the exit
pipe where the shape transitions from a complex shape at the output of the wrap to an ellipse at the
exit of the exit pipe.
Nominal area
Type the area in square units at the entrance to the volute at the beginning of the tongue (the mini-
mum scroll area is 0°).
Throat area
Type the area in square units at the end of the scroll region (the maximum area is near 360°). This
is the area before or after the tongue, depending on which option you select below.
Before/After tongue
Select either Before tongue or After tongue to set the throat area before or after the tongue.
Input/Output area
Type the area in square units at exit of the exit pipe.
Separation between overlapping cross sections at exit
Specify additional clearance between the exit pipe and the scroll to allow the user to move them fur-
ther apart than the default. This option becomes available when you select Asymmetric as the volute
type.
In an asymmetric volute, the exit pipe can intersect the scroll. If this happens, AxCent automatically
modifies the exit pipe shape so that it stays clear of the volute scroll. The separation between over-
lapping cross sections is the minimum distance that AxCent places between the exit pipe and parts
of the scroll it potentially intersects. Note that this is different from the leading edge radius of the
tongue, which sets the distance at the point where the scroll and exit pipe split off.
Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box – Asymmetric Shape tab

Use this tab of the Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box for upstream (Input) or downstream
(Output) volute designs using an asymmetric design.
The Asymmetric Shape tab appears when you select the Asymmetric volute type in the General pa-
rameters tab. The dimensions required are for the volute cross-section at 180 degrees.
View the design in the Contours window. To view the Contours window, if not displayed, choose
Volute Views from the Standard Screens menu.
Parameters for the volute cross-section at ___ deg

Specify the position of each volute cross-section by degree using the drop-down box.
Length parameters sections
Fix:
Specify the length parameters from L1 to L6, working counterclockwise around the volute.
The center axis of each radius depends entirely upon the length parameters preceding it.
L5/L6
Select the checkboxes for L5 and L6 to fix the values for each of these length parameters. If these
check boxes are not selected, the values of L5 and L6 will change when the shape expands around
the volute.
Radius parameters sections

Fix:
Select and then type the radius parameters values (R1 to R5), working counterclockwise around the
volute.
R5 Angle
Select either a 180° or 90° angle for the R5 angle.
Use this option to choose between two alternate shapes for the Asymmetric volute. The shapes that
appear in the tab depend upon which option you select (180° is displayed in the illustration above).
If you select 90? (sometimes referred to as the D-shape volute), parameters L6 and R4 are ignored.
Set circular profile

Select this check box to create a volute with equal sides and equal radii, and click Apply.
The result is approximately a circular cross-section. L1, L3 and L4 are set to equal values. L5 and
L6 are set to zero. R1, R2, and R3 are set to equal values. R4 and R5 are set to equal values.
Set A/R*Theta Constant
Select this check box to use an alternate method of determining the area schedule. In this method,
AxCent generates cross-sections that keep the value of A / (R*Theta) constant, where A is the cross-
section area, R is the radius of the section’s centroid, and Theta is the angle of the cross-section
around the volute.
Edit shape using control points

Select this check box to interactively edit the volute shape using Bezier control points. When you
select this option and click Apply, the control points appear on the contours window of the volute.
Adjust as necessary and click OK when done.
Show area graph button

Click this button to display the Volute Area graph. This graph shows the cross-sectional area of the
volute at all locations around its axis.
Use improved profile shape

Select this check box to use an improved profile shape. In this option, an alternate algorithm sets the
cross-sections of the Overhung volute.
Manage editable shapes button

Click this button to add shape angles to the list of editable shapes, or to delete angles from the list of
current editable shapes in the Manage Editable Shapes dialog box that appears.
Save parameter set to file

Click this button to save the asymmetric volute parameters to a separate csv (comma-separated val-
ue) file that you can load into the AxCent program, or open and edit directly with Excel or Notepad.
Load parameter set from file

Click this button to load parameters from the csv file that you have saved when you clicked the Save
parameter set to file button above.
Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box – Simple Shape tab
Use the Simple Shape tab of the Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box to define the shape of
either an overhung volute type (often used for turbochargers) or a symmetric volute type (often used
for pump volutes) (see the Select volute type section of the General parameters tab).
Note: The options on this dialog box change according to whether you select Overhung or
Symmetric in the Select volute type section of the General parameters tab.
Simple shape for symmetric volute types
The diagram below shows a cross-section of a symmetric volute type that is often used for a pump.
The top curvature parameter indicates the degree of "roundness" of the top. Increasing the number
(above 1") increases the curvature. Hub wall and shroud wall angles are both measured with respect
to the axis of rotation.
Type values for the following angles and parameters:

 Hub/Shroud wall angle (alpha1/alpha2)– Specify the angle from the volute wall to the
line perpendicular to the inlet on the hub or shroud side.
 Top curvature parameter– In the above example, the top curvature parameter is
represented as the ratio of B over A, in which B is the length beginning at the start of the
volute and ending at the top of the volute exit, and A is the length of the side wall of the
pump on either hub or shroud side. The minimum ratio that you can specify is 1.01, the
maximum ratio is 5. (In the illustration above, this ratio is approximately 1.2.)
For a description of this parameter and its ratio, see the above illustration.
 Step full inlet width (B3) – Specify the full width of the inlet including the step
(available when you select the Symmetric or Advanced volute shape).
 Inlet width (read-only) – The value for inlet width appears to the right of the Step full
inlet width option above.
 Step percent on shroud side – Specify the percentage for the distribution of the step
width. For example, if you specify a value of 75, 75% of the step width is distributed on
the shroud side and 25% is distributed on the hub side (available only when you select
the Symmetric or the Advanced volute shape).
To remove the step altogether, you can specify a value matching the actual inlet width
(see Inlet width above) or set the percentage in this option to zero.
Simple shape for asymmetric–constrained volute types
The diagram below shows a cross-section of an asymmetric–constrained volute often used for a tur-
bocharger. The casting separation line describes where the mechanical separation of the two pieces
of the volute occurs. Joint radius and floor radius are measured from the center axis of the turbo-
charger.
Type values for the following parameters:

 Joint radius
 Floor radius
 Web thickness
 Fillet radius

around the volute.
Use improved profile shape

Select this check box to use an improved profile shape. In this option, an alternate algorithm sets the
cross-sections of the Overhung volute.

Click this button to display the Volute Area window.
Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box – Advanced tab
Use this tab of the Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box for upstream (Input) or downstream
(Output) volute designs for complete control over the shape of the volute.
The Advanced tab appears when you select the Advanced volute type on the General Parameters
tab. The design created is for the volute cross-section at 180 degrees.
Use the Contours window to view the volute design. To view the window, select Volute Views from
the Standard Screens menu. To view the results of your changes in the Contours window, click Ap-
ply. To finish, click OK.
Shape parameters section

Left & right are mirror images
Select this check box to create a symmetrical volute.
Radial offset
Type the value for the radial offset, or the distance from the exit of the turbomachine to the beginning
of the complex part of the volute .
Inlet step parameters section

Step full inlet width (B3)
Specify the full width of the inlet including the step (available when you select the Symmetric or
Advanced volute shape).
Inlet width (read-only)

The value for inlet width appears to the right of the Step full inlet width option above.
Shroud side percent

Specify the percentage for the distribution of the step width. For example, if you specify a value of
75, 75% of the step width is distributed on the shroud side and 25% is distributed on the hub side
(available only when you select the Symmetric or the Advanced volute shape).
To remove the step altogether, you can specify a value matching the actual inlet width (see Inlet
width above) or set the percentage in this option to zero.
Scroll clipping section

In this section, select and then specify scroll clipping, which is used to avoid interference between
the exit pipe and the scroll.
Enable scroll clipping
Select this check box to apply scroll clipping. When you select this option, the options below become
available.
 Clip all profiles – Clip all profiles or cross-sections of the scroll.
 Clip profiles below – Specify the number of degrees below which all profiles of the
scroll are to be clipped. The degree angle represents the position of the scroll as it turns
from the nominal area (at 0°) to the throat area (at 360°).
 Clipping fraction at 0 – Specify the ratio of the clipped height of the scroll (A) over the
normal (or unclipped) height (B).
Shape editing section

Edit Shape at __ deg
Select this check box to activate the Profile display preferences section, and to select the cross-sec-
tion shape to be edited from the drop-down list.
You can add shapes to the drop-down list using the Manage Editable Shapes dialog box.
Profile display preferences section

Choose one of the following three options. You may switch between the three display preferences.
 Show single profile – From this generic starting point, you can drag control points to
create the volute shape. This is not a profile at a specific section.
 Show all profiles – Shows all profiles from the entrance of the volute to the exit.
Changing the control points will affect all profiles. Drag the control points to create the
volute shape you want.
 Show nearest profile – Shows the profile nearest to the 180° cross section. Drag the
control points to create the volute shape you want.
around the volute.
Manage editable shapes graph button

Click this button to add shape angles to the list of editable shapes, or delete angles from the list of
current editable shapes in the Manage Editable Shapes dialog box that appears. The shapes appear
in the drop-down list for Edit Shape at __ deg above.
Edit shapes with table button

Click this button to edit the Bezier control points of the advanced shape using the Edit Advanced
Shape via Table dialog box.

Click the Show area graph button. The Volute Area graph appears and shows the cross-sectional
area of the volute at all locations around its axis.
Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box – Pipe Shape tab
Use this tab to design the volute exit pipe.
The Pipe Shape tab of the Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box for upstream (Input) or down-
stream (Output) volute designs is available for any of the volute types specified in the General pa-
rameters tab.
Axis shape editing is available only for Asymmetric and Advanced volute types. It is not avail-
able for Overhung or for Symmetric volutes: the options for these types are unavailable.
View the volute design in the Contours window.
Cross section shape section

Enable transition to
Select this check box to specify the cross-section shape, and then select the type of cross-section
shape at the end of the exit pipe, whether Ellipse or Rectangle.
Specify the following parameters for the cross section shape:
 Aspect Ratio – The ratio of the major axis to the minor axis. A value of 1 indicates a
circle for the ellipse, or square for the rectangle. A value of 2 creates an ellipse or
rectangle whose major radius is twice its minor radius.
 Rotation angle – The amount that the end shape’s major axis is slanted from normal. A
value of 0 indicates no rotation.
Set the parameters for Aspect Ratio and Rotation angle at two points, at the end of transition, and
at either input or output (depending on whether you are specifying an input or an output volute).
 At transition (End of Transition) – Type values for the Aspect Ratio and the Rotation
angle.
The transition is the portion of the exit pipe where the cross-section of the pipe transitions from a
complex shape at the exit of the wrap section to an ellipse or a rectangle at the end of the transition
section.
 At Input/Output (Exit Pipe Input/Output) – Type values for the Aspect Ratio and the
Rotation angle.
Rectangle fillet ratio (0.01 - 0.5)

Specify the ratio of the corner radius to the smaller of the rectangle width and height. This option is
available when you select Rectangle as the cross-section shape above.
Pipe axis section

In this section, select either the Straight axis or 3-Point curve. View the Exit Pipe in the Axial View
window (available when you select Volute Views from the Standard Screens menu).
Straight axis
For a simple, straight exit pipe, choose Straight axis. The length of the straight axis exit pipe is set
in the General parameters tab.
3-Point curve
To adjust the meanline of the exit pipe, select 3-point curve. Check the Edit Axis Path check box
and click Apply. Move the control points that appear in the axial view. (To see the Axial View win-
dow, select Volute Views from the Standard Screens menu.)
In-plane angle
Specify an inlet or exit pipe angle above the plane of the volute (in a range from -90° to 90°). (This
option is not available for the 3-Point curve.)
Out-of-plane angle
Specify an inlet or exit pipe angle below the plane of the volute (in a range from -90° to 90°).
Edit Axis Path

Select this check box to edit the axis path when you select 3-point curve. (This option is not avail-
able for Straight axis.)
Exit pipe extension section

This section is only available for exit pipes and for downstream (or output) volutes. They are not
available for input (or upstream) volutes.
Enable extension to pipe

Select the check box to add a pipe extension below.
 Extension length – Type a value for the length of the extension.
 Reduction percent (1–100) – Specify the percentage of the reduction from the
beginning of the extension to its end.
For example, if you specify this parameter as 70%, and the area at the beginning of the extension is
0.1 m2, then the area at the end of the extension is 0.07 m2.
Early turning/exit options section

No early turning or early exit
Select this option for no early turning or early exit.
Early turning (no wrap)

Select this option to use the early turning feature to set an early turning angle in a range between 0°
and 45°.
Early turning angle (0-45°)

Specify the angle that the final scroll cross-section makes with the horizontal cross section at 360°.
The allowed range for this angle is from 0° to 45°. The default of 0° deactivates this feature.
The early turning feature is independent of the options in the Axis shape editing section above, but
is typically used with the 3-point curved exit.
Early turning starts at (180-270°)
Specify the angle measured clockwise from the horizontal point of 0 degrees beginning from the
point where the scroll cross-section begins to turn. The allowed range is from 90° to 180°, with a
default of 90°.
Early exit
Select this option to start the exit pipe earlier than in most other volute types. The early scroll end
allows more flexibility in the intersection among the scroll, exit pipe, and tongue. The resulting
tongue stretches to fill the space between the scroll and the exit pipe, as opposed to most other volute
styles in which the exit pipe matches the tongue.
Use the two following parameters to specify the early scroll end:
Exit starts early at (270-350°) – The angle where the scroll becomes detached from the R5 circle.
Simple tongue aspect ratio (0.5-2.5)– The ratio parameter that adjusts the inner curve of the tongue.
Output Volute dialog box – Dual Exit tab
Use this tab of the Output Volute Parameters dialog box to design the dual exit in the volute. You can
edit the parameters for each volute exit independently of the other, except for the tongues.
Note: The dual exit volute feature is only available for downstream (or output) volutes of
the Symmetric and Advanced volute types (selected on the General Parameters tab).
Note: The color brown indicates the presence of the dual volute scroll in the Contours
window, Volute Area window, and Axial View window (as shown above).
Dual Exit Controls section
Enable dual exits
Select this check box to include a dual exit in the volute. When you select the dual exit and click
Apply, the shape of the dual exit appears in the Axial View and 3D windows, and the parameters on
this tab are enabled.
A volute with dual exits has two scrolls, two tongues, and two exit pipes. While the primary exit is
at 0°, the second exit (including exit pipe and tongue) is at a user-specified angle.
Link to a primary exit

Select this check box to link the parameters of the dual exit to the primary exit. When you select this
option, all of the options on this tab are disabled except for Angle of 2nd exit below.
Angle of 2nd exit

Type the angle where the dual exit is placed within a range of 45 to 315 degrees. (The default angle
is 180°.)
Throat area %
Specify the throat area of the second volute as a percentage of the throat area of the first volute as
specified on the General parameters tab.
Exit length
Type a value for the exit length.
Exit area %
Specify the exit area of the second volute as a percentage of the output area of the first volute as spec-
ified on the General parameters tab.
Cross section shape section

Enable transition to
Select this check box to specify the cross-section shape, and then select the type of cross-section
shape at the end of the exit pipe, whether Ellipse or Rectangle.
Specify the following parameters for the cross section shape:
 Aspect Ratio – The ratio of the major axis to the minor axis. A value of 1 indicates a
circle for the ellipse, or square for the rectangle. A value of 2 creates an ellipse or
rectangle whose major radius is twice its minor radius.
 Rotation angle – The amount that the end shape’s major axis is slanted from normal. A
value of 0 indicates no rotation.
Set the parameters for Aspect Ratio and Rotation angle at two points, at the end of transition, and
at either input or output (depending on whether you are specifying an input or an output volute).
 At transition (End of Transition) – Type values for the Aspect Ratio and the Rotation
angle.
The transition is the portion of the exit pipe where the cross-section of the pipe transitions from a
complex shape at the exit of the wrap section to an ellipse or a rectangle at the end of the transition
section.
 At Input/Output (Exit Pipe Input/Output) – Type values for the Aspect Ratio and the
Rotation angle.
Rectangle fillet ratio (0.01 - 0.5)

Specify the ratio of the corner radius to the smaller of the rectangle width and height. This option is
available when you select Rectangle as the cross-section shape above.
Pipe axis section

In this section, select either the Straight axis or 3-Point curve. View the Exit Pipe in the Axial View
window (available when you select Volute Views from the Standard Screens menu).
Straight axis
For a simple, straight exit pipe, choose Straight axis. The length of the straight axis exit pipe is set
in the General parameters tab.
3-Point curve
To adjust the meanline of the exit pipe, select 3-point curve. Check the Edit Axis Path check box
and click Apply. Move the control points that appear in the axial view. (To see the Axial View win-
dow, select Volute Views from the Standard Screens menu.)
In-plane angle
Specify an inlet or exit pipe angle above the plane of the volute (in a range from -90° to 90°). (This
option is not available for the 3-Point curve.)
Out-of-plane angle
Specify an inlet or exit pipe angle below the plane of the volute (in a range from -90° to 90°).
Edit Axis Path

Select this check box to edit the axis path when you select 3-point curve. (This option is not avail-
able for Straight axis.)
Exit pipe extension section

This section is only available for exit pipes and for downstream (or output) volutes. They are not
available for input (or upstream) volutes.
Enable extension to pipe

Select the check box to add a pipe extension below.
 Extension length – Type a value for the length of the extension.
 Reduction percent (1–100) – Specify the percentage of the reduction from the
beginning of the extension to its end.
For example, if you specify this parameter as 70%, and the area at the beginning of the extension is
0.1 m2, then the area at the end of the extension is 0.07 m2.
Early turning/exit options section

No early turning or early exit
Select this option for no early turning or early exit.
Early turning (no wrap)

Select this option to use the early turning feature to set an early turning angle in a range between 0°
and 45°.
Early turning angle (0-45°)

Specify the angle that the final scroll cross-section makes with the horizontal cross section at 360°.
The allowed range for this angle is from 0° to 45°. The default of 0° deactivates this feature.
The early turning feature is independent of the options in the Axis shape editing section above, but
is typically used with the 3-point curved exit.
Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box – Tongue tab
Use the Tongue tab of the Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box to design the tongue in the vo-
lute.
Settings section
Tongue leading edge radius
Type a value for the tongue leading edge radius. This appears as R above.
Tongue leading edge ellipse aspect ratio

Type a ratio for the tongue leading edge ellipse aspect ratio. This ratio produces the ellipse of the
leading edge. A value of 1 produces a half-circle leading edge. Numbers greater than 1 extend the
ellipse as shown by R2 above.
Tongue leading edge Z scallop ratio
Type a number for the scallop ratio of the tongue in the Z axis. This should be 1 or greater. A value
of 1 would indicate that R4 (above) is 0 so there is no scalloping in that case.
Wrap section length

Type a value for the wrap section length, or length between the tail of the tongue and the end of the
wrap section.
Wrap section scroll gap

Specify the constant distance between the scroll and the bottom surface of the exit pipe.
Derived values section (read-only)

This section displays values calculated from the user-specified geometry. These values change when
you change the values in the Settings section.
Leading edge angle

The leading edge angle (tip angle), or angle between the centerline of the tongue and the horizontal
axis.
Area under tongue

The area under the tongue and above the impeller (cross-sectional area or nominal area).
Tongue gap
The gap between the tongue tip and the impeller.
Theta of tongue end

The angle between the vertical angle (0° on the Volute Tongue view) and the tip of the tongue.
Tongue thickness at tip

The tongue thickness at the tip. This is approximately twice the tip radius (or radius from the cen-
terline to the surface).
Tongue thickness at end

Thickness at the tail end of tongue.
Edit tongue shape

Select this check box to activate the control points in the Volute Tongue View window. To edit the
tongue shape, click Apply after you select this option.
Show 3D view of tongue button

Click to view the 3D display of the volute tongue.
Set tongue shape to default button

Click to return the tongue geometry to the default settings.
Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box – OCC Parameters tab
Use the OCC (Open Cascade) Parameters tab of the Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box to
specify Open Cascade parameters in the volute.
For guidelines on specifying Open Cascade asymmetric volutes, see Guidelines for generating
asymmetric volutes in AxCent using Open Cascade.
First transition location

Select the default location or specify a transitional length as a percentage (%) of the volute transition
section length, specified on the General parameters tab.
Transition pipe offset

This offset angle offsets the transition pipe segment on the YZ plane to avoid excessive overhanging
of the asymmetric volute, and the consequent overlapping of the inner ring by the exit pipe transition
area.
Note: Note This parameter is recommended for Turbocharger or Asymmetric volute types
(select either type on the General parameters tab).
Default
When you select Default, the AxCent program automatically detects the overlapping and then off-
sets the transition pipe by the appropriate degrees.
If overlapping occurs, a message dialog box indicates the offset angle calculated by AxCent.
Specified
Specify the offset angle in degrees, whether the transition pipe overlaps or not.
Note: A zero angle produces no effect.
Fuse volumes
Select this option to join the scroll and exit pipe using Boolean operations to form the Tongue region.
Note: This operation should be performed only after the desired scroll/exit pipe shape is
achieved.
Add tongue fillet

Select this check box to further specify a tongue fillet for the volute, using Method 1 or Method 2
below.
Method 1
Curvature parameter (0-1)
Length parameter (0-1)
Method 2
Default
Use the default option.
User specified
Specify the minimum and maximum radius (Rmin/Rmax) of the tongue fillet.
Wall thickness
Specify the thickness of the volute wall. The appropriate values depend upon the volute.
Transparency (0-1)
Specify the degree of transparency of the volute 3D display. The default is 0.7.
View Volute button

Click to view the flow path of the volute.
View Solid Volute button
After you have clicked the View Volute button, click to view the outer wall of the volute.
Note: This option is active for the Pump and the Advanced volute types only (select either
type on the General parameters tab).
In the left window, the transparency has been set at the default of 0.7.
Splitter Volute (Use splitter tab to specify parameters)

Select this check box to add splitters to the OCC volute. Selecting this option enables the parameters
on the Splitter tab.
Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box – Splitter tab
Use this tab of the Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box to define a splitter in the volute design
when you are using Open Cascade geometry generation.
The options on this dialog box become available when you select Splitter Volute on the OCC Pa-
rameters dialog box.
Splitter start angle

Specify the angle of the splitter start position in degrees, measured from the position of the first scroll
section. The default value is 180 degrees.
Splitter end distance from exit

Specify the distance from the end of the exit pipe to the end of the splitter.
Equal area distribution

Set the area below the splitter start location to the volute starting area, and specify an equal area
above and below the scroll exit.
This is one method of specifying the area distribution between the two volute flow paths from the
start position of the splitter.
Note: This option disables the Volute area cross-section area schedule.
Bottom volute area/total area

Select this option to specify the volute flow path area distribution from the splitter start to end as a
ratio of the bottom volute flow path area (Bottom volute area) to the total volute flowpath area (to-
tal area). After you select this option, use the table to specify the angle vs. area ratio distribution.
The first angle entry is the same as the splitter start angle and the area ratio is equal to zero.
Bottom volute area m^2
Use this option to specify the lower flow path area distribution from the splitter start position to end
position as an absolute value (in m^2 or in^2). Use the table to specify the angle vs. area distribution.
The first angle entry is same as the splitter start angle and at this point the area is equal to zero.
Splitter thickness schedule

Use this table to define the thickness of each splitter row.
Add row button

Click this button to add a row to the table.
Delete row button

Click this button to delete a row from the table.
View graph
Click this button to view a the splitter rib thickness graph. The graph displays the values that you
specify on the table.
Volute cross-section area schedule

Use this table to define the cross-section area of the volute.
You can specify the volute cross-section area in the following three ways:
 Maintain a constant area for the top volute from the start of the splitter.
 Specify the bottom volute area as a fraction of the total area.
 Specify the bottom volute as an absolute value of the total area.
Add row button

Click this button to add a row to the table.
Delete row button

Click this button to delete a row from the table.
View graph
Click this button to view a the volute cross-section area. The graph displays the values that you spec-
ify on the table, not those generated by the AxCent program.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide
January 11, 2018
Copyright © 2017 by Concepts ETI, Inc.
All rights reserved.
This document describes proprietary software developed by Concepts NREC LLC, for the end user's informational
purposes only, and is subject to change or withdrawal by Concepts NREC LLC at any time.
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Concepts NREC LLC AND PROTECTED BY
THE COPYRIGHT LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES AND INTERNATIONAL TREATIES.
You may make copies of this document for use by personnel at your site only. Any other attempt to copy or use this
document without the express permission of Concepts NREC LLC is forbidden.
The software described herein is constantly being enhanced and altered by Concepts NREC LLC This document may
contain errors or omissions and may not describe the most current version of the software. Concepts NREC LLC is
not responsible for any loss, financial or otherwise, brought about by the use of this document.
AXIAL, AXISTRESS, CADTranslator, CTAADS, EASy! Control, FANPAL, MatProp, MAX-5, MAX-AB, MAX-
PAC, MAX-PP, MAX-SI, P3MAX, PREMAX, RITAL, STRESSPREP, and TurboOPT II are trademarks of Concepts
ETI, Inc. AxCent, Agile Engineering Design System, COMPAL, PUMPAL, and Pushbutton CFD are registered
trademarks of Concepts NREC LLC.
All other products, services, or company names mentioned herein are claimed as trademarks or trade names by their
respective owners.
Version: AxCent v8.6

Chapter 1: Welcome to Pushbutton FEA

Introduction to Pushbutton FEA (Radial) ............................................. 458
About this Guide ............................................................................... 460
Introduction to Pushbutton FEA (Radial)
Pushbutton FEA™ is the Concepts NREC Windows® application built into AxCent that provides
stress analysis and flexible parametric modeling of radial and mixed-flow compressor and pump im-
pellers and radial turbine wheels.
Pushbutton FEA allows you to speed the analysis process by providing a simple menu-driven format
that helps you create files that can be used for input to a finite element program.
Pushbutton FEA does not itself perform finite element calculations, but can produce accurate finite
element analysis (FEA) models with dramatic time savings. Pushbutton FEA has been designed by
practicing mechanical engineers, and uses a powerful and flexible set of input information to mini-
mize the time it takes you to perform stress analysis. With Pushbutton FEA, it typically takes an ex-
perienced engineer about fifteen minutes to create a three-dimensional (3D) finite element model
ready for input and processing.
A wide range of centrifugal and mixed-flow designs can be accurately modeled by Pushbutton FEA.
The input information is a combination of blade shape and aerodynamic loading information (typi-
cally from the AxCent program), your selection of various modeling and parametric options, and the
input of key dimensions. You can specify the boundary conditions, counterbore, balance ring,
shroud, and fillet radius geometry information. Material properties are selected from a database,
which can be customized by you. The impeller geometry can include open or shrouded wheels, with
or without splitter blades.
Versions of Pushbutton FEA are available that support the ABAQUS, COSMOS/M®, ANSYS®,
MSC NASTRAN general-purpose 3D finite element computer codes. Support for other finite ele-
ment codes can be added for Concepts APS (Agile Product Support) members. Pushbutton FEA also
supports Pushbutton FEA, Concepts NREC’s own FEA solver.
Pushbutton FEA provides the following modeling features:
General features
 Mapping of pressure and thermal loads from aero analysis onto blade surfaces.
 Agile links to allow AxCent to start with either shell or solid blades.
 R*Theta vs. Z option to allow for plotting the blade shape data R- (for the axial view)
vs. Z.
 Thermal load functions with more accurate calculation of heat transfer coefficient.
 Contoured counterbore capability to handle a wider range of geometries.
General topologies
 Scalloped backface for radial turbines.
 Zero thickness backface
 Zero radius fillet
 Shaped scallop trough
 Counterbore geometry
 Fillet on interior corner
 Contoured interior faces
458 Chapter 1: Welcome to Pushbutton FEA Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Enhanced topologies
 Scalloped backfaces with a line-arc-line parameterization.
 Manual adjustment of topological boundaries for the mesh in backface scallops.
 Backface shape that includes extensions for starting line-arc-line backfaces from the end
of the backface extension or the shoulder.
 Blade fillet node locations and side-to-side normalization
 Inputs for constant size fillet
 Fillet size calculations based on blade geometry
 Smoothing of leading edge fillet node locations
 Optional user control of leading edge corner points
 Optional alignment of leading edge to constant Z plane
 Shroud seal runner can be below blade leading edge
 Backface contour can continue onto the backface extension
Other features
 Color plotting of element check quantities.
 Expanded Mass, Inertia, and Model Statistics report.
 Material property editing with Agile links
 Support for I-DEAS solver
 Data checking for blade shape data files
 Variable coordinate system origin, similar to the “shift all segments in Z” function in
AxCent
 Blade-to-blade spacing for multiple blade models
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Introduction to Pushbutton FEA (Radial) 459
About this Guide
The Pushbutton FEA User Guide comprises the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Welcome to Pushbutton FEA
Introduces you to Pushbutton FEA and to this Guide and explains how to get more help about using
Pushbutton FEA.
Explains how to start and exit from Pushbutton FEA, gives an overview of the main components of
the Pushbutton FEA interface, and provides procedures for opening, creating, saving, and closing
projects with Pushbutton FEA. This chapter also describes how to specify project settings, how to
view models and blade shape information, and how to check models before and after generating the
mesh.
Chapter 3: Setting Model Specifications
Provides procedures for setting all of the specifications for your model, including dimensions for all
parts of the model (backface, bore, shroud, scallop, etc.), model properties, model contours, material
properties, the coordinate system, aero loads, and mesh density.
Chapter 4: Generating FEA Models
Explains how to use Pushbutton FEA to build FEA models, how to customize an FEA solver run,
and how to run an FEA solver from within Pushbutton FEA.
Chapter 5: Linking Pushbutton FEA to Other Programs
Describes how to create a new Pushbutton FEA project from AxCent, how to update an existing FEA
model with changes made in AxCent, how to transfer mass and inertia information to RotorLab™,
and how to edit the materials database with MatProp™.
Chapter 6: Performing Post-Processing
Details how to perform post-processing procedures in Pushbutton FEA, including specifying post-
processing options for the Goodman, Campbell, and Interference diagrams, performing hot-to-cold
geometry conversions, evaluating the model for fatigue, and viewing mass, inertia, and other statis-
tical information for the model.
Chapter 7: Dialog Box Reference
Describes all of the dialog boxes that recur in the procedures of this user guide along with their pa-
rameters.
460 Chapter 1: Welcome to Pushbutton FEA Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.


Quick Start: Using Pushbutton FEA for radial models ........................... 462
Specifying project settings for stress analysis ...................................... 465
Viewing cross-section and axial views ................................................. 466
Viewing FEA models .......................................................................... 468
Working with model views ................................................................. 470
Checking models in Pushbutton FEA ................................................... 472
Quick Start: Using Pushbutton FEA for radial models
In the design process, stress analysis is typically employed after you have defined the blade sections
and stacking in AxCent.
The following procedure provides an overview of the basic steps for performing stress analysis with
Pushbutton FEA™ on your radial design (for a similar procedure for an axial design, see Quick Start:
Using Pushbutton FEA for axial models). For detailed information about any step in this procedure,
click the links in the procedure.
To perform radial stress analysis with AxCent
1. In AxCent, open the design for which you want to perform stress analysis.
– or –
Import an older design from the standalone STRESSPREP program by choosing Import – Start
Stress – Import Stressprep Case from the File menu.
2. Select to view the bladed segment.
3. From the Mechanical menu, choose Project. To learn about the Project dialog box that appears, see
"Aero Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)" on page 520.
Use the options in the Project dialog box to specify the model type, the title and prefix for the output
model file, and the FEA solver type to be used.
For more information, see "Specifying project settings for stress analysis" on page 465.
4. Click OK to close the Project dialog box.
5. From the View menu, choose FEA Views – Cross section to open the Cross Section window.
The Cross Section window displays a meridional view of the model. This model is updated when-
ever you change the model dimensions and/or options. Since the mesh creation is comparatively
slow, the automatically updated meridional view is helpful to preview the changes prior to re-creat-
ing the mesh. For more information, see "Viewing cross-section and axial views" on page 466.
6. From the Mechanical menu, choose Geometry. To learn about the Geometry dialog box that
appears, see "Geometry dialog box (for radial PBFEA models)" on page 548.
The tabs of the Geometry dialog box contain the dimensions and modeling options for specific sec-
tions of the rotor.
In the upper-left corner of each tab a schematic drawing (not to scale) displays the modeling options
you can specify and which parameters require specification to define those options. When you turn
on a specific modeling option, the drawing changes to reflect your choice, and the related input box-
es are enabled.
7. In the Geometry dialog box, specify the model dimensions. As you make changes, click Apply to
update the view in the Cross Section window. Adjust dimensions as necessary before proceeding.
For more information, see "Specifying radial model dimensions in Pushbutton FEA" on page 478.
8. When you are done specifying dimensions, click OK to close the Geometry dialog box.
9. From the Mechanical menu, choose Properties.
To learn about the Properties dialog box that appears, see "Properties dialog box (for radial Pushbut-
ton FEA models)" on page 606.
The Properties dialog box contains two tabs that let you specify global properties for the model, in-
cluding speed, material properties, and boundary conditions. Material properties are determined by
choosing a material type and temperature. A database is used to store the temperature-dependent
properties for each of the materials on the list

10. Specify the rotational speed by multiplier, material, nominal temperature, speed, and units.
For more information, see "Specifying model properties for a radial geometry in Pushbutton FEA"
on page 479.
11. Click OK to save these values, and close the Properties dialog box.
12. From the Mechanical menu, choose View FEA Grid to build the model.
While the models are being built, the Progress dialog box appears and displays messages that indi-
cate which part of the model is currently being created.
For more information, see "Building FEA models" on page 490.
Windows appear for the FEA 3D solid model, cross-section, parameter defaults, and model statistics.
13. Other viewing options are available to help you adjust the mesh and the aerodynamic loads. Select
these options from the Graphics menu (or from the shortcut menu that appears when you right-click
the window).
For more information, see "Viewing FEA models" on page 468.
14. Turn on element checking, (by right-clicking the FEA Model window and then choosing Render
Type – Element Check from the shortcut menu). Elements that exceed the Jacobian ratio or element
angle thresholds appear in red.
15. To adjust the thresholds, choose FEA Views – Element Thresholds from the View menu and adjust
the minimum and maximum values in the Element Thresholds dialog box.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Element Thresholds dialog box" on page 541.
When you change the threshold levels, Pushbutton FEA re-checks the mesh with the new settings.
For more information, see "Checking models in Pushbutton FEA" on page 472.
16. To adjust mesh density for the desired aspect ratio and element angles, choose Mesh from the
Mechanical menu.
Note: If an FEA model had already been generated, you do not need to recalculate the mesh
unless you make changes to dimensions, properties, or mesh density.
To learn about the Mesh dialog box that appears, see "Mesh dialog box (hexahedral dominant)" on
page 580.
In the Mesh dialog box, specify the mesh density parameters for each part of your model.
For more information, see "Specifying contours" on page 480.
17. When you are done adjusting the mesh, click OK.
18. To adjust the aerodynamic loads, choose Aero Loads from the Mechanical menu. To learn about the
Aero Loads dialog box that appears, see "Aero Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA
models)" on page 520.
In the Aero Loads dialog box, you can specify data for contains pressure, temperature, velocity, and
gas constants for the flow path. A separate option is provided for the coefficients of the heat transfer
equations that are used in various parts of the model. Thermal and pressure boundary conditions can
also be applied.
For pressure and thermal loads, see "Specifying pressure and thermal loads" on page 484. For heat
transfer constants, see "Specifying heat transfer constants" on page 486.
19. When you are finished adjusting the aerodynamic loads, click OK.
To run the mesh calculation again and to build the model with the new parameters, choose View
FEA Grid from the Mechanical menu.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Quick Start: Using Pushbutton FEA for radial models 463
20. View the FEA model again to see the effect of the new mesh density parameters.
21. To run the FEA solver, choose Run FEA from the Mechanical menu.
If you selected PBFEA for the solver in the Options tab of the Project dialog box (in step 3 above),
the Solver Options dialog box appears.
22. Specify the options for the PBFEA solver in this dialog box, and click OK.
For more information about running the PBFEA solver, see "Specifying the PBFEA solver" on page
195.
23. View the results of the PBFEA solver in the 3D FEA window.
To change the views of the results, see Selecting Pushbutton FEA views.

Specifying project settings for stress analysis
Pushbutton FEA project settings define basic parameters and options for the stress analysis to be per-
formed for the current design.
These options include the blade to be modeled should you choose to model a single blade, the types
of FEA model to be created, the name for the output model files, the type of FEA solver used, the
materials database, and the parameters for the selected FEA solver.
To specify stress analysis project settings
1. In the Contours window, select to view the bladed segment.

2. From the Mechanical menu, choose Project.
The Project dialog box appears.
To learn more about this dialog box, see "Project dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)"
on page 600.
3. Use the options on the Setup tab to specify the model’s title, the optional prefix to add to the output
files for the project, and the types of models that you want to use for the project.
4. Use the Options tab for Pushbutton FEA to specify the FEA solver, the location of the material
database, and (if necessary) the opening of MatProp for editing the materials database.
5. Use the options on the FEA Solver Parameters tab to customize the model file and to automatically
launch the FEA solvers.
6. Click Apply to view your changes without closing the Project dialog box open; click OK when you
are finished specifying project settings.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Specifying project settings for stress analysis 465
Viewing cross-section and axial views
The cross-section (meridional) and axial views provide feedback to you when geometry changes are
made to your FEA project. After changes are made in either the Geometry or Contours dialog box,
you can click Apply to apply these changes to the model.
The cross section view is very helpful in creating and editing the dimensions and contours for the
backface and shroud. The axial view is particularly useful when working with a scalloped backface
or balance notch.
As you move the mouse pointer in the Cross Section window, the status bar at the bottom of the win-
dow for Pushbutton FEA displays the pointer’s position in the R-Z direction. The R axis is the dis-
tance from the centerline. The Z and positions are in the same coordinate system used to create
the blade data file. Depending on your AxCent design, the Z = 0 point is often located at either the
leading or trailing edge. In PBFEA, you can change the Z=0 location.For more information, see
"Offsetting the coordinate system" on page 483.
The curves shown in the cross-section view are the actual curves used by the meshing routines of
either PBFEA. If overlapping or distorted curves appear in the cross section view, you should check
the Dimension and Contour inputs before running the mesh since it is most likely to be distorted as
well.
You can choose plotting options to see different information in the views, as well as apply graphic
viewing options to the views (for example, zoom, pan, auto scale, etc.). For more information, see
"Working with model views" on page 470.
The following procedures describe how to view cross-section and axial views of your model.

To view a cross-section model
2. From the View menu, choose FEA Views – Cross section (or click on the toolbar).
The Cross Section window appears, which displays a cross-section image of the model.
Note that the blade fillet radius is not shown in the Cross Section window.
To view an axial model

2. From the View menu, choose FEA Views –Axial (or click on the toolbar).
The Axial View window appears, which displays an axial image of the model.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Viewing cross-section and axial views 467
Viewing FEA models
After you have successfully created an FEA model in Pushbutton FEA, you can view the model.
Use the following procedures to view the 2D or 3D FEA model.
To view an FEA model in 2D or 3D

2. From the View menu, choose FEA Views – FEA Model (or click on the toolbar).
The FEA Model window appears and displays the model in 3D.
3. You can choose plotting options to view different information in the model, as well as apply graphic
viewing options.

To view an FEA model in 3D (from the Mechanical menu)
From the Mechanical menu, choose View FEA Grid.
2. The Progress dialog box appears briefly, indicating the progress of the build.
The following windows appear in the AxCent screen (clockwise order, from upper left):
 FEA Model window
 Wireframe window (for axial PBFEA)
 Cross-section window (for radial PBFEA)
 Defaults window
 Model Statistics window.
3. To view a 2D version of the model, right-click the FEA Model window and then choose Show as
2D.
The 2D FEA model appears in the FEA Model window.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Viewing FEA models 469

Working with model views
You generally use the cross-section view and axial views in PBFEA as the first step in checking the
model to verify that the disk and shroud are in the correct position relative to the blade, and that the
counter bores, scallop geometry, and backface contours are appropriate.
Use the model (mesh) view to check the mesh density and element shapes.
For more information about checking the PBFEA model using the various model views, see "Check-
ing models in Pushbutton FEA" on page 472.
The following procedure describes how to manipulate images in the Cross Section, Wireframe, Ax-
ial, and 2D and 3D FEA Model windows.
Cross-Section (or Wireframe) and Axial window commands
To Do this
Zoom in or out on the Right-click the view and then choose Zoom In or Zoom Out
model
Reset the view to the Right-click the view and then choose Default View.
way it was when it was
first displayed
Resize the view so that Right-click the view and then choose Fit to Window.
it fits within the
window
Save the current view Right-click the view and then choose Save Bitmap.
as a bitmap image
Print the current view Click on the toolbar, or choose Print from the File menu, or
right-click the view and then choose Print.
2D and 3D FEA Model window commands

To Do this
Move the mode Right-click the view and then choose Pan), and then click and drag
the model to the new location in the window.
Rotate the model Right-click the view and then choose Rotate) and then click and
drag the model in the window to rotate it.
Change the axis of Right-click the view, choose Rotation Type, and then choose the
rotation rotate command you want.
Zoom in on a specific Right-click the view, choose Zoom Box, click and drag on the
area of the model model to draw a dotted-line rectangle around the area that you
want to zoom in on, and then release the mouse button.
Zoom in or out on the Right-click the view and then choose Zoom In or Zoom Out.
model

To Do this
Reset the view to the Right-click the view and then choose Default View
way it was when it
was first displayed
Resize the view so Right-click the view and then choose Fit to Window.
that it fits within the
window
Select the type of Right-click the view, choose Render Type, and then choose the
model view you want model view you want: Solid Only (or click on the toolbar),
to see Solid Wireframe (or click on the toolbar), Hollow
Wireframe (or click on the toolbar), or Element CheckFor
more information, see the "Selecting model plotting options" topic
in AxCent Help.
Select the element Right-click the view, choose Element Statistics, and then choose
statistics you want to Aspect Ratio, Element Angle, Jacobian, or Autoscale Statistics.
see plotted in the
view
Display a 2D version Right-click the view and then choose Show as 2D. To return back
of the model. to the 3D view, select this command again.
Display the midside Right-click the view and then choose Show Midside Nodes. Mid-
nodes in the 2D or 3D side nodes are generated in the model if you do not select the No
view of the model. mid-side node elements check box on the Options tab of the
Project dialog box.
Display the applied Click on the toolbar, or right-click the view and then choose
boundary Temperature.
temperature in the
model
Display the applied Click on the toolbar, or right-click the view and then choose
pressure in the model Pressure.
Displays the Click on the toolbar, or right-click the view and then choose
convection Convection.
coefficient in the
model
Save the current view Right-click the view and then choose Save Bitmap.
as a bitmap image
Print the current view Click on the toolbar, or choose Print from the File menu, or
right-click the view and then choose Print.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Working with model views 471
Checking models in Pushbutton FEA
The first step in checking the model is to closely examine the cross-section and axial views before a
mesh is created to verify that the dimensions of the hub, shroud, and backface are correct. The cross-
section and axial views are built as you specify data for the model and reflect your most current
changes to model dimensions and contours. They show a rough approximation of what the model
will look like.
In the cross-section view, you should verify that the backface shape, counter bores, shroud profile,
balance rings, and nose profile are appropriate. In the axial view, you should verify that the scallops
are correctly positioned.
While viewing the model in the Cross-Section and Axial View windows, you can use the commands
on the Graphics menu to view different information in the model and to apply graphic viewing op-
tions such as zooming, panning, and rotating the image.
If the cross-section and axial views looks correct, you can then run the FEA solver and check the
model in the FEA Model window. The FEA Model window displays a 2D or 3D (default) FEA mod-
el after you have successfully completed an FEA solver run.
The following procedures describe how to check the cross-section and axial views before the model
is built and how to check the model after it has been built.
To check the cross section and axial views before the model has been built

2. Before the model has been built, choose FEA Views – Cross Section from the View menu (or click
on the toolbar).
The Cross Section window appears, which displays a cross-section image of the model.

3. From the View menu, choose FEA Views – Axial (or click on the toolbar).
The Axial View window appears, which displays an axial view of the model.
4. Use these two views to verify that the model looks correct.
 In the Cross Section window, verify that the backface shape, counter bores, shroud
profile, balance rings, and nose profile are appropriate.
 In the Axial View window, verify that the scallops are correctly positioned.
If any of these appear to be incorrect, you can view and modify their specifications in
the Geometry dialog box (from the Mechanical menu, choose Geometry). For more
information, see Specifying model dimensions.
To learn about the Geometry dialog box, see "Geometry dialog box (for radial PBFEA
models)" on page 548. For more information on model dimensions, see "Specifying
radial model dimensions in Pushbutton FEA" on page 478.
To move and manipulate the views while you are viewing the project in the Cross
Section and Axial View windows, use the methods described in “Working with model
views.” (See “Working with model views” on page 470.)
5. When you are finished viewing the cross-section and axial views, build the model by choosing View
FEA Grid from the Mechanical menu.
6. You can now check the model by following the next procedure.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Checking models in Pushbutton FEA 473
To check the model after the model has been built
1. After the model has been built, choose FEA Views –FEA Model from the View menu.
The FEA Model window appears.
Note: If you selected to build more than one model type on the Setup tab of the Project
dialog box, use the FEA Results dialog box (from the Mechanical menu, choose FEA
Runs) to select which model you want to view. To learn about the Setup tab, see
"Aero Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)" on page 520. To learn
about this dialog box, see "Choose data/Choose data to show or edit dialog box" on
page 262.
Use this view to verify that the model’s dimensions are correct and that the element shapes are suit-
able.
2. To easily see out-of-range elements in the FEA Model window, use the Element Check feature by
right-clicking the FEA Model window and then choosing Render Type – Element Check from the
When the Element Check feature is turned on, the model changes to a hollow frame model and dis-
plays out-of-range elements in red (all other elements are displayed in blue). The range is determined
by the Jacobian ratio threshold levels set in the Element Thresholds dialog box (from the View menu,
choose Element Thresholds).
To learn about this dialog box, see "Element Thresholds dialog box" on page 541.
Note: The minimum and maximum Jacobian ratio values specified in the Element
Thresholds dialog box are always used for displaying out of range elements in the
FEA Model window, even when the Jacobian ratio check box is not selected in the
Element Thresholds dialog box. Select the Jacobian ratio check box to receive
warning messages about out-of-range values.
Another way to check the model in the FEA Model window is to perform element statistics analysis
on the model. This type of analysis plots continuous values for the distribution of Aspect Ratio, El-
ement Angle, or Jacobian Ratio in the elements.

3. To perform element statistics analysis on the model, right-click the FEA Model window, choose
Element Statistics, and then choose the type of statistics you want to view from the shortcut menu
that appears.
The following example shows the model with the Aspect Ratio option selected.
The Autoscale Statistics command (on the Graphics – Element Statistics menu) allows you to set
the range based on the global minimum and maximum value for the plotted data of Aspect Ratio,
Element Angle, or Jacobian Ratio. If the Autoscale Statistics option is not selected, the warning lev-
els from the Element Thresholds dialog box are used as the scale range. Every time the settings are
changed, Pushbutton FEA re-checks the mesh with the new settings.
After checking the model to determine areas where the element shapes could be improved, you can
then use the mesh density settings to alter the distribution of the nodes and elements. In general, it
is most important to improve the element shapes in areas where high stress and/or high stress gradi-
ents occur. For more information about adjusting mesh density, see "Specifying contours" on page
480.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Checking models in Pushbutton FEA 475
Chapter 3: Setting Model Specifications

Specifying radial model dimensions in Pushbutton FEA ........................ 478
Specifying model properties for a radial geometry in Pushbutton FEA ... 479
Specifying contours ........................................................................... 480
Specifying material properties ............................................................ 482
Offsetting the coordinate system ....................................................... 483
Specifying pressure and thermal loads ............................................... 484
Specifying heat transfer constants ..................................................... 486
Specifying mesh parameters .............................................................. 487
Submodeled boundary conditions ....................................................... 488
Specifying radial model dimensions in Pushbutton FEA
Use the following procedure to specify dimensions for each element of a radial model.
While you are specifying model dimensions, you can preview the geometry changes you make by
leaving a Cross Section window open and clicking the Apply button in the Geometry dialog box af-
ter you make a change. Your changes are immediately reflected in the Cross Section window.
To specify model dimensions

2. From the Mechanical menu, choose Geometry.
The Geometry dialog box appears.
To learn more about this dialog box, see “Geometry dialog box (for radial PBFEA models)” on
page 548.
Each tab in the Geometry dialog box provides options for specifying the dimensions for one part of
the model.
With the Cross Section window open, click the Apply button to see the effect of the most recent
changes you have made to the modeling options.
Each tab in the Geometry dialog box displays a diagram of the corresponding section and the dia-
gram changes to reflect the choices that you make.These diagrams are for reference only, and are not
spatially accurate.
Most of the diagrams display reference letters to indicate which option or box on the tab affects
which part of the model. For example, on the Backface tab, the “A” in the diagram corresponds to
the option for setting shoulder position dimension.
3. Use the options on the applicable tabs to specify the dimensions of the model:
 Backface tab
 Bore tab
 Shroud tab
 Scallop tab
 Blade tab
 Balance Ring tab
 Balance Notches tab
 Diffuser tab
4. Click Apply to view changes without closing the dialog box; click OK when you are finished
specifying the model dimensions.
478 Chapter 3: Setting Model Specifications Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Specifying model properties for a radial geometry in Pushbutton FEA
Use the following procedure to specify global properties of the radial Pushbutton FEA model, in-
cluding the rotational speed multiplier, material properties, thermal constraints, and nominal tem-
perature.
To specify model properties

The Properties dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see “Contours dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)” on
page 527.
3. Use the options on the General and Boundary Conditions tabs to specify the model properties.
4. Use the options on the Thermal Constraints tab to specify fixed temperature constraints for the
simulation of model interface boundaries to infinite sources and sinks (if they apply to the model).
5. Click Apply to view changes without closing the Properties dialog box; click OK when you are
finished specifying the model properties.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Specifying model properties for a radial geometry in Pushbutton FEA 479
Specifying contours
Pushbutton FEA™ allows you to view and edit the radial contour dimensions for a variable platform,
shroud, hub, or blade in your model. When you are specifying contours, you can specify the follow-
ing geometry:
 R-Z contour points for the hub or shroud
 R-Theta points for the rotor OD (outer diameter)
 Radius and meridional distances for the variable fillets along the blade
You specify contours by using a set of data tables in the Contours dialog box. Some of the data tables
in the Contours dialog box are used by Pushbutton FEA with linear interpolation, while other sec-
tions are used with cubic spline interpolation. Where linear interpolation is used, you should make
sure that an adequate number of points are used in areas of high curvature and that only the endpoint
of straight sections are specified. When cubic spline interpolation is used, fewer points are needed
in the curves, but more points should be used where the curvature changes to make sure that there is
no overshoot.
The AxCent design determines the default coordinate system for all of the data tables.
Pushbutton FEA checks the coordinates of each point and warns you if it finds a point that is out of
range. Pushbutton FEA does not use any points out of range, so the warning can sometimes be safely
ignored.
Tip: You can choose to suppress warning messages by selecting the Suppress warning messages
check box on the Options tab of the Project dialog box.
Variable fillet contours

If you select the Contoured option for the fillet profile (on the Blade tab of the Geometry dialog
box), you also need to specify the fillet radius along the blade in the Contours dialog box.
Similar to other data in the Contours dialog box, the variable fillet uses pairs of points for location
(0 to 1.0) along the length of the blade and fillet radius at that location. The number of points does
not need to correspond in any way to the spacing of the points in the blade shape data.
Depending on which side of the blade you are defining, use the Hub Suction tab or the Hub Pressure
tab in the Contours dialog box to specify the variable fillets along the base of the blade.
For more information about specifying variable fillets, see "Specifying radial model dimensions in
Pushbutton FEA" on 478. Also see “Contours dialog box – Shroud Suction tab” on page 532.
To specify contours
7. From the Mechanical menu, choose Contours.
Note: You can also view the Contours dialog box by clicking the Define Contour button on
the Backface, Bore, Shroud, Scallop, and Blade tabs in the Geometry dialog box. For
more information, see Specifying model dimensions. For more information, see
“Specifying radial model dimensions in Pushbutton FEA” on page 478.
The Contours dialog box appears. The Contours dialog box allows you to view and edit the contour
dimensions for the backface, bore, nose, shroud, rotor OD (outer diameter), front and rear counter-
bore, and hub.
To learn more about this dialog box, see “Contours dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)”
on page 527.

The Contours dialog box is divided into a set of tabs, each of which lets you adjust the contours of
a specific location in the model.
8. In each tab, specify the values for that particular location:
 Backface
 Bore
 Front Counterbore
 Hub Pressure
 Hub Suction
 Nose
 OD
 Rear Counterbore
 Shroud
 Shroud Inlet
 Shroud Pressure
 Shroud Suction
9. Click Apply to view the results of your changes in the dialog box open; click OK when you are
finished specifying contour dimensions.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Specifying contours 481

Specifying material properties
Use the following procedure to specify material properties for the Pushbutton FEA model.
To specify material properties

To learn about this dialog box, see “Contours dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)” on
page 527.
3. In the list of materials in the “Materials” section of the General tab, select the material that you want
to use in your project.
4. In the Nominal Temperature box, type the blade temperature (either average or worst case,
depending on your design philosophy or the area of the blade that is the focus of an analysis) to apply
thermal effects on properties at run-time. This temperature is input into a linear curve fit of each
property vs. temperature. The Pushbutton FEA output file contains the material properties at the
selected temperature.
5. If you want to run the analysis at a constant temperature, select the Single set of properties check
box. When performing a thermal analysis, clear this check box to generate the full set of
temperature-dependent material properties.
6. Click Apply to view changes without closing the Properties dialog box open; click OK when you
are done.

Offsetting the coordinate system
You can offset the coordinate system Z=0 datum as often as necessary in Pushbutton FEA. The Ax-
Cent design specifies the R, Theta, and Z coordinates for the blade. In addition, you may choose to
define the FEA model in any other concentric cylindrical coordinate system. When the RTheta vs.
Z window is open, the R, Z coordinates can be read from the status bar at the bottom of the main
window.
Offsetting the coordinate system can make it easier to specify values in the Contours dialog box. For
instance, contoured backface data may be more convenient to work with when the Z=0 datum is at
the hub trailing edge. In other cases, the model may be coordinated to an absolute frame of reference
or offset by a certain amount so as to coincide with other FEA grids.
Caution: Even if you are using double precision in the FEA calculations, be sure to choose a coor-
dinate system with an origin as close as possible to the model that you are analyzing. Be-
cause of the small nodal displacements that are relative to the machine size, even the
rounding-off of figures can introduce significant inaccuracies.
To offset the coordinate system

2. From the Mechanical menu, choose Z Translation.
The Translate Z dialog box (for radial PBFEA) appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see “FEA Results dialog box” on page 543.
3. In the Translation type box, select the method you want to use to determine the origin of the model
coordinate system.
4. If you selected either the Absolute User Data or Relative User Data option in the Translation type
box, type the amount of the distance in the Translation amount box.
5. To reverse the Z direction in the output file, select the Mirror Z coordinates in output file check
box.
6. Click OK.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Offsetting the coordinate system 483
Specifying pressure and thermal loads
Pressure and thermal loads are applied to the FEA model. Data is read from a pre-run Rapid load,
MST or CFD analysis, or from an AxCent flow field data file to define the pressure, temperature,
velocity, and gas properties along the blade as well as the hub and shroud contours.
Note: You specify the analysis type and run or the flow field data file to use on the Setup
tab of the Aero Loads dialog box.
 Rapid Load – The current rapid loading solution.
 MST – The most recent MST solution. This option is not available if no MST solution is
available for the design.
 CFD – The currently active CFD run. This option is unavailable unless you first run
CFD.
 FLO file format – FLO files are automatically created by AxCent when you select any of
the three options above. Selecting this option is the preferred method for creating the flo
file because this option maintains the geometric connectivity within Axcent.
Nonetheless, you can still specify the connection to an external .flo file manually.
FLO files contain pressure, temperature, velocity, and gas constants for the flow path. For informa-
tion about the manual creation of FLO files, see "Exporting to Concepts NREC formats" on 190.
Pressure is applied as a face pressure to the elements on the outer surfaces of the FEA model. The
flow analysis solutions or the flow field file provides values for pressure along the flow path and the
blade, while the user specifies the values for pressure on the backface, bore, and outer surface of the
shroud.
Thermal load data is applied as a convection boundary condition on the outer surface of the FEA
model, using a bulk fluid temperature and a convection coefficient. Convection data along the flow
path and blade comes from the specified flow analysis solution or the flow field file. Convection flu-
id temperature and heat transfer coefficients on the backface, bore, and shroud outer surface are user-
defined. Convection coefficients are calculated separately for the hub and shroud surfaces, leading
edge, and blade surfaces. By default, separate heat transfer correlations are used for each of these
locations, but the user can edit the correlation constants. Once the meshing has been run, the pres-
sure, temperature, and convection coefficients may be plotted in color in the mesh viewing windows.
 PLOT3D file format – PLOT3D files are a universal file format that most CFD solvers
can generate (including AxCent’s Pushbutton CFD). For more information, see PLOT3D
file format. For information about creating PLOT3D files, see “Managing CFD runs” on
page 161.
When you use the PLOT3D file format, the pressure is read from the values on the pressure and suc-
tion surfaces, as specified in the PLOT3D files.
The relevant temperature for heat transfer is the free stream temperature (just outside the boundary
layer). PBFEA uses the velocity profile to estimate the grid location in the blade-to-blade direction
to read in the edge of the boundary layer.
The properties for evaluating the heat transfer coefficient (Re, Pr, etc.) are calculated at the film tem-
perature. The film temperature is taken as the average of the free stream temperature and the surface
temperature. The surface temperature of the blade is assumed to be the same as the first and last grid
planes in the blade-to-blade direction.
Once the grid has been created, you can plot the pressure, temperature, and convection coefficients
in color in the FEA Model window.For FEA models, see "Viewing FEA models" on 468. For model
views, see “Working with model views” on page 470.

To specify pressure and thermal loads in radial FEA models
2. From the Mechanical menu, choose Aero Loads.
The Aero Loads dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see “Aero Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)” on
page 520.
3. Use the options on the Setup tab to select whether to include pressure and/or thermal loads, to select
the type of flow analysis results or flow field file that you are using. If you choose a PLOT3D aero
load file, you must also specify the PLOT3D parameters on the Setup tab. (For this tab, see "Aero
Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)" on 520.)
4. On the Boundary Conditions tab, specify pressure and convection boundary conditions directly to
the front face of the rotor (up to the Nose), along the Bore, and to the rear face of the rotor (up to the
shaft Shoulder), and the outer surface of the shroud.
Note: Once you specify the flow-field heat transfer and/or pressure loads, you must also
specify the boundary conditions. The values are set by default to noticeably
unrealistic values to bring to your attention that the values have not been set and must
be.
5. Use the tables on the Backface tab to specify pressure and thermal loads for the backface section of
the model. (For this tab, see “Aero Loads dialog box – Setup tab” on page 520.)
6. Use the tables on the Shroud tab to specify pressure and thermal loads for the outer surface of the
shroud.
7. Click Apply to view the results of your changes without closing the Aero Loads dialog box; click
OK when you are done specifying pressure and temperature aero loading parameters.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Specifying pressure and thermal loads 485
Specifying heat transfer constants
In the Pushbutton FEA program, convection coefficients are calculated separately for the flow path,
leading edge, and rotor (upstream and downstream surfaces) and the results are applied as a convec-
tion boundary condition on the outer surface of the solid model.
Bulk fluid temperature along the flow path and blade comes from the flow field file that you specify,
including fluid properties. You must specify the bulk fluid temperature for the upstream and down-
stream surfaces.
To specify heat transfer constants

2. From the Mechanical menu, choose Aero Loads.
To learn about this dialog box, see “Aero Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)” on
page 520.
3. Select the Constants tab.
The equation used in the heat transfer correlation and the relevant constants appear on this tab. If you
prefer to use different constants or to augment or impede the convective heat transfer, edit the values
in the Heat transfer correlation section.
4. Specify the heat transfer correlation for the flow path, leading edge, and rotor.
5. Click Apply to view results with the dialog box open; click OK when you are finished specifying
aero load parameters.

Specifying mesh parameters
In Pushbutton FEA, you can specify a wide variety of mesh density and spacing parameters to opti-
mize the mesh of your model. For radial designs, two mesh types are available, hexahedral and tet-
rahedral.
To specify hexahedral mesh density parameters

3. In the Options tab of the Project dialog box that appears, select Hexahedral dominant in the “Mesh
type” section, and click OK.
4. From the Mechanical menu, choose Mesh.
The Mesh dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see “Mesh dialog box (hexahedral dominant)” on page 580.
5. Use the tabs in this dialog box to specify mesh density parameters for each part of your model:
 General Setting tab
 Blades tab
 Streamwise Spacing tab
 Hub-to-Shroud Spacing tab
 Hub Pieslice Spacing tab
 Shroud Pieslice Spacing tab
specifying the mesh density parameters.
To specify tetrahedral mesh density parameters

3. In the Options tab of the Project dialog box that appears, select Tetrahedral in the “Mesh type”
section, and click OK.
4. From the Mechanical menu, choose Mesh.
The Mesh dialog box for tetrahedral mesh types appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see “Mesh dialog box (hexahedral dominant)” on page 580.
5. Use the tabs in this dialog box to specify mesh density parameters for each part of your model:
 General tab
 Surface tab
 Edge tab
specifying the mesh density parameters.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Specifying mesh parameters 487

Submodeled boundary conditions
When you submodel a region that has a coarse mesh, the Pushbutton FEA program subdivides each
element in the grid in each direction, adjusting new nodes that are associated with a defined bound-
ary (such as backface or counterbore, etc.) to fall on that boundary.
Since the refined region is made by subdividing the existing elements, the coarse and fine regions of
the mesh share some nodes (1, 4, 7 in the following figure).
Intermediate nodes on the boundary are tied with constraint equations to the shared nodes. For in-
stance:
UX2 = 0.67*UX1 + 0.33*X4
UY2 = 0.67*UY1 + 0.33*Y4
UZ2 = 0.67*UZ1 + 0.33*Z4
is enforced with:
CE, neqn, 0, 2, UX, 1.0, 1, UX, 0.67, 4, UX, 0.33
CE, neqn, 0, 2, UY, 1.0, 1, UY, 0.67, 4, UY, 0.33
CE, neqn, 0, 2, UZ, 1.0, 1, UZ, 0.67, 4, UZ, 0.33
All nodes on the sides of the pie-slice sector are tied to the opposite side, as currently done for the
regular model

Chapter 4: Generating FEA Models

Building FEA models ......................................................................... 490
Customizing FEA solver runs .............................................................. 491
Running external FEA solvers ............................................................ 492
Mass and inertia properties ............................................................... 493
Introduction to element goodness calculations .................................... 494
Viewing the Model Statistics report .................................................... 495
Building FEA models
In Pushbutton FEA, you can specify everything you need to build the mechanical geometry and per-
form a structural analysis, including nodes, elements, material properties, boundary conditions, and
loads.
Each model is written to a file in the format required for COSMOS/M, ANSYS, NASTRAN, AB-
AQUS, or PBFEA. Certain sections of the model creation process are very computationally inten-
sive and may take several minutes. In particular, the leading edge section calculations can be time
consuming.
Note: In the initial stages of model preparation, it may be helpful for you to run the PBFEA
solver with these options disabled. Once you make other parts of the model to your
satisfaction, you can enable these options for the final model preparation.
Running Pushbutton FEA with the options at first disabled is also a good way to
debug problems with model generation. Begin by turning off all special features that
you have selected, check that the grid generates, and then select each of the special
features that generate the grid in between.
To turn off leading edge generation for Pushbutton FEA, clear the Include leading edge fillet check
box on the Blade tab of the Geometry dialog box.
To build an FEA model

1 In the Contours window, select the bladed segment.
2. From the Mechanical menu, choose View FEA Grid.
The model is written to a file in the format required by the FEA solver.
3. To view the FEA model, choose FEA Views – FEA Model from the View menu. For information
about using the FEA Model window, see "Viewing FEA models" on page 468.
490 Chapter 4: Generating FEA Models Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Customizing FEA solver runs
Using Pushbutton FEA, you can customize the FEA model file by specifying a header and/or footer
file that contains commands to run before or after the solver run. You can also set up a command line
to automatically launch the FEA solver from Pushbutton FEA.
To customize the FEA solver run

The Project dialog box appears.To learn about this dialog box, see "Aero Loads dialog box (for radial
Pushbutton FEA models)" on page 520.
3. Click the FEA Solver Parameters tab.
To view the options on this tab, see "Project dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)" on page
600.
4. Use the options on the FEA Solver Parameters tab to customize the model file and to specify a
command line to launch the FEA solver from inside the AxCent program.
5. Click OK.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Customizing FEA solver runs 491
Running external FEA solvers
Use this procedure to run an external FEA solver from within Pushbutton FEA.
To use this procedure, you must have already specified a command line script to run the solver.
Note: You can also use FEA data by manually running the FEA solver and reading in the
model file that you have generated.
To run an FEA solver

 From the Mechanical menu, choose Run FEA.
Pushbutton FEA runs the command line that you specify.

Mass and inertia properties
After a model is built, the Pushbutton FEA program can calculate the mass and inertia properties of
the model. This can be helpful in cases in which there is a weight goal, or to support rotordynamics
analyses.
The model Average, Maximum and Minimum values for the element Aspect Ratio, Side Length, El-
ement Angle, Jacobian Ratio are calculated and reported. For more details, see "Introduction to ele-
ment goodness calculations" on page 494.
Mass and Inertia

For the solid models, dividing each solid element into a set of 4-node tetrahedrons and determining
the contribution for each individual tetrahedron calculates the mass and inertia. The mass is then cal-
culated for the model sector, and multiplied by the number of sectors to arrive at a total. If splitter
blades are used in the design, you should be sure that the mass and inertia calculations are carried
out on an appropriate pie-slice model including the splitter blades. Otherwise, the main blade model
overestimates the mass and inertia while the splitter blade models underestimate the true value.
Mass and inertia properties are reported as follows:
Volume & Mass Reported separately for the modeled sector as well as for the entire rotor.
Ip Polar moment inertia, corresponding to Izz in the FEA solver.
It Transverse moment of inertia, corresponding to Ixx, Iyy in the FEA solver.
CG Center of gravity of the rotor. The blade shape file, subject to translation by
you, defines the default coordinate system.
The actual volume calculations are performed using an equation for the volume of a general tetrahe-
dron that was developed by Piero della Francesca. One of the great artists of the early Italian Renais-
sance, Francesca painted numerous religious works and was also interested in geometry and
mathematics. Naturally, his works are known for their use of perspective. He worked for numerous
sponsors, in places such as Florence, Ferrara, and Rome. Francesca produced diverse writings on the
topics of painting, geometry, and applied mathematics.
Francesca’s formula is the 3D analogue of Heron’s formula, which gives the area of a triangle in
terms of the lengths of its edges. Taking a general tetrahedron, the volume is given in terms of the
lengths of the edges as follows:
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Mass and inertia properties 493
Introduction to element goodness calculations
Pushbutton FEA™ (PBFEA) supplies a mechanism to check the suitability of the model for FEA
calculations before sending it to the FEA program to be analyzed. The following calculations are
performed on an element-by-element basis. The results are used for Element Threshold warnings
and are summarized in the Mass, Inertia and Model Statistics report. Plots of these quantities can be
produced through the View Model option.
Aspect Ratio The ratio of two adjacent sides of an element. The aspect ratio can be 1.0 or
greater. Elements with large aspect ratios (>30) do not perform well in FEA cal-
culations.
Element Angle The internal angle between two element faces. This angle is reported as the ab-
solute value of the number of degrees from the optimal angle. The optimal angle
is 90° for a four-sided element face and 60° for a three-sided element face. The
internal angles of 120° and 60° are both reported as 30° (degrees from optimal)
for a four-sided element face. Element angles are only reported for four-sided
faces in the Mass, Inertia and Model Statistics report on which warnings are
based.
Jacobian Ratio The Jacobian is a mapping between the actual element and the idealized element.
The Jacobian determinant is a measure of the magnitude of that mapping for a
given point. The Jacobian Ratio is a ratio of the greatest to the smallest Jacobian
determinant from points sampled at all the element nodes and the element cen-
troid. The ideal value for the Jacobian ratio is 1.0. Values greater than 30 indicate
the unreliability of the mapping between element space and real space. Negative
values indicate bad elements. The Jacobian Ratio is not performed for six-sided
solid prism elements or for shell elements.

Viewing the Model Statistics report
The Model Statistics report provides detailed information on the calculated mass and inertia proper-
ties of your model (after it has been built).
The report also includes information on the model Average, Maximum and Minimum values for the
element Aspect Ratio, Side Length, Element Angle, and Jacobian Ratio.
To view a mass, inertia, and model statistics report

2. From the View menu, choose FEA Views – Model Statistics.
Pushbutton FEA interrogates the model and then displays the Model Statistics window.
This window displays a report of the calculated mass and inertia properties of your model (after it
has been built). The model Average, Maximum, and Minimum values for the element Aspect Ratio,
Side Length, Element Angle, and Jacobian Ratio are calculated and reported. For more information,
see "Introduction to element goodness calculations" on page 494. This report includes element an-
gles for four-sided faces only.
Viewing this report can be helpful in cases where there is a weight goal, or to support rotordynamic
analyses.
3. Use the scroll bar to view all of the information.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Viewing the Model Statistics report 495
To view the model statistics report from the Mechanical menu

The Progress dialog box appears briefly, indicating the build progress for the PBFEA model.
 FEA Solid Model window
 Wireframe window (for axial PBFEA only)
 Cross-section window (for radial PBFEA only)
 Defaults window
 Contours window

Chapter 5: Linking Pushbutton FEA to Other Programs

Performing stress calculations with standalone STRESSPREP ................ 498
Transferring mass and inertia data to RotorLab ................................... 500
Editing the materials database with MatProp ....................................... 501
Performing stress calculations with standalone STRESSPREP
Use these procedures if you wish to continue using older standalone versions of STRESSPREP in-
stead of using the Pushbutton FEA™ program in AxCent.
While working in AxCent you can perform detailed stress analysis by automatically launching
STRESSPREP (for radial designs) and running the mesh for a new blade design case.
You can also update an existing FEA model with changes to the blade design in AxCent, and update
the FEA model with the latest blade geometry in AxCent without running a mesh in either program.
These procedures are described below.
1 Open the design for which you want to perform stress analysis.
3 From the AxCent Agile menu, choose Stressprep/Axistress – Run Stress/Vibration.
The appropriate stress program launches and displays the Save As dialog box, in order for you to
save the file to be generated for stress analysis.
4 In the File name box, type the name you want to give the file.
5 In the Save as type box, leave .def as the file time (AxiStr Files for axial designs, or Stress Files for
radial designs).
6 Click Save.
The stress program runs, using the default parameters.
The stress program displays the Progress dialog box, listing the status of the stress analysis.
If there are any problems with the stress analysis, the stress program displays the associated error
messages.
When the analysis is complete, the results appear in a Defaults window.
7 When the analysis is complete, you can then specify additional geometric details in the stress
program or run the FEA solver. For more information, refer to STRESSPREP Help.
8 When you are finished making changes, save the file, close the stress program, and return to AxCent.
To update the FEA model with blade shape iterations

9 From the AxCent Mechanical menu, choose Run FEA.
The FEA Stress/Vibration Parameters dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "FEA Stress/Vibration Parameters dialog box" on page 546.
498 Chapter 5: Linking Pushbutton FEA to Other Programs Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.
10 In the "File containing FEA model parameters" section, click the Browse button to search for and
select the existing *.DEF file that contains the FEA model parameters.
11 In the Open dialog box, click Open to select the *.DEF file.
12 In the FEA Stress/Vibration Parameters dialog box, click OK.
13 From the AxCent Agile menu, choose Stressprep/AxiStress – Run Stress/Vibration.
STRESSPREP loads the existing *.DEF file, imports the new blade shape from AxCent, and then
re-runs the mesh.
STRESSPREP displays the Progress dialog box, which displays the status of the stress analysis.
If any problems are encountered with the stress analysis, either program displays the appropriate er-
ror messages.
When the analysis is complete, the results appear in the Defaults window.
14 When the analysis is complete, you can use STRESSPREP to launch the FEA solver and post
process the results for the design iteration.
15 When you are finished making changes, save the file, exit fromSTRESSPREP , and return to
AxCent.
To update the model with the latest geometry without running a mesh
 From the AxCent Agile menu, choose Stressprep/AxiStress – Update Stress/Vibration.
STRESSPREP launches and updates the model with the blade geometry but does not run the mesh.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Performing stress calculations with standalone STRESSPREP 499
Transferring mass and inertia data to RotorLab
You can transfer mass and inertia data generated with the Pushbutton FEA program to the RotorLab
program to use in a rotordynamics analysis after a model has been built.
After the model has been built, you can transfer mass and inertia data generated with Pushbutton
FEA to the RotorLab program to use in a rotordynamics analysis. Mass and inertia data from Push-
button FEA are reflected in RotorLab’s parts bin.
Note: In order to use this feature, you must have the RotorLab program installed on your
computer
To transfer mass and inertia to RotorLab

1 In AxCent, open the design that contains the mass and inertia data that you want to transfer to Ro-
torLab.
2 In the Contours window, select to view the bladed segment
3 From the Agile menu, choose RotorLab – Setup Parameters.
The RotorLab Parameters dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "RotorLab Parameters dialog box" on page 614.
4 In the Label box, type a name to identify iterations as a separate disk in RotorLab.
5 In the RotorLab file box, type the full path and name of the RotorLab file (or click Browse to
navigate to and select the file you want to use). If you do not specify a file name here, RotorLab starts
with an empty parts bin and assembly.
6 Click OK.
7 From the Agile menu, choose Rotorlab – Run.
RotorLab starts and the mass and inertia of the current design is passed to RotorLab. The changes
are reflected in RotorLab's parts bin.
Editing the materials database with MatProp
Pushbutton FEA uses database files to maintain temperature-dependent material property data and
to make this information available for stress, vibration, and life calculations at any point in the design
cycle. These databases were created using Microsoft Access. You can update or add to the database
for either program to incorporate proprietary material data.
Instead of requiring the use of Microsoft Access to edit the material database, the Pushbutton FEA
program provides Agile links to the stand-alone MatProp program. MatProp allows you to edit ma-
terial databases used by the Concepts stress programs.
Note: To use this procedure, you must have the MatProp program installed on your
computer.
To edit the materials database

2 From the Mechanical menu, choose Project.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Project dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)" on page
600.
3 Click the Options tab for a radial model.
4 Click the Edit button.
PBFEA launches the MatProp application. By default, the material associated with the design is dis-
played in the MatProp window.
Note: In order to run MatProp from AxCent, you must first manually start MatProp one
time. To do this, use Windows Explorer to navigate to the MatProp installation
directory (the default directory is \\Program Files\Concepts\AxCent\Materials), and
then double-click MatProp.exe in the directory. MatProp starts. From the File menu,
choose Exit to close MatProp again. You can now run MatProp from AxCent.
5 In MatProp, edit the information as necessary. For more information about using MatProp, refer to
MatProp Help.
The Agile Engineering Design System registers the name of the materials database to ensure that
each of the analysis codes is using the same properties. MatProp automatically finds the correct file
for you and lets you change the registry entry. When the analysis codes in the Agile Engineering De-
sign System are used, the material properties are obtained as a function of temperature.
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Editing the materials database with MatProp 501
Chapter 6: Performing Post-Processing

Introduction to Post-processing ......................................................... 504
Specifying post-processing options for Pushbutton FEA ........................ 505
Viewing the Campbell diagram ........................................................... 506
Viewing the Goodman diagram .......................................................... 507
Viewing the Interference diagram ...................................................... 508
Fatigue life from start-stop cycles ...................................................... 509
Vibratory fatigue margin ................................................................... 511
Running hot-to-cold conversions (radial Pushbutton FEA models) ......... 513
Viewing the Model Statistics report .................................................... 516
Introduction to Post-processing
Post-processing is performed on the FEA results using the Goodman, Campbell, and Interference
(for radial Pushbutton FEA™ only) diagrams.
ANSYS, COSMOS/M, ABAQUS, and Pushbutton FEA are supported.
In general, three steps are required to post-process the results:
1 Instruct the FEA solver to output to an ASCII results file for Pushbutton FEA to read.
2. Set up Pushbutton FEA to use the FEA results files.
3. Set up the Pushbutton FEA post-processing plotting options.
The first two steps are described below.For information about setting up the post-processing plotting
options, see "Specifying post-processing options for Pushbutton FEA" on page 505.
Generating the FEA results files

For each solver, you must use specific commands to generate ASCII results files. You may find it
convenient to put these commands into the FEA solver footer file.
 The Goodman diagram requires a file with the six components of nodal stress at each
point (Sx, Sy, Sz, Txy, Txz, Tyz).
 The Campbell diagram requires a file with a list of the natural frequencies.
 The Interference diagram requires either the frequencies or nodal diameters from a
modal periodic symmetry solution or a file with the natural frequencies and mode shapes
from a full 360-degree model.
Commands for ANSYS and COSMOS are as follows:
 ANSYS – The /OUTPUT command is used to generate a results file. The PRNSOL
command should be used to include nodal stress in the Goodman diagram, frequencies in
the Campbell diagram, and frequencies and loading cases in the Interference diagram.
For guidelines for creating the batch files required by the Ansys program, see the topic “Using AN-
SYS in an Pushbutton FEA Analysis” in AxCent Help.
 COSMOS – The frequencies and mode shapes are read directly from the *.OUT files.
The LISTLOG and STRLIST commands should be used to produce the nodal stress
output file.
Setting up Pushbutton FEA to use the FEA results files

You must specify the FEA output files in the Data Setup dialog box. (To learn about this dialog box,
see "Data Setup dialog box (for radial PBFEA models)" on page 536.) In circumstances in which not
all models are solved, not all results files must be specified. For instance, if only stress results were
calculated, you only need to specify that file, which can only generate the Goodman diagram.For
more information, see "Specifying post-processing options for Pushbutton FEA" on page 505.
504 Chapter 6: Performing Post-Processing Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Specifying post-processing options for Pushbutton FEA
Use this procedure to specify options for the Goodman, Campbell, and Interference post-processing
diagrams.
To specify post-processing options

2. From the Mechanical menu, choose Data Setup.
The Data Setup dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Data Setup dialog box (for radial PBFEA models)" on page 536.
3. Use the tabs to specify the options for the diagrams you want to generate:
 Campbell diagram tab

 Goodman diagram tab
 Interference Diagram tab
4. Click Apply to view changes without closing the Data Setup dialog box; click OK when you are
done.
5. To view the diagrams, see the following topics:
 "Viewing the Campbell diagram" on page 506.
 "Viewing the Goodman diagram" on page 507.
 ."Viewing the Interference diagram" on page 508.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Specifying post-processing options for Pushbutton FEA 505
Viewing the Campbell diagram
View the Campbell diagram to view blade natural frequencies plotted versus rotational speed. This
diagram is plotted using natural frequency results from the FEA solver.
Note: The Campbell diagram compares impeller natural frequencies to multiples of
rotational speed and does not consider the effects of the mode shapes. An intersection
of one or more natural frequencies on the Campbell diagram, with strong harmonics
of the rotational speed, (“excitation orders” or “engine orders”) is almost a certainty
with an unshrouded radial or axial stage and likely for a shrouded stage, particularly
if speed varies. Based on a Campbell diagram alone, one would believe that some
problem is likely for virtually any design. This is clearly not the case. For more
information, see the Interference diagram.
To view the Campbell diagram
2. From the Mechanical menu, choose Campbell diagram (or click on the toolbar).
The Campbell diagram window appears.
3. To zoom in or out on the diagram, save the image as a bitmap, or print the diagram, right-click the
window and then choose the appropriate command.
4. To view a report of the diagram, click on the toolbar).

The report appears in the Campbell diagram window.
5. To return to the diagram, click on the toolbar.

Viewing the Goodman diagram
View the Goodman diagram to view the state of the stress for the model. The Goodman diagram is
plotted using stress results from the Pushbutton FEA solver and material strength and endurance lim-
it from the material property database.
Note: Viewing the Goodman diagram first requires that you run an FEA solver.
To view the Goodman diagram
2. From the Mechanical menu, choose Goodman diagram (or click on the toolbar).
The Goodman diagram window appears.
4. To view a report of the diagram, click on the toolbar.

The Stress Results and Life Calculations window appears and displays the report.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Viewing the Goodman diagram 507
Viewing the Interference diagram
View the Interference diagram to help you start the impeller vibration analysis. The Interference di-
agram is plotted using natural frequency and mode shape results from the PBFEA solver.
Note: Viewing the Interference diagram first requires that you run an FEA solver.
To view the Interference diagram

2. From the Mechanical menu, choose Interference Diagram (or click on the toolbar).
PBFEA displays the Interference Diagram window.
4. To view a report of the diagram, click on the toolbar.
The report appears in the Interference Diagram window.

Fatigue life from start-stop cycles
Once the disk stress has been calculated, the periodic stress from start-stop cycles can be evaluated
and an estimate can be made for the number of cycles to failure. Consider this example: An FEA
analysis predicts a maximum steady stress of 150 ksi in a compressor, due to centrifugal, pressure,
and thermal loads at top speed. The stress cycle goes from 0.0 ksi, to a maximum of 150 ksi, and
then back to zero so σa = 75 ksi and σm = 75 ksi for this case.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Fatigue life from start-stop cycles 509
This state of stress is then plotted on the Goodman diagram at (75, 75) showing a predicted disk fa-
tigue of life of nearly 106 start-stop cycles. Since these are average material properties, this means
that average life is 106 cycles, and half of the parts fail sooner. Depending on the predicted service
application, this number of cycles can be translated to a predicted number of operating hours.
As changes are made to the meanline design, the designer to ensure adequate disk fatigue margin
can check this fatigue life prediction. An increase in tip speed would increase the disk stress propor-
tionally by speed squared, reducing the life. Similarly, an increase in temperature would lower the
predicted life according to temperature-dependent material property curves.

Vibratory fatigue margin
In addition to the periodic stress caused by start-stop cycles, vibration must always be considered as
a potential cause of fatigue failures. While running, a compressor resonance could get excited and
additional vibratory stress would be added to the centrifugal stress already present. How much vi-
bratory stress can this compressor withstand? Consider this example: An FEA analysis predicts a
maximum steady stress of 150 ksi in a compressor, due to centrifugal, pressure, and thermal loads at
top speed. At top speed, the steady stress is 150 ksi and an unknown amount of vibratory stress, σv,
is present. As shown below, this translates into a steady stress σm = 150 ksi and an alternating stress
σa = σv.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Vibratory fatigue margin 511

Since the vibratory stress is still unknown, this point is plotted at (150, 0) on the Goodman diagram.
Examination shows that the fatigue margin, or the amount of vibratory stress that this compressor
tolerates, is roughly 25 ksi. There are no hard rules for the amount of fatigue margin required at de-
sign time however engineering groups typically require either a minimum margin (i.e., margin must
be greater than 20 ksi) or a minimum percentage margin (i.e., margin must be greater than 50% of
the 107 cycles to failure curve).

Running hot-to-cold conversions (radial Pushbutton FEA models)
The geometry that is calculated in AxCent and analyzed via MST and CFD is the so-called “hot”
geometry to which rotational, pressure, and thermal loads have been applied. This geometry, how-
ever, is not the same as the so-called “cold” geometry, from which the machining specifications and
files are made.
Pushbutton FEA provides the ability to calculate the cold shape from the hot shape by allowing you
to perform several iterations of the hot-to-cold conversion calculations. The following example de-
scribes the overall process using ANSYS as the FEA solver.
1 Pushbutton FEA generates an ANSYS.mod file, which contains the hot, running blade shape data.
2. The ANSYS.mod file is sent to ANSYS for calculation. Effectively, this “initial guess” of the static
cold shape is the running hot shape.
3. The nodal deflections calculated via the FEA analysis are subtracted (in the first iteration) from the
original running blade shape model referred to in step 1, to provide a first calculation of a cold, static
blade shape.
4. This first calculation of the cold static shape is now analyzed via FEA, using the same loads as in
step 1, and a second iteration of the cold shape is calculated, again by subtracting the calculated
deflections from the original hot running blade shape. The second iteration is compared with the
first, and both the maximum and rms errors are reported.
5. Repeat the process as many times as desired until the errors are less than a desired threshold.
The following procedure describes how to use Pushbutton FEA within AxCent to run iterative hot-
to-cold calculations.
To run hot-to-cold calculations

1 In the Contours window, select the bladed segment.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Project dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)" on page
600.
3. On the Setup and Options tabs, specify the models to generate and the solver to use.
4. On the FEA Solver Parameters tab, specify the header and footer files and the command lines (skip
this step if you chose PBFEA for FEA solver on the Options tab).
Note: Contact Concepts NREC Technical Support to obtain the script files described in this
procedure.
5. Click Apply to keep the dialog box open; click OK when you are done specifying project settings.
6. From the Mechanical menu, choose Aero Loads
To learn about this dialog box, see "Aero Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)" on
page 520.
7. On the Setup tab, select Include pressure loads and Include thermal loads to apply the aero and
thermal loads to the model.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Running hot-to-cold conversions (radial Pushbutton FEA models) 513
8. Under “Flow Data Source”, select the FLO file option and then click Browse to select the flow field
file.
9. Click Apply to keep the dialog box open; click OK when you are done specifying aero load
parameters.
Pushbutton FEA calculates the complete model definition.
11. Run the FEA solver (by choosing Run FEA from the Mechanical menu).
If you selected the PBFEA solver (in step 3 above), the Solver Options dialog box appears.
12. Configure the PBFEA solver run in this dialog box, and click OK.
The Progress dialog box appears during the solver run.
13. After running the FEA solver, choose Hot to Cold from the Mechanical menu (or click on the
toolbar).
The Hot to Cold dialog box appears.
To learn about this dialog box, see "Hot to Cold dialog box" on page 578.
14. In the Hot to Cold dialog box, specify the number of iterations for calculating the cold geometry.
15. Click the Create button.
A command window appears briefly for each iteration.
AxCent then produces the necessary cold geometry files, runs the FEA solver, and displays the lo-
cation of the final geometry files.
When the conversion is complete, the dialog box window displays the following items:
 Hot to Cold directory (default location is
C:\Users\username\AppData\Local\Concepts\AxCent\Stress\Hot to Cold X)
 The number of iterations (including maximum error values and RMS error values).
 The location of the final geometry (the data format for this geometry depends upon the
solver type).
This is the result of the first hot-to-cold iteration. The errors reported in the dialog box window are
the differences between the Trial static shape model (the “In” file) and the Predicted static shape out-
put file (the “Out” file).
You can now run the FEA solver on this first predicted output file and prepare the files in the working
directory for successive iterations. The overall goal is to reduce the max error and rms error values
to be below the tolerance you determine.

16. To close the Hot to Cold dialog box, click Cancel or click .
To learn about this dialog box, see "Aero Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)" on
page 520.
18. If you have not selected the Ansys solver (in the Options tab of the Project dialog box), skip to the
next step.
If you have selected the Ansys solver, specify the new script (ansys_mod_h2c.bat) in the Command
Line box of the FEA Solver Parameters tab.
When the script is run, the new DOS batch file performs the following actions:
 Copies the current “Out”.mod file to the corresponding “In”.mod file. The output from
the first Hot-to-Cold calculation becomes the new Trial static shape model file.
 Runs the FEA solver again on the newly created “In” file.
You do not need to change the Header and Footer file specifications.
19. Click OK in the Project dialog box.
20. Re-run the FEA solver and the Hot-To-Cold conversion until you reach the desired the max error
and RMS error values.
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Running hot-to-cold conversions (radial Pushbutton FEA models) 515
Viewing the Model Statistics report
The Model Statistics report provides detailed information on the calculated mass and inertia proper-
ties of your model (after it has been built).
The report also includes information on the model Average, Maximum and Minimum values for the
element Aspect Ratio, Side Length, Element Angle, and Jacobian Ratio.
To view a mass, inertia, and model statistics report

2. From the View menu, choose FEA Views – Model Statistics.
Pushbutton FEA interrogates the model and then displays the Model Statistics window.
This window displays a report of the calculated mass and inertia properties of your model (after it
has been built). The model Average, Maximum, and Minimum values for the element Aspect Ratio,
Side Length, Element Angle, and Jacobian Ratio are calculated and reported.For more information,
see "Introduction to element goodness calculations" on page 494. This report includes element an-
gles for four-sided faces only.
Viewing this report can be helpful in cases where there is a weight goal, or to support rotordynamic
analyses.
3. Use the scroll bar to view all of the information.

To view the model statistics report from the Mechanical menu
The Progress dialog box appears briefly, indicating the build progress for the PBFEA model.
 FEA Solid Model window
 Wireframe window (for axial PBFEA only)
 Cross-section window (for radial PBFEA only)
 Defaults window
 Contours window
Pushbutton FEA Radial User Guide Viewing the Model Statistics report 517
Chapter 7: Pushbutton FEA Dialog Box Reference
(Radial)

Aero Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) ................... 520
Contours dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) ...................... 527
Data Setup dialog box (for radial PBFEA models) ................................ 536
Element Thresholds dialog box .......................................................... 541
FEA Results dialog box ...................................................................... 543
FEA Stress/Vibration Parameters dialog box ........................................ 546
Geometry dialog box (for radial PBFEA models) .................................. 548
Hot to Cold dialog box ...................................................................... 578
Mesh dialog box (hexahedral dominant) ............................................. 580
Mesh dialog box (tetrahedral) ............................................................ 591
Project dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) ......................... 600
Properties dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) .................... 606
RotorLab Parameters dialog box ........................................................ 614
SubModel Settings dialog box ............................................................ 615
Translate Z dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) .................. 616
Aero Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)
Use the Aero Loads dialog box to select the file that contains load data and the load parameters for
your design. For more information, see Specifying pressure and thermal loads and Specifying heat
transfer constants. This dialog box appears when you choose Aero Loads from the Mechanical
menu.
The Aero Loads dialog box is divided the following tabs:
 Setup tab
 Boundary Conditions tab
 Backface tab
 Shroud tab
 Constants tab
Aero Loads dialog box – Setup tab

Use the Setup tab in the Aero Loads dialog box to select whether to include pressure and/or thermal
loads, the source of the flow data, and how to handle splitters (if your design includes splitters).For
more information, "Specifying pressure and thermal loads" on page 484.
520 Chapter 7: Pushbutton FEA Dialog Box Reference (Radial) Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.
Include pressure loads
Select this check box to apply pressure directly to the nodes or elements on the outer surface of the
solid model. Pressure along the flow path and blade comes from the flow field file. You specify pres-
sure on the backface, bore, and shroud outer surface.
Include thermal loads

Select this check box to apply thermal information as a convection boundary condition on the outer
surface of the solid model, using a fluid temperature and a convection coefficient. Convection fluid
temperature along the flow path and blade comes from the flow field file. You specify convection
fluid temperature on the backface, bore, and shroud surface. Convection coefficients are calculated
separately for the flow path, leading edge, and rotor (backface and outer shroud surfaces). Separate
heat transfer correlations are typically used for each of these cases.
Map cell data

Select this option to map aero loads from the CFD cell data to the FEA element face data without
interpolating to and from the nodes. This option increases mapping accuracy.
Flow Data Source section

Select one of the following options the source of the flow data:
 Rapid Load – Use the current rapid loading solution as the source of flow data.
 MST –Use the most recent MST solution as the source of flow data. This option is not
available if there is not available MST solution for the design.
 CFD – Ue the currently active CFD run as the source of flow data. This option is not
available if there is not an active CFD run.
 FLO file – Use a .FLO file, which is created by AxCent. The .FLO file contains
pressure, temperature, velocity, and gas constants for the flow path. When you select this
option, click the Browse button to navigate to and select the .FLO file you want to use.
 PLOT3D file – Use a PLOT3D file, which can be created by AxCent or by another CFD
solver. When you select this option, click the Configure button to specify the PLOT3D
solution files to use in the Plot3D dialog box.
 No Flow Data – Do not use flow data.
Splitter Handling section

If you have splitters in your design, this section displays the splitters and allows you to use pressure
side, mid passage, and suction side values from the main blades or from one of the splitter passages.
blades.
This option only affects the location of the reported flow data. The actual pressure, temperature etc.
If you select the Do you want to do this? check box, the main blades won’t have any odd geomet-
ric jumps in the data; however, the mid passage location will end up being on top of the splitter.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Aero Loads dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) 521
Aero Loads dialog box – Boundary Conditions tab
Use the Boundary Conditions tab in the Aero Loads dialog box to specify pressure and convection
boundary conditions directly to the front face of the rotor (up to the Nose), along the Bore, and to
the rear face of the rotor (up to the shaft Shoulder).For more information, "Specifying pressure and
thermal loads" on page 484
Aero Loads dialog box – Backface tab
Use the Backface tab in the Aero Loads dialog box to specify pressure and thermal loads for the
backface section of the model. Flow path information comes from the data file you specified on the
Setup tab from the data file. You can also specify convection loads on the Constants tab.For more
information, "Specifying pressure and thermal loads" on page 484
User-defined convection coefficient

By default, Pushbutton FEA calculates the backface convection coefficient based on the standard
heat transfer correlation for a flat plate spinning in a fluid. For cases where you have calculated the
convection coefficient outside of Pushbutton FEA (or have test data), you can specify the convection
coefficient yourself.
Select this check box to specify convection coefficients. When you select this check box, an "h" col-
umn appears in the Temperature table, where you can specify heat conduction values.
Pressure
Define pressure along the backface by specifying pressure values in the Pressure table. Pushbutton
FEA applies the pressure values by interpolating at each node. On the backface, pressure is defined
as a function of radius.
Temperature
Define boundary temperature on the backface by specifying temperature values in the Temperature
table. Pushbutton FEA uses these values to calculate the convective heat transfer coefficients for this
section of the model. The fluid properties are obtained from the flow field data file, and the flow is
modeled with the standard heat transfer equations. The coefficients typically used are for the fully
developed turbulent boundary layer heat transfer correlation.
Aero Loads dialog box – Shroud tab

Use the Shroud tab in the Aero Loads dialog box to specify pressure and thermal loads for the shroud
section of the model. Flow path information comes from the data file you specified on the Setup tab
from the data file. You can also specify convection loads on the Constants tab. For more information,
"Specifying pressure and thermal loads" on page 484.
User-defined convection
By default, Pushbutton FEA calculates the shroud convection coefficient based on the standard heat
transfer correlation for a flat plate spinning in a fluid. For cases where you have calculated the con-
vection coefficient outside of Pushbutton FEA (or have test data), you can specify the convection
coefficient yourself.
Select this check box to specify convection coefficients. When you select this option, an "h" column
appears in the Temperature table, where you can specify heat conduction values.
Pressure
Define pressure along the shroud by specifying pressure values in the Pressure table. Pushbutton
FEA applies the pressure values by interpolating at each node. On the shroud, pressure is defined as
a function of fractional distance along the shroud.
Temperature
Define boundary temperature along the shroud by specifying temperature values in the Temperature
table. Pushbutton FEA uses these values to calculate the convective heat transfer coefficients for this
section of the model. The fluid properties are obtained from the flow field data file, and the flow is
modeled with the standard heat transfer equations. The coefficients typically used are for the fully
developed turbulent boundary layer heat transfer correlation.
Aero Loads dialog box – Constants tab

Use the Constants tab in the Aero Loads dialog box to specify the heat transfer correlation for the
flow path, leading edge, and rotor (backface and outer shroud surfaces). Convection coefficients are
calculated separately for the flow path, leading edge, and rotor (backface and outer shroud surfaces)
and the results are applied as a convection boundary condition on the outer surface of the solid mod-
el. For more information, "Specifying heat transfer constants" on page 486
Heat transfer correlation
Flow path
This set of coefficients is used along the blade, and other flow path surfaces of the rotor. On the
blade, x is calculated as distance from the leading edge. On the rotor, x is the distance from the inlet.
The default coefficients represent the heat transfer of flow over a flat plate, using x as the distance
from the edge of the plate. If splitter blades are modeled, the convection coefficients are calculated
for the main blade and then mapped onto the splitter blades based on R-Z coordinates.
Leading edge
This set of coefficients is only used on the leading edge elements. The default coefficients represent
the average heat transfer of a cylinder in cross flow.
Rotor
This set of coefficients is used on the backface and shroud outer surface. The distance parameter is
the radius, so the default coefficients represent a spinning plate with fully developed turbulent flow.
Contours dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)
The Contours dialog box allows you to view and edit the contour dimensions for the backface, bore,
nose, shroud, rotor OD (outer diameter), front and rear counterbore, and hub. This dialog box ap-
pears when you choose Contours from the Mechanical menu.
Use the tables in this dialog box to specify the geometry as R-Z contour points for the hub or shroud,
R-Theta for the rotor OD, or radius and meridional distance for the variable fillets.
Note: You can cut and paste data in the tables in the Contours dialog box. This allows you
to transfer information to or from other programs. To copy or paste data in the tables,
select the cell that you want to copy or paste into, right-click, and then choose Copy
or Paste from the shortcut menu that appears. Another common data exchange
involves the use of Microsoft® Excel or MathCAD to calculate a backface shape and
then pasting the data into Pushbutton FEA. Geometry can also be imported through
ASCII data files.
Tip: Tip: While you are specifying model dimensions in the Contours dialog box, you can pre-
view the geometry changes you make by leaving a Cross Section window open and clicking
the Apply button in the Contours dialog box after you make a change. Your change is im-
mediately reflected in the Cross Section view.
Some of the data tables are used by Pushbutton FEA with linear interpolation, while other sections
are used with cubic spline interpolation. Where linear interpolation is used, you should be sure that
an adequate number of points are used in areas of high curvature but only the endpoint of straight
sections are needed. When cubic spline interpolation is used, fewer points are needed in the curves,
but more points should be used where the curvature changes to be sure that there is no overshoot.
Note: The AxCent geometry data determines the default coordinate system for all of the
data tables.
Pushbutton FEA checks the coordinates of each point and warns you when it finds a point that is out
of range. Pushbutton FEA does not use any points out of range, so the warning can sometimes be
safely ignored. The warning messages can be suppressed in the Options tab of the Project dialog box.
This dialog box contains the following tabs. Click a link to see detailed information about a tab.
 Backface tab
 Bore tab
 Nose tab
 Shroud tab
 Shroud Inlet tab
 OD tab
 Shroud Suction tab
 Front Counterbore tab
 Rear Counterbore tab
 Hub Pressure tab
 Hub Suction tab
 Shroud Pressure tab
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Contours dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) 527
Contours dialog box – Backface tab
Use the Backface tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of the disk backface between
the shaft shoulder and the outside of the rotor (to specify these contours, you must select the Con-
toured option on the Backface tab of the Geometry dialog box). The points should start near the
shaft shoulder and end near the outer diameter.
Since the values on the Backface tab of the Geometry dialog box define the points at the outer diam-
eter and the shaft shoulder, these two points should not be included in the table, only the points be-
tween. Linear interpolation is used unless you select the Use Spline check box on the Backface tab
of the Geometry dialog box. The R column defines the radius of the point. The Z column specifies
the Z coordinate of the point, in the same coordinate system as the blade. If you selected the Use
Spline check box, Pushbutton FEA uses a spline fit between the points instead of a linear interpola-
tion.
Use Control Points button

Click this button to shape the backface using the Control Points window.
Contours dialog box – Bore tab
Use the Bore tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of the bore between the front and
rear of the disk (to specify these contours, you must select the Contoured option under "Bore
shape" on the Bore tab of the Geometry dialog box). The points should start near the front of the disk
and end near the backface.
Since the values on the Bore tab of the Geometry dialog box define the points at the front of the disk
and at the backface, these two points should not be included in the table, only the points between.
Linear interpolation is used.

Click this button to shape the bore using the Control Points window.
Contours dialog box – Nose tab

Use the Nose tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of the nose between the front of
the disk and the leading edge (to specify these contours, you must select the Contoured option un-
der "Nose shape" on the Bore tab of the Geometry dialog box). The points should start near the front
of the disk and end near the leading edge.
Since the values on the Nose tab of the Geometry dialog box define the points at the front of the disk
and at the leading edge, these two points should not be included in the table, only the points between.
Cubic spline interpolation is used.

Click this button to shape the nose using the Control Points window.
Contours dialog box – Shroud tab
Use the Shroud tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of the outer profile of the shroud
between the front of the shroud and the OD (to specify these contours, you must select the Con-
toured option on the Shroud tab of the Geometry dialog box). The points should start near the front
of the shroud and end near the outer diameter.
Since the values on the Shroud tab of the Geometry dialog box define the points at the front of the
shroud and at the outer diameter, these two points should not be included in the table, only the points
between. Cubic spline interpolation is used.

Click this button to shape the shroud using the Control Points window.
Contours dialog box – Shroud Inlet tab

Use the Shroud Inlet tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of the inner profile of the
shroud between the front of the shroud and the blade leading edge (to specify these contours, you
must select the Contoured option under "Inlet shape" on the Shroud tab of the Geometry dialog
box). The points should start near the front of the shroud and end near the leading edge.
Since the values on the Shroud Inlet tab of the Geometry dialog box define the points at the front of
the shroud, and the blade shape defines the leading edge, these two points should not be included in
the table, only the points between. Cubic spline interpolation is used.

Click this button to shape the shroud inlet using the Control Points window.
Contours dialog box – OD tab
Use the OD (outer diameter) tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of the outer diam-
eter surface of the rotor. The outer surface of the rotor is generally cylindrical (to specify these con-
tours, you must select Scallop as the OD type on the Scallop tab of the Geometry dialog box, and
then select the Contoured option under "Scallop shape").
One of the most common exceptions is when balance material is removed from the OD. To model
this, the pie-slice OD may be contoured. The cut is specified by an angle (relative to the blade trailing
edge) and by the depth of the cut. For instance, with 12 blades, the pie-slice model would span 30°
and the angle of the cut should fall between ±15°. A cut depth of zero is enforced across the span of
the fillet radius on either side of the blade. Cubic spline interpolation is used.

Click this button to shape the outer diameter using the Control Points window.
Contours dialog box – Shroud Suction tab
Use the Shroud Suction tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of the shroud suction
side of the fillet. Use the Active blade box to select the blade to which to apply the contour settings.
Click the Define R and Z button to specify R and Z values for the fillet.
By default, the size of the variable fillet is defined versus the fractional distance along the flow path
(and you can see the corresponding R and Z values). You can also choose to specify the fillet size
versus the corresponding R and Z coordinates (in which case the fractional distance is shown for ref-
erence). In the d/L 3D column, specify the fractional distance along the flow path for the point (be-
tween 0.0 and 1.0 along the length of the blade). In the Radius column, specify the fillet radius at the
shroud suction location.
Contours dialog box – Front Counterbore tab
Use the Front Counterbore tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of the front counter-
bore (the contours you specify here apply only if you select the Contoured or Contoured To Side
options under "Front counterbore" on the Bore tab of the Geometry dialog box). The R column de-
fines the radius of the point. The Z column specifies the Z axial coordinate of the point, in the same
coordinate system as the blade.

Click this button to shape the front counterbore using the Control Points window.
Contours dialog box – Rear Counterbore tab

Use the Rear Counterbore tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of define the contour
of the rear counterbore (the contours you specify here apply only if you select the Contoured or
Contoured To Side options under "Rear counterbore" on the Bore tab of the Geometry dialog box).
The R column defines the radius of the point. The Z column specifies the Z coordinate of the point,
in the same coordinate system as the blade.

Click this button to shape the rear counterbore using the Control Points window.
Contours dialog box – Hub Pressure tab
Use the Hub Pressure tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of the hub pressure side
of the fillet (to specify these contours, you must select the Hub fillet location, Pressure Blade sur-
face, and the Contoured Fillet profile options on the Blade tab of the Geometry dialog box).
Use the Active blade box to select the blade to which to apply the contour settings. Click the Define
R and Z button to specify R and Z values for the fillet. By default, the size of the variable fillet is
defined versus the fractional distance along the flow path (and you can see the corresponding R and
Z values). You can also choose to specify the fillet size versus the corresponding R and Z coordinates
(in which case the fractional distance is shown for reference). In the d/L 3D column, specify the frac-
tional distance along the flow path for the point (between 0.0 and 1.0 along the length of the blade).
In the Radius column, specify the fillet radius at the hub pressure location.
Contours dialog box – Hub Suction tab

Use the Hub Suction tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of the hub suction side of
the fillet. (to specify these contours, you must select the Hub fillet location, Suction Blade surface,
and the Contoured Fillet profile options on the Blade tab of the Geometry dialog box).
Use the Active blade box to select the blade to which to apply the contour settings. Click the Define
R and Z button to specify R and Z values for the fillet. By default, the size of the variable fillet is
defined versus the fractional distance along the flow path (and you can see the corresponding R and
Z values). You can also choose to specify the fillet size versus the corresponding R and Z coordinates
(in which case the fractional distance is shown for reference). In the d/L 3D column, specify the frac-
tional distance along the flow path for the point (between 0.0 and 1.0 along the length of the blade).
In the Radius column, specify the fillet radius at the shroud hub location.
Contours dialog box – Shroud Pressure tab
Use the Shroud Pressure tab of the Contours dialog box to define the contour of the shroud pressure
side of the fillet. Use the Active blade box to select the blade to which to apply the contour settings.
Click the Define R and Z button to specify R and Z values for the fillet.
By default, the size of the variable fillet is defined versus the fractional distance along the flow path
(and you can see the corresponding R and Z values). You can also choose to specify the fillet size
versus the corresponding R and Z coordinates (in which case the fractional distance is shown for ref-
erence). In the d/L 3D column, specify the fractional distance along the flow path for the point (be-
tween 0.0 and 1.0 along the length of the blade). In the Radius column, specify the fillet radius at the
shroud pressure location.
Data Setup dialog box (for radial PBFEA models)
Use the Data Setup dialog box to specify options for the Goodman, Campbell, and Interference post-
processing diagrams. For more information, see "Specifying post-processing options for Pushbutton
FEA" on page 505.
This dialog box appears when you choose Data Setup from the Mechanical menu.
To set up PBFEA to use FEA results files, specify the FEA output files in the Data file boxes on each
tab in this dialog box.
In some circumstances, where not all of the models are solved, not all of the results files need to be
specified. For instance, if only stress results were calculated, you only specify that file, and can only
generate the Goodman diagram..
 Campbell diagram tab
 Goodman diagram tab
 Interference Diagram tab (for radial models only)
Data Setup dialog box – Campbell diagram tab

Use the options on the Campbell diagram tab of the Data Setup dialog box to specify parameters for
plotting the Campbell diagram.
Speed range
Use the boxes in this section to specify the minimum and maximum physical operating speed. These
speeds are plotted on the Campbell diagram as vertical lines:
Min physical
Type the minimum physical operating speed.
Max physical
Type the maximum physical operating speed.
Excitations
Specify possible excitations to be added to the diagram as a function of rotational speed.
Tolerance
Specify a tolerance for crossing speeds. Crossing speeds are calculated for any excitation that cross-
es a natural frequency within the running speed range plus this tolerance. An entry of 0.1 produces
crossing speeds within 10% of the running speed range.
Data files
Use the options in this section to specify the FEA output files to use when generating the Campbell
diagram:
Zero speed
Specify the data file that contains natural frequencies calculated at room temperature zero speed.
Click the Browse button to navigate to and select the file you want to use.
At ___ RPM
Type the RPM for the data file that contains the natural frequencies with speed and temperature ef-
fects included. A speed-squared relationship is assumed between the two sets of natural frequencies.
In the box below the At ___ RPM box, specify the file you want to use by clicking the Browse button
to navigate to and select the file.
In the box at the bottom of the tab, specify whether or not to consider any of the modes that are con-
tained in the data file by selecting the check box for each mode to include. Each mode represents a
vibrating frequency and shape for the rotor. The list of modes displayed here is calculated by the
FEA solver.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Data Setup dialog box (for radial PBFEA models) 537
Data Setup dialog box – Goodman diagram tab
Use the Goodman diagram tab of the Data Setup dialog box to specify parameters for plotting the
Goodman diagram.
Data file
Specify the data file that contains the nodal stress results. Click the Browse button to navigate to
and select the file you want to use.
User Gerber correction for mean stress

Select this check box to use the less conservative Gerber correction for mean stress when appropriate
for the material being used. By default, straight lines of constant fatigue life are used in the Goodman
diagram. With the Gerber correction, the envelope of failures is not truly linear, but follows more of
a parabolic line (called the Gerber line)..
In the box at the bottom of the tab, select the values that you want to include in the Goodman plot
by selecting the check box for each value to include. You can choose to plot the overall maximum
stress value and/or separate values for the relative maximum stress in the disk, blade, fillet, and
shroud.
Data Setup dialog box – Interference Diagram tab
Use the Interference Diagram tab of the Data Setup dialog box to specify parameters for plotting the
Interference diagram.
Speed range
Use the boxes in this section to specify the minimum and maximum physical operating speed. These
speeds are plotted on the Interference diagram as vertical lines:
Min physical
Type the minimum physical operating speed.
Max physical
Type the maximum physical operating speed.
Excitations
Specify possible excitations to be added to the diagram as a function of rotational speed.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Data Setup dialog box (for radial PBFEA models) 539
Tolerance
Specify a tolerance for crossing speeds. Crossing speeds are calculated for any excitation that cross-
es a natural frequency within the running speed range plus this tolerance. An entry of 0.1 produces
crossing speeds within 10% of the running speed range..
Data file
Specify the FEA output file that contains mode shapes and natural frequencies. Click the Browse
button to navigate to and select the file you want to use.
Element Thresholds dialog box
The Element Thresholds dialog box allows you to set the element warning levels. These warnings
are produced when an element in the FEA model exceeds your defined limits. This dialog box ap-
pears when you choose FEA Views –Element Thresholds from the View menu.
Warn
In this section, select the types of element for which you want to receive goodness criteria warnings.
Warning messages can be suppressed globally in the Options tab box of the Project dialog box.
Select one of the following elements:
 Aspect ratio – The ratio of two adjacent sides of an element. The aspect ratio can be 1.0
or greater. Elements with large aspect ratios (>30) do not perform well in FEA
calculations.
 Element angle – The internal angle between two element faces. This angle is reported as
the absolute value of the number of degrees from the optimal angle. The optimal angle is
90 for a four-sided element face and 60 degrees for a three sided element face. The
internal angles of 120(deg) and 60(deg) are both reported as 30 (degrees from optimal)
for a four-sided element face. Element angels are only reported for four sided faces in
the Mass, Inertia and Model Statistics report from which warnings are based.
 Jacobian ratio – The Jacobian is a mapping between the actual element and the
idealized element. The Jacobian determinant is a measure of the magnitude of that
mapping for a given point. The Jacobian Ratio is ratio of the greatest to the smallest
Jacobian determinant from points sampled at all the element nodes and the element
centroid. The ideal value for the Jacobian ratio is 1.0. Values greater than 30 indicate the
mapping between element space and real space is unreliable. Negative values indicate
bad elements. The Jacobian Ratio is not performed for 6 sided solid prism elements or
shell elements.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Element Thresholds dialog box 541
Warning/Threshold levels
In this section, specify the minimum and maximum levels for each type of element goodness criteria.
The quantities with an asterisk (*) are compared against the results for the FEA mesh. If any of the
following conditions are met, a warning message is issued:
 Element Aspect Ratio exceeds your maximum Aspect Ratio.
 Element Jacobian Ratio below your minimum level.
 Element Jacobian Ratio above your maximum level.
 Element Angle varies from 90 degrees by an amount greater than your maximum level.
The minimum aspect ratio and the minimum element angle are not used as warning thresholds.
The element levels from this dialog box can be used as scale ranges when viewing element statistics
in a FEA model window.
FEA Results dialog box
Use the FEA Results dialog box to compare results and high-level grid parameters for FEA runs and
grid generation attempts in the current design. Some of the main model design parameters and grid
parameters appear in the table along with significant results from completed FEA analyses.
The dialog box contains three tabs containing the following FEA data:
 All – All table entries.
 Grids – Grid generation only.
 Solutions – All solved cases.
Note: This dialog box is available when you use the Pushbutton FEA solver or when you
generate a grid for any solver.
To view this dialog box, choose FEA Runs from the Mechanical menu.
FEA Results table

The table displays the status of each FEA run for the current design. To perform an action on a listed
FEA run, select the run by clicking the blank cell above the run's column.
 Status – The status of the FEA run.
 Run – The name of the design and the identifying number of the run.
 Thermal – Indicates whether a thermal analysis was generated for the run. You select
the analysis types for the run in the Solver Options dialog box when you are using the
To learn about the Solver Options dialog box, see "Solver Options dialog box" on page 373.
 Static – Indicates whether a static analysis was generated for the run. You select the
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide FEA Results dialog box 543
 Modal – Indicates whether a modal analysis was generated for the run. You select the
 Segment – The selected segment as defined in the Setup Segments dialog box.
 Material – The material property set selected from the materials database. (This
database is specified on the Options tab (radial) or Options tab (axial) of the Project
dialog box.)
 Speed – The design speed multiplied by the Rotational Speed Multiplier (as specified on
the General tab of the Properties dialog box).
 Path – The full path of the directory that contains the FEA files generated for the run.
 Solver – This is either the solver intended for the grid generation file, or the solver used
to solve the analysis.
 Version – The AxCent version used to generated the run.
 CFD Run – The CFD analysis used to generate boundary conditions for the particular
FEA analysis or grid generation. MST analysis is also listed when relevant. (For the
CFD analysis, see the tables of the CFD Results dialog box.)
 A list of parameter values for the run, including node and element counts,model mass,
inertia, and temperature values, and frequency values. If necessary, use the scroll bar to
 Run Time– The total time it took to generate the run.
Buttons
Use the buttons at the bottom of the dialog box to manage your FEA runs (note that some buttons
affect the selected FEA run).
Group section
Parameters
Click this button to view and edit the results variables using the FEA Result Variable dialog box.
Selection section
Set Active
Click this button to make the selected FEA run active. If the solution data is not loaded, the solution
file is read and the Model window is displays data from this run.
New 3D View
Click this button to a open a new 3D FEA Model window showing a filled contour plot of the se-
lected run.
Export
Click this button to export the FEA geometry and grid parameters to an xml file (in a *.mech_xml
format).
Delete Run
Click this button to delete the selected FEA run from the current design and from the dialog box. In
order to add the run back into the results dialog box, you must run the calculation again.
Note: The FEA run data will not be removed from the FEA directory. You need to
periodically clean these files out of the directory to avoid filling up the available disk
space.
Results section
Refresh
Click this button to refresh the grid with the selected FEA run.
Close
Close the FEA Results dialog box.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide FEA Results dialog box 545
FEA Stress/Vibration Parameters dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify FEA stress and vibration parameters, and to specify the file associated
with the current design.
The dialog box appears when you choose StressPrep/AxiStress – Stress/Vibration Parameters
from the Agile menu.
If the blade shape has been modified and a new stress model is desired, select Run FEA from the
Mechanical menu to update the model.
Pushbutton FEA automatically launches and provides updated results.
3D solid stress model (recommended)

Select this option to use a 3D solid stress model. This model is recommended because it is usually
more accurate; however, depending on the circumstances of your design, the shell-based model may
provide more accurate results.
Shell based stress model (not recommended)

Select this option to use a shell based stress model. This model tends to run faster in Pushbutton
FEA.
Use Axistress rather than Stressprep (recommended for axial designs

Select this option for an axial design.
File containing FEA model parameters
Click the Browse button to navigate to and select the source file that contains the flow field data to
use for Pushbutton FEA calculations. Either program uses this to calculate the loads on the wheel
caused by the fluid going through it.
Flow field data source

Select one of the following data sources to use for the flow field data.
 Rapid load – The current rapid loading calculation.
 None – None of the current solutions are suitable to use for the flow field data.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide FEA Stress/Vibration Parameters dialog box 547
Geometry dialog box (for radial PBFEA models)
Use this dialog box to specify the dimensions for the model. The Geometry dialog box appears when
you choose Geometry from the Mechanical menu.
Each tab in the Geometry dialog box displays a diagram of the corresponding section and the dia-
gram changes to reflect the choices you make. Most of the diagrams display reference letters to in-
dicate which option or box on the tab affects which part of the model. For example, on the Backface
tab, the "A" label in the diagram corresponds to the option for setting the shoulder position dimen-
sion.
Note: If you have a Cross Section window open, you can click the Apply button to see the
effect of the most recent changes you’ve made to the modeling options.
The Geometry dialog box contains the following tabs:
 "Geometry dialog box – Backface tab" on page 549
 "Geometry dialog box – Balance Notches tab" on page 573
 "Geometry dialog box – Balance Ring tab" on page 571
 "Geometry dialog box – Blade tab" on page 567
 "Geometry dialog box – Bore tab" on page 554
 "Geometry dialog box – Diffuser tab" on page 576
 "Geometry dialog box – Scallop tab" on page 563
 "Geometry dialog box – Shroud tab" on page 559.
Geometry dialog box – Backface tab
Use the Backface tab of the Geometry dialog box to specify the dimensions of the backface. To use
this dialog box, "Specifying radial model dimensions in Pushbutton FEA" on page 478.
The illustration in the upper-left corner of the tab is intended to show where each of the inputs is
used in the model and which options have been selected. This illustration is not to scale but you can
open a separate cross section (meridional) window by choosing Cross-section from the View –
FEA Views menu.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Geometry dialog box (for radial PBFEA models) 549
Changes in the backface dimensions are reflected in the Cross Section window when you click the
Apply button, allowing a quick check on the input. For more information,"Specifying radial model
dimensions in Pushbutton FEA" on page 478.
Dimensions
In this section, specify the position and radius dimensions of the backface.
(A) Shoulder position

Specifies the position of the backface shoulder, measured from the trailing edge of the blade.
(B) Shoulder radius

Specifies the radius of the shoulder at the backface of the rotor.
(C) Web thickness at OD

Specifies the axial thickness of the web of the rotor, measured from the trailing edge of the blade.
Zero thickness radius

You can model a rotor where the backface reaches zero thickness and the blade sticks up past the
end of the backface, as sometimes used in radial turbines. The zero thickness radius specifies the
distance from the centerline where the backface ends if the web thickness (dimension C) is set to
zero. This feature is sometimes used with a variable fillet radius that also reaches zero before the end
of the blade.
Backface shape
In this section, specify the shape of the backface by selecting one of the following options:
Default curve
Select this option to use the default backface shape. The default backface shape applied by Pushbut-
ton FEA is a hyperbolic curve applied between the outer diameter and the shaft shoulder.
Contoured
Select this option to specify the backface geometry using R-Z points in the Contours dialog box (by
clicking the Define Contour button). The backface contour is in effect between the shaft shoulder
radius and the outer rim of the rotor. To have a backface spline contour instead of a linear interpo-
lation, select the Use spline check box. The following examples show three different contoured
backfaces.
Line-Arc-Line
Select this option to define the backface geometry with the OD angle, Radius, and Shoulder an-
gle dimensions, as illustrated below. Two lines are defined, one starting at the outer diameter (OD)
of the rotor and the second starting at the shaft shoulder. The arc position is calculated based on tan-
gency to the lines. The maximum arc size may be limited by the geometry.
Hub extension
In this section, specify whether to include a hub extension and the radius and position of the exten-
sion.
Include hub extension
Select this check box to include a hub extension in the model. The hub extension is useful when the
rotor cross-section shows an "extra" portion of the disk, which extends out from the backface (typi-
cal of some seal and interstage attachment designs). The idea of the hub extension as an "extra" set
of elements is important for you to keep in mind, since that is how it is handled internally by the
Pushbutton FEA meshing routines.
(D) Extension radius

Specifies the radius of the rotor at the end of the shaft extension. When the hub extension is used,
the shoulder radius (dimension B) defines the inflection point where the normal backface ends and
the hub extension begins.
(E) Extension position

Specifies the position of the hub extension, measured from the trailing edge of the blade.
Backface shape includes extension

Select this check box to include an extension when using a contoured or line-arc-line backface. This
option defaults to a straight or conical surface projecting from the backface. This allows the curve
of the backface to propagate smoothly from the backface to the extension.
Second hub extension

Use this section to specify whether to include a second hub extension and the radius and position of
the second extension. Adding a second hub extension allows you to model a step in the backface
extension geometry.
This section is available only if you have selected the Include hub extension check box.
Include second hub extension

Select this check box to include a second hub extension in the model.
(F) First radius

Specifies the starting radius of the second hub extension.
(G) Second radius

Specifies the ending radius of the second hub extension.
(H) Position
Specifies the position of the second hub extension end, as measured from the blade exit hub location.
(I) Fillet radius

Specifies the fillet radius between the first and second hub extensions (this can also be 0.0).
Geometry dialog box – Bore tab
Use the Bore tab of the Geometry dialog box to specify the dimensions of the bore in your model.
The shape of the bore is defined by input of key dimensions and selection of various options.
FEA Views menu.
Changes in the bore dimensions are reflected in the Cross Section window when you click the Apply
button, allowing a quick check on the input. For more information, see Specifying model dimen-
sions.
Bore dimensions
(A) Nose radius
Specifies the radius at the front of the rotor measured from the centerline. Although the nose itself
may be contoured, the nose radius and length define the point at the front of the rotor.
(B) Nose length

Specifies length of the disk in front of the blade leading edge. Because this is a relative dimension
changing the blade shape data may change the position of the front of the rotor. If leading edge ele-
ments are going to be used in the model, this nose length must be at least as large as the fillet radius.
(C) Bore radius at nose

Specifies the radius of the bore at the front of the rotor.
(D) Backface bore

Specifies the radius of the bore at the backface.
Nose shape
Select the nose shape option you want to use:
Using upstream segment

Select this option to use the upstream segment for the contours of the nose shape.
Conical (straight)
Select this option to specify the inlet shape as a straight line between the leading edge hub line of
the blade and the front of the nose.
Contoured
Select this option to specify the inlet geometry using R - Z points in the Contours dialog box (by
clicking the Define Contour button). This is the default selection for nose shape. For more infor-
mation, see Specifying contours.
Bore shape
Select the bore shape option you want to use:
Conical (straight)
Select this option to specify a straight line between the dimensions at the front and rear of the rotor,
which results in a straight bore if the two dimensions are equal. This is the default selection for bore
shape.
Contoured
Select this option to specify the bore geometry using RZ points in the Contours dialog box (by click-
ing the Define Contour button). For more information, see Specifying contours.
Front counterbore/Rear counterbore

Use these sections to define a counterbore at the front and/or rear of the rotor. To specify a front
counterbore, first select the shape of the counterbore in the drop-down box:
 Square – Select this option to specify a square counterbore. When you select this option,
you need to specify the radius and length of the counterbore in the (E) Radius and (F)
Length boxes. These two dimensions form a square counterbore. There is a sharp corner
on the inside of the counterbore, representing a possible singularity in the model. For
very high mesh density, this singularity may produce unrealistically high stress results.
 Inner Radius – Select this option to model the fillet on the inside of the counterbore by
specifying the radius. The mesh density in this fillet is dependent on the number of
nodes across the web, the number of nodes across the nose, and the number of points
along the blade flow path. When you select this option, you need to specify the radius,
length, and inner radius of the counterbore in the (G) Radius, (H) Length, and Inner
radius boxes.
 Contoured – Select this option to contour the inside faces of the counterbore by defining
the R-Z coordinates of the geometry. This is useful in defining some typical gas turbine
impeller configurations. When you select this option,click the Define Contour button to
specify the contours of the counterbore on the Front Counterbore tab or Rear
Counterbore tab of the Contours dialog box.
 Contoured To Side –Select this option to contour the inside faces of the counterbore by
defining the R-Z coordinates of the geometry. This is useful in defining some typical gas
turbine impeller configurations. When you select this option,click the Define Contour
button to specify the contours of the counterbore on the Front Counterbore tab or Rear
Counterbore tab of the Contours dialog box.
Geometry dialog box – Shroud tab
Use the Shroud tab of the Geometry dialog box to specify the dimensions of the shroud in your mod-
el.
If a shrouded wheel is to be modeled, a number of dimensions and options are used to define the
geometry. Including a shroud is optional.
FEA Views menu.
Changes in the shroud dimensions are reflected in the Cross Section window when you click the Ap-
ply button, allowing a quick check on the input. For more information, see Specifying model dimen-
sions.
Options
Include shroud in disk model
Select this check box to include a shroud in the model. If you turn off this option, Pushbutton FEA
still saves the shroud modeling dimensions so they may be recalled later.
Shroud dimensions
Use this section to specify the dimensions of the shroud.
(A) Shroud inlet thickness

Specifies the thickness of the shroud at the end of the seal runner section, measured from the blade.
Pushbutton FEA determines the blend point where the seal runner ends based on the inlet thickness,
the seal runner radius, and the blade shape.
(B) Shroud exit thickness

Specifies the thickness at the outer diameter of the rotor, measured from the blade.
(C) Axial length at inlet

Specifies the length of the shroud in front of the leading edge.
(D) Edge chamfer

Specifies the size of the chamfer applied to front inner surface of the shroud.
(E) Seal runner radius

Specifies the front of the shroud is modeled with a constant radius seal runner. Pushbutton FEA de-
termines the blend point where the seal runner ends based on the inlet thickness, the seal runner ra-
dius, and the blade shape.
(F) Inlet radius

Specifies the radius of the flow path at the impeller inlet, measured from the centerline.
Inlet shape
Use this section to select the inlet shape you want to use for the shroud:
Using upstream segment

Select this option to use shape of the upstream segment to define the inlet contours.
Conical (straight)
Select this option to specify the inlet shape as a straight line between the blade and the point defined
by the inlet length and radius inputs. This is the default selection for inlet shape.
Contoured
Select this option to specify the shroud flow path geometry using R-Z points in the Contours dialog
box (accessed by clicking the Define Contour button). For more information, "Specifying con-
tours" on page 480.
Outer profile
Select one of the following options to specify the shroud outer profile shape:
Default curve
Select this option to use the default shroud profile provided by Pushbutton FEA. This profile is built
from the seal runner radius and shroud thickness inputs.
Contoured
Select this option to specify the shroud outer geometry using R-Z points in the Contours dialog box
(by clicking the Define Contourbutton). For more information, "Specifying contours" on page 480
Line-arc
Select this option to define the shroud geometry with two angles and a radius. Two lines are defined,
one starting at the inlet and the second starting at the exit. The arc position is calculated based on
tangency to the lines. The maximum arc size may be limited by the geometry.
Geometry dialog box – Scallop tab
Use the Scallop tab of the Geometry dialog box to specify the dimensions of the scallop in your mod-
el.
FEA Views menu.
Changes in the scallop dimensions are reflected in the Axial View window when you click the Ap-
ply button, allowing a quick check on the input. For more information, "Specifying radial model di-
mensions in Pushbutton FEA" on page 478
OD type
Select the type of OD (outer diameter) shape to plot in the Axial View window. (Click the Apply
button to view your changes in the Axial View window.) By default, the OD of the rotor is circular.
As an option, you can modify the outer diameter of pie-slice models using R-Theta points in the Con-
tours window by selecting one of the following options in the OD type box:
 Cylinder
 Balance notch
 Scallop
Modifications to the OD shape can be a symmetric scallop or a single cut, as from a balancing op-
eration. A balance notch is assumed to be relatively shallow, and the affected nodes and elements
are shifted to match the boundary of the notch. In contrast, a scallop is assumed to be much deeper
and nodes and elements are removed from inside the scallop area before the remaining nodes are
smoothed to the boundary of the scallop.
If you select the Balance notch or Scallop option in the "Scallop shape" section, the options in the
"Scallop bevel" and "Mesh control points" sections on this tab are enabled so that you can further
define the scallop.
OD parallel to Z axis
Select this check box to set the outer diameter parallel to the Z axis.
Blade end radius

Displays the radius at the blade hubline trailing edge. (This number is specified by the coordinates
in the AxCent design and is provided here for reference purposes only.)
Scallop shape
Use this section to select scallop shape that you want to use and to specify the geometry for the shape
you select.
Contoured
Select this option to define contours in the OD tab of the Contours dialog box (by clicking the De-
fine Contour button).. For more information, "Specifying contours" on page 480
Line-Arc-Line
Select this option to define a line-arc-line scallop shape by specifying the following parameters:
 (A) Web width angle
 (B) Radius
 (C) Web side angle
Line-Arc-Arc
Select this option to specify a line-arc-arc scallop shape by specifying the following parameters:
 (d1) Left width angle

 (d2) Right width angle
 (e1) Left side angle
 (e2) Right side angle
 (r1) Arc radius
 (r2) Corner arc radius
Scallop bevel
Use the boxes in this section to approximate a rounded section with the appropriate bevel height for
the bottom of the scallop, which is flat by default. The bottom of the bevel is determined from the
scallop contour. The section is then raised above that level according to the height you specify.
Type
Select the type of bevel you want to add: Half Circle or Quarter Circle.
Height
Select the height above the bottom of the bevel that the section should be raised.
Mesh control points
Use this section to refine the mesh by defining the location of the control points. To specify the con-
trol points, select theUser-defined check box, and then specify values between 0 and 1 in the Minus
side and Plus side boxes.
The points are positioned along the R-Z curve, which defines the scallop. By default, Pushbutton
FEA determines points in the scallop contour to control the meshing regions in the backface. Sepa-
rate inputs are used for the two sides of the backface scallop. To see the effect of this feature, choose
Axial from the View menu. The manually located points are drawn as symbols along the scallop
curves.
Geometry dialog box – Blade tab

Use the Blade tab of the Geometry dialog box to specify the dimensions of the blades in your model.
In Pushbutton FEA, you can define circular fillets as well as elliptical fillet types. The rules applying
to fillet specification are as follows:
 An elliptical fillet can be specified by radius and aspect ratio or by the distance to the
tangent points.
 Both elliptical and circular fillets can vary in size along the flow path in an arbitrary
manner (defined in the Contours dialog box).
 The hub fillet may have different fillet types and sizes on the pressure and suction sides.
 The hub fillet need not be the same type as the shroud.
The definition of the main blade fillets is completely independent from the splitter blades, in both
type and in size.
FEA Views menu.
Changes in the blade dimensions are reflected in the Cross Section window when you click the Ap-
ply button, allowing a quick check on the input. For more information, "Specifying radial model di-
mensions in Pushbutton FEA" on page 478
Active blade
Select the blade for which you want to specify fillet settings (Main Blade, Splitter Blade 1 or
Splitter Blade 2). You can specify separate fillet settings for the main blade and each of the split-
ters, independently of the others. The hub fillet may have different fillet types and sizes on the pres-
sure and suction sides. The same holds for the shroud.
Note: The Setup tab in the Project dialog box has a similar selection box that determines
which blade is used when the model is built. In the fillet window, the selection box
is for geometry input only; it does not affect which blade is used when the model is
built.
Fillet type
Select the type of fillet that you want to use for the selected blade:
 Circular
 Ellipse (aspect ratio)
 Ellipse (tangent distance)
An elliptical fillet can be specified by radius and aspect ratio or by the distance to the tangent points.
Fillet location section

Select the location of the fillet: Hub or Shroud.
Blade surface section

Select the blade surface (or surfaces) where the fillet will be located: Pressure and suction, Pres-
sure, or Suction.
Leading/trailing edge sections
There is no separate dimensional input for the leading/trailing edge fillet type, and it is always cir-
cular. The pressure and suction side fillets that immediately follow the leading/trailing edge deter-
mine the size of the leading/trailing edge fillet. These should be reasonably close in size towards the
leading/trailing edge. If elliptical fillets are used on the blade, the aspect ratio should approach 1.0
towards the leading/trailing edge.
Select the leading/trailing edge options you want to use:
Note: Leading/trailing edge fillets and details are included by default if you select them as
rounded in the Leading/Trailing Edge Ellipse Parameters dialog box.
Use swept leading/trailing edge contour

Select this check box to include the swept leading/trailing edge geometry. This check box is avail-
able when the design includes a swept leading/trailing edge.
Adjust leading/trailing edge zone

Select this check box to control how much of the blade shape geometry is assigned to the leading/
trailing edge meshing zone. If you select this option, specify the percentage of the blade length for
the leading/trailing edge meshing zone in the Percentage Blade Length box.
The data blocks for blade shape define the default assignment. The length input is a fraction of the
total blade length. For geometry with a high aspect ratio ellipse, this feature allows you to assign the
straight portions of the ellipse to the blade side meshing zones and the curved portion to the leading/
trailing edge zones.
Another use of this feature is in cases where a complete leading/trailing edge mesh is difficult to gen-
erate, or where the multiple blade model is used. In such cases, you can input a small number
(~0.001) for the length and turn off the leading/trailing edge fillet elements. This results in elements
that follow most of the leading/trailing edge ellipse but have a small blunt region at the very front of
the blade. To see the effect of this feature on assigning the meshing zones, view the RTheta vs. Z
plot (choose R*Theta vs. Zfrom the View menu)
Percent Blade Length

If you select the Adjust leading/trailing edge zone check box, type the percentage of the blade
length for the leading/trailing edge meshing zone in this box.
Shell thickness factor

Type the value by which to reduce the thickness of the leading/trailing edge elements to represent
a sheared leading/trailing edge. This option applies to shell models only.
Fillet profile section

Select one of the following profiles:
 Uniform size – The default setting.
 Contoured – The default setting is for a uniform fillet profile, however, elliptical and
circular fillets can vary in size along the flow path in an arbitrary manner. If this option
is selected, the contour information is used to determine the fillet radius along the blade.
Click theDefine Contourbutton to define the contours in the Contours dialog box.
 Calculated – Unlike the Contoured fillet option, which allows you to specify the fillet in
an arbitrary manner, the Calculated fillet defines the fillet size as a function of the blade
geometry as follows:
Where R is the local hub radius, N is the number of blades, b is the blade angle, and A, C, and K are
constants.
Click the Define Calculation button to define the fillet information in the Calculated Fillet dialog
box. To learn about this dialog box, consult AxCent Help for the Pushbutton FEA program.
Leading/Trailing edge corner location sections

Pushbutton FEA attempts to find the best choice for placement of the leading/trailing edge corner
nodes. Depending on the blade and fillet geometry, this may degrade the element angles in the blade,
leading/trailing edge, and/or leading/trailing edge fillet. In this case, you can manually define the lo-
cations of the two corner nodes by selecting the User-defined location check box and then speci-
fying the values of the first corner (First location box) and second corner (Second location box)
locations (values between 0.0 and 1.0). The front of the blade is the region in the leading/trailing
edge between the first location and the second location. The area from the beginning of the leading/
trailing edge to the first location and the area from the second location to the end of the leading/trail-
ing edge area is the side of the leading/trailing edge.
Fillet dimensions
When a constant fillet radius is desired, these values are used for both the pressure and suction sides
of the blade.
(A) Fillet radius
(B/A) Aspect ratio
Geometry dialog box – Balance Ring tab
Use the Balance Ring tab of the Geometry dialog box to specify the dimensions of the balance ring.
If the balance ring option is selected, geometric information is required for the model. The balance
ring is assumed to have a flat backface, as defined by the balance ring thickness, balance ring radii,
and backface profile.
FEA Views menu.
Changes in the balance ring dimensions are reflected in the Cross Section window when you click
the Apply button, allowing a quick check on the input.For more information,"Specifying radial
model dimensions in Pushbutton FEA" on page 478
Balance ring
Include balance ring
Select this check box to include a balance ring in the model. When you select the check box, the
remaining boxes in the "Balance ring" section are enabled.
(A) Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the balance ring in the axial direction, measured from the backface.
(B) Inner radius

Specifies the inner dimensions of the balance ring, measured from the centerline of the rotor.
(C) Outer radius

Specifies the outer dimensions of the balance ring, measured from the centerline of the rotor.
Geometry dialog box – Balance Notches tab
Use the Balance Notches tab of the Geometry dialog box to specify the dimensions of the balance
notches in your model.
Pushbutton FEA allows you to model up to three spherical indentations in the impeller backface.
Your inputs define a number of spheres that, at least partially, intersect the backface. Pushbutton
FEA uses this information to adjust the node position for any nodes that fall in the region of the ma-
terial removal (and the immediately neighboring nodes), to produce the indentation in the backface.
FEA Views menu.
Changes in the balance notch dimensions are reflected in the Cross Section window when you click
the Apply button, allowing a quick check on the input.. For more information, see "Specifying radial
model dimensions in Pushbutton FEA" on page 478
Spherical indentations
Include backface indentation
Select this check box to include one or more backface indentations. When you select the check box,
the remaining boxes in the "Spherical indentations" section are enabled.
(A) Tool size

Specifies the radial size of the ball-end mill used for the plunge cut. This number should be small
compared to the size of the rotor.
(B) Radius
Specifies the radial position (distance from centerline) of the cut. This should fall between the shaft
shoulder and the outer diameter of the rotor.
(C) Angle
Specifies the angular position of the cut, relative to the blade trailing edge. For instance, with 12
blades, the pie-slice model would span 30° and the angle of the cut should fall between ±15°.
Depth
Specifies the depth of the cut. This should be less than or equal to the size of the tool.
Flat-bottom groove
Include backface groove
Select this check box to include a backface groove in the model. When you select the check box, the
remaining boxes in the "Flat-Bottom Groove" section are enabled. Your inputs define a cutout which
at least partially intersects the backface and which is extruded in the angular direction.
Pushbutton FEA uses this information to adjust the node position for any nodes that fall in the region
of the material removal (and the immediately neighboring nodes), to produce the groove in the back-
face.
It is assumed that the radius of the tool is small compared to the outer diameter of the rotor. This
balancing feature could be made by plunging a typical flat-ended tool into the backface of the disk,
with the tool axis parallel to the centerline of the rotor, and then turning the part to draw out the
groove.
Specify the following information for the backface groove:
(A) Tool size

Specifies the radial size of the end mill used for the cut. This number should be small compared to
the size of the rotor.
Tool fillet
Specifies the corner radius of the flat end mill that would be used to make the balance notch.
Depth
Specifies the depth of the cut.
(B) Radius
Specifies the radial position (distance from centerline) of the cut. This should fall between the shaft
shoulder and the outer diameter of the rotor.
(C) Start angle

Specifies the start angular position of the cut, relative to the blade trailing edge. For instance, with
12 blades, the pie-slice model would span 30° and the angle of the cut should fall between ±15°.
(D) End angle

Specifies the end angular position of the cut, relative to the blade trailing edge.
Geometry dialog box – Diffuser tab
Use the Diffuser tab of the Geometry dialog box to specify the dimensions of the vaneless diffuser
in your model.
A vaneless diffuser can be used with or without a shroud, and is useful when there is an elliptical
edge to the blade at the outer diameter (that is, a turbine leading edge) since it enforces a specific
outer radius of the rotor instead of relying on the blade shape data.
FEA Views menu.
Changes in the diffuser dimensions are reflected in the Cross Section window when you click the
Apply button, allowing a quick check on the input.
Options section
Include vaneless diffuser
Select this check box to include a rotating vaneless diffuser in the model. When you select this check
box, the boxes in the "Dimensions" section are enabled.
Dimensions section
(A) Exit passage height
Specifies the passage height at the outer radius of the rotor. The hub line is assumed to extend
straight up, so the passage height sets the axial position of the shroud.
(B) Outer radius

Specifies the outer radius of the rotor. When the rotating vaneless diffuser option is turned off, the
outer radius is determined by the blade shape data.
Exit Shape section

Select one of the following options for specifying the exit shape:
 Using downstream segment – Use the downstream segment to define the contours of the
diffuser exit.
 Straight – Use a straight diffuser exit.
Hot to Cold dialog box
Use the Hot to Cold dialog box to perform a hot-to-cold calculation in Pushbutton FEA, whether for
axial machines or for radial machines. This dialog box appears when you choose Hot-to-Cold from
the Mechanical menu.
PBFEA Options section
Run Static Solver Only

Select this option to run a static analysis using previously set loads and constraints.
Run Thermal and Static Solver

Select this option to run the thermal and the static solver. A thermal analysis uses the thermal bound-
ary conditions, including those that may be mapped from the CFD, MST or Rapid loading solution.
Note: When you select both Thermal and Static analyses, first the thermal solver runs, then
the Static solver uses the calculated nodal temperatures to determine the effects of
thermal strain that are added to the displacement results.
Reference Temperature
Specify the temperature to which all nodal temperatures are referenced.
Reference temperature only applies directly to Static analysis. In a static analysis, temperatures can
only be supplied from the results of a thermal analysis as a nodal temperature. Reference temperature
is subtracted from the nodal temperature to provide the delta T value used to calculate thermal ex-
pansions and finally to calculate stress.
Iterations to run
Specify the number of iterations (ranging from 1 to 99).
Hot to Cold window

When the calculation is complete, the dialog box window displays the hot to cold directory, the max-
imum error values, the rms error values, and the location of the final geometry. The errors in the win-
dow are the difference between the trial static shape model (the "In" file) and the predicted static
shape output file (the "Out"file).
Create button
Click this button to run the hot-to-cold calculation and to create the hot to cold geometry files (the
file format changes according to the solver that you select).
Abort button
Click this button to abort or to stop the iterations.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Hot to Cold dialog box 579
Mesh dialog box (hexahedral dominant)
The Mesh dialog box allows you to specify hexahedral dominant mesh density parameters.
This dialog box appears after you select Hexahedral dominant in the "Mesh type" section on the
Options tab of the Project dialog box, and then choose Mesh from the Mechanical menu.
 "Mesh dialog box – General Settings tab" on page 580.
 "Mesh dialog box – Blades tab" on page 582.
 "Mesh dialog box - Streamwise Spacing tab" on page 585.
 "Mesh dialog box – Hub-to-Shroud Spacing tab" on page 586
 "Mesh dialog box – Hub Pie-slice Spacing tab" on page 587.
 "Mesh dialog box – Shroud Pie-slice Spacing tab" on page 589.
Mesh dialog box – General Settings tab

Use the General Settings tab of the Mesh dialog box to specify general mesh density parameters.
For more information about specifying hexahedral mesh parameters, "Specifying mesh parameters"
on page 487
Mesh density in the rotor is adjustable through the selection of the number of nodes across each of
the critical regions.
Separate controls are provided for node spacing and the blade mesh density. Viewing the mesh, and
checking both the aspect ratio and element angles can achieve an optimum mesh.
Shroud section
Shroud node layers
Specify the number of nodes in the blade quasi-orthogonal direction, through the thickness of the
shroud.
Hub Extension section

Nodes along extension
Specify the number of nodes in the axial direction, along the length of the hub extension.
Second Hub Extension section

Nodes along extension
Specify the number of nodes in the axial direction, along the length of the second hub extension.
Node layers
Specify the number of nodes in the blade quasi-orthogonal direction, through the thickness of the
second hub extension.
Flow path nodes section

Pushbutton FEA has two ways to treat the elements in front of the blade leading edge. It can either
bring them straight in the axial direction or they can be wrapped at the same angle as the blade.
A value of 0.0 tells Pushbutton FEA to mesh those elements in the straight axial direction. A value
of 1.0 tells Pushbutton FEA to mesh those elements at the full blade angle. Values between zero and
one will result in elements that wrap at some fraction of the blade angle.
There are separate values to control the element wrap angle for the impeller nose and shroud. In all
cases, the pie-slice models are cyclically symmetric sectors.
Nose extension
Specify the number of nodes along the flow path of the hub, in front of the blade leading edge.
Nose wrap factor

Specify a nose extension wrap angle.
Shroud extension nodes

Specify the number of nodes along the flow path of the shroud, in front of the blade leading edge.
Shroud wrap factor

Specify a shroud extension wrap angle.
Disk section
Nodes across web
Specify the number of nodes in the axial direction, through the impeller backface.
Nodes across nose

Specify the number of nodes in the radial direction, between the bore and the blade leading edge.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Mesh dialog box (hexahedral dominant) 581
Bias to bore
The pie slice gets narrow as it approaches the centerline, by definition. This means that the element
layers tend to get smaller in the theta direction (thinner) near the bore.
Use this option to improve the element aspect ratio. This option makes the elements smaller in the
radial direction as you approach the centerline. The higher the number, the greater the effect of the
bias.
Vaneless diffuser
Hub surface nodes
Specify the number of nodes along the flow path, beyond the blade trailing edge, along the hub.
Shroud surface nodes

Specify the number of nodes along the flow path, beyond the blade trailing edge, along the shroud.
Balance ring section

Balance ring nodes
Specify the number of nodes through the thickness of the balance ring.
Mesh dialog box – Blades tab

Mesh density in each blade is adjustable through selecting the number of nodes across each of the
critical regions. Separate controls are provided for node spacing and the general setting. Viewing the
mesh, and checking both the aspect ratio and element angles can achieve an optimum mesh. For
more information about specifying mesh options, "Specifying mesh parameters" on page 487
Active blade
Select the blade for which you want to specify blade mesh spacing (Main Blade, Splitter Blade
1 or Splitter Blade 2). You can specify separate mesh spacing settings for the main blade and each
of the splitters, independently of the others.
Blade section
In this section, specify the number of nodes along the curve of the fillet where the blade meets the
hub and the shroud. In the blade alone and 360° models, both of which use shells for the blade, the
fillet is modeled by increasing the shell thickness to account for the extra material in the fillet.
In the shell pie-slice model, the fillet is modeled with six-node bricks on each side of the blade. If
you are not interested in stress at the fillet, the shell pie-slice model may be a more appropriate ap-
proach. Alternatively, you may find it helpful to use the mesh density settings to specify three nodes
for the fillet. This places one node at each end of the fillet, and the third node in the center of the arc.
Hub fillet
Shroud fillet
Blade thickness nodes
The number of nodes from the pressure side to the suction side of the blade.
Blade mesh layers

Squeeze factor
Select the squeeze factor for a splitter blade. For the Multiple solid blades model, this factor is
used to adjust the size of the nodes in front of the splitters so that all blades can fit into the pie slice
nicely. The range of the factor is from 0.6 to 1.0, with 0.6 being the maximum squeeze and 1.0 being
no squeeze.
Leading edge
For single-blade solid pie models, use the boxes in this section to specify the number of nodes in the
side and front of the blade’s leading edge. The side and front are the edges in reference to the leading
edge corner locations, which can either be calculated by Pushbutton FEA or defined by the user in
the "Leading edge corner location" section on the Blade tab of the Geometry dialog box.
Side of blade
Points on front of blade
Mesh dialog box - Streamwise Spacing tab
Use the Streamwise Spacing tab of the Mesh dialog box to adjust the mesh spacing to concentrate
the nodes and elements in areas of specific interest, in addition to adjusting the mesh density of the
blade. Since the blade mesh flows into the hub and shroud mesh, the hexahedral mesh spacing op-
tions affect the entire model. For more information about specifying hexahedral mesh options, see
“Specifying mesh parameters” on page 487..
Distribution along the full flow path (from 0.0 to 1.0) section
In this table, specify the mesh distribution along the full flow path from the leading edge to the trail-
ing edge in the table in terms of Start Percent, End Percent, and Number of Nodes.
Each row in the table represents a segment in the flow path. Except the first row in the table, the Start
Percent must be the same as its previous row of End Percent, in this way the full flow path is divided
into continuous segments in terms of Start Percent and End Percent.
Start Percent
This parameter must start from 0.0
End Percent
This parameter must end at 1.0.
Number of Nodes
The number of nodes for the segment.
Spacing along flow path section
User-defined control point location at percent
Select this check box and type the value in the available box to manually set the control point posi-
tion as percent of the hub line meridian distance. If this option is not selected, Pushbutton FEA au-
tomatically places the control point where the hub forms a 45-degree angle with the machine axis.
The control point serves as a transition point for the mesh on the platform side of the hub line. Below
this point the nodes on the hub line are used for the near-horizontal element faces. Above this point
the nodes from the hub line form the near-vertical element faces.
Mesh dialog box – Hub-to-Shroud Spacing tab

Use the Hub-to-Shroud Spacing tab of the Mesh dialog box to adjust the mesh spacing to concentrate
the nodes and elements in areas of specific interest. The options on this tab allow you to cluster the
nodes and elements at the hub, the shroud, or both.For more information about specifying hexahe-
dral mesh options, "Specifying mesh parameters" on page 487
Distribution from Hub to Shroud (from 0.0 to 1.0)

In this table, specify the mesh distribution from hub to shroud in the table in terms of Start Percent,
End Percent, and Number of Nodes.
Each row in the table represents a segment from hub to shroud. Except for the first row in the table,
the Start Percent must be the same as its previous row of End Percent, in this way the blade span is
divided into continuous segments in terms of Start Percent and End Percent.
Start Percent
End Percent
Number of Nodes
Mesh dialog box – Hub Pie-slice Spacing tab

Use the Hub Pie-slice Spacing tab of the Mesh dialog box to specify the pie-slice spacing of the hub.
The options on this tab allow you to vary the pie-slice spacing, from pressure side to suction side.
For more information about specifying hexahedral mesh options, "Specifying mesh parameters" on
page 487
Note: You can also specify different pie-slice spacing for the shroud by using the options
on the Shroud Pie-slice Spacing tab.
Active blade
Select the blade for which you want to specify hub pie-slice mesh spacing (Main Blade, Splitter
Blade 1 or Splitter Blade 2). You can specify separate pie-slice mesh spacing settings for the main
blade and each of the splitters, independently of the others.
Pressure side from pie edge to blade (0.0 to 1.0)

In this table, specify the mesh distribution on the pressure side of the blade, from the pie edge to the
blade, in terms of Start Percent, End Percent, and Number of Nodes.
Each row in the table represents a segment from pie edge to blade. Except for the first row in the
table, the Start Percent must be the same as its previous row of End Percent, in this way the blade
span is divided into continuous segments in terms of Start Percent and End Percent.
Start Percent
End Percent
Number of Nodes
Suction side from pie edge to blade (0.0 to 1.0)

In this table, specify the mesh distribution on the suction side of the blade, from the pie edge to the
Start Percent
End Percent
Number of Nodes
Mesh dialog box – Shroud Pie-slice Spacing tab
Use the Shroud Pie-slice Spacing tab of the Mesh dialog box to specify the pie-slice spacing of the
shroud. The options on this tab allow you to vary the pie-slice spacing, from pressure side to suction
side. For more information about specifying hexahedral mesh parameters, "Specifying mesh param-
eters" on page 487
Note: You can also specify different pie-slice spacing for the hub by using the options on
the Hub Pie-slice Spacing tab.
Active blade
Select the blade for which you want to specify shroud pie-slice mesh spacing (Main Blade, Split-
ter Blade 1 or Splitter Blade 2). You can specify separate pie-slice mesh spacing settings for the
main blade and each of the splitters, independently of the others.
Pressure side from pie edge to blade (0.0 to 1.0)

In this table, specify the mesh distribution on the pressure side of the blade, from the pie edge to the
Start Percent
End Percent
Number of Nodes
Suction side from pie edge to blade (0.0 to 1.0)

In this table, specify the mesh distribution on the suction side of the blade, from the pie edge to the
Start Percent
End Percent
Number of Nodes
Mesh dialog box (tetrahedral)
Use this dialog box to specify radial tetrahedral mesh density parameters.
This dialog box appears after you select Tetrahedral in the "Mesh type" section on the Options tab
of the Project dialog box, and then choose Mesh from the Mechanical menu.
 "Mesh dialog box – General tab" on page 591.
 "Mesh dialog box – Face tab" on page 593.
 "Mesh dialog box – Edge tab" on page 596.
 "Mesh dialog box – Advanced tab" on page 598.
Mesh dialog box – General tab

Use the General Settings tab of the Mesh dialog box to specify general tetrahedral mesh density pa-
rameters.
For more information about specifying tetrahedral mesh options, see "Specifying mesh parameters"
on page 487.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Mesh dialog box (tetrahedral) 591
Global mesh sizing option
Select one of the following mesh sizing options:
 Relative – The relative size that ranges from a value greater than 0.0 to 1.0 (0 itself is
not valid as a value). The actual mesh or edge size will be calculated by multiplying the
length of the largest edge of the coordinate-aligned bounding box of the entity by the
given parameter. The bounding box is best described as a brick that bounds an entity and
that can also enclose the entity element.
If you select Relative for the sizing, specify the relative value.
 Absolute – The absolute size is specified in currently selected units. If you select
Absolute, you should give an absolute value in the current unit system, whether inch, m,
or mm.
Mesh size
Specify the mesh size, whether Relative or Absolute.
Mesh curvature refinement

Select the check box to specify the automatic curvature refinement that matches the curvature of the
entities in the geometric model. The value that you specify represents a d/h ratio, as shown in the
diagram below. The mesh size h is selected so that the d/h ratio is less than a threshold value that
should always be less than 0.5. Useful values for the threshold value are typically in the range of
0.01 to 0.4. Smaller values for d/h provide a more refined mesh.
Nose wrap factor

Specify a value between 0 to 1.0 for the nose wrap factor. A value of 0 aligns the nose with the Z
axis, while a value of 1.0 aligns the blade angle at the leading edge.
The nose of a blade can wrap around its leading edge from the z direction to the blade angle direction
. You can specify any angle between these two directions.
Shroud wrap factor

As with the nose wrap factor, specify a value between 0 to 1.0 for the shroud wrap factor.
Set refined mesh button

Click to set a refined mesh. This option sets the grid parameters to values that produce approximately
100,000 elements.
Set default mesh button

Click to set a default mesh.
Mesh dialog box – Face tab
Use this tab of the Mesh dialog box to specify the sizes of the meshes on the surface of a blade pie-
slice.
Surface mesh sizing option

Select one of the following mesh sizing options for the surface:
or mm.
Surface mesh size section

In the following sections, select the check box for the parameters in each section to specify their
mesh sizes.
Blade section
 Blade TE
 Blade LE
 Blade PS/SS – Pressure and suction sides.
Hub fillets section
 PS/SS Hub Fillet
 LE Hub Fillet
 TE Hub Fillet
Shroud fillets section

 PS/SS Shroud
 LE Shroud Fillet
 TE Shroud Fillet
Disk section (Radial only)

 Hub
 Backface
 Bore
 Pieslice
 Counter bore
Platform section (Axial only)

Select the check boxes to specify the following parts of the platform: Top, Bottom. Front, Tail,
and Sides.
Blisk section (Axial only)

Select the check boxes to specify the Front Profile and Rear Profile.
Firtree (Axial only)

Select the check boxes to specify the following parts of the firtree: Front/Rear, Neck, Convex/
Concave, Firtree Straight, and Firtree Bottom.
Shroud section
 Shroud
Mesh dialog box – Edge tab
Use this tab of the Mesh dialog box (for tetrahedral mesh types) to specify the mesh sizing options
for the edge.
Mesh propagation distance

Select the check box to specify a value for mesh propagation distance.
The mesh propagation factor represents the distance around a model entity that the mesh size on that
entity affects. Mesh gradation occurs at the end of the propagation, and is a transition from one mesh
size to another. Mesh propagation for an edge can be defined as the mesh size of the edge that prop-
agates in a symmetric cylindrical region around an edge that can be considered as the axis of the cyl-
inder. The propagation factor represents the radius of the cylinder.
The figure below shows the propagation of a given mesh size for a hub fillet edge. Note that the mesh
size of the edge propagates along the hub surface and blade surface according to the mesh propaga-
tion factor.
Edge mesh sizing option

Select the Relative or Absolute edge mesh sizing, and then continue to specify values for the hub
and shroud.
or mm.
Hub/Shroud fillet edges sections

In these sections, select the check boxes for the following edges for which to specify values:
 Leading edge
 PS/SS edges
 Trailing edge
Mesh dialog box – Advanced tab
Use this tab of the Mesh dialog box (applicable to tetrahedral mesh types) to adjust additional ad-
vanced parameters to correct a grid generation failure, or to improve the quality of the tetrahedral
grid.
This tab provides the user with visualization tools and adjustments to help correct a tetrahedral mod-
el generation failure or improve a tetrahedral grid of poor quality, combined with error messages and
grid quality diagnostics,
Select the following check boxes:
 View CAD model – The 3D model appears in a separate window after you generate the
grid (by choosing View FEA Grid from the Mechanical menu). This option is useful for
finding a grid generation failure or locating where to adjust the CAD model.
 Do not recreate CAD model – Select for the new grid generation to use the previous
CAD geometry.
 Improve fillet tolerance – Use this option to correct a specific fillet failure during a
CAD model generation.
Pie slice face filling option
When a pie slice face is highly curved and has a high wrap, it is difficult to create the CAD geometry
using one face.
Use this option to split the pie-slice face into several faces for easier geometric generation in cases
in which the pie slice face is highly curved and has a high wrap.
 Default – The program automatically selects the best option among Single face, Multiple
face or Thru section based mainly on the wrap factor. Most pump cases have high wrap
factors. You can generate their geometry using one of these methods.
 Single face – This option uses a single face to create the pie-slice face.
 Multiple face – This option splits the pie-slice face into three faces to create the
complete pie-slice, and is more suitable for highly curved pie-slices.
 Thru sections – This option uses two faces to create the complete pie-slice face.
Add pie slice theta to main blade

Select either Default or User-specified, and specify a value in the box.
When there are splitters in the pie-slice, there is not enough space for the main blade. Using this op-
tion, you can adjust the angle of the main blade without changing the angle of the whole pie-slice.
The pie-slice theta of the main blade changes according to the angle that you specify in this box. This
is useful when multiple splitters are present and the fillets approach the pie slice edges. When in-
creasing the number of blades, the pie-slice theta decreases, and the adjustable angle decreases. Typ-
ical theta range can range from 0 to 5 degrees.
 Default – Use this option for the program to set the pie-slice theta to the main blade. A
user-specified value is not required for this option.
 User-specified – Select this option to specify a value for the change of the pie-slice
theta of the main blade.
Back face alignment factor w.r.t. hub face

Select either Default, or select User-specified to specify a value in the box.
This specifies which part of the back face curve (from hub to shroud) is aligned in theta value with
relation to the hub line. The value ranges from 0 to 1.0.
The change in the back-face pie slice shape is shown in the views below for two factors. (0.2 and 0.8)
Project dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)
Use the options in the Project dialog box to specify project settings, including the types of FEA mod-
els you want to create, the FEA solver, the location of the materials database for the project, and the
FEA solver parameters. The Project dialog box appears when you choose Project from the Mechan-
ical menu.
The Project dialog box contains the following tabs:
 "Project dialog box – Setup tab" on page 600.
 "Project dialog box – Options tab" on page 602.
 "Project dialog box – FEA Solver Parameters tab" on page 604.
Project dialog box – Setup tab

Use the Setup tab of the Project dialog box to specify the model’s title, the optional prefix to add to
the Pushbutton FEA output files for the project, and the types of models that you want to use for the
project. For more information, see "Specifying project settings for stress analysis" on page 465.
Note: The types of FEA models available depend on the type of blade shape data that you
select.
Models that have four-node elements for the blade require blade shape data with
midline and normal thickness coordinates. The solid models require full definition of
the blade pressure, suction, and leading edge surfaces.
Active blade
If you select the Single blade pie slice option (under the Shell/2D blade option) on this tab, use
the Active blade box to select which single blade you want to model. If you select a multiple-blade
pie slice model check box, all blades in the pie slice are modeled.
Note: The Blade tab in the Geometry dialog box has a similar selection box that determines
the blade for which you are entering dimension information. In the Geometry dialog
box, the active blade selection does not affect which blade is used when the model is
built.
Model title
Type a unique title to identify the particular rotor being worked on. Some FEA solvers use this title
in post processing and file output.
Model prefix
Optionally, type a prefix to add to the start of the output file names to identify the files from this
project. If you specify a prefix, it is added to the beginning of each output model file name for the
models you use for the project (the model file names are Axisymmetric, BladeOnly, IGES, IGES-
MultiBlade, PieSlice, PieSliceMultiBlade, SolidPie, and SolidPieMultiBlade).
Number of sections to repeat

Specify the number of pie slice segments to repeat. The additional pie slices will be copies of the
first pie slice. For example, when a solver does not support modal periodic symmetry solutions, you
must repeat the model a number of times equal to the number of main blades to produce a full 360°
model. In other cases, for specialized analyses, two or three slices may be repeated.
This box is enabled only when you select a multiple-blade model options (in the "Models" section).
Arc width for single blade model

Specify the arc width for a single blade model. The value in this box is generally set to 360 / total
number of blades, including splitters. For some models, this may result in too small of an arc to phys-
ically accommodate the fillet radius at the leading edge hub line. In such instances, the arc width
must be increased.
The value in this box applies only to single-blade pie-slice models and is enabled only when you
select a single-blade model option (in the "Models" section).
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Project dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) 601
Project dialog box – Options tab
Use the Options tab of the Project dialog box to specify the FEA solver, the location of the material
database, and if necessary, open MatProp so that you can edit the materials database.For more infor-
mation, see "Specifying project settings for stress analysis" on page 465.
FEA solver
Select the FEA solver that you typically want to use in your projects. The solver you specify here is
the default FEA solver used for this project and other projects you create. You can change the FEA
solver here at any time.
 MSC/Nastran
 Ansys
 Cosmos/M
 Abaqus
 PBFEA – The Concepts NREC solver.
Automatic TECPLOT output

Select this check box to provide output of the FEA model in TECPLOT format, in addition to the
model file. This provides another method of visualization and display of the models.
Compress nodes and elements
Select this check box to eliminate any gaps in the node and element numbering scheme to produce
the most compact model possible. This option is used automatically by the PBFEA solver.
Since most solvers use sparse matrix storage formats, this option has little bearing on the memory
requirements of your finite element model.
Suppress warning messages

Select this check box to suppress warning messages that Pushbutton FEA automatically displays.
These mostly concern the grid quality checks that are performed, but other checks are done on both
geometric and general model integrity during grid generation.
Caution: Use this option at your own risk.
No Midside Node Elements

By default, Pushbutton FEA generates elements with midside nodes. To turn this option off, select
this check box.
Calculix compatible output

Select this option to produce output that is compatible with Calculix, an open-source FEA software
program.
Note: This option is not yet fully implemented.
Materials database
Specify the materials database file (.MDB) to use for the project. To search for and select a materials
database file, click the Browse button.
The Agile Engineering Design System® registers the name of the materials database to ensure that
each of the analysis codes is using the same properties. The materials database file may reside in a
central secure location for access to all AEDS users in an organization.
The materials database file is in Microsoft Access™ format. You can edit the file by using MatProp,
a stand-alone utility that is integrated with Pushbutton FEA. To run MatProp, click the Edit button
on the Options tab. When you run MatProp, it automatically finds and displays the correct materials
database file for you to edit.
Note: To run MatProp from Pushbutton FEA and AxCent, you must first manually start
MatProp once. To do this, browse to the MatProp program in the AxCent installation
directory (located at ...\\Program Files (x86) \Concepts \AXCENT
\Materials\MatProp.exe) and double-click MatProp.exe. From the File menu,
choose Exit to close MatProp again. You can now run MatProp from Pushbutton FEA
and AxCent.
Mesh Type section

Select one of the following mesh types:
 Hexahedral dominant – Specify this type in the Mesh dialog box for hexahedral (six-
faced) meshes.
PBFEA employs hexahedral elements wherever possible, adds prism elements to rounded leading/
trailing edges, or uses a zero bore and adds pyramid and tetrahedral elements when both these op-
tions are used together. In most cases, the final grid is more than 95% hexahedral.
 Tetrahedral – Specify this type in the Mesh dialog box for tetrahedral (four-faced)
meshes.
Project dialog box – FEA Solver Parameters tab
Use the FEA Solver Parameters tab of the Project dialog box to customize the model file and to au-
tomatically launch the FEA solvers from inside of Pushbutton FEA.
Note: This dialog box is not available if you select PBFEA for FEA solver on the Options
tab.
Header file
Specify the file (if any) that is to be "pasted" in front of the regular Pushbutton FEA model file com-
mands. You may set these up as a case control deck, to specify custom output formats, etc. Type the
full path and name of the file, or click the Browse button to navigate to the file.
Footer file
Specify the file (if any) that is to be "pasted" to the end of the regular Pushbutton FEA model com-
mands. These files may include batch output commands, post-processing definitions, etc. Type the
full path and name of the file, or click the Browse button to navigate to the file.
Command line
Specify a setting that allows you to launch the FEA solver. This usually specifies a DOS batch file,
but could be used equally well with Perl or Python scripts, Visual Basic programs, etc. When you
choose Run FEA from the Mechanical menu, the program issues the following operating system
command:command_line model_file where command_line is the batch file and model_file is the full
path name of the Pushbutton FEA output file in 8.3 format. For example, the following batch file
could be used to clear out a previous run from a working directory, and start COSMOS/M using the
name of the model file as a part of the COSMOS/M command:del d:\fea\Example\model.*geostar
d:\fea\Example\model %1exit
The exact form of the batch file depends on many factors such as your computer setup, network li-
censing, FEA solver, etc.
Properties dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)
The Properties dialog box contains three tabs that let you specify global properties for the model,
including speed, material properties, nominal temperature, and thermal constraints. Material prop-
erties are determined by choosing a material type and temperature. A database is used to store the
temperature dependent properties for each of the materials on the list.
The Properties dialog box appears when you choose Properties from the Mechanical menu.
The Properties dialog box contains the following tabs. Click a link to see detailed information about
a tab.
 "Properties dialog box – General tab" on page 606.
 "Properties dialog box – Boundary Conditions tab" on page 608.
 "Properties dialog box – Thermal Constraints tab" on page 610.
Properties dialog box – General tab

Use the General tab of the Properties dialog box to specify general properties for the model, includ-
ing the model's rotational speed, the material to use in the project, and the nominal blade temperature
to use.
Rotational speed section
Rotational Speed Multiplier
Type a value by which to multiply the rotational speed specified for the design (you can specify the
direct value in the Setup Segments dialog box). A value of 1 (the default) uses the rotational speed
specified for the design. A value of 0.95 uses 95% of the rotational speed. A value of 1.1 results in
a 10% overspeed (or 110% of the specified rotational speed)..
Rotational speed in AxCent is specified as revolutions per minute (RPM). Pushbutton FEA automat-
ically converts this as necessary for each particular FEA solver, typically to radians per second.
When aerodynamic loads are applied to the model, the rotational speed is also used to calculate the
heat transfer coefficient on the backface and shroud. Typically, the flow over these surfaces is con-
sidered to be a fully developed turbulent flow profile of a rotating disk, although you must adjust the
exact correlation.
Material section
Select the material that you want to use in your project. The following material property files are
provided with Pushbutton FEA.
 Austenitic Stainless Steel (300 series) – Represented by AISI 316L.
 Alloy Steel (4340 bar) – Ferritic and Martensitic Steels – Ferritic and Martensitic
Steels, including low carbon, high strength low alloy, and 400 series stainless,
represented by AISI 4340.
 Cast Aluminum (c355-T6) – Represented by C355-T61.
 Superalloy (Inconel 718 cast) – Cobalt or Nickel-rich Superalloys, represented by
Inconel 718.
 Precipitation Hardening Stainless Steel (17-4PH) – Represented by 17-4Ph.
 Titanium Alloy (6AL4V) – Represented by 6Al-4V.
These material property sets correspond to groups of materials with similar property values within
each group, that is, property values which generally vary between materials by no more than several
percent.
This database of material was created using Microsoft Access and may be updated and/or expanded
by you to incorporate proprietary material data. For more information, see "Editing the materials da-
tabase with MatProp" on page 501.
Nominal temperature
Type the blade temperature (either average or worst case, depending on your design philosophy or
the area of the blade that is the focus of an analysis) to apply thermal effects on properties at run-
time.
Single set of properties

Select this check box to evaluate the material properties at a single, nominal temperature and to write
them to the file as a global property, Specify a nominal temperature at which to evaluate the proper-
ties.
Pushbutton FEA uses a material property database that specifies the material properties as a function
of temperature, and by default writes the material properties to the solver output file in table format.
This allows the selected FEA solver to evaluate the property as you have set it there.
By default, the PBFEA solver runs a non-linear thermal analysis (non-linear based on the evaluation
of a temperature-dependent value of thermal conductivity) to provide a temperature field that can be
used to evaluate local element values of the required material properties.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Properties dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) 607
Properties dialog box – Boundary Conditions tab
Use the Boundary Conditions tab in the Properties dialog box to choose bore constraints that most
closely simulate the actual impeller attachment.
Pie-slice cut face

When pie-slice models are made, you can select the type of constraints placed on the cut faces of the
hub and shroud sectors. The available choices are:
 Constraint Eqn. – Constraint equations are used to equate the X, Y, and Z deflections
for each node pair on the sector boundary.
This default choice is generally used for stress, blade vibration modes, and the zero nodal diameter
disk modes.
 Harmonic condition – Some FEA solvers have options for modal periodic symmetry
analysis, allowing more accurate calculations of the bladed disk modes of vibration. If
the selected solver does not support modal symmetry, constraint equations are
substituted.
 Fixed boundary – For some blade dynamics analysis, you may find it helpful to fix the
cut faces of the disk sector. This choice applies a zero displacement condition at each
node on the cut faces.
 Cyclic – This option is essentially the same as the Harmonic condition option, but uses
the much reduced and automatic periodic boundary production for ANSYS.
Nose / Shoulder / Bore B.C.

In these sections, you can set displacement constraints on specific surfaces of the finite element mod-
el.
Typically, constraints should be applied on both dT and dZ on one of the faces.
 dR – Select this check box to set the radial displacement of the model face to zero.
 dT – Select this check box to provide a constraint in the tangential direction.
 dZ – Select this check box to set the axial displacement to zero on the selected face of
the model.
No Boundary BC
Select this option for no single node constraint. Unless you select No Boundary BC, the same sin-
gle node constraint occurs for the other solvers.
Note: If you do not select a constraint and do not check this option, a single node is
constrained at the shoulder in r, theta and z. Because a BC specification is required
for the PBFEA solver, this option is not available if that solver has been previously
selected.
Properties dialog box – Thermal Constraints tab
Use the Thermal Constraints tab in the Properties dialog box to apply fixed temperature constraints
to simulate model interface boundaries for infinite sources and sinks.
Nose/Shoulder/Bore B.C. sections

Use these sections to set thermal constraints on specific surfaces of the model.
Note: The use of this type of constraint is rare. Thermal interfaces to the design's
surroundings are more commonly modeled using a convection tuple of a bulk
temperature and convection coefficient. This boundary condition assumes that
however much energy is passed across this boundary to and from the model, the
temperature of the component interface remains constant.
Fix T
To activate any of the three sections, select the Fix T check box.
T1/T2
Specify the fixed temperatures in T1 and T2.
In the case of the nose and shoulder boundary conditions, T1 applies to inner radial and T2 to outer
radial.
In the case of the bore boundary conditions, T1 applies to the left hand side of the diagram and T2
to the right side of the diagram. Linear interpolation takes place for the points in between.
If you require a constant temperature across the boundary, specify the same temperature in each of
these boxes.
Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to customize the display of data in the 3D FEA window.
This dialog box appears when you right-click this window and choose FEA View Options from the
Options section
Select the check boxes for the following display options:
 Draw Geometry –Display the machine geometry along with the FEA grid and data. The
geometry appears in the 3D FEA window only. (Or click on the 3D FEA window
toolbar to display the same geometry.)
 Draw Volute – Display the volute, if a volute is included in the design.
 Draw Grid Lines – Display the lines of the FEA grid. (Or click on the toolbar.)
 Link All Views – Apply all the settings you have selected in this dialog box (except in
the 2D View/3D View windows) to all the other FEA windows for your current design.
This is useful for comparing the same grid slices from two or more different FEA runs.
 Animate – Animate the FEA plot (or click on the 3D FEA window toolbar). The 3D
plot rotates only when you select the Modal analysis in the Solver Options dialog box.

Select the number of blades to include in the grid. These options are available for 3D PBFEA views
only. They are also available on the 3D FEA window toolbar.
 Draw One Blade – The FEA grid and data appear in a single blade passage. (Or click
on the 3D FEA window toolbar.)
 Draw two blades – The FEA grid and data appear in two contiguous blade passages. (Or
 Draw All Blades – The FEA grid and data are rotated and displayed around the entire
wheel (all blade passages appear). This option is available for modal non-constraint
equations, when you select the Modal analysis in the Solver Options dialog box. (Or
Plot data section

In this section, choose the style of plot to draw, whether Surface or Contours.
Colored by
Choose the FEA solution variable by which to color the plot. The options available depend upon
which solvers were used during the run (as selected in the Solver Options dialog box). (You can also
choose the options listed below in the toolbar of the 3D PBFEA window.)
Note: The modal displacement options listed below (Modal Displacement Magnitude and Modal
Displacement in X/Y/Z) only appear when you select Modal for analysis in the Solver Options di-
alog box.
 Node Number – The grid node number.
 Displacement in X/Y/Z – The static analysis displacement components for X, Y, or Z.
 Total Displacement – The vector sum of the static analysis displacement components.
 Stress XX/YY/ZZ/XY/YZ/ZX – The direct and shear stresses.
 Von Mises Stress – The Von Mises equivalent stress criterion, the standard method for
determining an axis-independent equivalent.
 Principal Stress 1/2/3 – The three principal stresses.
 Temperature
 Modal Displacement Magnitude – The vector sum of the displacements specific to the
modal analysis. This option depends upon which modal result you select in the Solver
Options dialog box.
 Modal Displacement in X/Y/Z – The modal analysis displacement components for X, Y,
or Z.
Displacement Scale Factor

Displacements (or deformities) are very small relative to the overall dimensions of the model. You
must scale them to better view the displaced shape. The displacement scale factor is applied to the
displacements used in producing the distorted geometry. Like the Vector Scale Factor used for view-
ing CFD results (see the CFD View Options dialog box), it is a visualization tool. (You can also
change the displacement scale on the toolbar of the 3D PBFEA model window.
Type a value for this factor and then select from the drop-down list one of the following displace-
ment results to be viewed:
 Geometry – Undisplaced geometry in solid wireframe before calculation of the stress.
(Or click on the 3D FEA window toolbar.)
 Displaced Geometry – Geometry with the calculated displacements. (Or click on

the toolbar.)
 Displaced Geometry + Wireframe – Both solid and displaced (or distorted) geometry as
well as hollow wireframe (or undisplaced) geometry. This options is useful for viewing
the effects of the distorted geometry.(Or click on the toolbar.)
Mode
Select the grid node number to view the frequency and the HRM (Harmonic Index or nodal diame-
ter). This option is only available when you select Modal Displacement Magnitude or Modal Dis-
placement in X/Y/Z in the "Colored by" drop-down list above. Use this option to select the
calculated mode number and view the relative displacements
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Pushbutton FEA View Options dialog box 613
RotorLab Parameters dialog box
Use the RotorLab Parameters dialog box to select the RotorLab file to which you want to transfer
mass and inertia data generated with Pushbutton FEA.
The dialog box becomes available when you choose Rotorlab – Setup Parameters from the Agile
menu.
Tip: Tip: For detailed information about using RotorLab, refer to RotorLab Help.
Label
Type a name to identify iterations as a separate disk in RotorLab.
RotorLab file
Type the full path and name of the RotorLab file that you want to use, or click Browse to navigate
to and select the RotorLab file. If you do not specify a file name here, RotorLab starts with an empty
parts bin and assembly.
SubModel Settings dialog box
Use the SubModel Settings dialog box to specify sub-model settings for a specified region in a
coarse grid. This dialog box automatically appears after you select a region in a Cross-section win-
dow, or when you right-click the Cross Section window and then choose SubModeling – Settings
from the shortcut menus that appears.
Number of grids section

In this section, specify the number of times to subdivide each element for the new mesh in the spec-
ified region. This allows you to control how fine to make the new mesh in the new region by speci-
fying the grid in three directions. Each element in the grid is then subdivided in each direction. New
nodes that are associated with a defined boundary (backface, counterbore, etc.) are adjusted to fall
on that boundary.
Radial direction
Specify the number of sub-divisions in the radial direction.
Circumferential direction
Specify the number of sub-divisions in the circumferential direction (or Z direction).
Axial direction
Specify the number of sub-divisions in the axial direction (or theta direction).
Region selected section

This section displays the R and Z coordinates for the selected region at each corner.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide SubModel Settings dialog box 615
Translate Z dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models)
Use the Translate Z dialog box to offset the coordinate system Z=0 datum as often as necessary. This
dialog box appears when you choose Z Translation from the Mechanical menu.
The AxCent design specifies the r, q, and z coordinates for the blade. In addition, you may choose to
define the FEA model in any other concentric cylindrical coordinate system. When the cross section
view is open, the r, z coordinates can be read from the status bar at the bottom of the main window.
In some cases, data entry in the Contours dialog box is more convenient if the origin were in a par-
ticular point. For instance, contoured backface data may be convenient to work with the Z=0 datum
at the hub trailing edge. In other cases, the model may be referenced to an absolute frame of refer-
ence or offset a certain amount so as to coincide with other FEA grids.
Translation type
Select the origin of the model coordinate system:
 Default – The default coordinate system is defined by the blade shape data in AxCent.
 Absolute user data – You can enter the distance to translate the origin. This option is an
absolute shift from the coordinate system defined in AxCent.
 Relative user data – This option is a relative shift from the currently defined position.
 Hub leading edge – This option allows you to specify the hub leading edge on the blade.
Pushbutton FEA translates the origin to the z=0 plane where that point falls.
 Shroud leading edge – This option allows you to specify the shroud leading edge on the
blade. Pushbutton FEA translates the origin to the z=0 plane where that point falls.
 Hub trailing edge – This option allows you to specify the hub trailing edge on the blade.
Pushbutton FEA translates the origin to the z=0 plane where that point falls.
 Shroud trailing edge – This option allows you to specify the shroud leading edge on the
blade. Pushbutton FEA translates the origin to the z=0 plane where that point falls.
Translation amount
In this box, type the amount of distance for Absolute or Relative user data.
Mirror Z coordinate in output file

Select this check box to reverse the Z direction in the AxCent output file.
Pushbutton FEA™ Radial User Guide Translate Z dialog box (for radial Pushbutton FEA models) 617
Software Products License
1. ACCEPTANCE OF SOFTWARE AS ACCEPTANCE OF LICENSE Acceptance of Software by
you (the “Licensee”), as indicated by express acceptance, by physical acceptance, by downloading,
and/or use of the Software, is acceptance of the license herein granted and of its terms and
conditions. If you do not agree with the terms of this Software Products License Agreement,
promptly return, unopened, all Software to Licensor for a refund of the price paid.
2. GRANT OF LICENSE Upon acceptance of the Software by the Licensee and payment of the
licensing fees to the Licensor, the Licensor grants to the Licensee a license for in-house use on
designated equipment of all Software specified in the Licensor’s License Quotation Document
(Licensor’s Quotation [or Proposal or Order Acknowledgement] Document) (“LQD”) with any and
all site, geographic, equipment, and/or use restrictions noted in the Order Acknowledgment that you
have received/will receive from the Licensor. The license is solely for the design, analysis, and/or
manufacture of the Licensee’s current or future turbomachinery products, and to reproduce Software
only as reasonably necessary to support the authorized use. The Software, Software revisions, and
any documentation furnished to the Licensee are proprietary to the Licensor. The Licensee agrees
that it can obtain only a license to use the Software in accordance with all of the terms and conditions
herein.
3. INTERNAL USE Licensee shall use the Software only for its own internal business purposes and
shall not, without the prior written approval of Licensor, either allow any third party to obtain or to
have access to the Software in any form or allow any use of the Software for the benefit of any third
party. “In-house users” are those users of the Software whose personal services are paid for by the
Licensee.
4. NUMBER OF USERS Unless otherwise stated in an LQD expressly agreed to by the Licensor,
Licensee has obtained a single license for the licensed Software that grants to the Licensee the right
for only one person to access the licensed Software at any given time. However, the licensed
Software may be accessible from more than one computer. A license file or security key may be
provided that must be used to ensure only the agreed upon use of the licensed Software
5. TYPES OF LICENSES GRANTED Licensor grants limited types of Software licenses. Which type
the Licensee has chosen is determined from the LQD, including a comparison of the Licensor’s
current standard rates with the license fees paid, tendered, or acknowledged by the Licensee. In no
case is a license granted for use of the Software in a US Department of Commerce Restricted
Country, however designated, or for use by a person or other entity that is on any US government
restricted or barred list, however designated. The types of licenses are:
a. Fixed-Node. Defined as a license to access the Software, one user at a time, on a pre-designated
computer (CPU).
b. Area Floating. Defined as a license for the number of simultaneous users as specified in the LQD
to access the Software, from sites separated from a primary site by no more than one hundred
(100) straight-line map miles (161 straight-line map kilometers).
c. Site. Defined as a license for the number of simultaneous users as specified in the LQD to access
the Software from a single building or campus of buildings.
d. North America Floating. Defined as a license for the number of simultaneous users as specified
in the LQD to access the Software, from any location in North America (to include the Caribbe-
an Islands except Cuba).
e. Europe Floating. Defined as a license for the number of simultaneous users as specified in the
LQD to access the Software, from any location in the European Union (to include the United
Kingdom).
f. Global Floating. Defined as a license for the number of simultaneous users as specified in the
LQD to access the Software, from any location not in a country on a United States Department
of Commerce restricted countries list by whatever name it takes.
g. Global. Defined as a license for multiple simultaneous user access from any locations not in a
country on a United States Department of Commerce restricted countries list by whatever name
it takes. To be effective a Global license must by signed by Licensor’s Chief Executive Officer.
6. EXPORT AND RE-EXPORT FORMALITIES United States export laws and regulations, as well
as other laws and regulations of the United States or other countries, may place restrictions upon the
geographic area of use, upon the end use, or upon the end user of the licensed Software. Licensee
agrees that it has the responsibility to determine and to comply with all such laws and regulations,
especially whenever there is a change in locations of access, in users, or in uses of the licensed
Software.
7. ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS
a. Licensee acknowledges that Licensor holds all right, title, and interest in and to all tangible and
intangible incidents of the Software, including all Trade Secrets and Copyrights pertaining
thereto, and that the Agreement conveys to Licensee only a limited right to use the Software.
Such right to use is fully revocable hereunder by Licensor. Licensee agrees that, except for such
right of use, it shall not assert any right, title, or interest in or to the Software or Documentation.
b. Licensee acknowledges that the Software constitute commercially valuable, proprietary, confi-
dential products of Licensor, the design and development of which reflect a considerable effort
on the part of skilled development professionals and the investment of considerable time and
money. Licensee further acknowledges that the Software contain substantial Trade Secrets of
Licensor, which have been entrusted to Licensee for use only as expressly authorized under this
Agreement. As used herein, Trade Secrets entail any scientific or technical information, design,
process, procedure, formula, or improvement that is commercially valuable and secret (in the
sense that its confidentiality affords Licensor a competitive advantage). Trade Secrets include,
without limitation, the source code, system design and specifications, programming sequences,
algorithms, flow charts, and formats pertaining to the Software. Trade Secrets do not include,
however, any data or information that is generally known to the public, that (1) has been or is
disclosed to Licensee as a matter of right and without restriction by a third party who has law-
fully obtained such data or information; (2) is independently developed by Licensee without re-
liance in any way on the Software or Documentation; or (3) is approved in writing by Licensor
for unrestricted publication by Licensor. If required by order of a government authority within
its powers, Licensee may disclose to such authority data, information, or materials pertaining to
or involving the Software to the extent required by such order, provided that Licensee shall first
have used its best efforts to obtain a protective order reasonably satisfactory to Licensor suffi-
cient to maintain the confidentiality of such data, information, or materials and shall promptly
notify Licensor of any such order or anticipated order.
c. Licensee acknowledges Licensor’s rights and benefits afforded under U.S. copyright law and all
international copyright conventions in all Software as restricted, unpublished works. The
Licensee agrees not to release it outside of the purchasing organization without prior written ap-
proval from the Licensor. The Licensee is not authorized to make copies of the Software without
prior written approval from the Licensor except that the Licensee may make one copy for archi-
val or backup purposes only. All applicable rights in patents, copyrights, trademarks, service
marks, and trade secrets in the Software, Software revisions and documentation are and will re-
main the property of the Licensor.
8. PROTECTION OF CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND PROPRIETARY RIGHTS.
620 Software Products License Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

a. Licensee shall devote its best efforts, consistent with the practices and procedures under which
it protects its own most valuable proprietary information and materials, to protect the Software
against any unauthorized or unlawful use, disclosure, dissemination, or copying. No license or
permission is given for the reproduction of Software by any means. Extra copies of Documen-
tation may be purchased from Licensor at any time.
b. Licensee shall not, at any time, disclose or disseminate the Software or Documentation, or the
Trade Secrets and confidential information embodied therein, whether in whole or in part, to any
employee, consultant, contractor, or other person who (1) does not have need to know and to
obtain access thereto in order to give effect to the rights granted to Licensee under this Agree-
ment or (2) is not legally bound by written agreement with the Licensee to maintain the propri-
etary and confidential nature of such materials and to limit use and copying thereof and access
thereto as required by the terms of this Agreement. Licensee shall take appropriate action, by
instruction, agreement, and otherwise, with any persons authorized to have access to the Soft-
ware, so as to enable Licensee to fulfill the foregoing obligations.
c. Under no circumstances may Licensee decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Soft-
ware.
9. PROPRIETARY LEGENDS Licensee shall reproduce and include in all authorized (backup) copies
of the Software and Documentation all proprietary notices or legends of Licensor including, without
limitation, all such notices or legends referring to Licensor's reservation or assertion of rights under
U.S. copyright laws and international copyright conventions as they now appear, or as Licensor may
in the future furnish to Licensee, on the Software and on the media and packaging containing the
Software.
10. RETURN OF MATERIALS UPON TERMINATION Within 60 days after termination of this
Agreement in any way or upon Licensee's permanent cessation of use of the Software, Licensee shall
return to Licensor all copies of the Software. Licensee shall destroy all extracts, adaptations, and
transcriptions of the Software and cease all further use or production thereof. Licensee shall send a
written statement to Licensor that it has complied with the foregoing obligation, which statement
shall be certified as complete, current, and accurate by the authorized representative of the Licensee
charged with general responsibility for the operation of the Software.
11. MAINTENANCE OF RECORDS Licensee shall maintain complete, current, and accurate record of
the number and location of all copies of the Software (including all extracts, adaptations, or
transcriptions thereof) and, upon request by Licensor, make such records available for review by
Licensor representatives.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY AND INSPECTION Licensor may enter the premises of Licensee, on 24 hours'
notice, during regular business hours and in the least disruptive manner possible, for the purpose of
inspecting the placement and use of the Software and the standard procedures of Licensee regarding
retention, safekeeping, and disposal of all media and materials pertaining thereto. At that time,
Licensor may question employees of Licensee in proximity to the Software about Licensee's
compliance with the procedures required in the Agreement.
13. COMPLIANCE WITH LAW
a. Licensor. The Licensor shall comply with applicable laws and regulations in effect at the latter
of the Licensor’s quotation or order fulfillment, as they may apply to the Software
b. Licensee. Compliance with any local government laws or regulations relating to the use of the
Software, shall be the sole responsibility of the Licensee. After delivery of the Software to the
Licensee, the Licensee shall have sole and complete responsibility for complying with all laws
and regulations of all countries regarding the use of the Software. In particular, if this License
permits floating use of the Software among employees of the Licensee, the Licensee shall have
sole and complete responsibility for compliance with all laws and regulations relating to export
or re-export or confidentiality of the Software.
14. TITLE AND RISK OF LOSS Title and risk of loss to the Software shall pass to the Licensee upon
tender of delivery “F.O.B. the Licensor’s facility” unless otherwise agreed upon in writing by the

parties, except that a security interest in the Software will remain in the Licensor, regardless of mode
of attachment to realty or other property until full payment has been made therefore. Licensee agrees
upon request to do all things and acts necessary to perfect and maintain said security interest and
shall protect Licensor’s interest by adequately insuring the Equipment against loss or damage from
any cause wherein the Licensor shall be named as an additional insured.
15. ASSIGNMENT AND DELEGATION Licensee may not assign or transfer any of its rights in, or
delegate any performance under, this contract without the prior written consent of the Licensor. The
Licensor however may assign or transfer, without the consent of the Licensee, the Licensor’s right
to receive all or any portion of the payment due from the Licensee under this contract. The Licensor
may assign or transfer the entire contract in a transaction that transfers substantially the entirety of
the Licensor’s business in the Software being licensed.
16. SURVIVAL OF OBLIGATIONS Licensee's obligations of confidentiality, non-disclosure, and
non-infringement shall survive the termination of the Agreement and remain in effect for so long as
Licensor is entitled to protection of its rights in the Software under applicable law.
17. INJUNCTIVE RELIEF Licensee acknowledges that, in the event of a breach by Licensee of any of
the provisions hereof, Licensor will not have an adequate remedy in money or damages. Licensor
shall therefore be entitled to obtain injunctive relief against Licensee in any court of competent
jurisdiction in the event of any such breach. Licensor’s rights hereunder shall not in any way be
construed to limit or restrict its right to seek or obtain other damages or relief under this Agreement
or under applicable law.
18. U.S. GOVERNMENT AS LICENSEE-The Software is only provided with “Restricted Rights.” Use
duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph
(c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013
or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR
52.227-19, as applicable. Manufacturer is Concepts ETI, Inc., 217 Billings Farm Road, White River
Jct, VT 05001, USA.
19. LIMITED WARRANTY Licensor warrants that the software will substantially conform to
published specifications and to the documentation, provided that it is used on computer hardware
and with the operating system for which it was designed. Licensor further warrants that the media
on which the software is distributed, and the software security keys necessary to use the software,
are free from defects in materials and workmanship. Licensor will replace defective media or
security keys at no charge, provided that the items are returned to Licensor within 60 days of date of
delivery. Licensor will also replace, at the Licensee's cost on a time and materials basis, security keys
damaged due to the Licensee's misuse. Replacement keys will not be issued in any case until the
original keys have been received by Licensor. These are the Licensee's sole remedies.
20. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
a. BECAUSE SOFTWARE IS INHERENTLY COMPLEX AND MAY NOT BE COMPLETE-
LY FREE OF ERRORS, THE LICENSEE IS ADVISED TO VERIFY ALL WORK. TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, LICENSOR DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTIC-
ULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, THE ACCOMPANYING WRIT-
TEN MATERIALS, AND ANY ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE. TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL Licensor BE LIA-
BLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
DAMAGES FOR INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, COMPENSATORY OR EXEMPLA-
RY DAMAGES, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE SOFTWARE
EVEN IF LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
b. The remedies of the Licensee set forth herein are exclusive. The liability of the Licensor with
respect to an order or contract shall not exceed an amount equal to the price paid by the Licensee.
The Licensor shall in no event be liable to the Licensee for any direct, indirect, special, punitive,

consequential or incidental damages, including lost profits or revenues, arising out of the use or
inability to use the Software.
21. DELIVERY Delivery dates are estimated. In no event will dates be construed as falling within the
meaning of “time is of the essence”.
22. EXCUSABLE DELAYSThe Licensor shall not be liable for any loss or delay due to war, riots, fire,
flood, strikes or other labor difficulty, acts of civil or military authority including governmental
laws, order, priorities or regulations, acts of the Licensee, embargo, car shortage, damage or delay
in transportation, inability to obtain necessary labor or materials from usual sources, or other causes
beyond the reasonable control of the Licensor. In the event of delay in performance due to any such
cause, the date of delivery or time for completion will be adjusted to reflect the actual length of time
lost by reason of such delay. The Licensee’s acceptance of Software constitutes a waiver of any
claims for delay from any cause.
23. TAXES The price of the Software does not include any present or future Federal, State, or local
property, license, privilege, sales, use, excise, gross receipts or other taxes or assessments which may
be applicable to, measured by, imposed upon or result from this transaction or any services
performed in connection therewith. Such taxes will be itemized separately to Licensee, who shall
make prompt payment to the Licensor. In lieu of payment for taxes the Licensor shall accept a valid
exemption certificate from Licensee, if applicable. If such exemption certificate is not recognized by
the governmental taxing authority involved, Licensee shall promptly reimburse the Licensor for any
taxes that are covered by such exemption certificate and that the Licensor is required to pay.
24. SET OFFS Licensee, any affiliated company, any successor, or any assignee cannot claim
compensation or set off any asserted claim against any amounts that are, or become, payable to the
Licensor under this license or otherwise.
25. INDEMNITY The Software is a mathematical analysis tool intended to assist Licensee in Licensee's
development/design process and requires considerable skill and judgment for its correct use and for
the interpretation of the computed results. The Software is not intended to be nor is it a substitute for
rigorous and comprehensive prototyping or other testing by Licensee of products prior to production
and sale. Licensee agrees to defend, indemnify and hold the Licensor harmless against any liability
or claim made against the Licensor or the Licensee arising from Licensee's use of the software except
a claim for patent or copyright infringement or a claim arising out of the Licensor's willful
misconduct or gross negligence.
26. WARRANTY The Licensor warrants that the Software, when delivered and properly installed, will
operate properly on designated equipment, reproducing the computer output of its embedded sample
case within engineering accuracy. The Licensor agrees to provide, until replacement of the Software,
corrections for any material error reported and determined to be in the Software, documentation, or
operational procedures in an expeditious manner and at no further cost. THE LIMITED EXPRESS
WARRANTIES SPECIFIED ABOVE ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES MADE BY LICENSOR
AND THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY OPERATION OF
LAW OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
27. NUCLEAR LIABILITY In the event that the Software sold hereunder is to be used pertaining to a
nuclear facility, the Licensee shall, prior to such use, arrange for insurance or governmental
indemnity protecting the Licensor against liability and hereby releases and agrees to indemnify the
Licensor and its suppliers for any nuclear damage, including loss of use, in any manner arising out
of a nuclear incident, whether alleged to be due, in whole or in part to the negligence or otherwise
of the Licensor or its suppliers.
28. LANGUAGE This License has been transacted in the English language. In the event of any
inconsistency between any translation hereof and the English language version, the English
language version will govern.
29. WAIVER Waiver by Licensor of any breach hereof is not a waiver of future strict compliance with
all obligations of the Licensee.

30. TERMINATION This License is effective until terminated by the breach of its terms by the
Licensee. Failing to make a payment to renew a limited time license shall be a breach. Upon any
breach, this License terminates immediately and automatically without notice from the Licensor. In
such event, Licensee shall immediately cease using the Software and shall return all copies of the
Software to the Licensor.
31. SEVERABILITY If any provision of this License Agreement is held to be illegal or unenforceable,
then such provision will be considered modified to a legal and enforceable form that best reflects the
parties’ intention. All remaining provisions hereof shall remain in full force and effect.
32. DISPUTE RESOLUTION All controversies and claims arising under or relating to this agreement
are to be resolved by the courts of the state of Vermont, USA, applying Vermont law excluding
Vermont choice of law rules. Objections to personal jurisdiction of the parties are waived.
33. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This is the complete agreement of the parties notwithstanding any
prior discussions or agreements or any terms and conditions asserted in purchase orders or in
previous agreements, however denominated, whether or not referencing this transaction, or
otherwise.
Should you have questions concerning this Agreement, or if you desire to contact Licensor for any
reason, please write or call Concepts ETI, Inc., Customer Software Support, 217 Billings Farm
Road, White River Junction, VT 05001, USA. Telephone: 802-296-2321; Fax: 802-296-2325.

Index (C) Start angle box 575
(C) Web thicknes at OD box 550
(D) Backface bore box 555
Symbols (D) Edge chamfer box 560
(D) End angle box 575
.BREP files 37, 109
(D) Extension radius box 552
.csv 431
(d1) Left width angle box 566
.DAT 579
(d2) Right width angle box 566
.FIT files 37, 109
(E) Extension position box 552
.FLO files 269, 361, 484
(E) Seal runner radius box 560
.geomTurbo files (Numeca) 184, 423
(e1) Left side angle box 566
.IBL files 417, 419
(e2) Right side angle box 566
.IGES files 37, 109
(F) First radius box 553
.MCH files 268, 415, 418
(F) Inlet radius box 560
.MDB files 603
(G) Second radius box 553
.MOD files 579
(H) Position box 553
.SAT files 37, 109
(I) Fillet radius box 553
.STEP files 37, 109
(r1) Arc radius box 566
.SUR files 268, 415, 418
(r2) Corner arc radius box 566
.x_t files 37, 109
(A) Exit passage height 577
(A) Fillet radius box 571 Numerics
(A) Nose radius box 555
1 Independent hub and shroud option 208
(A) Shoulder position box 550
1st Order Upwinding (AUSM) option 387
(A) Shroud inlet thickness box 560
2D Wedge Diffuser option 218
(A) Thickness box 572
2-D wheel with straight or circular arc blades option 211
(A) Tool size box 574, 575
3 Explicit shroud, radial inlet, exit rake option 209
(B) Inner radius box 572
3D CFD window
(B) Nose length box 555
arbitrary slice 257
(B) Outer radius 577
3D FEA window 199
(B) Radius box 574, 575
3D geometry, viewing before exporting to CAD 186
(B) Shoulder radius box 550
3D View command 199
(B) Shroud exit thickness box 560
3D viewing
(B/A) Aspect ratio box 571
3D FEA models 355
(C) Angle box 574
3rd Order Upwinding (AUSM) option 387
(C) Axial length at inlet box 560
4 Fully radial option 210
(C) Bore radius at nose box 555
6 2-D wheel with straight or circular arc blades option
(C) Outer radius box 572 211
A Arc width for single blade model box 601
A/R theta constant 434, 438 ARPACK 194
Abaqus FEA solver 602 Artificial compressibility scaling factor (Rb) box 381
Absolute theta check box 221 artificial viscosity coefficients 381, 384
Absolute User Data option 483 as box 303, 328
ACIS (CadEx) 192, 302, 306, 326 aspect ratio 471, 494, 541
Active blade box 568, 583, 587, 589, 601 asymmetric volutes 108, 113, 427
Add backface/bore check box 304, 329, 407 length 429
Add mechanical geometry check box 407 radius 429
add side ports 100 At __RPM box 537
Adjust leading/trailing edge zone check box 569 at % span 315, 378
Advanced option 239 Austenitic Stainless Steel 607
Advanced tab 435 Author box 302, 327
advanced volutes Automatic TECPLOT output 602
edit with table 431, 438 Autoscale Statistics command 471, 475
aero loads averaging 256
backface 523 AxCent
boundary conditions 522 exiting from 22
constants 525 keyboard shortcuts 28
dialog box 520 main window 23
hot-to-cold geometry conversions for 513 overview of the design flow 11
setup 520 preferences 39
shroud 524 Software Products License for 619
specifying for models 484 starting from CADFIT 33
specifying heat transfer constants 486 toolbar buttons 25
Aero Loads command 485, 486, 520 units to use with 40
Aero Loads dialog box 520, 522, 523, 524, 525 axial blades 76
agile repository for 349
link to materials database 501 staggering 76
Alloy Steel 607 Axial command 467, 473, 567
Alternative coordinate system for IGES output 305, 331 Axial direction box 615
angles AXIAL file (.AXL) option 273
specifying blade distributions 63 axial length of segments 87
animating 3D models 197 axial machines
for PBFEA solver 355 blade shape design for 11
annulus shape 50 axial thrust parameters 333
ANSYS axial view
commands 504 checking before model is built 472
FEA solver 602 editing volute exit path in 114
appending segments 205 viewing 466
Arbitrary number of midspan sections and stacking AXISTRESS
curve option 212 as standalone program 498
626 Index Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

B viewing 63
backface 528 Blade box 303, 327
graphical editing 528 Blade end radius box 564
using control points 528 blade generation option
Backface shape 550 choosing 52
Backface tab 523, 528, 549 specifying 54
balance 571, 573 Blade Generation Options dialog box 207
Balance notch OD type 564 blade loading 286
Balance Notches tab 573 Blade mesh layers 583
Balance ring 572 Blade options 583
balance ring 571, 582 blade repository 217, 349
Balance Ring tab 571 Blade row interface model options 235
Baldwin-Lomax model 380 blade shape data files
for Numeca Fine Turbo 392 specifying for projects 465
Basic option 239 blade stacking 57
Bezier Blade Stagger Angle dialog box 220
blade section type 215 blade surface
formulation 50 import 222, 243
Bezier cross-section volute type 108 Blade surface box 568
Bezier points Blade tab 567
editing blades with 65 blade thickness distribution 73
editing volute shape with 111 editing 73
editing volutes with 114, 431, 438 scaling 73
Bezier-Bernstein polynomials 50 viewing 72
Bias to bore box 582 Blade thickness nodes 583
blade 50 blades 76, 568
alignment 83 mesh 582
camber surface 50 shape design with AxCent 11
choosing generation option for 52 staggering 76
definition approaches in AxCent 50 Blades tab 582
generation blade-to-blade averaging 246, 256
blade-to-blade slice 246
choose option for 207
blading
MAX-AB extensions 261
camber-line thickness 50
shapes: modifying 75
bore 529, 554
specifying generation type 54
Bore boundary conditions 609
thickness 50
Bore box 522
blade angle 220
Bore dimensions 555
blade angle distribution 69
Bore shape 555
adjusting exit lean angle 69
Bore tab 529, 554
editing on the hub and shroud 65
boundary conditions 156, 224, 225, 230, 234, 237, 400
editing the wrap angle 70
apply to new solver run 402
setting entry lean angle 67
overview 144
specifying 63
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Index 627

setting exit 146 Cast aluminum 607
setting initial 147 cell data 521
setting inlet 145 Central Differencing option 387
Boundary Conditions command 145 CETI (Patented) option 212
Boundary Conditions tab 522, 608 CETI Full Baldwin-Lomax model 380
bowed blading 85, 239 CETI solver enhancements options 382
Bowed Blading Parameters dialog box 239 CFD
Bring in Model dialog box 241 batches 151
building FEA models 490 customize alerts for 259
intermediate solution iterations 389
line plots, increasing data points for 180, 307, 320
C
managing runs 161
CAD MPI 401
import 37, 109, 222, 243 multi-block 155
viewing models before exporting to 186 multiple processes 401
CAD exchanger formats 192, 302, 306, 326 overview 142
CAD output 185, 187 results 244, 248
selecting ranges 363 running 151
CADFIT select run 360
creating new designs with 33 solver settings 149, 375, 391, 393, 394
importing CAD files to 37, 109 update viscous stress iterations 389
importing to 33 view options 255
opening 33 CFD (Meanline on QOs w/ slope) option 415
raw data 284 CFD alerts 259
starting from 33 CFD directory 348
calculated fillet CFD files 121, 122, 123, 125, 247
profile 570 exporting flow field information 183
calculations CFD grids
CFD 151 generating C-type 174, 179
MST 137 generating H-type 167
rapid loading 131, 133, 140 generating OH-type 178
single-streamtub 131 overview 164
SST 131 CFD line plots 246
Calculix 603 CFD map 403
CAM CFD meanline 188
link to MAX-PAC 127 CFD option 521
camberline for aero loads 484
blade thickness 217 CFD results 408
thickness blading methods 50 CFD Results dialog box 244, 248
Campbell diagram 536 CFD results groups 244, 248, 249
tab 536 CFD Results Variables file 348
viewing 506 CFD run variables 244
casing treatments 100 CFD segments 313

CFD Server 401 for initialization 232
CFD shortcut buttons 26 Constant R check box 220
CFD solutions 307 Constant Theta check box 220
type 313 Constant Z check box 220
CFD solvers 142, 235 Constants tab 525
CFD Volute directory 348 Constraint Eqn. option 608
CFDvars.txt 348 Contoured bore shape 556
CFL number 393 Contoured counterbore option 557
CG 493 Contoured fillet profile 570
CGNS (CFD General Notation System) file format 247 Contoured nose shape 555
change fonts Contoured option 551, 555, 556, 561
for 2D plots 350 Contoured scallop shape 565
for parameter windows 350 Contoured shroud outer profile 561
checking models 472 Contoured shroud shape 561
Choose Data to Edit dialog box 262 Contoured To Side counterbore option 558
Choose segment box 241 contours 528
Choose Segment dialog box 260 dialog box 527, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 533, 534, 535
Choose Segments for MST Calculation dialog box 265 specifying for models 480
Circular fillet type 568 table of points for 268, 415, 418
Circumferential Averaging option 235 variable fillet 480
Circumferential direction box 615 Contours command 480, 527
clearance cells 323 Contours dialog box 527, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 533,
multigrid level 310, 323 534, 535
clocking Contours window
frozen rotor row 236 edit volute shape in 111
Close blades on all sides option 303, 328 control points
Close button 247 backface 528
column 236 hub or shroud 276
combined multiple line plot 246 control variables 394
Comma separated values 415 Convection command 471
command line convergence criteria 394
FEA 605 Convergence Options tab 385
COMPAL file (.GEO) option 273 cooled turbine 421
Compress nodes and elements 602 coordinate system
Compress nodes and elements check box 603 offsetting 483
compressible fluids 292 Copy a Segment dialog box 271
compressible multiblock scheme 388 Copy a segment out of another design option 271
Conical (straight) bore shape 555 Copy multiple segments check box 271
Conical (straight) nose shape 555 copying 89, 91
Conical (straight) option 555, 560 segments 89
Conical (straight) shroud shape 560 Cosmos/M
constant passage blade section type 217 commands 504
constant pressure solver 602

Courant-Frederichs-Lewy 393 viewing 63, 72
coying Data file box 537, 538, 540
segments 91 Data Setup command 505, 536
CPU booster 393 Data Setup dialog box 536, 538, 539
Create Meanline File dialog box 273 Dawes solver 142, 151
Create New Flow Path Branch dialog box 274 Default curve option 550, 561
Cross Section command 467, 472 Default curve shroud outer profile 561
cross-section Default View command 470, 471
ellipse 439, 445 Define R and Z button 532, 534, 535
mid-span geometry 55, 57, 62 Delete Run button 283, 544
rectangle 439, 445 Depth box 574, 575
view 261 design flow, overview of AxCent 11
checking before model is built 472 Design name box 271
Design title box 241
viewing 466
designs 33
volutes 429, 431, 438
adding volutes to 108
Cross-section command 549, 555, 560, 564, 568, 571,
573, 577 closing 47
csv (comma-separated value) 415 creating 31
editing asymmetric volutes 113 creating with CADFIT 33
CTAADS 421 saving 46
CTAADS compatible output check box 305, 330 deviation effect 290
C-type grids (OC and OH-C) 307 diagrams 506, 507, 508
generating 174, 179 Campbell 506
C-type grids, generating 164 Goodman 507
curvature-controlled blade profile 217 Interference 508
curve control points 276 diffuser 576
custom blade generation 207 blade generation options for 53
Custom format option 415 diffuser exit 577
Custom option 218 Diffuser tab 576
customizing FEA solver runs 491 dimensions 550, 577
Cut off Mach number box 388 dialog box 548, 554, 559, 567, 571, 573, 576
cutaway view 261 specifying model 478
cutback blade 295 directional slot 236
cutback edge 295 Disk nodes 581
Cyclic option 609 displacement constraints 608
Cylinder OD type 564 Distribution along the full flow path table 585
Distribution from hub to shroud table 586
distributions, specifying blade angle 63
D Do you want to do this? check box 521
data 262 double precision solver 389
adjusting 41 dR check box 609
exporting 182, 188, 190, 191 drilled nozzle 219
exporting to STL 192 dT check box 609

dual exit volutes 444 diffuser 577
early turning angle 441, 447 lean angle 204
dZ check box 609 theta 280
exit boundary conditions, setting 146
exit flow angle for blade rows 288
E
Exit prop. dist. from hub box 239
early scroll end for volute 443 Exit R delta Theta box 239
early turning angle exit rake 204
dual exit volute 441, 447 exit shape
Early turning-chord based option 316 FEA 577
early volute exit 443 Exit streamwise interpolation box 235
earlyAxCent formats 270 exit volutes
edges and curves 39 dual exit 444
Edit Now button 240 expert mode
edit side ports 100 for FINE/Turbo 312
editing volute cross-sections 429 Explicit shroud, radial inlet, exit rake option 209
element angle 494 Explicit surface boundaries check box 304, 329
Element angle check box 541 exponential hub-to-shroud nodes distribution 324
Element Angle command 471 export_slice Python script 363
Element Check command 471 exporting 267, 301, 306, 413
Element Statistics command 471 CAD output 192
Element Thresholds command 541 CFD 247
Element Thresholds dialog box 541 FEA results 282, 544
elements 494 flow field information 183
goodness calculations for 494 graphics-based 3D solids 192
thresholds 541 machine information 182, 190, 191
ellipse separate surfaces 304, 329
cross-section shape type 439, 445 STEP 406, 407
Ellipse (aspect ratio) fillet type 568 STL files 192, 408
Ellipse (tangent distance) fillet type 568 stress geometry 304, 329
Enable link to meanline check box 332 to AxCent 6.6 format 270
End Percent column 585, 587, 588, 590 to CADFIT 267
Energy diffusion terms check box 382 to MAX-PAC 267
English units 364 to Numeca 423
entry lean angle 67 to PBFEA 190, 267
Entry prop. dist. from hub box 239 to Tecplot 191, 247
Entry R delta Theta box 239 exporting FEA results 282, 544
epsilon 388 Extend blade inot the hub and shroud check box 304,
Euler equations 392 328, 407
removing numerical loss 375, 391 extraction slots 157, 158, 159, 160, 370
Euler solution 380 activating and deactivating 160
Excitations box 537, 539 adding 158
exit copying 159

deleting 160 .INF 33
modifying 160 .max 127
extrusion angle 218 .MCH 182
.MDB 603
.MOD 579
F
.PYC 182
Factored matrix free parameters options 382 .STEP 33, 192, 302, 306, 326
fatigue 511 .STL 192, 306, 408
fatigue life 509 .STP 406
from start-stop cycles 509 .SUR 33, 182, 190, 267
FEA .trb 310
storage of results 349 .TUR 417
FEA models 468, 474, 490, 604 *.csv 188
building 490 *.sur 188
viewing 468 CFD (*.mch) 413, 415
working with views of 470 CFD export 247
FEA results 408 CGNS (*.cgns) 247
exporting 282, 544 Fine/Turbo CFD (*.trb) 413
files 349 materials database 603
parameters for 282 Paraview (*.vtm) 247
FEA Results dialog box 281, 543 PLOT3D 247
FEA results files, using with Pushbutton FEA 504 STEP (.stp) 406
FEA results parameters 544 Tecplot (*.ijk) 413
FEA run variables 281, 349, 543 Tecplot (*.tec) 247
FEA Runs command 281, 543 Tecplot(*.dat) 417
FEA solver box 602 Tecplot(*.ijk) 417
FEA Solver Parameters tab 604 xml 282, 544
FEA solvers 195, 465, 491 File name box 271
customizing runs for 491 fillet 567
parameters for 491 profile 569
running from within STRESSPREP 195 simple circular type, to export 304, 329
specifying for projects 465 Fillet dimensions 570
FEA stress/vibration 546 Fillet location box 568
file formats Fillet type 568
.BREP 33 FINE/Open 391
.curve 417 FINE/Open CFD 375, 377
.DAT 417, 579 FINE/Turbo CFD 375, 377, 391
.FIT 190, 267 solver 184, 423
.FLO 484 FINE/Turbo expert mode 312
.GEOMTURBO 423 first order upwinding 387
.geomTurbo 310, 417 First Segment box 272
.IGES 33, 192, 301, 302, 306, 326 Fit to Window command 470, 471
.IMP 190, 267 Fitting Method dialog box 284

fixed beta 343 generating C-type CFD grids (OC and OH-C) 174, 179
Fixed boundary option 608 generating H-type CFD grids 167
flank milling, blade generation options for 53, 219 generating OH-type CFD grids 178
Flat-bottom groove 574 geometry
Flatten top and bottom of blades check box 305, 330 adjusting 41
FLO files 484, 521 engine 295
flow viewing 3D before exporting to CAD 186
create new flow path branch 99 Geometry command 473, 478, 548
field information 183 Geometry dialog box 548, 549, 554, 559, 563, 567, 571,
files 269, 361 573, 576
flow branch 274 Geometry options 338, 396
side ports to 368 Geometry output options 413
Flow Data Source options 521 global residual smoothing 388
flow field initialization 230, 231 Goodman diagram 510, 512, 536, 538
flow modeling 288 viewing 507
Flow path boxes 526 Goodman diagram command 507
flow path branch 99, 100, 274, 366 goodness calculations
Flow path nodes 581 for elements 494
fluid graphics
dynamic loading: introduction 130 preferences 346
fluid blockage 291 graphics-based 3D solids 192
fluid dynamic inlet blockage check box 333 Grid dialog box 180, 307, 313, 318, 320
fluid properties 292 Grid generation and initialization options 389
fluids 292 grid parameters
dynamic loading 285 preview before saving 312
specifying properties for 292 grid settings preview 180, 320
fonts 350 grid slice 256
Footer file box 604 grid slice direction 246
Four-stage Runge-Kutta scheme 382 Grid tab 180, 307, 320
front counterbore 533, 556 grids 307
Front Counterbore tab 533 arbitrary slice 257
front leakage 237 clearance 323
Frozen Rotor option 235 C-type 164, 174
frozen rotor row clocking 236 executables 377
Full repeat of all blades check box 304, 329, 407 multiple 180, 252, 307, 313, 320
Fully radial option 210 nodes 180, 307, 320
select display of 249
single row view 180, 320
G smoothing 180, 307, 310, 320
Gauss-Seidel scheme 382 to Fine/Turbo 423
General Settings tab 580, 591, 593 Topology 313, 317
General tab 606 transferring to Numeca 184
generating CFD O-type grids 174, 179 type selection 313, 317

vaneless space 180, 307, 320 IGES
specifying options 465
IGES files
H
output options 301, 326
Harmonic condition option 608 select segment range for export 363
Header file box 604 impeller
heat transfer constants, specifying 486 blade generation options for 52
Heat transfer correlation 526 implicit scheme 382
Height box 566 importing 89, 91
hexahedral mesh type 580, 585, 586, 587, 589, 591, 593, CAD files 37, 109
603
segments 89, 91
H-Grid Clearance tab 318
Improved thickness calculation check box 338, 396
H-grids 164, 307
incidence
Hollow Wireframe command 471
effect 289
Hot to Cold dialog box 578
Incidence blending check box 382
hot/cold output 302, 327
Include backface groove check box 574
hot-to-cold calculations 513, 579
Include backface indentation check box 574
Hot-to-Cold Transform command 578
Include balance ring check box 572
HRM (Harmonic Index) 357
Include blade tip surface revolution check box 304, 328
H-type grids 249
Include hub extension check box 552, 553
generating 167
Include hub surface check box 303, 328, 406
hub 534
Include leading edge fillet check box 490
pressure 534
Include pressure loads check box 521
suction 534
Include second hub extension check box 553
to shroud spacing 586
Include shroud in disk model check box 560
hub and shroud rotation 366
Include shroud surface check box 303, 328, 406
Hub beta distribution check box 242
Include thermal loads check box 521
Hub contour check box 241
Include vaneless diffuser check box 577
hub extension 551, 581
incompressible fluids 292
Hub fillet nodes 583
incompressible multiblock scheme 388
Hub Pie-slice Spacing tab 587
Independent hub and shroud option 208
Hub Pressure tab 534
inertia 493
Hub Suction tab 534
inflow conditions 225, 230
Hub surface nodes 582
initial conditions
Hub thickness distribution check box 242
method 232
Hub-Shroud shapes option 240
overview 144
Hub-shroud shapes table 240
setting 147
hub-to-shroud slice 246
injection slots 100, 157, 160, 370
Hub-to-Shroud Spacing tab 586
activating and deactivating 160
Hybrid grids 307
adding 158
copying 159
I deleting 160
modifying 160
Identification options 302, 326
specifying with leakage flow 224, 225, 230, 234, 237 Laminar solution option 380
types 236 Last Segment box 272
inlet boundary conditions 145 Layout Templates directory 348
inlet guide vane, blade generation option for 52 leading edge 80
Inlet shape (shroud) 560 nodes 584
upstream segment 560 specifying swept 80
INMACH box 234 Leading edge boxes 526
Inner Radius counterbore option 556 leading/trailing edge 569
Input/Output Volute Parameters dialog box 432, 435 corner location 570
inserting segments 205 leakage calculations 238
Interference diagram 508, 536 lean angle 67, 69, 204
interference diagram Length box 569
viewing 508 Level 28
Interference Diagram command 508 Levels of coarse grid box 383
Interference Diagram tab 539 license agreement 619
Intermediate Solutions Every ___ Iterations box 389 life 509, 511
Inviscid (Euler) solution option 380 line plots 246
Ip 493 view multiple solutions 245, 246
isolines 39, 222 linear static solver 194
It 493 Line-arc option 562
iterations to run Line-arc shroud outer profile 562
CFD 400 line-arc-line backface 563
Fine/Turbo solver 394 Line-Arc-Line option 551
hot to cold 579 Line-Arc-Line scallop shape 565
link
to Meanline Program dialog box 332
J
LISA 194
Jacobian command 471 LISA FEA 194
Jacobian ratio 494 loss
check box for 541 matching calculated with model loss 375
Jacobian ratio check box 474 loss and deviation models
transonic 450
low speed flow 392
K
Lumped Mass Matrix check box 374
k-epsilon 2-equation model 380
keyboard shortcuts 28
k-omega 2-equation model M
option 380 machine
exporting information 182, 190, 191
file format 413
L
Machining/CFD Output File Parameters dialog box 413
LAB files 125
Main blade option 583, 587
Label box 614
Main toolbar 25

Make a copy of one of the segments in this design option with CFD results 121, 122, 123, 125
271 measurement units 364
manual early turning menus 24
option 316 meridional 338, 396
Map Generation for CFD 403 stacking 338, 396
map plots 244, 248 meridional distance 50
mapping cell data 521 meridional stacking 338, 396
mass and inertia 493, 495, 516 enable along the leading edge check box 338, 396
properties of 493 enable along the trailing edge check box 338, 396
transferring data to RotorLab 500 meridional velocity ratio 332
viewing 495, 516 meridional view, viewing 466
Match Throughflow Solver Loss Every ___ Iterations Merkle Preconditioning check box 388
box 389
mesh 582
Material box 607
dialog box 580, 582, 585, 586, 591, 593
material properties 482, 607
edge sizing 596
editing 501
hexahedral 487, 603
specifying for models 482
nose wrap 592
materials
radial 596
selecting for AXISTRESS model 482
specifying parameters for 487
selecting for Pushbutton FEA model 482
tetrahedral 487, 603
materials database 465, 602, 603
tetrahedral types 596
files for 603
Mesh command 487, 580, 591
specifying for projects 465
Mesh control points 567
MathCAD 527
Mesh dialog box 580, 582, 585, 586, 587, 589, 591, 593
MatProp 501, 602, 603
metric units 364
.exe file 501, 603
Microsoft Excel 527
Max ___ deg box 221
midside nodes 602, 603
MAX 5/MAX AB/MAX SI 334, 337, 413
mid-span geometry 358
Max physical box 537, 539
cross-sections 55, 57, 62
maximum physical operating speed 537, 539
Min ___ deg box 221
MAX-PAC 127
Min physical box 537, 539
MCA option 214
minimum physical operating speed 537, 539
MCH 182, 188, 413
Mirror Z coordinate in output file check box 483, 617
meanline
mirrored volute shapes 111
existing AxCent designs 30
Mixing plane box 235
linking to 119
Mixing plane option 235
updating 120
Equivalent sand roughness 236
Meanline and thickness option 188, 413
modal analysis 194, 196, 374
Meanline file name box 332
animate the 3D view 355
meanline files 119, 120, 121, 122
Modal check box 374
creating 121, 122
model 478
linking to 119
dimensions
updating 120
specifying for Pushbutton FEA 478

model analysis viewing 179
PBFEA 194, 198 multiple line plots, combined 246
Model prefix box 601 multiple solution line plots 245
Model Statistics command 495, 516 multi-streamtube analysis 130
model statistics, viewing 495, 516
Model title box 601
N
models 241, 470, 472, 480, 484, 486, 487
checking 472 NACA 65 Airfoil blades option 211
setting properties for 479 NACA blade type 215
specifying contours for 480 Navier-Stokes 392
specifying heat transfer constants for 486 New 2D View button 246
specifying mesh parameters for 487 New 3D View button 246, 282, 544
specifying pressure and thermal loads for 484 NIST fluids
viewing 3D before exporting to CAD 186 fluid directory 348
viewing FEA 470 using with OpenMP threads 401
working with FEA 470 No Flow Data option 521
Modified Pritchard blade 215 No Mid Side Node Elements check box 603
Movable blade - restagger by ___ deg box 220 Node layers box 581
Move button 247 nodes
MPI (Message Passing Interface) 253, 401 distribution 324
MSC/Nastran FEA solver 602 for grids 180, 307, 320, 324
MST 521 Nodes across nose box 581
analysis 130, 137 Nodes across web box 581
automatically run 265 Nodes along extension box 581
choose segments for 265 Nominal temperature box 607
editing QOs for 340 Non-reflective options 235
exporting flow field information 183 normalized modal stresses 374
for aero loads 484 nose 529
introduction to 136 boundary conditions 609
parameters 339 Nose box 522
multi-block CFD 155, 377 Nose extension box 581
display results of 250 nose shape 555
multi-block scheme 387 Nose tab 529
Multi-block solver 142 Nose wrap factor box 581
multi-block solver 387, 388 Number of grids boxes 615
using MPI for 401 Number of Modes box 374
multi-core processors 401 Number of Nodes column 585, 587, 588, 590
multi-grid cycle (V and W) option 383, 384 Number of points (H to S)box 267, 415, 418
Multiple Circular Arc blade section type 214 Number of points (LE to TE) box 267, 415, 418
multiple computers 351 Number of pre-steps box 384
multiple grids 180, 252, 307, 313, 315, 320 Number of sections to repeat box 601
generating for H-Classic 167, 174 Number of undo steps to store box 349
generating for OH-Classic 178 Number of user-defined hub-shroud shapes box 240

Numeca 184, 310, 423 FEA run 281, 543
control variables 394 specifying mesh 487
flow model 391 Parasolid 37, 109, 192, 302, 306, 326
output files 394 Paraview file format 247
solver settings 393 Partial admission % column 236
numerical model 393 PBCFD
NURBS 427 overview 142
PBFEA 194
data setup 536
O
material properties 607
O grids 307 meridional views in 466
generating 174, 179 Per blade row check box 236
OC grids 249 Percent M from LE to end of bow box 239
generating 179 periodic blade repeats
generating O and C grids 174 for CFD 256
OCC volute 108, 109 for FEA 355
STEP output 407 physical configuration 391
OD (outer diameter) 531 pie slice models 608
OD tab 531 Pierro della Francesca 493
OD type box 564 Pie-slice cut face box 608
OH grids 178, 307 pipe diffuser 219
generating 178 PLOT3D files 247, 484, 521
OH-C grids 307 plots
old AxCent file formats 270, 362 change fonts for 350
Open CASCADE for FEA 356
. iges files for 192, 302, 306, 326 plotting options 256
closing 3D window 406, 408 for FEA 356
for volute 409, 450 Points on front of blade box 584
Open MPI 346, 351 polytropic efficiency 290
OpenMP threads 401 post-processing 504, 505, 513
Organization box 302, 327 overview of 504
Original B-to-B 3D scheme 382 specifying options for 505
Original Dawes Baldwin-Lomax model option 380 Post-prolongation iterations box 385
outer diameter 531 Post-restriction iterations box 385
shape 564 Precipitation Hardening Stainless Steel 607
Outer profile (shroud) 561 preferences 39, 346, 348
pressure
for flow field 232
P
Pressure and suction surfaces only option 303, 328
Pan command 470
pressure and thermal loads, specifying 484
parallel processes 346, 351
Pressure command 471
grid generation 311
pressure distribution
parameters 487
variable 232

Pressure side from pie edge to blade table 587, 589 Pushbutton FEA solvers 492
Pressure table 523, 524 Put intermediate sections in ruled blades check box 305,
Pressure/Suction Results dialog box 353 330
preview grid settings 312
Print command 470, 471
Q
Pritchard blade type
quick reference, blade generation option 52
for axial blades 11
quick start 462
Pro/Engineer 417, 419
Produce surface without 'poles' check box 305, 329
Product box 302, 327 R
profile parameters 263
R box 220
Project command 491, 501
radial 2D nozzle 218
Project dialog box 600, 602, 604
radial blades
Project menu 465
staggering 76
project settings, specifying 465
Radial direction box 615
projects 465, 506, 507, 508
radial machines
dialog box 600, 602, 604
blade shape design for 11
specifying settings for 465
Rapid Load option 521
viewing results for 506, 507, 508
for 484
properties 606, 608
rapid loading analysis 130, 131
Properties command 479, 482, 606
exporting flow field information 183
Properties dialog box 606, 608
restart 140
proportional meridional distance 50
Ratio of turbulence viscosity to molecular viscosity at in-
Ps inlet box 235 let box 381
Pushbutton CFD (PBCFD) 142, 149, 151, 154, 156, 397 rear counterbore 533, 556
Map Generation 403 Rear Counterbore tab 533
Start CFD 399 rectangular cross-section 439, 445
Pushbutton FEA 194, 501, 602 Refresh button 247, 283, 545
3D window 196 refresh CFD runs 247
animating 3D plot of 197 refresh PBFEA runs 283, 545
animating models 197 Region selected 615
copyright 194 Relative user data 483
materials database 501 Render Type command 471
modal analysis 194 Repair button 247
quick start 462 repository (for blade profiles)
software license 194 for axial blade profiles 217, 349
stress and vibration parameters 546 repository (for CFD runs) 401
table of results 198 Restagger Angle Range options 221
viewing 3D plot of 199 Restagger Axis options 220
viewing results 196, 198 Restagger Blade dialog box 359
Pushbutton FEA (PBFEA) restart rapid loading 140
3D window 355 results 244, 504, 506, 507, 508
viewing results 355 setup dialog box 536, 538, 539

Reverse flow control check box 382 adding multiple 55
Reynolds number appending 205
for Numeca 391, 392 appending to designs 91
Rotate command 470 choosing 260
rotating interface lines 260 copy 271
rotation type command 470 copying 89
rotational speed 282, 544, 607 copying and importing 91
Rotor boxes 526 flow path branch 366
rotor mesh 580, 591, 593 importing 89
rotor, blade generation options for 52 inserting 205
RotorLab file box 614 select for output 302, 327, 406
RotorLab Parameters dialog box 614 selecting ranges for export 363
RotorLab, transferring data to 500 set up 366
rounded edge construction 298, 338, 396 Select File button 241
postponement of 338, 396 Select Flow File Data dialog box 269, 361
ruled surfaces 219 Select items to copy options 241
running FEA solvers from within STRESSPREP 195 Select options 303, 327, 406
RZ data Select Segment Range dialog box 363
hub and shroud 268, 415, 418 Selecting CFD view options 154
selection levels 39
Set Active button 246, 282, 544
S
Set Segments button 303, 327, 406
Save Bitmap command 470, 471 Setting command 615
scale Setting entry lean angle 67
for stress displacement 357 Setup Parameters command 500
scaled cross section view 466 Setup tab 520, 600
scallop shape of blades 75
bevel 566 Share geometry between blades check box 305, 330
height 566 Shell thickness factor box 569
type 566 shortcuts 259
dimensions 563 keyboard 28
OD type 564 Shoulder boundary conditions 609
shape 565 Shoulder box 522
Scallop tab 563 Show as 2D command 469, 471
Schemes options 382 Show Midside Nodes command 471
script 310 shroud 530
scroll clipping 436 contours 530
scroll cropping 436 dimensions 559, 560
second hub extension 552, 581 inlet 530
secondary zone parameters 332 pressure 535
sections and surfaces 203 suction 532
seed points 258 surface nodes 582
segments 91, 366 Shroud beta distribution check box 242

Shroud contour check box 242 spacing along flow path table 453, 585
Shroud extension nodes box 581 Spalart-Allmaras 1-equation turbulence model 380, 392
Shroud fillet nodes 583 Span % 378
Shroud Inlet tab 530 Specify hub and extrusion section option 218
Shroud node layers box 581 Specify shroud and lean angle option 213
Shroud node options 581 Speed range 537, 539
Shroud Pie-slice Spacing tab 589 Spherical indentations 574
Shroud Pressure tab 535 Spin Softening check box 374
Shroud Suction tab 532 spline blade section type 217
Shroud tab 524, 530, 559 Split boundary curves at LE check box 305, 329
Shroud thickness distribution check box 242 Splitter blade 1 option 583, 587
Shroud wrap factor box 581 Splitter blade 2 option 583, 587
Side of blade nodes 584 Splitter Handling options 521
side ports 100, 274, 368 splitters
Simple Airfoil blade section type 216 for volutes 453
Simple Shape tab 432 Square counterbore option 556
simple volute shape 433 Squeeze factor box 583
Single blade pie slice check box 601 SST analysis 130, 131, 133, 140
single grid row 180, 320 2-equation model option 380
single patch STL file 409 Stacking and Geometry Options for Midspan Sections
Single set of properties check box 482, 607 dialog box 338, 396
single streamtube analysis 130, 131, 133, 140 stacking curves 261, 338, 396
slot stacking options 338, 396
area distribution 371 Stagger angle (Deg) box 359
offset angle 371 staggering blades 76
viewing CFD results for 255 Start PBPlus (AxCent grid) solver dialog box 397
Slot Selection dialog box 370 Start Percent column 585, 586, 588, 590
smoothing 388 Start Pushbutton CFD Run dialog box 397
for O or OH grids 180, 307, 320 start-stop cycles, from fatigue life 509
Software Products License 619 Static check box 373
Solid Only command 471 static pressure 231
Solid Wireframe command 471 status
Solution smoothness check box 382 for CFD solutions 245, 249
Solver box 377 for FEA solutions 281, 543
Solver Options dialog box 373 steady initialization 394, 395
solver precision 394 STEP files 192, 302, 306, 326, 406
solver precison 389 363
Solver Settings dialog box 375, 376, 379, 385, 391, 393, export stress geometry to 407
394 step geometry
Denton Solver tab 378 volutes 433
Solver tab 376 STL 192
solvers 131, 133, 137, 140, 151, 156, 317, 375 select segment range for export 363
run status 249 STL files 192, 306, 408

additional info file 409 tables
select segment range for export 363 edit asymmetric volutes with 113
Stop Solver button 247 tangential stacking 57, 338, 396
streamline 258 Tecplot
streamline curvature 130 file format 247
overview 130 temperature
streamwise slice 246 specifying loads 484
streamwise spacing 585 Temperature command 471
Streamwise Spacing tab 585 Temperature table 523, 525
stress analysis tetrahedral mesh type 591, 596, 603
quick start 462 tetrahedron 493
standalone programs 498 text format 263
stress and vibration 546 Thermal check box 373
stress geometry 304, 329 thermal constraints 610
stress stiffening 374 Theta 279, 280
Stress toolbar 27 Theta relative to blade center line check box 220
STRESSPREP thickness
as standalone program 498 calculation 338, 396
stretch segment 410 thickness distributions 50
stretching axial length of segments 87 modifying blade 72
SubModel Settings dialog box 615 third order upwinding 387
submodeling 488, 615 threads (openMP) 401
command 615 three-dimensional flow field 231
Suction side from pie edge to blade table 588, 590 Time step factors for coarse grid box 384
Superalloy 607 Time step multiplier box 381
Suppress warning messages 602 tip clearance
Suppress warning messages check box 603 export contours 421
surface files 188 Titanium Alloy 607
*.sur 268, 414, 415, 418 tolerance 304, 329
surface of revolution 305, 330 Tolerance box 537, 540
Surface option 188, 414 Tool fillet box 575
surfaces toolbar buttons 25
trim 39 toolbars
swept leading edge 411 Main 25
specifying 80 Stress 27
Swept leading edge check box 242 tooltips
swept trailing edge - specifying 80 grid parameters 180, 320
symmetric volutes 108 topology of CFD grid 313
Topology tab 313
trailing edge 80
T
specifying swept 80
table-based output 188 Translate Z dialog box 616
table-based thermodynamic functions 388 Translation amount box 617

Translation type box 616
transonic loss 450
trimming surfaces 39
turbofans
flow paths for 274
Turbulence inlet intensity box 381
Turbulence model mixing length scale box 380
turbulence models
for Numeca 391
y+ values 380
Two-stage Runge-Kutta scheme 382
Type box 566
U
unguided turning 216
Uniform size fillet profile 570
units 364
design: specifying 40
specifying for projects 465
Units box 302, 327
unmirrored volute shapes 111
unstructured grid 317
Update front leakage data automatically check box 333
Update Viscous Stress Every ___ Iterations box 389
Upstream nose shape 555
upstream segment
to define inlet 560
Use Dawes Style Initialization by AxCent option 389
Use Gerber correction for mean stress check box 538
Use Non-optimized AxCent results option 390
Use Optimized Initialization (one zone model, tangential loading) option 389
Use separate blade generating sheet option 213
Use Surf-of Rev whenever possible check box 305, 330
Use swept leading/trailing edge contour check box 569
Use theta instead of beta curves check box 219
User variable name box 221
User-defined control point location at percent check box 586
User-defined convection check box 524
User-defined convection coefficient check box 523
User-defined locations check box 570

V
vane slots 100, 105, 425
vaneless diffuser 577
nodes 582
vaneless space for grids 164, 180, 307, 320
variable aspect ratio
for fillets 568
variable fillet contours, specifying 480
variables, CFD run 244
variables, FEA run 281, 543
velocity
distribution
for initialization 232
vibratory fatigue margin 511
View FEA Grid command 490
viewing
3D FEA models 196
volume and mass 493
volute 108
adding 108
advanced shape edit with table 431, 438
asymmetric 429
Bezier cross-section 108, 427
control points with 111
cross-sections 429
separation between exit and scroll 429
dual exits for 444
early turning start angle 441, 447
editing exit path 114
editing shapes 111, 431, 438
exit pipe 114, 439, 441, 447
early exit 443
early scroll end 443
length 429
overlapping cross-sections 427, 429
parameterized 108
parameters for 426, 427
parameters for OCC 450
profile shape 431, 434
radius 429
scroll 436
splitters for 453
644 Chapter 9: Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

step geometry 432
straight axis 440, 446
symmetric 427
three-point curve 441, 447
tongue 448
default shape 448
turbocharger 427
Von Mises stress method 356
Vr inlet box 234
Vx inlet box 234
W
wake
constraints 290
wall treatment 379
Warn options 541
Warning/Threshold levels 542
windows
AxCent 23
change fonts for 39, 350
wizard 31
wrap angle 70, 279, 280
X
xml
export FEA data 282, 544
Y
y+ for turbulence models 380
Z
Z box 220
Z Translation command 483, 616
zero momentum slot 236
Zero speed box 537
Zero thickness radius box 550
Zoom Box command 470
Zoom In command 470
Zoom Out command 470

Agi l e E n gi n e e r i n g D e s i g n Sys t e m
®
Agile Engineering Design System®
Designing Radial Machines with AxCent

(including Pushbutton FEA™ User Guide)
Corporate Headquarters and Product Center CN Europe
217 Billings Farm Road 3B Marston House
White River Junction, VT 05001-9486 Cromwell Park, Banbury Road
USA Chipping Norton
Phone: 802 296 2321 Oxon, OX7 5SR, UK
Fax: 802 296 2325 Phone: 44 (0) 1608 641515
Web: www.conceptsnrec.com Fax: 44 (0) 1608 644110
E-mail: sales@conceptsnrec.com

Designing Radial Machines AxCent

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Designing Radial Machines AxCent

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Agi l e E n gi n e e r i n g D e s i g® n Sys t e m

Agile Engineering Design System

Designing Radial Machines with AxCent

Version: AxCent v8.6

Chapter 1: Welcome to Pushbutton FEA 459

Chapter 2: Welcome to AxCent 9

Chapter 3: Getting Started 21

Chapter 4: Developing Radial Blade Geometry 49

Chapter 5: Creating and Linking to Meanline Designs 117

Chapter 6: Performing Streamline Curvature Calculations 129

Chapter 7: Generating Flow Simulations with Pushbutton CFD 141

Chapter 8: Generating CFD Grids 163

Chapter 9: Exporting information from AxCent 181

4 Contents Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Chapter 10:Using PBFEA in AxCent 193

Chapter 11:AxCent Dialog Box Reference 201

Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® 5

Chapter 1: Welcome to Pushbutton FEA 457

Chapter 2: Getting Started 461

Chapter 3: Setting Model Specifications 477

6 Contents Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Chapter 4: Generating FEA Models 489

Chapter 5: Linking Pushbutton FEA to Other Programs 497

Chapter 6: Performing Post-Processing 503

Chapter 7: Pushbutton FEA Dialog Box Reference (Radial) 519

Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® 7

This chapter includes...

10 Chapter 1: Welcome to AxCent Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Creating a new design from scratch

Blade shape design with AxCent

Introduction to the AxCent design flow

Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction to AxCent 11

12 Chapter 1: Welcome to AxCent Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Introduction to AxCent 13

14 Chapter 1: Welcome to AxCent Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Standard Examples (functional with minimal licensing)

Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® How to use this Guide 15

comp_rad_Eckardt.DES A radial compressor with a vaneless diffuser. The geometry

comp_rad_PR-1.2.DES A low speed (PR=1.2) radial compressor with a vaneless

comp_rad_PR1.6.DES A moderate speed (PR=1.6) radial compressor with a

comp_rad_turbocharger.DES A radial compressor with a geometry and flow field typical

pump_rad_cont_cross.DES Mixed flow (almost radial) pump with a continuous cross-

pump_rad_Ns1000.DES Low specific speed (Nsp=1000) radial pump with a head

pump_rad_Ns2000.DES Moderate specific speed (Nsp=2000) radial pump with a

pump_rad_Ns4000.DES High specific speed (Nsp=4000) mixed flow pump design

Advanced Examples (requires at least some higher level license

16 Chapter 1: Welcome to AxCent Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

comp_rad_Eckardt_OH-grid.DES Radial Eckardt “O” compressor design using the OH grid

comp_rad_PR-2p0_cascade.DES Total-total pressure ratio 2 radial compressor with a cascade style

comp_rad_R134_OH-grid.DES Refrigeration compressor design set to use DBR model R134a

pump_rad_3stage.DES Three-stage radial pump design delivering approximately 100m

pump_rad_cont_cross_OH_grid.DES Mixed flow (almost radial) pump with a continuous cross-over

pump_rad_dual_volute.DES Radial pump design with a dual-exit volute geometry.

pump_rad_inducer_H2.DES High-speed liquid hydrogen pump design typical of a rocket fuel

pump_rad_Ns2000_large_grid.DES Same design as the one in the basic examples

Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® How to use this Guide 17

18 Chapter 1: Welcome to AxCent Copyright © Concepts ETI, Inc.

Designing Radial Machines with AxCent® Getting help 19

Chapter 1: Welcome to AxCent

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Chapter 3: Developing Radial Blade Geometry

Chapter 4: Creating and Linking to Meanline Designs

Chapter 5: Performing Streamline Curvature Calculations

Chapter 6: Generating Flow Simulation with Pushbutton CFD